Faa PDF

STUDY MATERIAL
FOUNDATION PROGRAMME
FUNDAMENTALS OF
ACCOUNTING AND
AUDITING
PAPER 4
ICSI House, 22, Institutional Area, Lodi Road, New Delhi 110 003
tel 011-4534 1000, 4150 4444 fax +91-11-2462 6727
email info@icsi.edu website www.icsi.edu
i
© THE INSTITUTE OF COMPANY SECRETARIES OF INDIA
TIMING OF HEADQUARTERS
Monday to Friday
Office Timings – 9.00 A.M. to 5.30 P.M.
Public Dealing Timings

Without financial transactions – 9.30 A.M. to 5.00 P.M.
With financial transactions – 9.30 A.M. to 4.00 P.M.
Phones
41504444, 45341000
Fax
011-24626727
Website
www.icsi.edu
E-mail
info@icsi.edu
Laser Typesetting by AArushi Graphics, Prashant Vihar, New Delhi, and

Printed at M P Printers/10000/February 2012
ii
FOUNDATION PROGRAMME – IMPORTANT NOTE
The study material has been written in lucid and simple language and conscious efforts have been made to
explain the fundamental concepts and principles of accounting and auditing. This study material is divided into
two main parts –
Part-A Fundamentals of Accounting, and
Part-B Fundamentals of Auditing
The institute has decided that the first examination for Foundation Programme under new syllabus will be held
from December 2012 session in the Optical Mark Recognition (OMR) format, whereby students are required to
answer multiple choice questions on OMR sheet by darkening the appropriate choice by HB pencil. One mark
will be awarded for each correct answer. There is NO NEGATIVE mark for incorrect answers.
The specimen OMR sheet is appended at the end of the study material. There are two self test question papers
in the study to acquaint students with the pattern of examination. These are for practice purpose only, not to be
sent to the institute.
For supplementing the information contained in the study material, students may refer to the economic and
financial dailies, commercial, legal and management journals, Economic Survey (latest), CS Foundation Course
Bulletin, Suggested Readings and References mentioned in the study material and relevant websites.
The objective of the study material is to provide students with the learning material according to the syllabus of
the subject of the Foundation Programme. In the event of any doubt, students may write to the Directorate of
Academics and Professional Development in the Institute for clarification at faa@icsi.edu
Although due care has been taken in preparing and publishing this study material, yet the possibility of errors,
omissions and/or discrepancies cannot be ruled out. This publication is released with an understanding that the
Institute shall not be responsible for any errors, omissions and/or discrepancies or any action taken on the basis
of contents of the study material.
Should there be any discrepancy, error or omission noted in the study material, the Institute shall be obliged if
the same are brought to its notice for issue of corrigendum in the CS Foundation Course Bulletin.
iii
SYLLABUS
PAPER 4: FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING AND AUDITING
Level of Knowledge: Basic Knowledge

Objective: To familiarize and develop an understanding of the basic aspects of accounting, auditing concepts
and their principles.
PART A: FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING (70 MARKS)
1. Theoretical Framework
– Meaning and Scope of Accounting; Accounting Concepts; Accounting Principles, Conventions and
Standards – Concepts, Objectives, Benefits; Accounting Policies; Accounting as a Measurement
Discipline – Valuation Principles, Accounting Estimates
2. Accounting Process
– Documents & Books of Accounts: Invoice, Vouchers, Debit & Credit Notes, Day books, Journals,
Ledgers and Trial Balance
– Capital and Revenue: Expenditures and Receipts; Contingent Assets and Contingent Liabilities
– Rectification of Errors
3. Bank Reconciliation Statement
– Meaning; Causes of difference between Bank Book Balance and Balance as per Bank Pass Book /
Bank Statement; Need of Bank Reconciliation Statement; Procedure for Preparation of Bank
Reconciliation Statement
4. Depreciation Accounting
– Methods, Computation and Accounting Treatment of Depreciation; Change in Depreciation Methods
5. Preparation of Final Accounts for Sole Proprietors
– Preparation of Profit & Loss Account, Balance Sheet
6. Partnership Accounts
– Goodwill
– Nature of and Factors Affecting Goodwill
– Methods of Valuation: Average Profit, Super Profit and Capitalization Methods
– Treatment of Goodwill
– Final Accounts of Partnership Firms
– Admission of a Partner
– Retirement/Death of a Partner
– Dissolution of a Partnership Firm
7. Introduction to Company Accounts
iv
– Issue of Shares and Debentures; Forfeiture of Shares; Re-Issue of Forfeited Shares; Redemption of
Preference Shares
PART B: FUNDAMENTALS OF AUDITING (30 MARKS)
8. Auditing
– Concepts and Objectives
– Principles of Auditing
– Types of Audit
– Evidence in Auditing
– Audit Programmes
9. Audits and Auditor’s Reports
– Internal Audit
– Statutory Auditor: Appointment, Qualification, Rights and Duties
– Secretarial Audit: An Overview
– Cost Audit: An Overview
– Auditor’s Report: Meanings, Contents, Types, Qualifications
v
LIST OF RECOMMENDED BOOKS*
PAPER 4 : FUNDAMENTAL OF ACCOUNTING AND AUDITING
READINGS
1. M. C. Shukla, Advanced Accounts Vol. I, S. Chand & Company Ltd., Ram Nagar, New Delhi-55.
T. S. Grewal &
S. C. Gupta
2. R. L. Gupta & Financial Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi - 2.
V. K. Gupta
3. J. R. Monga Financial Accounting – Concepts & Applications; Mayoor Paperbacks, A-95, Sector
5, Noida (U.P.)
4. S. N. Maheshwari & Advanced Accounting, Volume I; Vikas Publishing House (Pvt.) Ltd., Jangpura,
S. K. Maheshwari New Delhi-14.
5. S. P. Jain & Advanced Accounting, Volume I; Kalyani Publishers, Daryaganj, New Delhi - 2.
K. L. Narang
6. Ashok Sehgal & Advanced Accounting (Financial Accounting); Taxmann’s, New Delhi.
Deepak Sehgal
7. Aruna Jha Student’s Guide to Auditing & Assurance, Taxmann Publications Pvt. Ltd., New
Rohtak Road, New Delhi.
8. S. D. Sharma Auditing Principles & Practice, Taxmann Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Rohtak Road,
New Delhi.
9. Anand G. Srinivasan Auditing, Taxmann Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Rohtak Road, New Delhi.
10. S. Sundharababu, A Handbook of Practice Auditing, S. Chand, S. Sundharsanam, B.N. Tondon &
Company, New Delhi
REFERENCES
1. T. P. Ghosh, A. Banerjee Principles and Practice of Accounting, Galgotia Publishing Company, New Delhi-5.
& K.M. Bansal
2. P. C. Tulsian Financial Accounting, Sultan Chand & Company, New Delhi.
3. R. Narayanaswamy Financial Accounting – A Managerial Prospective; PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
4. Ashish K. Bhattacharyya Essentials of Financial Accounting; PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
*This study material is sufficient from the point of view of syllabus. The students may refer these books for further knowledge and study
of the subject.
vi
CONTENTS
PART A: FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING
LESSON 1
THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK
Page
Accounting 3
Review Questions 5
Book Keeping 5
Systems of Accounting 6
Accounting as Information System 7

Role of Accountant 8
Accounting Principles, Concepts and Conventions 9
Accounting Standards 12
Accounting Policies 13
Accounting – A Measurement Discipline 13
Accounts and its Classification 13

Review Questions 15
Double Entry System 15
Rules of Debit and Credit 16

Accounting Equation 18
LESSON ROUND UP 18
GLOSSARY 19
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS 19
LESSON 2
ACCOUNTING PROCESS-I (RECORDING OF TRANSACTIONS)
Accounting Cycle 24
Journal 24
Ledger 29
Subsidiary Books of Accounts 33
– Purchases Book 34
– Sales Book 34
vii
Page
– Purchases Returns Book 34
– Sales Returns Book 35
– Bills Receivable Book 39
– Bills Payable Book 40
– Cash Book 40
Review Questions 42
Petty Cash Book 44
General Journal 46
Trial Balance 48
LESSON ROUND UP 54
GLOSSARY 55
LESSON 3
ACCOUNTING PROCESS-II (RECTIFICATION OF ERRORS)
Errors 60
Classification of Errors 60
Errors Disclosed by Trial Balance 61
Errors Not disclosed by Trial Balance 62
Review Questions 62
Steps to locate Errors 63
Rectification of Errors 63
– Before the preparation of Trial Balance 63
– After the preparation of Trial Balance but before the preparation of Final Accounts 67
– In the next accounting period 70
LESSON ROUND UP 78
GLOSSARY 78
LESSON 4
ACCOUNTING PROCESS-III (CAPITAL AND REVENUE ITEMS)
Capital Expenditure 82
Revenue Expenditure 82
viii
Page
Deferred Revenue Expenditure 82
Capital and Revenue Receipts 83
Capital and Revenue Profits 84
Capital and Revenue Losses 84
Review Questions 84
Contingent Assets 86
Contingent Liability 87
LESSON ROUND UP 87
GLOSSARY 88
LESSON 5
BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT
Introduction 92
Review Questions 93
Causes of difference between Bank Balance as per Cash Book and Pass Book 93
Significance of Bank Reconciliation Statement 94
Procedure of preparing Bank Reconciliation Statement 94
– Preparation of Bank Reconciliation Statement when overdraft balances are given 96
– Preparation of Bank Reconciliation Statement when extracts of cash book and pass book are given 98
Illustrations 98
LESSON ROUND UP 108
GLOSSARY 108
LESSON 6
DEPRECIATION ACCOUNTING
Introduction 114
Accounting Concept of Depreciation 116
Review Questions 117
Methods of Providing Depreciation 118
– Uniform Charge Methods 118
– Fixed Instalment Method or Straight Line Method 118
ix
Page
– Depreciation Fund (Sinking Fund) Method 120
– Insurance Policy Method 124
– Annuity Method 126
– Declining Charge Depreciation Methods 128
– Diminishing Balance Method (Reducing Balance Method) 128
– Sum of Years’ Digits Method 130
– Double Declining Balance Method 130
– Other Methods 131
Change in Method of Depreciation 132
Calculation of Profit or Loss on Assets Sold 133
Depreciation and Replacement of Assets 136
LESSON ROUND UP 137
GLOSSARY 137
LESSON 7
PREPARATION OF FINAL ACCOUNTS FOR SOLE PROPRIETORS
Introduction 142
Trading Account 142
Profit & Loss Account 143
Balance Sheet 145
Classification of Assets 146
Classification of Liabilities 146
Adjustment Entries 148
Closing Entries 157
Manufacturing Account 158
Limitations of Financial Statements 159
Illustrations 160
LESSON ROUND UP 172
GLOSSARY 172

x
Page
LESSON 8
PARTNERSHIP ACCOUNTS
Basic Concepts of Partnership 180
Goodwill 182
Methods of Valuation of Goodwill 183
Preparation of Final Accounts of Partnership 185
Profit & Loss Appropriation Account 185
Reconstitution of Partnership 195
– Change in Profit Sharing Ratio 195
– Admission of a Partner 197
– Retirement of a Partner 217
– Death of a Partner 232
Dissolution of Partnership Firm 239
LESSON ROUND UP 254
GLOSSARY 255
LESSON 9
INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTS
Basic Concepts of Company Accounts 262
Issue of Shares 263
– For Cash 264
– Under Subscription of Shares 272
– Over Subscription of Shares 272
– Calls in Advance and Interest on Calls in Advance 273
– Calls in Arrears and Interest on Calls in Arrears 277
– Issue of shares for consideration other than cash 279
Forfeiture of Shares 283
Re-issue of Forfeited Shares 285
Forfeiture and Re-issue of Shares allotted on Pro-Rata basis in case of over subscription 291
Issue of Debentures 295
xi
Page
– For cash 295
– For consideration other than Cash 301
– As Collateral Security 302
Redemption of Preference Shares 304
LESSON ROUND UP 313
GLOSSARY 314
PART B: FUNDAMENTALS OF AUDITING
LESSON 10
CONCEPT OF AUDITING
Introduction 319
Meaning of Audit 319
Principal Aspects to be Covered in Audit 320
Benefits of Auditing 321
Limitations of Auditing 321
Investigation 322
Difference between Auditing and Investigation 322
LESSON ROUND UP 323
GLOSSARY 324
LESSON 11
TYPES OF AUDIT
Internal Audit 329
Financial Audit 331
Secretarial Audit 332
Cost Audit 332
Tax Audit 333
Bank Audit 333

xii
Page
Co-operative Society audit 333
Trust Audit 334
Insurance Audit 334
Partnership Audit 334
Sole Proprietorship Audit 334
Government Audit 334
Management Audit 334
Functional Audit 334
Propriety Audit 334
Efficiency Audit 335
LESSON ROUND UP 335
GLOSSARY 336
LESSON 12
TOOLS OF AUDITING
Audit Plan 340
Audit Programme 340
Audit Evidence 342
Working Papers 343
LESSON ROUND UP 345
GLOSSARY 346
LESSON 13
AUDITOR AND RELATED PROVISIONS
Who is an Auditor 350
Appointment of Auditor 350
Qualification of Auditor 351
Disqualification of Auditor 351
xiii
Page
Rights and Powers of Auditor 352
Duties of Auditor 352
Auditors Report 353
Auditors Opinion 355
LESSON ROUND UP 356
GLOSSARY 357
TEST PAPERS 2012
Test Paper 1/2012 359
Test Paper 2/2012 376
xiv
PART A
FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING
LESSONS
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
In today’s business world, accounting is
1. Theoretical Framework
considered as ‘the universal language of
business’ because it is the vehicle for reporting
2. Accounting Process – I financial information about a business entity to
(Recording of Transactions) users such as shareholders and managers. A
proper accounting system is essential to any
business whether big or small in order to manage
3. Accounting Process – II
its daily functions and run it successfully. The
(Rectification of Errors)
main obligation of any business is to maximize
profits, minimize losses and at the same time
4. Accounting Process – III maintain its position as a responsible entity within
(Capital and Revenue Items) the society.
So, in the current business world, everybody
5. Bank Reconciliation Statement should have the knowledge of accounting
discipline irrespective of the job he is doing. The
rapid advancement in business activities due to
6. Depreciation Accounting
industrialization and globalization, the need for
people having knowledge of accounts have
7. Preparation of Final Accounts for Sole increased manifold. Apparently it is impossible
Proprietors to survive in today’s advanced business
environment without adequate knowledge on
basic accountancy.
8. Partnership Accounts
Especially all business students should have
some background in accounting to understand
9. Introduction to Company Accounts
and interpret and present the results of business.
1
Lesson 1
Theoretical Framework
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Accounting
Accounting is a very old concept – as old as
– Definition
– Stages of Accounting money. A description of proper keeping of
– Branches of Accounting
accounts is also found in ‘Arthashastra” written
– Functions of Accounting
– Advantages of Accounting by Kautilya. However, it has developed with the
– Limitations of Accounting passage of time to meet the requirements and
– Review Questions
– Book Keeping challenges of ever growing society. The modern-
– Difference between Book Keeping day accounting concept based on double entry
and Accounting
– Systems of Accounting system was originated by Luco Pacioli in Italy.
– Accounting as Information System Though the act of accounting is very old, in recent
– Users of Accounting Information
– Characterstics of Accounting Information times it has acquired special significance
– Role of Accountant because of rapidly growing economy, cut-throat
– Accounting Principles, Concepts and
Conventions competition, expanding markets and increasing
– Accounting Standards
production and changes in technology.
– Accounting Policies
– Accounting A Measurement Discipline In this lesson, we will throw light on the basic
– Accounts and its Classification
concepts of accounting, types of accounts,
– Double Entry System accounting principles, conventions, concepts &
– Rules of Debit and Credit
standard, meaning of double entry system and
– Accounting Equation
– Lesson Round Up the rules of debit & credit on which entire concept
– Glossary
of accounting is based.
– Self-Test Questions
The system of book keeping by double entry is, perhaps the most beautiful one in the wide domain
of literature or science. Were it less common, it would be the admiration of the learned world.
Edwin T. Freedley
Lesson 1  Theoretical Framework 3
ACCOUNTING
Accounting is used by business entities for keeping records of their monetary or financial transactions. A
businessman who invested money in his business would like to know whether his business is making a profit
or incurring a loss, the position of his assets and liabilities and whether his capital in the business has
increased or decreased during a particular period.
Definition
The definition given by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (‘AICPA’) clearly brings out the
meaning of accounting. According to it, accounting is “the art of recording, classifying and summarizing in a
significant manner and in terms of money, transactions and events which are, in part at least, of a financial
character and interpreting the results thereof”. The definition brings out the following as attributes of
accounting:
(i) Accounting is an art. Accounting is classified as an art, as it helps us in attaining our aim of
ascertaining the financial results, that is, operating profit and financial position through analysis and
interpretation of financial data which requires special knowledge, experience and judgment.
(ii) It involves recording, classifying and summarizing. Recording means systematically writing down the
transactions and events in account books soon after their occurrence. Classifying is the process of
grouping transactions or entries of the same type at one place. This is done by opening accounts in a
book called ledger. Summarizing involves the preparation of reports and statements from the classified
data (ledger) understandable and useful to management and other interested parties. This involves
preparation of final accounts namely profit and loss account and balance sheet.
(iii) It records transaction in terms of money. All transactions are recorded in terms of common measure
i.e. money which increases the understanding of the state of affairs of the business.
(iv) It records only those transactions and events which are of financial character. If an event has no
financial character then it will not be measured in terms of money and not recorded.
(v) It is the art of interpreting the results of operations to determine the financial position of the enterprise,
the progress it has made and how well it is getting along.
Stages of Accounting
Accounting has the following stages:
(i) The transactions of a business that have, at least in part, a financial character are identified and
recorded.
(ii) The recording is done in a manner which identifies the different classes and types of transactions.
(iii) The resulting records are summarized in such a way that the owners or other interested parties in the
business can see the overall effects of all the transactions. The statements prepared by the
summarizing process is known as financial statements which will show the profit or loss made by the
business over a period of time and the total capital employed in the business. Such financial
statements are used by management to make business decisions.
Branches of Accounting
Accounting has three main forms or branches viz. financial accounting, cost accounting and management
accounting.
(i) Financial Accounting: It is concerned with record-keeping directed towards the preparation of trial
balance, profit and loss account and balance sheet.
4 FP-FA&A
(ii) Cost Accounting: Cost accounting is the process of accounting for costs. It is a systematic procedure
for determining the unit cost of output produced or services rendered. The main functions of cost
accounting are to ascertain the cost of a product and to help the management in the control of
cost.
(iii) Management Accounting: Management accounting is primarily concerned with the supply of
information which is useful to the management in decision-making, increasing efficiency of business
and maximizing profits.
Functions of Accounting
The following are the main functions of accounting:
(i) Keeping Systematic Records: Accounting is done to keep a systematic record of financial transactions.
(ii) Protecting and Controlling Business Properties: Accounting helps to see that there is no unauthorized
use or disposal of any assets or property belonging to the firm, because proper records are
maintained. Accounting will furnish information about money due from various persons and money due
to various parties. The firm can see that all amounts due to it are recovered in due time and that no
amount is paid unnecessarily.
(iii) Ascertaining the Operational Profit/Loss: Accounting helps to determine the results of the activities in a
given period, usually a year, i.e. to show how much profit has been earned or how much loss has been
incurred. This is done by keeping a proper record of revenues and expenses of a particular period and
then matching the revenues with the corresponding costs.
(iv) Ascertaining the Financial Position of the Business: Balance sheet is prepared to ascertain the
financial position of the firm at the end of a particular period. It shows the values of the assets and the
liabilities of a business entity.
(v) Facilitating Rational Decision Making: Accounting facilitates collection, analysis and reporting of
information at the required point of time to the required levels of authority in order to facilitate rational
decision making.
Advantages of Accounting
The following are the advantages of accounting:
(i) Maintenance of Business Records: All financial transactions are recorded in a systematic manner in
the books of accounts so that there is no need to depend upon on memory. It is impossible to
remember the business transactions which have grown in size and complexity.
(ii) Preparation of Financial Statements: Proper recording of transactions facilitates the preparation of
financial statements i.e. the trading and profit and loss account and balance sheet.
(iii) Comparison of Results: Accounting information when properly recorded can be used to compare the
results of one year with those of earlier years so that the significant changes can be analyzed.
(iv) Decision Making: Accounting information helps the management to plan its future activities by
preparing budgets and coordination of various activities in different departments.
(v) Evidence in Legal Matters: Properly recorded accounting information can be produced as evidence in
a court of law.
(vi) Provides Information to Interested Parties: Interested parties like owners, creditors, management,
employees, customers, government, etc. can get financial information about the organisation.
(vii) Helps in Taxation Matters: Income tax and/sales tax authorities depend on the accounts maintained by
the business taxation matters.
(viii) Valuation of Business: When the business is to be sold, the accounting information can be utilized to
determine the proper value of business.
Limitations of Accounting
The following are the limitations of accounting:
(i) Accounting information is expressed in terms of money: The accountant measures only those events
that are of financial nature i.e. capable of being expressed in terms of money. Non-monetary items or
events are not measured and recorded in accounting.
(ii) Accounting information is based on estimates: Some accounting data are based on estimates and
estimates may be inaccurate.
(iii) Accounting information may be biased: Accounting information is not without personal influence or
bias of the accountant. In measuring income, accountant applies a choice between different methods
of inventory valuation, deprecation methods, treatment of capital and revenue items etc. Hence, due to
lack of objectivity income arrived at may not be correct in certain cases.
(iv) Fixed assets are recorded at the original cost: The value may of fixed assets change over time and so
there may be a great difference between the original cost and current replacement cost. Balance sheet
may not show true and fair view of the financial position on a particular date.
(v) Accounting can be manipulated: Accounting information may not be used as the only test of
managerial performance as profits can be manipulated or misrepresented.
(vi) Money as a measurement unit changes in value: The value of money does not remain stable. Unless
price level changes are considered in measurement of income, the accounting information will not
show true financial results.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Accounting records only those transactions and events which are of

__________character.
2. ____________ is concerned with record-keeping directed towards the
preparation of trial balance, profit and loss account and balance sheet.
3. The main functions of cost accounting are to ascertain the
_____________of a product and to help the management in the
______________________.
4. Fixed assets are recorded at _______________ cost.
5. Accounting information is expressed in terms of ___________.
BOOK-KEEPING
Book-keeping is mainly concerned with recording of financial data relating to the business operations in a
significant and orderly manner. It is concerned with the permanent record of all transactions in a systematic
manner to show its financial effect on the business. It covers procedural aspects of accounting work and
includes record keeping function. It is the science and art of correctly recording in books of account all those
business transactions that result in the transfer of money or money’s worth. It is mechanical and repetitive.
This work of book–keeping is of clerical nature and usually entrusted to junior employees of accounts section
of a business house. Now-a-days, most of the book-keeping work is done through computers and other
electronic devices. In fact, accounting is based on a systematic and efficient book-keeping system. The main
purpose behind book-keeping is to show correct position regarding each head of income and expenditure as
well as assets and liabilities. Further, book-keeping is meant to show the effect of all the transactions made
during the accounting period on the financial position of the business.
Book-Keeping and Accounting

Book-keeping and accounting are often used interchangeably but they are different from each other.
Accounting is a broader and more analytical subject. It includes the design of accounting systems which the
book-keepers use, preparation of financial statements, audits, cost studies, income-tax work and analysis and
interpretation of accounting information for internal and external end-users as an aid to making business
6 FP-FA&A
decisions. This work requires more skill, experience and imagination. The larger the firm, the greater is the
responsibility of the accountant. It can be said that accounting begins where book-keeping ends. Book-
keeping provides the basis for accounting. The following are the points of distinction between book-keeping
and accounting:
DIFFERNCE BETWEEN BOOK-KEEPING AND ACCOUNTING
Book-keeping Accounting
(i) It is concerned with the recording of (i) It is concerned with the summarizing of the
transactions. recorded transactions.
(ii) The work of book-keeping is mainly routine (ii) The work of accountant requires higher
and clerical in nature and is increasingly being level of knowledge, conceptual
done by computers. understanding and analytical skill.
(iii) Book-keeping constitutes the base for (iii) Accounting starts where book keeping
accounting. ends.
(iv) Book-keeping is done in accordance with (iv) The methods and procedures for
basic accounting concepts and conventions. accounting for analysis and interpretations
for financial reports may vary from firm to
firm.
(v) Financial statements do not form part of book- (v) Financial statements are prepared in
keeping. accounting process from the book-keeping
records.
(vi) Financial position of the business cannot be (vi) Financial position of the business is
ascertained through book-keeping records. ascertained on the basis of accounting
reports.
SYSTEMS OF ACCOUNTING
Basically there are two systems of accounting:
Cash System of Accounting: It is a system in which accounting entries are made only when cash is received or
paid. No entry is made when a payment or receipt is merely due. In other words, it is a system of accounting in
which revenues and costs and assets and liabilities are reflected in the accounts in the period in which actual
payments or actual receipts are made in cash. It may not treat any revenue to have been earned or even sales to
have taken place unless cash is actually paid by customers. It has no relevance whether the receipts pertain to
previous period or future period. Similarly, expenses are restricted to the actual payments in cash during the
current year and it is immaterial whether the payments have been made for previous period or future period.
Cash basis of accounting is incompatible with the matching principle of income determination. Hence, the
financial statements prepared under this system do not present a true and fair view of operating results and
financial position of the organization. Cash system of accounting is suitable in the following cases:
(i) Where the organization is very small or in the case of individuals, where it is difficult to allocate small
amounts between accounting periods; and
(ii) Where credit transactions are almost negligible and collections are uncertain e.g. accounting in case of
professionals i.e. doctors, lawyers, firms of chartered accountants/company secretaries. But while
recording expenses, they take into account the outstanding expenses also. In such a case, the
financial statement prepared by them for determination of their income is termed as Receipts and
Expenditure Account.
Accrual System of Accounting: This is also known as mercantile system of accounting. It is a system in
which transactions are recorded on the basis of amounts having become due for payment or receipt. Accrual
basis of accounting, attempts to record the financial effects of the transactions, events, and circumstances of
an enterprise in the period in which they occur rather than recording them in period(s) in which cash is
received or paid by the enterprise. It recognizes that the buying, selling and other economic events that affect
enterprise’s performance often do not coincide with the cash receipts and payments of the period. The
purpose of accrual basis accounting is to relate the revenue earned to cost incurred so that reported net
income measures an enterprise’s performance during a period instead of merely listing its cash receipts and
payments. Accrual basis of accounting recognizes assets, liabilities or components of revenues and expenses
received or paid in cash in past and expected to be received or paid in cash in the future. The following are
the essential features of accrual basis:
– Revenue is recognized as it is earned irrespective of whether cash is received or not;
– Costs are matched against revenues on the basis of relevant time period to determine periodic
income, and
– Costs which are not charged to income are carried forward and are kept under continuous review. Any
cost that appears to have lost its utility or its power to generate future revenue is written off as a loss.
ACCOUNTING AS INFORMATION SYSTEM

Accounting, being the language of business, is used to communicate financial and other information to
individuals, organizations, governments etc. about various aspects of business and non-business entities. For
example, when a firm applies for a loan from a bank, it will have to submit details of its business activities in
terms of operating results (profit or loss) and the financial position (assets and liabilities). Similarly, the
shareholders or prospective investors must have financial information in order to evaluate the performance of
the management. Many laws require that extensive financial information be reported to various government
departments such as income-tax, sales tax, company law board and so on. Accounting is a discipline that
collects reports and interprets financial information about the activities of different organizations. Hence,
actual accounting is concerned with communicating the results of an organization.
Users of Accounting Information

Accounting is of primary importance to the proprietors and the managers. However, other persons such as
creditors, prospective employees, etc. are also interested in the accounting information.
(i) Owners/Shareholders: The primary aim of accounting is to provide necessary information to the
owners related to their business.
(ii) Managers: In large business organizations and in corporations, there is a separation of ownership and
management functions. The managers of such business are more concerned with the accounting
information because they are answerable to the owners.
(iii) Prospective Investors: The persons who are contemplating an investment in a business will like to
know about its profitability and financial position. They derive this information from the accounting
reports of the concern.
(iv) Creditors, Bankers and other Lending Institutions: Trade creditors, bankers and other lending
institutions would like to be satisfied that they will be paid on time. The financial statements help them
in judging such position. Banks and other lending agencies rely heavily upon accounting statements
for determining the acceptability of a loan application.
(v) Government: The Government is interested in the financial statements of business enterprise on
account of taxation, labor and corporate laws.
(vi) Employees: Employees are interested in financial statements because increase in their salaries and
wages and payment of bonus depends on the size of the profit earned.
(vii) Regulatory Agencies: Various Government departments and agencies such as Company Law Board,
Registrar of Companies, Tax Authorities etc. use accounting reports not only as a basis for tax assessment
but also in evaluating how well various businesses are operating under regulatory legislation.
(viii) Researchers: Accounting data are also used by the research scholars in their research in accounting
theory as well as business affairs and practices.
(ix) Customers: Customers may also have either short-term or long-term interest in the business entity to
know the profitability, liquidity and solvency position of the company.
8 FP-FA&A
Characteristics of Accounting Information
The various characteristics of accounting information are as follows:
(i) Relevance: The information should be relevant in order to influence the economic decisions of users
by helping them to evaluate the events at all times. Accounting information has a bearing on decision
making by helping investors, creditors and other users to evaluate past and future events. It confirms
or corrects prior expectations. The relevance of information is affected by its nature and materiality.
(ii) Reliability: Reliability relates to the confidence in the accounting information in the sense that the
information must faithfully represent what it intends to present; it must be factual. Information should
be free from material errors and bias. The key aspects of reliability are faithful representation,
substance over form, neutrality, prudence and completeness.
(iii) Comparability: Accounting information of an enterprise is useful when it is comparable with similar
information for the same enterprise in other periods of time and similar information regarding other
enterprises at the same time. Thus, the information should be presented in a consistent manner over
time and consistent between entities to evolve users to make significant comparisons.
(iv) Understandability: Information should be readily understandable by users who are expected to have a
reasonable knowledge of business, economics and accounting and a willingness to study the
information with reasonable diligence.
(v) Timeliness: The more quickly the information is communicated or provided to the users, the more likely
it is to influence their decisions. Hence, accounting information should be made available at
appropriate time without delays for prompt decision-making.
(vi) Cost-benefit: The accounting information must be useful to most of the people who want to use it and
preparation of that useful information must not be a costly and time consuming process. The emphasis
is on cost-benefit consideration and the benefit derived from information should normally exceed the
cost of providing it.
(vii) Verifiability: Verifiability ensures the truthfulness of the recorded transactions, which can be checked
by persons other than the accountant himself.
(viii) Neutrality: Accounting information is neutral in the sense that it should be free from bias and it should
not favor one group over another. Neutrality is significant especially for the external users of
accounting information.
(ix) Completeness: Completeness means that all material information that is necessary to investors,
creditors or other users for assessing the financial position and operating results of the organization
has been disclosed in the financial statements.
ROLE OF ACCOUNTANT
The role of accountant may be summarized as under:
(i) Maintenance of Books of Accounts: The primary role of an accountant is to offer his services for
maintaining systematic records of financial transactions in order to ascertain the net profit or loss for
the accounting period and the financial position as on a particular date.
(ii) Statutory Audit: Every limited company is required to appoint a chartered accountant as an auditor
who is statutorily required to report each year whether the financial statements have been prepared in
accordance with the generally accepted accounting principles, accounting standards and legal
requirements and that they show a true and fair view of the financial position and profit and loss.
(iii) Internal Audit: In addition to statutory audit, big companies employees its own staff to conduct internal
audit to ensure that the transactions are recorded, classified and summarized in accordance with the
established accounting procedures to ensure that instructions of the management are being followed
throughout the company.
(iv) Budgeting: Budgeting means the planning of business activities before they occur. On completion of
the actual activities for a given period, the planned activities are compared with the actual to find out
the variation, if any.
(v) Taxation: An accountant can handle the taxation matters of a business or of a person and can
represent before the tax authorities and settle the tax liability under the prevailing statute. He also
assists in reducing the tax burden by proper tax planning.
(vi) Investigation: Accountants are often called upon to carry out investigation to ascertain the financial
position of the business for the information of interested parties.
(vii) Management Advisory Service: An accountant is largely responsible for internal reporting to the
management for planning, controlling, decision-making on matters for long-term plans. He provides
management consultancy services in the areas of management information systems, expenditure
control and evaluation of appraisal techniques.
(viii) Other Activities: Accountants among many other duties perform duties such as arbitrator for settling of
disputes, share registration work, liquidators, cost accountants, etc.
ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES, CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS

Accounting Principles
Accounting is often called the language of business through which a business house communicates with the
outside world. In order to make this language intelligible and commonly understood by all, it is necessary that
it should be based on certain uniform scientifically laid down standards. These standards are termed as
accounting principles.
Accounting principles have been defined as “the body of doctrines commonly associated with the theory and
procedure of accounting, serving as an explanation of current practices and as a guide for the selection of
conventions or procedures where alternatives exist”.
In short, accounting principles are guidelines to establish standards for sound accounting practices and
procedures in reporting the financial status and periodic performance of a business. These principles can be
classified into two categories (i) Accounting concepts; and (ii) Accounting conventions.
Accounting Concepts
Accounting concepts are defined as basic assumptions on the basis of which financial statements of a
business entity are prepared. They are used as a foundation for formulating various methods and procedures
for recording and presenting the business transactions. The important accounting concepts are given
below:
(i) Business Entity Concept: According to this concept, business is treated as an entity separate from its
owners, creditors, managers and others. It is treated to have a distinct accounting entity which controls the
resources of the concern and is accountable thereof. Accounts are kept for a business entity as distinguished
from the persons associated with it. All transactions of the business are recorded in the books of the business
from the point of view of the business. Transactions are also recorded between the owner and the firm, for
instance, when capital is provided by the owner, the accounting record will show the firm as having received
so much money and as owing to the proprietor. This concept is based on the sense that proprietors entrust
resources to the management and the management is expected to use these resources to the best
advantage of the firm and to account for the resources placed at its disposal. Hence, in accounting for every
type of business organization, be it sole tradership or partnership or joint stock company, business is treated
as a separate accounting entity.
The failure to recognize the business as a separate accounting entity would make it extremely difficult to
evaluate the performance of the business since the private transactions would get mixed. The overall effect of
adopting this concept is:
– Only the business transactions are recorded and reported and not the personal transactions of the
owners.
– Income or profit is the property of the business unless distributed among the owners.
– The personal assets of the owners or shareholders are not considered while recording and reporting
the assets of the business entity.
(ii) Money Measurement Concept: Money measurement concept holds that accounting is a measurement
10 FP-FA&A
and communication process of the activities of the firm that are measurable in monetary terms. Thus, only
such transactions and events which can be interpreted in terms of money are recorded. Events which cannot
be expressed in money terms do not find place in the books of account though they may be very important for
the business. Non-monetary events like, death, dispute, sentiments, efficiency etc. are not recorded in the
books, even though these may have a great effect. Accounting therefore, does not give a complete account of
the happenings in a business or an accurate picture of the conditions of the business. Thus, accounting
information is essentially in monetary terms and quantified.
The system of accounting treats all units of money as the same irrespective of their time dimension. This has
created doubts about the utility of the accounting data, leading to the introduction of inflation accounting.
(iii) Cost Concept: According to cost concept, the various assets acquired by a concern or firm should be
recorded on the basis of the actual amounts involved or spent. This amount or cost will be the basis for all
subsequent accounting for the assets. The cost concept does not mean that the assets will always be shown
at cost. The fixed asset will be recorded at cost at the time of its purchase but it may systematically be
reduced in its value by charging depreciation. These assets ultimately disappear from the balance sheet when
their economic life is over and they have been fully depreciated and sold as scrap. It may be noted that if
nothing has been paid for acquiring something, it would not be shown in the accounting books as an asset.
Cost concept is not much relevant for investors and other users because they are more interested in knowing
what the business is actually worth today rather than the original cost.
(iv) Going Concern Concept: Business transactions are recorded on the assumption that the business
will continue for a long-time. There is neither the intention nor the necessity to liquidate the particular
business venture in the foreseeable future. Therefore, it would be able to meet its contractual obligations
and use its resources according to the plans and pre-determined goals. It is on this concept that a
clear distinction is made between assets and expenses. Transactions are recorded in such a manner that the
benefits likely to accrue in future from money spent now or the future consequences of the events occurring now
are also taken into consideration. It is because of this concept that fixed assets are valued on the basis of cost
less proper depreciation keeping in mind their expected useful life ignoring fluctuations in the prices of these
assets.
However, if it is certain that a business will continue for a limited period, then the accounting records will be
kept on the basis of expected life of the business and there will be no need for such detailed accounting
information as to revenue and capital expenditure.
When an enterprise liquidates a branch or one segment of its operations, the ability of the enterprise to
continue as a going concern is not impaired. But the enterprise will not be considered as a going concern if it
goes into liquidation or it has become insolvent. If the assumption of the going concern is not valid, the
financial statements should clearly state this fact.
(v) Dual Aspect Concept: This concept is based on double entry book-keeping which means that accounting
system is set up in such a way that a record is made of the two aspects of each transaction that affects the
records. The recognition of the two aspects to every transaction is known as dual aspect concept. Modern
financial accounting is based on dual aspect concept. One entry consists of debit to one or more accounts
and another entry consists of credit to some other one or more accounts. However, the total amount debited
is always equal to the total amount credited. Therefore, at any point of time total assets of a business are
equal to its total liabilities. Liabilities to outsiders are known as liabilities, but a liability to owners is referred to
as capital. Thus, this concept expresses the relationship that exists among assets, liabilities and the capital in
the form of an accounting equation which is as follows:
Assets = Liabilities + Capital, or
Capital = Assets – Liabilities
Since accounting system requires recording of the two aspects of each transaction, this concept shows the
effect of each transaction on them. Assets and liabilities are two independent variables and capital is the
dependent variable, for it is the difference between assets and liabilities. Any change in any one of these
three, must lead to a change in any of the other two.
(vi) Realisation Concept: According to this concept revenue is recognised only when a sale is made. Unless
money has been realised i.e., cash has been received or a legal obligation to pay has been assumed by the
customer, no sale can be said to have taken place and no profit can be said to have arisen. It prevents
business firms from inflating their profits by recording incomes that are likely to accrue i.e. expected incomes
or gains are not recorded.
(vii) Accrual Concept: Every transaction and event affects, one or more or all the three aspects viz., assets,
liabilities and capital. Normally all transactions are settled in cash but even if cash settlement has not taken
place, it is proper to record the transaction or the event concerned into the books. This concept implies that
the income should be measured as a difference between revenues and expenses rather than the difference
between cash received and disbursements. Business transactions are recorded when they occur and not
when the related payments are received or made. This concept is called accrual basis of accounting and it is
fundamental to the usefulness of financial accounting information.
It is not necessary that there is an immediate settlement in cash for any transaction or event therefore
accrued revenues and costs are recognized as they are earned and incurred and recorded in the financial
statements of the period. On the basis of this concept, adjustment entries relating to outstanding and prepaid
expenses and income received in advance etc. are made. They have their impact on both the profit and loss
account and the balance sheet.
(viii) Accounting Period Concept: It is customary that the life of the business is divided into appropriate
parts or segments for analyzing the results shown by the business. Each part or segment so divided is known
as an accounting period. It is an interval of time at the end of which the income or revenue statement and
balance sheet are prepared in order to show the results of operations and changes in the resources which
have occurred since the previous statements have been prepared. Normally, the accounting period consists
of twelve months.
(ix) Revenue Match Concept: This concept is based on accounting period concept. In order to determine the
profit earned or loss suffered by the business in a particular defined accounting period, it is necessary that
expenses of the period should be matched with the revenues of that period. The term ‘matching’ means
appropriate association of related revenues and expenses. Therefore, income made by the business during a
period can be ascertained only when the revenue earned during a period is compared with the expenditure
incurred for earning that revenue. According to this concept, adjustments should be made for all outstanding
expenses, accrued incomes, unexpired expenses and unearned incomes etc. while preparing the final
accounts at the end of the accounting period.
Accounting Conventions
The term ‘convention’ denotes custom or tradition or practice based on general agreement between the
accounting bodies which guide the accountant while preparing the financial statements. It is a guide to the
selection or application of a procedure. In fact financial statements, namely, the profit and loss account and
balance sheet are prepared according to the following accounting conventions:
(i) Consistency: The consistency convention implies that the accounting practices should remain the same
from one year to another. The results of different years will be comparable only when accounting rules are
continuously adhered to from year to year. For example, the principle of valuing stock at cost or market price
whichever is lower should be followed year after year to get comparable results. Similarly, if depreciation is
charged on fixed assets according to diminishing balance method, it should be done year after year. The
rationale behind this principle is that frequent changes in accounting treatment would make the financial
statements unreliable to the persons who use them.
The consistency convention does not mean that a particular method of accounting once adopted can never
be changed. When an accounting change is desirable, it should be fully disclosed in the financial statements
along with its effect in terms of rupee amounts on the reported income and financial position of the year in
which the change is made.
(ii) Disclosure: Apart from statutory requirements good accounting practice also demands all significant
information should be fully and fairly disclosed in the financial statements. All information which is of material
interest to proprietors, creditors and investors should be disclosed in accounting statements. This convention
is gaining more importance because most of big business units are in the form of joint stock companies where
ownership is divorced from management. The Companies Act makes ample provisions for disclosure of
essential information so that there is no chance of any material information being left out.
(iii) Conservatism: Financial statements are usually drawn up on a conservative basis. There are two
principles which stem directly from conservatism.
12 FP-FA&A
(a) The accountant should not anticipate income and should provide for all possible losses, and
(b) Faced with the choice between two methods of valuing an asset the accountant should choose a
method which leads to the lesser value.
Examples:
– Making provisions for bad debts in respect of doubtful debts.
– Amortizing intangible assets like, goodwill, patents, trade marks, etc. as early as possible.
– Valuing the stock in hand at lower of cost or market value.
(iv) Materiality: According to the convention of materiality, accountants should report only what is
material and ignore insignificant details while preparing the final accounts. The decision whether the
transaction is material or not should be made by the accountant on the basis of professional experience and
judgment.
An item may be material for one purpose while immaterial for another. For the items appearing in the profit
and loss account, materiality should be judged in relation to the profits shown by the profit and loss account.
And for the items appearing in the balance sheet, materiality may be judged in relation to the groups to which
the assets or liabilities belong e.g. for any item of current liabilities, it should be judged in relation to the total
current liabilities.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS

(i) A concept is a theoretical idea forming a set of practices while a convention is a method or procedure
accepted by general agreement.
(ii) Accounting concepts are not based on accounting conventions whereas accounting conventions are
based on accounting concepts.
(iii) Accounting concepts are not internally inconsistent while accounting conventions are internally
inconsistent.
(iv) Personal judgment has no role in the adoption of accounting concepts. But for accounting conventions,
personal judgment may play a crucial role.
(v) Accounting concepts are established by law while accounting conventions are established by common
accounting practices.
(vi) There is uniform application of accounting concepts in different organizations while it may not be so in
a case of accounting conventions.
ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
Accounting as a “language of business” communicates the financial results of an enterprise to
various interested parties by means of financial statements, which have to exhibit a “true and fair” view of its state
of affairs. Like any other language, accounting, has its own complicated set of rules. However, these rules have to
be used with a reasonable degree of flexibility in response to specific circumstances of an enterprise and also in
line with the changes in the economic environment, social needs, legal requirements and technological
developments. Therefore, these rules cannot be absolutely rigid nor they can be applied arbitrarily.
Accounting standards (ASs) are written policy documents issued by expert accounting body or by government
or any other regulatory body. Accounting Standards cover the aspects of recognition, measurements,
presentation and disclosure of accounting transactions in the financial statements. These are set in the form
of general principles and left to the professional judgment for application.
An accounting standard may be regarded as a sort of law - a guide to action, a settled ground or basis of
conduct or practice. The objective of setting standards is to bring about uniformity in financial reporting and to
ensure consistency and comparability in the data published by enterprises. The Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India (ICAI) constituted the Accounting Standards Board (ASB) on 21st April, 1977, with a
view to harmonising the diverse accounting policies and practices in use in India. The ICAI has issued 32
Accounting Standards and 29 Accounting Standards Interpretations so far.
ACCOUNTING POLICIES
Accounting policies refer to the specific accounting principles and the methods of applying those principles
adopted by the enterprise in the preparation and presentation of financial statements. Policies are based on
various accounting concepts, principles and conventions.
The accounting standards issued by professional accounting bodies limit and reduce alternatives out of which
accounting policies are to be selected by an enterprise for measurement and reporting of business transactions.
Thus, the specific accounting policies are selected by an enterprise in conformity with generally accepted
accounting principles and the accounting standards. For example, as per matching concept, depreciation should
be treated as cost of doing business and matched with revenue of the same period. As per Accounting
Standard-6 depreciation can be calculated by straight line method, written down value method etc. So, the
organization has to make a policy as to which method it wants to follow. Similarly, valuation of inventory,
treatment of goodwill, valuation of investments, valuation of fixed assets etc. are the significant areas which
require standardization of accounting policies to ensure relevance and reliability of accounting information.
ACCOUNTING - A MEASUREMENT DISCIPLINE

Accounting is a measurement discipline as it deals with the monetary measurement of inputs and as a result,
it provides a basis for measuring the efficiency or performance of enterprise. Measurement means
assignment of numerical values to specific attributes or characteristics of selected objects or events. It means
that asset, liability or change in capital must have a relevant attribute that can be expressed in monetary units
with sufficient reliability.
Value refers to the benefits to be derived from objects, abilities or ideas. Valuation is essentially an economist’s
concept. Value is the utility of an economic resource to the person enjoying its use. In accounting, monetary unit
is used for the value of an object, ability or idea. Value is measured in terms of money. If the value of the
machine is taken as `2,00,000, it is only one type of value popularly called acquisition cost or historical cost.
Measurement is a broader concept than valuation. The concept of measurement includes valuation.
Generally, four measurement bases are usually accepted in accounting parlance i.e. (i) Historical Cost; (ii)
Current Cost; (iii) Realizable Value; and (iv) Present Value.
(i) Historical Cost: It means acquisition price, i.e., the amount of cash paid to acquire an asset. Liabilities
are recorded at the amount of proceeds received in exchange of the obligation.
(ii) Current Cost: Assets are carried at the amounts of cash or cash equivalent that would have to be paid
if the same or equivalent assets were acquired currently. Liabilities are carried at the undiscounted
amount of cash or cash equivalents that would be required to settle the obligation currently.
(iii) Realisable Value: As per this valuation basis, assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash
equivalent that would be realized by selling the assets in a routine manner. Similarly, liabilities are
recorded at their settlement values.
(iv) Present Value: As per present value concept, an asset is shown in the balance sheet at the sum of present
discounted net cash inflows that the asset is expected to generate in the normal course of business
activities. Similarly, liabilities are disclosed at the present discounted value of future net cash outflows that
are expected to be required to satisfy the liability in normal or due course of business activities.
ACCOUNTS AND ITS CLASSIFICATION

The business transactions are recorded in accounts. An account is an
individual record of a person, firm, or thing, an item of income or an expense. According to Kohler’s
Dictionary for Accountants,
An account is prepared for each type of asset, liability, owner(s) equity, an account has been
revenue and expense. For example, the account of cash would show the cash defined as a formal record
receipts, cash payments and balance of cash in hand, an account of a person of a particular type of
would show the business transactions that have taken place with that person transactions expressed in
and net position in respect of money owed by or to him. money.
14 FP-FA&A
Classification of
Accounts
Personal Accounts
Natural Personal Artificial Personal Representative

Accounts Accounts Personal Accounts
Impersonal
Accounts
Real Accounts Nominal Accounts
Tangible Real
Accounts
Intangible Real
Accounts
Classification of Accounts
(I) PERSONAL ACCOUNTS: These accounts show the transactions with customers, suppliers, money
lenders, the banks and the owner. Personal accounts can take the following forms:
(a) Natural Personal Accounts: The term natural persons mean persons who are the creation of
God. For example proprietor’s account, supplier’s account, receiver’s account etc.
(b) Artificial Personal Accounts: These accounts include accounts of corporate bodies or
institutions which are recognized as persons in business dealings. For example, any limited
company’s account, bank account, insurance company’s account, any firm’s account, any club’s
account, etc.
(c) Representative Personal Accounts: These are accounts which represent a certain person or
group of persons. In books, the names of the parties will appear. Since these accounts are in
many number and of the same nature, the accounts standing against these accounts, are added
and put under one common title. For example, if the business is not able to pay rent, say, for 15
shops, then all landlords of these shops stand as creditors and the amounts due to them are
added and put under one common head known as “Rent Outstanding Account”. This account is a
personal account representing so many landlords. Salary outstanding, rent prepaid, interest
outstanding, interest received in advance, etc. are some of the other examples.
(II) REAL ACCOUNTS: Real accounts may be of the following types:
(a) Tangible Real Accounts: These are accounts of such things which are tangible i.e. can be seen,
touched or felt physically. Examples– land, building, furniture, cash etc.
(Note: please note that bank account is a personal account and is not a real account because
bank account is the account of some banking company which is an artificial person).
(b) Intangible Real Accounts: These accounts represent such things which cannot be touched but
can be measured in terms of money. Examples, goodwill, trade marks, patent rights etc.
(III) NOMINAL ACCOUNTS: Nominal accounts are opened in the books to explain the expenses and
incomes. For example, in a business- salary is paid to the employees, rent is paid to the landlord, wages
are paid to the workers, commission is paid to the salesmen, wherein cash goes out of the business but
salary, rent, wages, commission etc. as such do not exist. Nominal accounts include accounts of all
expenses, losses, income and gains.
Valuation Accounts: In addition to the traditional classification of accounts - personal and impersonal -
valuation accounts are also being recognized e.g. provision for depreciation account, provision for
doubtful debts account, stock reserve account etc.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Classify the following into personal, real and nominal accounts:
Stationery Account, Depreciation Account, Cash Account, Bank Current
Account, Goodwill Account, Interest Account, Patents and Trade Marks
Account, Capital Account, Bank Loan Account, Freight Account, Drawings
Account, Rent Account and Account of Govind, a customer.
2. A firm spends money for the following. Mention whether they are
assets, expenses or losses :
– Purchasing typewriters
– Acquiring trade marks
– Paying salaries
– Acquiring a lease of land for 15 years
– Paying interest
– Purchasing furniture
– Paying compensation to injured workers
– Theft by burglars
DOUBLE ENTRY SYSTEM

There are two systems of keeping records- Single entry system and Double entry system. The single entry
system appears to be time-saving and economical but it is unscientific as under this system some
transactions are not recorded at all whereas some other transactions are recorded only partially. On the other
hand, the double entry system is based on scientific principles and is, therefore, used by most of the business
houses. The system recognises the fact that every transaction has two aspects and records both aspects of
each and every transaction. Under this system, in every transaction an account is debited and some other
account is credited. The crux of accountancy lies in finding out which of the two accounts are affected by a
particular transaction and out of these two accounts which account is to be debited and which account is to be
credited.
Merits of Double Entry System
(i) It keeps a complete record of business transactions. Both personal accounts and impersonal accounts
are kept. The entire information regarding the values of assets and profits earned during the year can
be easily obtained.
(ii) It provides a check on the arithmetical accuracy of accounts, since every debit has corresponding
credit to it and vice-versa.
(iii) The detailed profit and loss account can be prepared to show profits earned or loss suffered during
any given period.
(iv) The system makes possible the comparison of purchases as well as sales, expenditure, income etc. of
current year with those of the previous years, thus enabling a businessman to control his business
activities. The balance sheet can be prepared at any specified point of time or any date showing the
actual amount of assets, liabilities and capital.
16 FP-FA&A
(vi) It significantly reduces the chances of a fraud and if a fraud is committed it can be easily detected.
(vii) The accurate details with regard to any account can be easily obtained.
RULES OF DEBIT AND CREDIT

The left hand side of an account is called the debit side; while the right hand side is called the credit side. An
entry on the left side of an account is called a debit entry, or merely a debit, an entry on the right side is called
a credit entry or credit. The act of recording an entry on the left side of an account is called debiting the
account; and recording an entry on the right side of an account is called crediting the account. The difference
between the total debits and total credits is the account balance. Double entry system means the recording of
both the aspects i.e. debit and credit.
GOLDEN RULES
Personal Accounts: ‘Debit the receiver and credit the giver’
Real Accounts: ‘Debit what comes in, and credit what goes out’
Nominal Accounts: ‘Debit all expenses and losses and credit all incomes and
gains’
Explanation:
Personal Accounts: ‘Debit the receiver and credit the giver’, i.e. debit the account of the person who receives
something and credit the account of the person who gives something. For example, if you purchase goods from
Ram on credit, the two accounts involved are Goods (Purchase) Account and Ram’s Account. The latter account is
a personal account. Since, Ram is the giver in this transaction, his account will be credited. Similarly, if cash is paid
to Ram, Ram’s Account will be debited since he is the receiver. Thus, the account of a person is debited with any
benefit such person receives and is credited with any benefit such person imparts.
Real Accounts: ‘Debit what comes in, and credit what goes out’, i.e. debit the account of the thing which
comes in and credit the account of the thing which goes out. For example, where furniture is purchased for
cash, furniture account is debited while cash account is credited.
Nominal Accounts: ‘Debit all expenses and losses and credit all incomes and gains’ i.e. debit the
accounts of expenses and losses and credit all incomes and gains. For example, if you pay salary to your
clerk, the two accounts involved are salary account and cash account. Salary account is a nominal account.
Salary paid is an expense of the business and therefore this account will be debited. Similarly if interest is
received, interest account will be credited, since interest is an income item.
Significance of Debit and Credit

(a) Debit in Personal Accounts
(i) If the account is new, debit implies that the person whose account is being debited has become
debtor of the business.
(ii) If the account is already there and the person whose account is being debited is already a debtor
of the business, the new debit implies that the sum due from that person has increased.
(iii) If the account of a person who is a creditor of the business is debited, the debit implies that the
amount due to that person has decreased by the amount of debit. It is also conceivable that the
creditor may become a debtor after the debit entry; it will happen when the amount of the debit
exceeds the amount for which the person was a creditor immediately before the debit.
(b) Credit in Personal Accounts
(i) If the account is new, credit implies that the person whose account is being credited has become
creditor of the business.
(ii) If the account of a creditor of the business is credited, it will mean that the amount which is due to
that person has increased by the amount of the fresh credit. Credit in the account of a debtor of
the business signifies that the amount for which the debtor was liable to the business has
diminished by the amount of the credit entry. It is also possible that a debtor may become a
creditor after the credit.
(c) Debit in Real Accounts: A debit in real account means that either the value of the asset whose
account is being debited has increased or the business has acquired more of that asset.
(d) Credit in Real Accounts: A credit in the real account implies that either the value of the asset whose
account is being credited has decreased or the business has disposed of a part or the whole of the
asset for the amount of the credit.
(e) Debit in Nominal Accounts: A debit in nominal account signifies that there has been an expense or
loss of the amount of the debit or some income or profit has diminished by the amount of the debit.
(f) Credit in Nominal Accounts: A credit in a nominal account implies that there has been an income or
a profit of the amount of credit or some expense or loss has diminished by the amount of the credit.
IMPORTANT NOTE: ANALYSING TRANSACTIONS FOR RECORDING

If the three fundamental rules described above are kept in mind, it would be possible to record all the
transactions correctly. Follow these simple steps to record all the transactions:
– Identify the two accounts involved in the transaction.
– Find out the type of account for both the accounts involved in the transaction.
– Apply the rules of debit and credit.
For example, payment of salary is a transaction. It involves Salary Account and the Cash Account.
Salary Account is a nominal account whereas the Cash Account is a real account. Salary is an
Expense. Rule of Nominal Accounts says “Debit all expenses and losses”. So, Salary Account will be
debited. Whereas rule of real accounts says credit what goes out. Here cash is going out. So, Cash
Account will be credited
Illustration 1: From the following transactions, identify the nature of accounts involved and state which
account will be debited and which account will be credited?
ACCOUNTS TYPE OF DEBIT/ CREDIT

S. No. TRANSACTION
INVOLVED ACCOUNT
Mr. Anil started business with ` Cash Account Real Debit (Incomings)
1.
60,000. Capital Account Personal Credit (Giver)
Purchased goods for cash ` Purchases A/c Real Debit (Incomings)

2.
25,000. Cash Account Real Credit (Outgoings)
Cash Account Real Debit (Incomings)
3. Sold goods for cash ` 20,000.
Sales A/c Real Credit (Outgoings)
Purchased goods from Mr. Bansal Purchases A/c Real Debit (Incomings)
4.
for cash ` 10,000. Cash Account Real Credit (Outgoings)
Sold goods to Mr. Charles ` 8,000 Charles Personal Debit (Receiver)

5.
on credit. Sales A/c Real Credit (Outgoings)
Furniture A/c
6. Purchased furniture for ` 6,000 Real Debit (Incomings)
Cash Account
Real Credit (Outgoings)
Rent Account Nominal Debit (Expenses)

7. Paid rent ` 1,500
Cash Account Real Credit (Outgoings)
Wages A/c Nominal Debit (Expenses)
8. Paid wages
Cash Account Real Credit (Outgoings)
Purchased goods from Ajit on Purchases A/c Real Debit (Incomings)

9.
credit Ajit Personal Credit (giver)
18 FP-FA&A
Cash Account Real Debit (incomings)

10. Dividend received
Dividend A/c Real Credit (Income)
Cash Account Real Debit (incomings)
11. Machinery sold
Machinery A/c Real Credit (Outgoings)
Salaries A/c
Nominal Debit (Expenses)
12. Outstanding for salaries Outstanding Salaries
Personal A/c Debit (Creditors)
A/c
ACCOUNTING EQUATION
All business transactions are recorded as having a dual aspect. At any point of time, a firm will possess things
which may either be sold or converted into cash or which may be later used for a fairly long time. All these things
are called assets. Building, land, machinery, furniture, stock, debtors, bills receivable, cash at bank, cash in hand
etc. are a few examples of assets. The proprietor of the business brings capital into the business out of which the
business (a separate entity) purchases assets for its use. Thus, the amount of the assets of a business is equal to
the amount of capital contributed by the proprietor of the business. Thus, Capital = Assets.
In case the capital contributed by the proprietor is insufficient, the business takes borrowing from other parties
or outsiders. These parties may give loan or allow credit facilities at the time of purchase of goods. The
money which is owed to outsiders and which has to be paid, sooner or latter are called liabilities. For
example: Loans, Bank Overdraft, Creditors, Bills Payable, and Outstanding Expenses etc. On the one hand,
the loan given by the outside parties increases the assets of the business, on the other hand, claims of
creditors and lender of money on the assets of the business increase.
Hence, the sum of resources (assets) = obligations (capital + liabilities)
Therefore, Capital + Liabilities = Assets; or
Capital = Assets — Liabilities.
This equation is known as accounting equation. This equation is based on
the concept that for every debit, there is an equivalent credit. The entire
system of double entry book-keeping is based on this concept.
Example: Suppose A starts a business with a capital of ` 50,000, immediately the firm will have `
50,000 as cash as asset and at the same time the firm will owe to the owner ` 50,000 which is taken as
the proprietor’s capital. Thus,
Capital (` 50,000) = Assets ` 50,000 (Cash).
If the firm purchases furniture worth ` 10,000 out of the money provided by A, the situation will be:
Capital (` 50,000) = Cash (` 40,000) + Furniture (` 10,000).
Subsequently, if the business borrows ` 15,000 from a bank, the position will be as follows:
Capital (` 50,000) + Bank loan (` 15,000) = Cash (` 55,000) + Furniture (` 10,000).
LESSON ROUND UP
– Accounting is the art of recording, classifying and summarizing transactions and events which are of a
financial character in terms of money, and interpreting the results thereof.
 – Three main branches of accounting are financial accounting, cost accounting and management
accounting.
– Accounting functions are: keeping systematic records; protecting and controlling business properties;
ascertaining the operational profit/loss; ascertaining the financial position of the business; and
facilitating rational decision-making.
– Accounting is the language of business and used to communicate financial and other information to
different interested parties like individuals, organizations, creditors, investors, researchers,
governments etc.
– Accounting information should be relevant, reliable, comparable, understandable, timely, neutral,
verifiable and complete.
– Accounting can be based on cash or accrual system. In cash system, accounting entries are made
only when cash is received or paid while in accrual system, transactions are recorded on the basis of
amounts having become due for payment or receipt.
– Book keeping is different from accounting. Book keeping is concerned with the permanent recording or
maintaining of all transactions in a systematic manner to show its financial effect on the business.
– Accounting principles are guidelines to establish standards for sound accounting practices and
procedures in reporting the financial status of a business. These principles can be accounting
concepts and accounting conventions.
– Accounting concepts are defined as basic assumptions on the basis of which financial statements of a
business entity are prepared. While ‘convention’ denotes custom or tradition or practice based on
general agreement between the accounting bodies which guide accountant while preparing the
financial statements.
– Some of the important accounting concepts are: business entity concept, money measurement
concept, cost concept, going concern concept, dual aspect concept, realization concept, accrual
concept, accounting period concept and revenue match concept.
– Accounting conventions are consistency, disclosure, conservatism and materiality.
– Accounting standards (ASs) are written policy documents issued by expert accounting body or by
government or any other regulatory body.
– Two classes of accounts are personal accounts and impersonal accounts. Impersonal accounts can
be further classified into real and nominal accounts.
– Accounting Equation represents that sum of resources (assets) is equal to the obligations (capital and
liabilities) of the business.
GLOSSARY
Book Keeping The permanent recording or maintaining of all transactions in a systematic manner
to show its financial effect on the business.
Accounting Guidelines to establish standards for sound accounting practices and procedures in
Principles reporting the financial status of a business.
Accounting Basic assumptions on the basis of which financial statements of a business entity
Concepts are prepared.
Accounting Written policy documents issued by expert accounting body or by government or
Standards any other regulatory body.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
Theory Questions
1. Define accounting and state its characteristics.
2. Name the users of accounting information.
3. Discuss the system of accounting.
4. What are the functions of accounting?
20 FP-FA&A
5. Distinguish between book-keeping and accounting
6. State the difference between accounting concepts and conventions.
7. Explain important accounting conventions.
8. What are accounting standards?
9. Discuss the merits of double entry system of accounting.
10. Explain the basic rules of debit and credit in accounting.
11. What do you mean by accounting equation?
12. Define the term ‘account’ and what are the types of accounts? Explain with examples.
Practical Questions
1. Point out the accounts which will be debited and credited for each one of the following transactions:
– Cash received from X and discount allowed to him.
– Cash paid to Y and discount received from him.
– Credit Sales to Z.
– Cash Sales to A.
– Purchases from B on credit.
– Salary paid to clerk by means of cheque.
– Payment of cash to Landlord for rent.
– Depreciation on furniture.
– Interest due but not yet paid.
– Interest provided on capital.
2. Give Accounting Equation for following transactions of Jitesh:
– Started business with cash ` 36,000
– Paid Rent in advance `800
– Purchased goods for cash `10,000 and on credit `4,000
– Sold goods for cash `8,000
– Rent paid `2000 and rent outstanding `400
– Bought cycle for personal use `16,000
– Purchased equipments for cash `10,000
– Paid to creditors `1,200
– Other business Expenses paid `1,800
– Depreciation on equipment `2,000
3. Prove that the Accounting Equation is satisfied in all the following transactions of Naresh.
– Commenced business with cash ` 30,000.
– Rent paid in advance ` 250.
– Purchased goods for cash `15,000 and credit ` 10,000.
– Sold goods for cash `15,000, Costing `10,000.
– Paid salary ` 25,000 and salary outstanding ` 5,000.
– Bought motor cycle for personal use ` 65,000.
4. Aman had the following transactions. Use accounting equation to show their effect on his assets,
liabilities and capital.
 – Brought ` 60,000 in cash to start business.
– Purchased securities for cash ` 45,000.
– Purchased an office building for ` 900,000 giving ` 600,000 in cash and the balance through
a loan.
– Sold securities costing ` 6,000 for ` 9,000.
– Purchased an old car for `168,000.
– Received cash for rent ` 21,600.
– Paid cash for ` 3,000 for loan and ` 1,800 for interest.
– Paid cash for office building expenses ` 1,800.
– Received cash for dividend on securities `1,200.
5. Solve the Accounting Equation on the basis of the following transactions:
 – Sohan commenced business with `70,000
– Withdrew for private use ` 1,700
– Purchased goods on credit ` 14,000
– Purchased goods for cash ` 10,000
– Paid salaries `3,000
– Paid to creditors `10,000
– Sold goods on credit for `15,000
– Sold goods for cash (cost price was `3,000) ` 4,000
– Purchased machinery for ` 15,000
22 FP-FA&A
Lesson 2
Accounting Process–I
(Recording of Transactions)
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Accounting Cycle
Accounting process involves identification and
– Journal
– Procedure of Journalising analysis of financial transactions. These
– Compound Journal Entry transactions are then recorded, classified and

– Ledger
summarised in a systematic manner to give
– Features of Ledger Account
– Different between Journal and Ledger useful information. Thus, accounting process
– Ledger Posting starts with the recording of business transactions
– Balancing Ledger Accounts
in monetary terms, in the primary books of
– Subsidiary Books of Account
– Purchases Book accounts. For recording business transactions,
– Sales Book it is necessary that these transactions are
– Purchases Returns Book
evidenced by proper source documents like cash
– Sales Returns Book
– Bills Receivable Book memo, purchase bill, sales bill, cheque book,
– Bills Payable Book salary slip etc. From these source documents,
– Cash Book
transactions are recorded in the books of
– Petty Cash Book accounts which is the first and major step in
– General Journal accounting. It is the base of accounting as entire
– Trial Balance
future process would depend upon this recording
– Features of Trial Balance
– Objectives of Trial Balance of transactions. In this lesson, we will know about
– Methods of Preparing of Trial Balance
recording transactions in primary books like
– Lesson Round Up
journal and subsidiary books, posting in ledger
– Glossary
– Self-Test Questions and then preparing trial balance.
Accounting is the language of business.
Warren Buffet
24 FP-FA&A
ACCOUNTING CYCLE
Accounting cycle or accounting process includes the following:
1. Identifying the transactions from source documents like purchase orders, loan agreements, invoices,
etc.
2. Recording the transactions in the journal or subsidiary books as and when they take place.
3. Classifying all entries posted in the journal or subsidiary books and posting them to the appropriate
ledger accounts.
4. Summarising all the ledger balances and preparing the trial balance and final accounts with a view to
ascertain the profit or loss made during a particular period and ascertaining the financial position of the
business on that particular date.
JOURNAL
Journal is the book of primary entry in which every transaction is recorded before being posted into the
ledger. It is that book of account in which transactions are recorded in a chronological (day to day) order. In
modern times, besides the main journal, specialized journals are maintained to record different type of
transactions. The process of recording transaction in a journal is termed as journalising. A journal is generally
kept on a columnar basis. Journalising is the root of accounting.
SPECIMEN OF JOURNAL
In the Books of …………..
Journal Entries
Date Particulars L.F. Debit Credit

Amount (`) Amount (`)
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)
(i) Date: The date on which the transaction has taken place is recorded here. The year is written at the top of
the date column of each page of the journal. On the next line of the date column, the month & day of the first
entry are written. Unless the month or year changes or until a new page is begun, neither the month nor the
year is repeated on the page.
(ii) Particulars: The two aspects of a transaction are recorded in this column i.e. the details regarding
the accounts which have to be debited and credited. The name of the account(s) to be debited is entered
at the extreme left of the particulars column next to the date column. The abbreviation ‘Dr.’ is written at the
right end of the particulars column on the same line of the account debited. The name of the account to be
credited is entered on the next line with a prefix ‘To’ and is intended to the right of the date column. A brief
explanation of the transaction known as narration is written below the account titles of the transaction. Finally,
a thin line is drawn all through the particulars column to indicate that the entry of the transaction has been
completed.
(iii) L.F. (Ledger Folio): This column records the page number in the ledger in which the accounts in the
particulars column are transferred (posted).
(iv) Amount (Debit): The debit amount is recorded in the amount (Dr.) column opposite to the title of the
account debited.
Lesson 2  Accounting Process-I 25
(v) Amount (Credit): The credit amount is recorded in the amount (Cr.) column opposite to the title of the
account credited.
Procedure of Journalising
The following procedure is followed for passing journal entries-
– Analyze each transaction in terms of accounts affected. As a rule every transaction has at least two
accounts.
– Find out the type of accounts affected in a transaction i.e. personal, real or nominal.
– Apply the rules of debit and credit to each type of accounts involved.
– The debit and credit accounts must be equal. Sometimes, a journal entry may have more than one
debit or more than one credit. This type of journal entry is called compound journal entry. Regardless
of the number of debits or credits in a compound journal entry, the aggregate amount of debits should
be equal to the aggregate amount of credits.
– For a business, journal entries generally extend to several pages, hence, totals of debit and credit
amount columns are cast at the end of each page. Against the debit and credit total at the end of a
page, the words, ‘Total c/f’ (c/f - indicates carried forward) are written in the particulars column. The
debit and credit totals are then written in the beginning of the next page in the amount columns and
against them the words ‘Total b/f’ (b/f - indicates brought forward) are written in the particulars column.
On the last page ‘Grand Total’ is casted.
Compound Journal Entry

Transactions which are inter-connected and have taken place simultaneously are recorded by means of a
compound or combined journal entry. For example receipt of cash from a debtor and allowance of discount to
him are recorded by means of a single journal entry. Similarly transactions of the same nature are recorded
by means of a combined entry provided they take place the same day. For example, if amount is spent on the
same day for salaries, wages, stationery, rent, etc. a combined entry can be passed debiting all the relevant
nominal accounts with respective amounts and crediting cash account with the total amount spent.
Illustration 1:
Journalise the following transactions:
2011 `
Mar., 2 Commenced business with cash 2,50,000
” 4 Purchased furniture for cash 20,000
” 4 Cash purchases 1,45,000
” 5 Deposited with bank 30,000
” 6 Bought from Patil 40,000
Sold to Natarajan for cash 14,300
” 7 Stationery purchased 1,050
” 7 Bought from Salil 26,000
” 7 Sold to Mukherjee 8,080
” 9 Rent for two years paid in advance 24,000
” 9 Drawings by the proprietor for household expenses 4,000
Goods taken out by the proprietor for domestic use 500
” 9 Cash withdrawn from Bank 25,000
” 10 Sold to Mathur on credit 9,850
” 11 Purchases made, payment through cheque 2,900
” 14 Cash received from Patil on account 10,000
26 FP-FA&A
” 14 Cash paid to Salil after deduction of discount ` 1300 24,700
” 17 Cash received from Mathur in full settlement of his account 9,750
” 18 Mukherjee becomes insolvent. A dividend of
50 paise in a rupee is received 4,040
” 18 Purchase of a Scooter for cash 30,000
” 20 Sold goods to Aggarwal 8,640
Sold to Nayak 3,780
” 24 Cartage paid in cash 150
” 24 Repairs to Scooter, payment not yet made 170
” 26 Payment of cash for petrol 550
” 26 Purchases of goods for cash 12,000
” 26 Purchases of Office Equipment for cash 12,100
” 27 Repairs bill paid in cash 170
” 28 Aggarwal returns goods 400
” 31 Depreciation in furniture 100
Depreciation on Scooter 200
” 31 Salary to clerk outstanding 1,800
” 31 Adjustment for the month’s rent 1,000
” 31 Bank charges for the month 50
” 31 Interest on capital for the month 1,250
Salary to be credited to proprietor 2,000
” 31 Salil agrees to take some defective goods purchased
from him and immediately refunds the money 700
Solution:
JOURNAL
` `
2011
Mar., 2 Cash Account Dr. 2,50,000
To Capital Account 2,50,000
(For cash brought in by proprietor as his capital)
” 4 Furniture Account Dr. 20,000
To Cash Account 20,000
(For purchase of furniture for cash)
” 4 Purchases Account Dr. 1,45,000
To Cash Account 1,45,000
(For purchase of goods in trade for cash)
” 5 Bank Account Dr. 30,000
(For cash deposited in bank)
” 6 Purchases Account Dr. 40,000
To Patil 40,000
(For credit purchases of goods in trade, Patil being the
supplier)
” 6 Cash Account Dr. 14,300
To Sales Account 14,300
(For cash sales made to Natarajan)
Total c/f 4,99,300 4,99,300
` `
Total b/f 4,99,300 4,99,300
2011
Mar. 7 Stationery Account Dr. 1,050
(For purchase of stationery for cash)
To Salil 26,000
(For credit purchases of goods to Salil)
” 7 Mukherjee Dr. 8,080
(For credit sales of goods to Mukherjee)
” 9 Rent Paid in Advance A/c Dr. 24,000
(For rent paid in advance)
” 9 Drawings Account Dr. 4,500
To Purchases Account 500
(For drawings in cash and goods made by the proprietor)
To Bank Account 25,000
(For cash withdrawn from Bank)
” 10 Mathur Dr. 9,850
(For sales to Mathur on credit)
To Bank Account 2,900
(For purchases of goods, payment made by means of
cheque)
To Patil 10,000
(For cash received from Patil)
” 14 Salil Dr. 26,000
To Discount Account 1,300
(For cash paid to Salil and discount received from him)
” 17 Cash A/c Dr. 9,750
Discount Account Dr. 100
To Mathur 9,850
(For cash received from Mathur and discount allowed)
Bad Debts Account Dr. 4,040
To Mukherjee 8,080
(For cash received from Mukherjee on his insolvency and
amount written off as bad debt)
Total c/f 6,54,610 6,54,610
28 FP-FA&A
` `
2011 Total b/f 6,54,610 6,54,610
Mar. 18 Scooter Account Dr. 30,000
(For purchase of a scooter)
” 20 Aggarwal Dr. 8,640
Nayak Dr. 3,780
(For credit sales made to Aggarwal and Nayak on this day)
” 24 Cartage Account Dr. 150
To Cash Account 150
(Cartage paid)
” 24 Repairs Account Dr. 170
To Repairs Outstanding A/c 170
(For repairs charges, outstanding)
” 26 Petrol Expense Account Dr. 550
To Cash Account 550
(For petrol expenses paid in cash)
(For cash purchases)
” 26 Office Equipment Account Dr. 12,100
(For purchase of office equipment)
” 27 Repairs Outstanding A/c Dr. 170
To Cash Account 170
(Repairs outstanding paid)
” 28 Sales Returns Account Dr. 400
To Aggarwal 400
(Sales returns from Aggarwal)
” 31 Depreciation Account Dr. 100
To Furniture Account 100
(For depreciation on furniture)
” 31 Depreciation Account Dr. 200
To Scooter 200
(For depreciation on scooter)
” 31 Salary Account Dr. 1,800
To Salary Outstanding A/c 1,800
(For salary outstanding)
” 31 Rent Account Dr. 1,000
To Rent Outstanding A/c 1,000
(For rent outstanding)
Total c/f 7,25,670 7,25,670
` `
Total b/f 7,25,670 7,25,670
2011
Mar., 31 Bank Charges Account Dr. 50
To Bank 50
(For bank charges)
” 31 Interest on Capital A/c Dr. 1,250
Salary to Proprietor Dr. 2,000
To Capital Account 3,250
(For interest on capital, Rs. 1250 and salary for the
proprietor credited with Rs. 2,000)
” Cash Account Dr. 700
To Purchase Returns A/c 700
(For cash received from Salil on return of some defective
goods sold to him)
_______ _______
Total 7,29,670 7,29,670
LEDGER - PRINCIPAL BOOK OF ACCOUNTS

Ledger is the principal book of accounts where similar transactions relating to a particular person or property
or revenue or expense are recorded. In other words, it is a set of accounts. It contains all accounts of the
business enterprise whether real, nominal or personal. The main function of a ledger is to classify or sort out
all the items appearing in the journal or other subsidiary books under their appropriate accounts so that at the
end of the accounting period each account will contain the entire information of all the transactions relating to
it in a summarised or condensed form.
For instance, all the transactions that have taken place with Mr. Mathur will be entered in Mathur’s Account.
Similarly, all items relating to cash, sales, purchases, salaries, discount, etc. appear in their respective
accounts.
SPECIMEN RULING OF LEDGER ACCOUNT

Dr. Name of the Account Cr.
Date Particulars J.F Amount Date Particulars J.F Amount

` `
Features of the Ledger Account

(i) The ledger account is divided into two sides - the left hand side is known as debit side while the right
hand side is known as credit side. The abbreviations ‘Dr.’ and ‘Cr.’ are placed at the top left and right
hand corners respectively as a custom.
(ii) The name of account is written in the top middle of the account.
(iii) J.F. denotes folio or page number on which its journal entry may be found.
30 FP-FA&A
Difference Between Journal and Ledger
(i) The transactions are recorded first in the journal and then they are posted to the ledger. Thus journal
is the book of first or original entry while the ledger is the book of second entry.
(ii) The journal is the book for chronological record while the ledger is the book for the analytical record.
(iii) Journal is more reliable as compared to the ledger since it is the book of primary entry.
(iv) The process of recording transaction in journal is termed as “Journalising” while the process of
recording transactions in the ledger is known as ‘Posting’.
Ledger Posting
The term ‘Posting’ means transferring the debit and credit items from the journal to their respective accounts
in the ledger.
Rules of Posting
 – The names of accounts used in the journal carried to the ledger should be exactly the same.
– Separate accounts should be opened in the ledger for posting transactions relating to different
accounts recorded in the journal.
– The concerned account which has been debited in the journal should also be debited in the
ledger and the account which has been credited in the journal, should also be credited in the
ledger i.e., but a reference should be given of the other account.
– It is customary to use the words ‘To’ and ‘By’ while making posting in the ledger. The words ‘To’
is used with the accounts shown on the debit side of the ledger account while the word ‘By’ is
used with accounts which appear on the credit side of the ledger account.
– In the folio column, the page number of the journal from where the entry is transferred to ledger
account is written.
– The date of the transaction is written on the date column.
Balancing Ledger Accounts
Balancing of an account means the process of equalizing the two sides of an account by putting the
difference on the side where amount is short. Where the debit side of an account exceeds the credit side then
the difference is put on the credit side, and the account is said to have a debit balance. This balance is
brought down on the debit side while opening the account. Similarly, where the credit side of an account
exceeds the debit side, the difference is put on the debit side, and the account is said to have a credit
balance. This is brought down on credit side while opening the account.
The following steps are followed for balancing the accounts:
(i) Total the amounts of debit and credit entries in the account.
(ii) If the debit and credit sides are equal then there is no balance. The account stands automatically
balanced or closed.
(iii) If the debit side total is more, put the difference on the credit side amount column, by writing the words
in particulars column “By Balance c/d”. If the credit side total is more, put the difference on the debit
side amount column by writing the words in the particulars column “To Balance c/d”.
(iv) After putting the difference in the appropriate side of the account, add both sides of the account and
draw a thin line above and below the total.
(v) Bring down the debit balance on the debit side by writing the words in particulars column “To Balance
b/d”. Similarly bring down the credit balance on the credit side by writing the words in the particulars
column “By Balance b/d”.
Illustration 2:
Journalise the following transactions, post them in the ledger and balance the accounts in the books of Mr. Rajesh.
2011 `
Jan. 1 Started business with cash 2,00,000
Jan. 3 Purchased goods for cash 60,000
Jan. 5 Sold goods to Shyam 60,000
Jan. 6 Sold goods for cash 20,000
Jan. 9 Received cash from Shyam 40,000
Jan. 13 Goods purchased from Ram 40,000
Jan. 20 Cash paid to Ram 20,000
Jan. 25 Paid office rent 4,000
Jan. 31 Paid salaries to staff 20,000
Jan. 31 Returned goods by Shyam 10,000
Solution:
In the Books of Mr. Rajesh
Journal Entries
Date Particulars L.F. Debit (`) Credit (`)
2011
Jan. 1 Cash Account Dr. 2,00,000
(Being capital introduced by the proprietor in cash)
Jan., 3 Purchases Account Dr. 60,000
(Being goods purchased for cash)
”5 Shyam Dr. 60,000
(Being goods sold on credit to Shyam)
”6 Cash Account Dr. 20,000
(Being goods sold for cash)
”9 Cash Account Dr. 40,000
To Shyam 40,000
(Being the cash received from Shyam)
To Ram 40,000
(Being goods purchased on credit from Ram)
” 20 Ram Dr. 20,000
(Being cash paid to Ram)
” 25 Rent Account Dr. 4,000
(Being office rent paid in cash)
” 31 Salaries Account Dr. 20,000
(Being salaries paid to staff)
” 31 Sales Returns Account Dr. 10,000
To Shyam 10,000
(Being goods returned by Shyam)
_______ _______
Total 4,74,000 4,74,000
32 FP-FA&A
Ledger Accounts
Dr. Cash Account Cr.
Date Particulars J.F. ` Date Particulars J.F. `
2011 2011
Jan. 1 To Capital A/c 2,00,000 Jan. 3 By Purchases A/c 60,000
”6 To Sales 20,000 ” 20 By Ram 20,000
”9 To Shyam 40,000 ” 25 By Rent A/c 4,000
” 31 By Salaries A/c 20,000
_______ ” 31 By Balance c/d 1,56,000
2,60,000 2,60,000
Feb. 1 To Balance b/d 1,56,000
Dr. Capital Account Cr.
Jan. 31 To Balance c/d 2,00,000 Jan. 1 By Cash A/c 2,00,000
2,00,000 2,00,000
Feb. 1 By Balance b/d 2,00,000
Dr. Purchases Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 3 To Cash A/c 60,000 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 1,00,000
” 13 To Ram 40,000 _______
1,00,000 1,00,000
Feb. 1 To Balance c/d 1,00,000
Dr. Sales Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Balance c/d 80,000 Jan. 5 By Shyam 60,000
______ ”6 By Cash A/c 20,000
80,000 80,000
Feb. 1 By Balance b/d 80,000
Dr. Shyam Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 5 To Sales Account 60,000 Jan. 9 By Cash A/c 40,000
” 31 By Sales Returns 10,000
_____ ” 31 By Balance c/d 10,000
60,000 60,000
Feb. 1 To Balance b/d 10,000
Dr. Ram Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 20 To Cash Account 20,000 Jan. 13 By Purchases A/c 40,000
”31 To Balance c/d 20,000 _____
40,000 40,000
Dr. Rent Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 25 To Cash Account 4,000 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 4,000
4,000 4,000
Dr. Salaries Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Cash Account 20,000 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 20,000
20,000 20,000
Dr. Sales Returns Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Shyam 10,000 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 10,000
10,000 10,000
Feb. To Balance b/d 10,000
SUBSIDIARY BOOKS OF ACCOUNT

As stated earlier journal is a book of primary entry. It means all business transactions are first recorded in the
journal. However, it is not possible to record all transactions in one journal for large business organizations.
Therefore, the journal is sub-divided into many subsidiary books. The sub-division of journal into various
subsidiary journals in which transactions of similar nature are recorded are called subsidiary books. The
following are the subsidiary books:
1. Purchases Book
2. Sales Book
3. Purchases Returns Book
4. Sales Returns Book
5. Bills Receivable Book
6. Bills Payable Book
7. Cash Book.
34 FP-FA&A
PURCHASES BOOK
Purchases book is meant for recording the purchase of goods on credit only. Cash purchases are not
recorded in this book.
Purchases Book
Date Particulars J.F Invoice No. Ledger Folio Details Amount

` `
Entries in the purchases book are made from the invoices received from the suppliers. Posting is done in the
supplier’s/ creditors account daily from the purchases book with their respective amounts. At the end of
week/month, the total of the purchases book is debited to the purchases account in the ledger.
In ‘Particulars Column’ the names of the suppliers together with details of goods purchased are recorded. In
‘Details Column’ detail amounts of different items are recorded whereas in ‘Amount Column’ the net amount
of various invoices is recorded.
SALES BOOK
In the Sales Book, only credit sale of goods are recorded. Sales Book is prepared on the basis of copies of
invoice sent to customers. To post sales book, the accounts of the customers are individually debited with
respective amounts at the end of every month. Sales Account is credited with the monthly total of the Sales
Book. In ‘Particulars Column, the name of the customers along with details of the goods sold to them are
recorded.
Cash Sales will be entered in the Cash Book; credit sale of various assets or investments will be recorded in
General Journal.
Sales Book
Date Particulars Invoice No. Ledger Folio Details Amount

` `
PURCHASES RETURNS BOOK

The purchase returns books records the details of goods returned by the business organization to the
supplier(s). The goods purchased for cash and returned are not recorded in this book. When the goods are
returned to the supplier, a debit note is sent to him indicating that his account has been debited with the
amount mentioned in the debit note. The specimen of the purchases returns book is as follows:
Purchase Returns Book
Date Particulars Debit Note No. Ledger Folio Amount Amount

` `
The total amount column of the purchases return book is credited to the purchases returns account and the
account of the supplier(s) to whom debit notes have been sent are debited individually in their respective accounts.
SALES RETURNS BOOK

The details of goods returned by the customers to the business organization are recorded in this book. Goods
sold for cash and returned are not recorded in sales returns book. When goods are returned by the customer
a credit note is sent to him intimating that his account has been credited with the value of goods returned. A
specimen of the sales returns book is as follows:
Purchase Returns Book
Date Particulars Credit Note No. Ledger Folio Amount Amount

` `
The individual accounts of the customers are credited with their respective amounts while the periodical total
of the amount of the sales returns book is posted to the debit of sales returns account.
Illustration 3:
Record the following transactions in the appropriate books of original entry and show how they will be posted.
Assume invoice numbers, folio number, etc.
2011
Mar. 6 Purchased on Credit from Kadam
100 Shirts @ ` 300 each
50 Neckties @ ` 100 each.

36 FP-FA&A
Mar.10 Sold on Credit to Mehta
10 Bush Shirts @ 350 each
20 Hand towels @ ` 20 each.
” 13 Goods returned to Kadam
2 Shirts @ 300 each
” 17 Sold to Andley on Credit
20 Trousers @ ` 200 each
5 Neck-ties @ ` 120 each
” 18 Goods received back from Manohar, a customer
4 Nick-ties @ ` 110 each
2 Shirts @ ` 500 each
” 22 Sold to Apte on credit
5 Bush Shirts @ ` 500 each
100 metres of long cloth @ ` 30 per metre
” 28 Apte returns 1 Bush Shirt invoiced at ` 500
” 30 Purchased goods on credit from Gyani Cloth Store
150 Bush Shirts @ ` 400 each
200 metres of long cloth @ ` 25 per metre
50 metres of shirting @ ` 150 per metre
Gyani Cloth Store allows Trade Discount @ 5%
Andley returns one Neck-tie invoiced at ` 120

Solution:
Purchases Book
Date Particulars Inv. L.F. Details Amount
No. ` `
2011
Mar. 6 Kadam
100 shirts ` 300 each 62 8 30,000
50 Nick-ties ` 100 each 5,000 35,000
Mar. 30 Gyani Cloth Store
150 Bush Shirts `400 each 6981 17 60,000
200 metre long cloth
@ ` 25 per metre 5,000
50 metres Shirting
@ ` 150 per metre 7,500
72,500
Less : Trade Discount 5% 3,625 68,875
Total 1,03,875
Sales Book
Date Particulars Inv. L.F. Details Amount
No. ` `
2011
Mar. 10 Mehta
10 Bush Shirts
@ ` 350 each 408 9 3,500
20 Hand towels
@ ` 20 each 400 3,900
”17 Andley
20 Trousers
@ ` 200 each 409 12 4,000
5 Neck-ties
@ ` 120 each 600 4,600
” 22 Apte
5 Bush Shirts
@ ` 500 each 410 15 2,500
100 metre long cloth
@ ` 30 per metre 3,000 5,500
Total 14,000
Purchases Returns Book
Date Particulars Debit Note L.F. Amount Amount
No. ` `
2011
Mar. 13 Kadam
2 Shirts 22 8
@ ` 300 each 600
Total 600
Sales Returns Book
Date Particulars Credit Note L.F. Amount Amount
No. ` `
2011
Mar. 18 Manohar
4 Nick-ties @ ` 110 each 34 7 440
2 Shirts @ ` 500 each 1,000 1,440
” 28 Apte
1 Bush Shirts @ ` 500 35 15 500
” 30 Andley
1 Nick-tie @ ` 120 36 12 120
Total 2,060
38 FP-FA&A
Ledger Accounts
Dr. Kadam Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 13 To Purchase Mar. 6 By Purchases
Returns A/c (PRB 3) 600 A/c (PB 8) 35,000
Dr. Mehta Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 10 To Sales
Account (SB23) 3,900
Dr. Andley Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 17 To Sales A/c (SB 23) 4,600 Mar. 30 By Sales Returns
Account (SRB 10) 120
Dr. Manohar Cr.
2011
Mar. 18 By Sales Returns
A/c (SRB 10) 1,440
Dr. Apte Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 22 To Sales Account (SB 23) 5,500 Mar. 28 By Sales Returns
Account (SRB 10) 500
Dr. Gyani Cloth Stores Account Cr.
2011
Mar. 30 By Purchases A/c (PB8) 68,875
2011
Mar. 31 By Sundries as per
Sales Book (SB 23) 14,000
Dr. Purchase Account Cr.
Mar. 31 To Sundries as per
Purchases
Book (PB 10) 1,03,875
Dr. Purchases Returns Account Cr.
2011
Mar. 31 By Sundries as per
Purchases Returns
Book (PRB 3) 600
Dr. Sales Returns Account Cr.
2011
Mar. 31 To Sundries as per
Sales Returns
Book (SRB 10) 2,060
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Fill in the Blanks:
1. _______ is the book of primary entry in which all transactions are
recorded.
2. _______ means transferring the debit & credit items from the journal to
the ledger accounts.
3. When the goods purchased are returned to the supplier ____ note is
sent to him.
Bills Receivable Book

This book is used to record the details of bills receivable by the business organization. The entries to be made
in this book include the name of the acceptor, date of receipt of the bill, term of the bill, due date, amount and
other details. The total of the amount column of the bills receivable book is debited to bills receivable account
while the amount of each bills receivable is posed to the credit of the account of the party from whom it is
received.
BILLS RECEIVABLE BOOK
From Date Due

Bill Date Ledger Term Amount Disposal
Whom Acceptor of the Date
No. Received Folio `
Received Bill
40 FP-FA&A
BILLS PAYABLE BOOK
This is used to record the particulars of all the bills payable accepted by the business organisation for the
purpose of paying amounts due to its creditors. The acceptance is duly returned to the drawer. The amount of
each bill is posted to the debit side of the drawer’s account in the ledger and the total of the amount of the
bills payable book is posted to the credit of bills payable account in the ledger.
Bills Payable Book
Bill Date Drawn By Ledger Payee Date Term Due Amount Disposal
No. Accepted Folio of the Date
`
Bill
CASH BOOK
Cash book is the book in which all transactions concerning cash receipts and cash payments are recorded.
Cash Book is in the form of an account. It serves the purpose of Cash Account also. On the debit side, all cash
receipts are recorded while on the credit side, all cash payments are recorded. In case of cash transactions,
only a single aspect of transactions is recorded in ledger because the other aspect has to be recorded in Cash
Book. Cash Book thus serves the purpose of a book of original entry as well as that of a ledger account.
A cash book has the following features:
(a) Only cash transactions are recorded in the cash book.
(b) It performs the functions of both journal and ledger at the same time.
(c) All cash receipts are recorded in the debit side and all cash payments are recorded in the credit side.
(d) It records only one aspect of transaction i.e. cash.
(e) All cash transactions are recorded chronologically in the cash book.
Types of Cash Book

(i) Single Column Cash Book: It is like an ordinary cash account. In this all cash receipts are recorded on
the left hand side (real account - debit what comes in) and all cash payments are recorded on the right hand
side (real account - credit what goes out).
Dr. Cash Book (Single Column) Cr.
Date Particulars L.F. Amount ` Date Particulars L.F Amount `
(ii) Two (Double) Columnar Cash Book: It has two amount columns on both sides; one is for cash
and another is for discount. Cash column is meant for recording cash receipts and payments while
discount column is meant for recording discount received and allowed. The discount column on the debit
side represents the discount allowed while discount column on the credit side represents the discount
received.
Dr. Cash Book (Double Column) Cr.
Date Particulars L.F. Discount Amount Date Particulars L.F Discount Amount
` ` ` `
Note: Discount columns do not serve the function of a discount account. Discount columns are merely
memorandum columns. Discount allowed account and discount received account are opened in the ledger
and the totals of discount columns are posted in these accounts.
Illustration 4:
Record the following transactions in Cash Book of Mr. Singh:
2011 `
April 1 Mohan Lal commenced business with cash 1,00,000
” 2 Bought goods for cash 65,700
” 3 Sold goods for cash 4,320
” 6 Received cash from Fateh Singh 1,800
” 6 Allowed him discount 50
” 9 Paid cash to Shugan Chand 19,500
Discount allowed by Shugan Chand 500
” 12 Paid for Office Furniture 5,680
” 18 Sold goods for cash 7,810
” 23 Received cash from Subramaniam 9,870
” Discount allowed to him 120
” 27 Paid for advertising 500
” 28 Cash paid to Asia Trading Co. 20,300
Discount received 250
” 30 Cash sales 1,280
” 30 Cash received from Fateh Singh 2,850
Discount allowed to him 100
Salary paid in cash 3,150
42 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Mr. Singh
Dr. Cash Book Cr.
Date Particulars L.F Discount Cash Date Particulars L. Discount Cash
` ` F ` `
2011 2011
April April
1. To Capital A/c 1,00,000 2. By
3. To Sales A/c 4,320 Purchases
6. To Fateh Singh 50 7,810 A/c 65,700
18. To Sales A/c 1,800 9. By Shugan
23. To Chand 500 19,500
Subramaniam 120 9,870 12. By Furniture
30. To Sales A/c 1,280 A/c 5,680
30. To Fateh Singh 100 2,850 By
27. Advertising 500
By Asia
28. Trading Co. 250 20,300
By Salary 3,150
By Balance 13,100
30. c/d
30.
___ _______ ___ _______
270 1,27,930 750 1,27,930
May1 To Balance B/d 13,100
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. ____ Cash book has two account columns on both sides
Double/Triple).
2. Only _____ transactions are recorded in cash book (cash/credit).
3. Bills Payable is _____ for the organization (asset/liability).
(iii) Three Columnar Cash Book: This type of cash book contains the following three amount columns on
each side:
(a) Discount column for discount received and allowed;
(b) Cash column for cash received and cash paid; and
(c) Bank column for money deposited and money withdrawn from the bank.
Dr. Cash Book (Triple Column) Cr.
Date Particulars L.F. Discount Cash Bank Date Particulars L.F Discount Cash Bank
` ` ` ` ` `
When triple column cash book is prepared, there is no need for a separate bank account in the ledger. The
bank account maintained by the enterprise is a personal account and the cash account is a real account. For
recording transactions in the bank column of the cash book the rule of debit and credit applicable to personal
accounts should be followed i.e. debit the receiver and credit the giver. Thus, when cash is deposited into
bank, the bank would be the receiver and would be debited in the bank column of the cash book. Similarly, for
cash withdrawn from the bank the bank would be the giver and would be credited in the bank column of the
cash book.
Contra Entry: If a transaction involves both cash and bank account, it is entered on both sides of the cash
book, one in the cash column and second in the bank column, though on opposite sides. This is called contra
entry and word ‘C’ is indicated against that item in L.F. column. e.g. when cash is withdrawn from the bank, it
is recorded on the debit side in cash column and on the credit side in the bank column. Similarly, when cash
is deposited with the bank, the amount is recorded on the debit side in bank column and on the credit side in
the cash column.
Illustration 5:
On 1st May, 2011 the columnar cash book of Mitra showed that he had ` 2,000 in his cash box and that there
was a bank overdraft of ` 8,000. During the day the following transactions took place:
Cash withdrawn from bank for office use 10,000
Paid salaries in cash 3,000
Cash paid to Harish & Co. 6,500
Drawings in cash made by Mitra for household expenses 1,000
Received from G. Guha in settlement of an account of ` 10,000,
` 1,800 in cash and a cheque of ` 8,000. The cheque was
immediately deposited in bank
Cash sales 6,500
Bank returns a cheque of ` 9,900 received from Kulu & Sons in
settlement of an account of ` 10,000
Paid rent by cheque 1,500
Cash deposited with bank 6,000
Write up the Cash Book for the day and balance it.
44 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Dr. Cash Book (Triple Column) Cr.
Date Particulars L.F. Discount Cash Bank Date Particulars L.F. Discount Cash Bank
` ` ` ` ` `
2011 2011
May To Bal b/d 2,000 May By Bal b/d 8,000
1 1
To Bank (C) 10,000 By Cash (C) 10,000
To G.Guha 200 1,800 8,000 By
Salaries
To Sales A/c 3,000
A/c 6,500
By Harish 6,500
To Cash (C) 6,000
By
To Bal c/d 15,400 Drawings
A/c 1,000
By Kulu & 100 9,900

Sons
By Rent 1,500
A/c
By Bank (C) 6,000
______ _____ _____ By Bal c/d ______ ___3,800 _____
___200 20,300 29,400
___200 20,300 29,400
May To Balance 3,800 May By 15,400

2 b/d 2 Balance
b/d
PETTY CASH BOOK

Payments in cash of small amounts like traveling expenses, postage, carriage etc. are petty cash expenses.
These petty cash expenses are recorded in the petty cash book. The petty cash book is maintained by
separate cashier known as petty cashier. It is also called the Imprest System of maintaining petty cash. The
petty cashier is given a certain sum of money at the beginning of the fixed period (e.g. a month/fortnight)
which is called float. The amount of float is so fixed that it may be adequate to meet petty expenses of the
prescribed period. The balance in the petty cash book shows cash lying with the petty cashier.
Petty Cash Book
Amount Date Particulars Voucher Total Analysis of Payments

Received No. Amount
Paid Cartage Postage Conveyance Misc. or
Sundries
The advantages of the imprest system are as follows:
– It saves the time of the chief cashier.
– Petty cashier is not allowed to keep idle cash with him if the float is found to be more than adequate;
its amount will be immediately reduced. This reduces the chances of misuse of cash by the petty
cashier.
– As the sum of float is small, it does not provoke the person in charge of it or others in the office to
misappropriate it.
– The record of petty cash is checked by the cashier periodically, so that a mistake if committed is soon
rectified.
– It enables a great saving to be effected in the posting of small items to the ledger accounts.
– The system trains young staff to handle money responsibilities.
Petty Cash Book may be treated either as a part of the double entry system or merely as a memoranda book.
If the former course is adopted, each payment to petty cashier is shown on the credit side of the main Cash
Book which is considered to have been balanced by a debit entry in the petty cash book. The two entries are
folioed against each other completing the double entry aspects. Payments recorded in the Petty Cash Book
are directly posted to the different nominal accounts. Of course, entries for expenses are made only with the
periodical totals of expenses under various heads. If the latter course is adopted, for amounts paid to petty
cashier, petty cash account in the ledger is debited besides entering the amounts (paid to petty cashier) on
the credit side of the main cash book and recording the amount in the petty cash book. Periodically, different
nominal accounts are debited and the petty cash account is credited in ledger for expenses recorded in Petty
Cash Book.
Illustration 6:
Prepare an analytical Petty Cash Book from the following information:
Petty cash is maintained on the basis of imprest system. On 20th March, 2011 the petty cashier had with him
` 328. He received ` 672 to make up the expenses of the previous week. During the week the following
expenses were met by the petty cashier:
2011 `
March 20 Bus fare 6
” 21 Revenue stamps 85
21 Tea for customers 22
” 22 Cartage 43
” 24 Cooli 10
24 Telegram charges 76
24 Refreshment for customer 52
” 25 Repairs to furniture 100
25 Taxi charges 87
25 Post cards 90
25 Cloth for dusters 74
25 Tea for customers 20
46 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Analytical Petty Cash Book
Amount Date Particulars Vouc Total Cartage Printing Customers Conveya Sundri
Received her Amou & Cooli & Entertainm nce es
No. nt Stationery ent
Paid
2011
March
328 20. To Balance b/d
672 20. To Cash
20. By Bus Fare 6 6
21. By Rev. Stamps 85 85
21. By Tea for Customers 22 22
22. By Cartage 43 43
24. By Cooli 10 10
By Telegram charges 76 76
24.
24. By Refreshment to
customers 52 52
25. By Repairs to
Furniture 100 100
25. By Taxi Charges 87 87
25. By Post Cards 90 90
By Cloth for Dusters 74 74
25.
By Tea for Customers 20 20
25.
____ By Balance c/d _335
1,000 1,000
335 27. To Balance b/d
665 27. To Cash A/c
The journal entry required for various petty cash expenses are the following:
Journal Entry
` `
Cartage A/c Dr. 53
Postage and Telegrams A/c Dr. 251
Conveyance A/c Dr. 93
Customer’s Entertainment A/c Dr. 94
Repairs A/c Dr. 100
General Expenses A/c Dr. 74
To Petty Cash Account 665
The Petty Cash Account in the ledger will appear as follows:
Dr. Petty Cash Account Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 20 To Balance b/d 328 Mar. 26 By Sundries* 665
” To Cash A/c 672 ” By Balance c/d 335
1,000 1,000
Mar. 27 To Balance b/d 335
” To Cash 665
GENERAL JOURNAL
This is also known as Journal Proper. It is used for making the original record of such transactions for which
no special journal has been kept in the business. Entries recorded in the general journal may be confined to
the following transactions:
(i) Opening Entries: Opening entries are passed at the beginning of the financial year to open the books by
recording the assets, liabilities and capital appearing in the balance sheet of the previous year. It is written as
follows:
Assets Account Dr.
To Liabilities Account
To Capital Account
(ii) Closing Entries: Closing entries are used at the end of the accounting year for closing of accounts
relating to expenses and revenues. These accounts are closed by transferring their balances to the Trading,
Profit and Loss Account.
(iii) Adjustment Entries: At the end of the accounting year, adjustments entries are to be passed for
outstanding/prepaid expenses, accrued income/income received in advance etc. Entries for all these
adjustments are passed in the general journal.
(iv) Transfer Entries: Transfer entries are passed in the general journal for transferring an item entered in
one account to another account.
(v) Rectification Entries: Rectification entries are passed for rectifying errors which might have committed in
the books of account.
(vi) Purchase of Fixed Assets/Stationery: When fixed assets or stationeries are purchased on credit, the
entries are passed in the general journal.
(vii) Sale of Worn-out or Obsolete Assets: When obsolete assets are sold on credit, these are originally
recorded in the general journal.
Illustration 7:
On 31st March, 2011 following balances are available in ledger for the year 2010 - 11.
`
Furniture (debit balance) 20,000
Stock of Goods Account (debit balance) 70,000
S. Sircar (debit balance) 14,000
M. Mitra (debit balance) 7,500
Cash (debit balance) 2,400
B. Basu (credit balance) 13,900
Capital Account (credit balance) 1,00,000
Write the opening entry for 1st April, 2011.
Solution :
Date Particulars L.F. Dr. Cr.

Amount ` Amount `
2011
April 1 Furniture A/c Dr. 20,000
Stock of Goods Dr. 70,000
S.Sircar Dr. 14,000
M. Mitra Dr. 7,500
Cash A/c Dr. 2,400
To B. Basu 13,900
(For opening balances of various assets, liabilities
and capital as on 1st April, 2011)
48 FP-FA&A
TRIAL BALANCE
A trial balance is a schedule or list of balances of both debit and credit extracted from various accounts in the
ledger including cash and bank balances from cash book. Since every transaction has a dual effect i.e. every
debit has a corresponding credit and vice versa, the total of the debit balances and credit balances extracted
from the ledger must tally. Thus, at the end of the accounting period or at the end of each month, the
balances of the ledger accounts are extracted and trial balance is prepared to test as to whether the total
debits are equal to total credits.
Features of a Trial Balance

It is a statement prepared in a tabular form. It has two columns one for debit balances and another for credit
balances.
The balances at the end of the period as shown by ledger accounts are shown in the statement.
It can be prepared on any date provided accounts are balanced.
It is a method of verifying the arithmetical accuracy of entries made in the ledger.
Objectives of Preparing Trial Balance

(i) It is a check on the accuracy of posting. If the trial balance agrees it proves that:
(a) the books are arithmetically accurate, and
(b) both the aspects of the transactions have been correctly recorded in the books of original
entry as well as in the ledger.
(ii) It brings together the balances of all the accounts at one place and this facilitates the preparation of
profit and loss account and balance sheet.
Methods of Preparing the Trial Balance

(i) Totals Method: In this method, the totals of debit and credit sides of the ledger accounts are shown in
the trial balance. The sum totals of debit and credit columns of the trial balance must be equal. This is
less popular method.
(ii) Balances Method: In this method, the balances of ledger accounts are taken to respective debit and
credit columns of the trial balance and then grand total is taken out. The total of balances in the debit
column must be equal to the total balances in the credit column of the trial balance.
Specimen of Trial Balance
Trial Balance as at ________
Sl. Particulars L.F. Amount (Dr.) Amount (Cr.)

No.
(` ) (` )
Illustration 8:
Raju started business on 1st January 2011. You are required to pass entries, in journal & subsidiary books,
post them in ledger and prepare trial balance under totals & balances method for January 2011. His
transactions for the month were follows:
2011 `
Jan. 1 Cash brought in by Raju as his capital 2,00,000
Furniture purchased on credit from Nuluk Furniture Home 25,000
” 2 Goods purchased from Modi & Sons on credit 61,400
” 3 Goods purchased for cash 35,000
” 4 Goods purchased from Delhi Traders on credit 73,300
” 5 Cash Sales 4,600
” 8 Sold goods to Bhatia & Co. on credit 19,860
” 11 Purchased stationery for cash 1,050
” 12 Paid Modi & Sons cash to settle account
Received 5% discount from him ......
” 13 Received from Bhatia & Co. in full settlement of account 19,800
” 18 Sold on credit to Ganesh & Co. 5,000
” 19 Received cash from Ganesh & Co. 1,000
” 21 Sold on credit to Hoshiar Singh 4,000
” 23 Purchased goods for cash 26,000
” 27 Hoshiar Singh becomes insolvent. A first and final
dividend of ` 3,000 is received from his estate
” 31 Ganesh & Co. pays cash 3,900
” 31 Discount allowed to Ganesh & Co. 100
” 31 Cash paid for rent 2,800
” 31 Depreciation on furniture 250
” 31 Payment to Delhi Traders in full settlement 73,000
Solution:
In the books of Raju
Journal Entries
` `
2011
Jan. 1 Furniture Account Dr. 25,000
To Nuluk Furniture Home 25,000
(For furniture purchased on credit from
Nuluk Furniture Home)
” 27 Bad Debts Dr. 1,000
To Hoshiar Singh 1,000
(Bad debts written off on the insolvency of
Hoshiar Singh)
” 31 Depreciation A/c Dr. 250
To Furniture A/c 250
(For depreciation provided on Furniture)
______ ______
Total 26,250 26,250
50 FP-FA&A
Purchases Book
Month : January, 2011
Date Particulars Invoice No. L.F. Details Amount
`
2011
Jan. 2 Modi & Sons Goods 61,400
Jan. 4 Delhi Traders Goods 73,300
Totals 1,34,700
Sales Book
Month : January, 2011
Date Particulars Invoice No. L.F. Details Amount

`
2011
Jan. 8 Bhatia & Co. 19,860
” 18 Ganesh & Co. 5,000
” 21 Hoshiar Singh 4,000
28,860
Dr. Cash Book Cr.
Date Particulars L.F. Discount ` Date Particulars L.F. Discount `

2011 2011
Jan. 1 To Capital A/c 2,00,000 Jan. 3 By Purchases 35,000
”5 ” Sales 4,600 ” 11 ” Stationery 1,050
” 13 ” Bhatia & Co. 60 19,800 ” 12 ” Modi & Sons 3,070 58,330
” 17 ” Sales 10,700 ” 23 ” Purchases 26,000
” 19 ” Ganesh & Co. 1,000 ” 31 ” Rent 2,800
” 27 ” Hoshiar Singh 3,000 ” 31 ” Delhi Traders 300 73,000
” 31 ” Ganesh & Co. 100 3,900 ” 31 ” Balance c/d _____ 46,820
160 2,43,000 3,370 2,43,000

2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Balance c/d 2,00,000 Jan. 1 By Cash 2,00,000
2,00,000 2,00,000
Feb. 1 ” Balance b/d 2,00,000
Dr. Furniture Account Cr.

2011 2011
Jan. 1 To Nuluk Furniture Jan. 31 By Depreciation 250
Home 25,000 ” Balance c/d 24,750
25,000 25,000
Dr. Nuluk Furniture Home Cr.

2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Balance c/d 25,000 Jan. 31 By Furniture 25,000
25,000 Feb. 1 ” 25,000
Balance b/d 25,000
Dr. Modi & Sons Cr.

2011 2011
Jan. 12 To Cash A/c 58,330 Jan. 2 By Purchases 61,400
” Discount A/c _3,070 _____
61,400 61,400
Dr. Purchases Account Cr.

2011 2011
Jan. 3 To Cash A/c 35,000 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 1,95,700
” 23 ” Cash A/c 26,000
” 31 ” Sundries as per
Purchases Book 1,34,700 _______
1,95,700 1,95,700
Feb. 1 ” Balance b/d 1,95,700
Dr. Delhi Traders Cr.

2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Cash A/c 73,000 Jan. 4 By Purchases 73,300
” Discount A/c ___300 _____
73,300 73,300
52 FP-FA&A

2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Balance c/d 44,160 Jan. 5 By Cash A/c 4,600
Jan. 17 ” Cash A/c 10,700
Jan. 31 ” Sundries as per
_____ Sales Account 28,860
44,160 44,160
Dr. Bhatia & Co. Cr.

2011 2011
Jan. 8 To Sales A/c 19,860 Jan. 13 By Cash A/c 19,800
______ ” Discount A/c ____60
19,860 19,860
Dr. Stationery Account Cr.

2011 2011
Jan. 11 To Cash A/c 1,050 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 1,050
1,050 1,050
Dr. Ganesh & Co. Cr.

2011 2011
” 31 ” Cash A/c 3,900
_____ ” Discount A/c __100
5,000 5,000
Dr. Hoshiar Singh Cr.

2011 2011
____ ” Bad Debts A/c 1,000
4,000 4,000
Dr. Bad Debts Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 27 To Hoshiar Singh 1,000 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 1,000
1,000 1,000
Feb. 1 ” Balance b/d 1,000
Dr. Rent Account Cr.
2011
Jan. 31 To Cash A/c 2,800 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 2,800
2,800 2,800
Feb. 1 ” Balance b/d 2,800
Dr. Depreciation Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Furniture 250 Jan. 31 By Balance c/d 250
250 250
Feb. 1 ” Balance b/d 250
Dr. Discount Account Cr.
2011 2011
Jan. 31 To Sundries for Jan. 31 By Sundries for
Discount Discount
Allowed as Received
per debit side as per
of Cash Book 160 credit side
of Cash Book 3,370
” 31 ” Balance b/d 3,210 _____
3,370 3,370
Raju’s Trial Balance

(Totals Method)
as on 31st January, 2011
Sl. Particulars Debit Credit
No. Totals ` Totals `
1. Cash 2,43,000 1,96,180

2. Capital Account 2,00,000
3. Furniture Account 25,000 250
4. Nuluk Furniture Home 25,000
5. Modi & Sons 61,400 61,400
54 FP-FA&A
No. Totals ` Totals `
6. Purchase Account 1,95,700
7. Delhi Traders 73,300 73,300
8. Sales Account 44,160
9. Bhatia & Co. 19,860 19,860
10. Stationery Account 1,050
11. Ganesh & Co. 5,000 5,000
12. Hoshiar Singh 4,000 4,000
13. Bad Debts Account 1,000
14. Rent Account 2,800
15. Depreciation Account 250
16. Discount Account 160 3,370
6,32,520 6,32,520
Raju’s Trial Balance

(Balances Method)
as on 31st January, 2011
No. Balances ` Balances `
1. Cash 46,820
2. Capital Account 2,00,000
3. Furniture Account 24,750
4. Nuluk Furniture Home 25,000
5. Purchases Account 1,95,700
6. Sales Account 44,160
7. Stationery Account 1,050
8. Bad Debts Account 1,000
9. Rent Account 2,800
10. Depreciation Account 250
11. Discount Account _______ 3,210
2,72,370 2,72,370
LESSON ROUND UP
– Accounting cycle includes identifying, recording, classifying and summarizing the transactions.
– Every transaction is recorded in the Journal before being posted into the ledger. It is that book of
account in which transactions are recorded in a chronological order.
– Recording in the journal is done following the rules of debit and credit.
– Posting is the process of recording transactions in the ledger based on the entry in the journal.
– The main function of a ledger is to classify or sort out all the items appearing in the journal or other
subsidiary books under their appropriate accounts so that at the end of the accounting period
summary of each account is easily available.
– Balancing of ledger accounts involves equalization of both sides of the account by putting the
difference on the side the amount is short.
– Various subsidiary books are: purchases book; sales book; purchases returns book; sales returns
book; bills receivable book; bills payable book and cash book.
– Petty Cash Book is maintained under Imprest System of petty cash.
– General Journal or journal proper is maintained for recording those transactions which are not
recorded in the subsidiary books.
– Trial Balance is prepared after posting the entries in ledger to verify the arithmetical accuracy of
entries made in the ledger.
GLOSSARY
Journal Book of prime entry in which every transaction is recorded before being posted into the
ledger.
Compound Transactions which are inter-connected and have taken place simultaneously are recorded
Journal by means of Posting is the process of recording transactions in the ledger based on the
Entry entry in the journal.
Cash Book It is a record of transactions concerning cash receipts and cash payments.
Trial A schedule or list of balances both debit and credit extracted from various accounts in the
Balance ledger.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
Theory Questions:
1. Distinguish between journal and ledger.
2. What do you mean by contra-entries in a columnar cash book?
3. What is meant by columnar cash book?
4. What is meant by analytical petty cash book?
5. Describe the imprest system.
Practical Questions:
1. Journalise the following transactions:
2011 `
(i) Jan. 1 Bought office furniture from Kanji & Co. 6,000
(ii) ” 5 Bought goods from F. Roy 5,000
(iii) ” 10 Bought goods from P. Gupta 10,000
(iv) Feb. 1 Sold goods to K. Peter 4,000
(v) ” 5 Sold goods to P. Turpin & Co. 7,000
(vi) ” 12 Bought goods from C. Henry 4,500
(vii) ” 17 Bought goods from J. Jones 2,000
(viii) ” 20 Sold goods to S. Sorab & Co. 18,000
(ix) ” 23 Sold goods to B. Byramji 1,750
(x) ” 25 Received cash from P. Turpin & Co. 3,000
(xi) ” 27 Received cash from K. Peter 2,500
(xii) ” 28 Paid cash to F. Roy 1,000
56 FP-FA&A
(xiii) ” 28 Paid cash to P. Gupta 5,000
(xiv) Mar. 4 Paid salaries 2,000
(xv) ” 5 Paid office rent 750
(xvi) ”. 7 Sold goods for cash 2,750
(xvii) ” 8 Bought goods for cash 1,250
(xviii) ” 11 Paid for stationery 250
(xix) “ 15 Received cash from S. Sorab & Co. 14,750
(xx) ” 15 Received cash from B. Byramji 1,750
(xxi) ” 17 Paid cash to C. Henry 3,500
(xxii) ” 17 Paid cash to J. Jones 2,000
(xxiii) ” 20 Purchased goods for cash 1,000
(xxiv) ” 25 Paid Kanji & Co. 6,000
2. Rolly Polly was carrying on business as a cloth dealer. His transactions during April, 2011 were as
follows:
2011 `
Apr., 1 Sold cloth on credit to Gifloo 5,000
” 2 Purchased cloth from Amboo on credit 20,000
” 3 Paid rent for April by cheque 3,000
” 4 Cash purchases of cloth (paid by cheque) 8,000
Cash sales 4,500
” 6 Paid for stationery and postage 500
” 8 Drawn cash for private use 2,500
” 10 Drawn cash from Bank for office 15,000
” 13 Purchased goods on credit from Minoo 25,000
” 16 Sold goods on credit to Gopal 18,000
” 17 Paid telephone charges 4,800
Paid for advertising 3,500
” 22 Cash purchases 9,000
” 24 Purchased filing cabinet and paid by cheque 5,000
” 27 Purchased Government securities 30,000
Paid wages for the month 8,000
Journalise the transactions and prepare ledger accounts.
3. Enter the following transactions in a triple column cash book.
March, `
2011
” 1 Balance at bank 20,000
Purchased goods by cheque 10,000
Drew cheque for office cash 500
Purchased stationery for cash 100
” 8 Received from C-cheque 1,250
Allowed discount 30
” 9 Received from A-cheque 1,400
Allowed discount 40
” 10 Carriage paid in cash 30
” 12 Received cheque from D 1,750
Allowed discount 30
” 13 Paid for cooly hired-cash 80
Drew cheque favoring G for rent 1,800
” 15 Paid for purchases-cheque 20,000
Received from C-cheque 900
Allowed discount 20
” 20 Paid for postage-cash 50
Paid K by cheque 1,950
Discount allowed by him 50
” 22 Received cheque for sales 1,500
” 25 Paid for cleaning office 50
” 27 Paid wages-cash 500
30 Drew cheque for electricity 2,000
Drew cheque for office use 3,000
(Ans.: Cash in hand ` 2,690; Bank overdraft ` 12,450; Discount - Dr. ` 120 and Cr. ` 50).
58 FP-FA&A
Lesson 3
Accounting Process – II
(Rectification of Errors)
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Errors The main objective of any accountant is to

ascertain the true profit and financial position of
– Classification of Errors
the business for the accounting period. For this,
– Clerical Errors the accountant put in best efforts to record the
– Errors of Principles transactions correctly. However, the recording

cannot be made error free. Certain error are bound
– Errors disclosed by Trial Balance
to be committed while recording the transactions
– Errors not disclosed by Trial Balance which affect the final accounts of enterprises.
– Review Questions Therefore, it becomes very important for the

accountant to identify the errors and rectify them
– Steps to locate Errors
so that the correct and true financial position is
– Rectification of Errors ascertained. Errors should be rectified as and
when they are found. Since, the accountant cannot
– Before the preparation of Trial Balance
simply change the figures and entries posted
– After the preparation of Trial Balance
earlier, a certain procedure has to be followed to
but before the preparation of Final rectify the wrong entries.
Accounts.
In this lesson, we will study about accounting
– In the next accounting period errors, identifying and classifying the accounting
– Lesson Round-Up errors and the procedure for rectifying those

errors before the preparation of trial balance,
– Glossary
before the preparation of final account and in the
– Self-Test Questions next accounting period.
Accounting errors were made; they will be corrected and they will be disclosed, ... Internal
practises are being, and will continue to be, enhanced.
Richard Notebaert
60 FP-FA&A
ERRORS
Accounting errors are the errors committed by persons responsible for recording and maintaining accounts of
a business firm in the course of accounting process. These errors may be in the form of omitting the
transactions to record, recording in wrong books, or wrong account or wrong totalling and so on. While
discussing about the trial balance, we have seen that preparation of trial balance is a method of verifying the
arithmetical accuracy of entries made in the ledger. But it may be noted that an agreement in the trial balance
does not prove that- (i) all transactions have been correctly analyzed and recorded in the proper accounts;
and (ii) all transactions have been recorded in the books of original entry. Hence, we can say that a trial
balance should not be regarded as a conclusive proof of the correctness of the books of account, that is if the
trial balance does not agree, there are errors or mistakes and even if the trial balance agrees, there may be
errors in the accounts.
CLASSIFICATION OF ERRORS
ERRORS
Clerical Errors Errors of Principle
Errors of Errors of Compensating

Omission Commission Errors
Complete Omission
Partial Omission
A. Clerical Errors
Errors other than errors of principle are called clerical errors. The following are the types of clerical errors.
1. Errors of Omission: These errors arise as a result of some act of omission on the part of the
person responsible for the maintenance of books of account. It refers to the omission of a transaction
at the time of recording in subsidiary books or posting to ledger. Omission may be complete or
partial.
(a) Complete Omission: When any particular transaction has not at all been entered in the journal
or in the book of original entry, it cannot be posted into the ledger at all and complete error of
omission will occur. The trial balance is not affected at all by such errors e.g. failure to record
completely credit sales in sales book.
(b) Partial Omission: This means that the transaction is entered in the subsidiary book, but is not
posted to the ledger, such errors affect the agreement of trial balance e.g. omitting to post the
discount columns of the cash book.
2. Errors of Commission: These errors arise due to some positive act of commission on the part of the
person responsible for the maintenance of the books of account. These mistakes are committed
because of ignorance, lack of proper accounting knowledge and carelessness of the accounting staff.
They are committed while recording transactions. These errors may or may not affect the agreement
of trial balance.
Lesson 3  Accounting Process-II 61
For example:
– Mistake in transferring the balance of an account to the trial balance or omitting to write the
balance of an account in the trial balance.
– Mistake in balancing an account.
– Mistake in posting in so far as the amount is wrongly written. A common mistake, for example, is to
transpose figures - to write ` 115 instead of ` 151. This will cause a mistake of ` 36 and a
corresponding difference in the trial balance. The total of all the figures of the difference thus
caused is 9 or multiples of 9. (Students should note that in case of transposition of figures, (i) the
difference in trial balance will always be divisible by 9, (ii) the total of all the figures of the
difference will also be divisible 9. Suppose, you have written 67895 instead of 95678 or in any
other way, provided the figures are the same, the difference 27783 (i.e. 95678 - 67895) is divisible
by 9. Hence, if the difference in trial balance is divisible by 9, it may be assumed that there may be
transposition of figures.
– Making an entry on the wrong side. For example, if instead of debiting an account with ` 500 it is
credited with the amount, the debit balance, in the trial balance will be shorter by ` 1,000. A
mistake on the wrong side causes the difference to be double of the amount involved.
– A mistake in the casting of subsidiary books. A mistake in the total of the Purchases Book will
affect the Purchases Account, a mistake in the total of the Sales Book will mean a corresponding
mistake in the Sales Account. Similarly, total of the Returns Book, if wrongly done, would mean
that the Returns Inwards Account or Returns Outwards Account will be posted with wrong amount.
These mistakes will be reflected in the trial balance.
It must be noted that a mistake in the totals of the subsidiary books will not affect the correctness of
the various personal accounts of customers and creditors.
3. Compensating Errors: They are group of errors, the total effect of which is not reflected in the trial
balance. These errors are neutralizing in nature, hence one error is compensated by other error or
errors of opposite nature. For example, an extra debit in purchase account may be compensated by an
extra credit in sales account. Thus, compensating errors do not affect the agreement of trial balance.
B. Errors of Principle
Generally errors involving violation of accounting principles are termed as errors of principle. These errors
arise because of the failure to differentiate between capital expenditure and revenue expenditure and capital
receipts and revenue receipts. The distinction between capital and revenue is of relevance because any
incorrect adjustment or allocation in this respect would falsify the final results shown by the profit and loss
account and the balance sheet. These errors do not affect the agreement of trial balance. For
example, debiting purchase of furniture to office expenses account, crediting sale of furniture to sales
account, etc.
ERRORS DISCLOSED BY TRIAL BALANCE

Trial balance in general, discloses any error which affects one side of the account. These errors are disclosed
by the trial balance as both sides of trial balance do not agree.
Examples:
 – Error in casting subsidiary books.
– Error in carrying forward the total of one page the next page.
– Error in totaling the trial balance.
– Error in posting from book of subsidiary record to ledger.
– Error in balancing an account.
– Error in preparation of debtors’ schedule and creditors’ schedule.
– Error in carrying a balance of an account to the trial balance.
62 FP-FA&A
– Omission of casting etc.
– Posting an amount on the wrong side of a ledger account.
– Double posting to an account.
ERRORS NOT DISCLOSED BY TRIAL BALANCE

The agreement of a trial balance is only a check of arithmetical accuracy of the ledger but it is not a
conclusive proof as to the absolute accuracy of the books. The following errors will not effect the agreement
of trial balance and hence are not disclosed by the trial balance:
(i) Errors of Complete Omission: If a transaction was not, the agreement of the trial balance will not be
affected. For example, if goods worth ` 2,000 have been received back from a customer and the entry
has not at all been made in the Returns Inwards Book then, the Customer’s Account will not be
credited and the Returns Inwards Account also will not be debited. Thus, there will be no debit and
credit, and the trial balance will agree even if there is a mistake.
(ii) Errors of Commission: If a transaction was debited or credited to a wrong account with correct amount and
on the correct side in the books of original entry or in the ledger, trial balance will remain unaffected.
(iii) Compensatory Errors: These are errors which are neutralized by the commission of another error or
errors of the same magnitude but of opposite nature, which makes the trial balance to agree. For
instance, the overcasting of a sales book (say) ` 3,000 and thereby the excess credit to the sales
account, will be arithmetically off-set either by over debiting or under crediting a single account or
several accounts with a total sum of ` 3,000.
(iv) Errors of Principle: Errors of principle like furniture purchased debited to purchase account, building
sold credited to sales account, commission paid for purchase of land debited to commission account
etc. will not affect trial balance as they are related to allocation of amount received or spent between
revenue & capital. There will be no effect on trial balance because double entry will be passed and one
account will be debited & other credited. So the debit & credit side of trial balance will definitely agree.
(v) Recording Wrong Amount in Subsidiary Book: If a wrong amount is written in subsidiary books, then
entries on both the debit and credit sides will be on the basis of the wrong amount and then the trial
balance will naturally agree.
(vi) Errors of Duplication: This is the error of entering a transaction more than once in the subsidiary books.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Classify the following errors:
(i) Credit sale of ` 1,500 to P was correctly recorded in sales book but
not posted to P’s Account.
(ii) Purchases book was undercast by ` 100.
(iii) Cash paid to Brij Behari, ` 500 was debited to Bankey Behari as `
5,000.
(iv) Purchase of furniture ` 3,000 was recorded in Purchases Book.
(v) Whitewashing charges ` 500 were debited to Buildings Account.
[Ans. Errors of Omission = (i), Errors of Commission
= (ii), (iii), Errors of Principle = (iv), (v)]
2. Which of the above mentioned errors will not affect the trial balance?
[Ans. (iv) and (v)]
3. What will be effect of the above mentioned errors on the profits for the
year?
[Ans. Increase in profit by ` 2,400]
STEPS TO LOCATE ERRORS
Whenever there is a difference in the trial balance even by the smallest amount, the mistakes involved must be
located. A small amount may be the net result of a number of mistakes and it is not safe to ignore a difference
in trial balance howsoever, small it may be. The following steps are suggested to find out errors:
(i) Total the debit and credit columns of the trial balance again. If one amount has been shown for a
group of accounts (for example, in place of all customers individually, only one amount against
“Sundry Debtors” may be shown), recheck the total of the list of such accounts.
(ii) See that the balances of all accounts including the cash, bank balances have been written in the trial
balance.
(iii) See that there is no mistake in the balancing of the various accounts.
(iv) Find out the exact difference in the trial balance. Look for such accounts which show the same amount. It
is possible that the balance of the particular account has been omitted from the trial balance. Accounts
showing a balance equal to half the difference should also be checked; the amount may have been
written on the wrong side of the trial balance
(v) Recheck the totals of the subsidiary books.
(vi) If the difference is a large one, compare the figures with the trial balance of the corresponding date of
the previous year. Any account showing a rather large difference over the figures of the corresponding
trial balance of the previous year should be rechecked.
(vii) Posting of all the amounts corresponding to the difference or half the difference should be checked.
(viii) If the difference is still not traced, posting of the accounts will have to be checked. For this, it is better,
first of all, to check the posting of the totals of subsidiary books such as sales book, purchases book,
returns books etc. The subsidiary books should then be gone through to see if any items have not
been posted. It should also be checked whether the various accounts have been opened with correct
balances. Nominal accounts should be checked first, then real accounts and then personal accounts
should be taken up.
RECTIFICATION OF ERRORS
It is better to rectify errors always through journal entries. However, if an error is located immediately after it
has been entered, the accountant may neatly cross out the wrong amount and initial the rectification. There
should not be any overwriting. If however, some time has elapsed between the commission of the error and
its detection, the error should be rectified by making suitable journal entries only.
Need for Rectification of Errors:

– To present the correct accounting information.
– To show the accurate profit or loss made during the year by preparing the profit & loss account.
– To disclose the true financial position by preparing the balance sheet.
Rectification before the Preparation of Trial Balance

When errors are detected before the preparation of the trial balance, it should be assessed whether they are
one sided errors or two sided errors. According to the nature of errors, different steps are taken for their
rectification.
(a) Errors Affecting One Account (One Sided Errors): Errors affecting one account may occur due to the
following reasons:
(i) Wrong casting.
64 FP-FA&A
(ii) Wrong balancing.
(iii) Wrong posting.
(iv) Wrong carry forward.
(v) Forgetting to show an amount in the trial balance.
For rectification of these type of errors, no journal entry is required to be passed, only the relevant account, in
the ledger is to be debited (for short debit or excess credit) or is to be credited (for short credit or excess
debit) according to the situation.
While rectifying one sided errors it should be remembered that the double entry aspect of the rectifying entry
will not be complete. For example, if P’s account has been debited with ` 365 for credit sales of ` 356
correctly recorded in sales book, then the rectifying entry will be ` 9 made on the credit side of P’s account
only. No account will be debited with this amount of ` 9.
Illustration 1:
Rectify the following:

(i) An entry for the goods sold to Madhav for ` 1,020 was posted to his account as ` 1,200.
(ii) ` 1,000 being the monthly total of discount allowed to customers was credited to discount account in
the ledger.
(iii) ` 2,750 received from Sohan was credited to Mohan as ` 3,750.
(iv) Total of Purchases Book was ` 10,000 short.
(v) Sales of old furniture for ` 1,750 to Old Wares Stores was recorded in sales book. Book value of the
furniture was ` 2,500.
Solution:
(i) Credit Madhav with ` 180 saying “By Excess debit for sales on .....` 180".
(ii) Debit the Discount Account with ` 2,000 saying “To Rectification of wrong credit of ` 1,000 for discount
allowed.... ` 2,000.
(iii) Credit Sohan with ` 2,750 and debit Mohan with ` 3,750.
(iv) Debit Purchases Account with ` 10,000 saying “To Short total of Purchases Book..... ` 10,000".
(v) Debit Sales Account with ` 1,750 and Loss on Sale of Furniture Account with ` 750 and credit
Furniture Account with ` 2,500.
(b) Errors Affecting Two or More Accounts. (Two Sided Errors): Errors which affect two or more accounts
are as follows:
(i) Errors of complete omission.
(ii) Errors in recording in the subsidiary books.
(iii) Errors in posting to wrong account with or without wrong amount.
(iv) Errors of principle.
For rectification of these types of errors, following steps may be taken:
(i) Write down in the rough sheet, the correct entry necessary for recording the transaction.
(ii) Write down in the rough sheet the entry that has actually been passed.
(iii) Pass in the journal the requisite entry to arrive at the correct entry of step (i) and cancel the entry of
step (ii).
Example: A purchase of ` 5,000 from Rajesh entered in the purchases day book as ` 500.
The rectification of this error shall involve:
` `
(a) Purchases A/c Dr. 5,000 (correct entry)
To Rajesh 5,000
(b) Purchases A/c Dr. 500 (entry passed)
To Rajesh 500
(c) The rectifying entry in the journal will be:
Purchases A/c Dr. 4,500 (rectifying entry)
To Rajesh 4,500
Illustration 2:
Pass journal entries necessary to rectify the following errors:
1. An amount of ` 2,000 withdrawn by the proprietor for his personal use has been debited to Trade
Expenses Account.
2. A purchase of goods from Nathan amounting to ` 3,000 has been wrongly entered in the Sales
Book.
3. A credit sale of ` 1,000 to Santhanam has been wrongly passed through the Purchases Book.
4. ` 1,500 received from Malhotra have been credited to Mehrotra.
5. ` 3,750 paid on account of salary to the cashier Dhawan stands debited to his personal account.
6. A contractor’s bill for extension of premises amounting to ` 27,500 has been debited to Building
Repairs Account.
7. On 25th March, goods of the value of ` 5,000 were returned by Akash Deep and were taken into stock
but the returns were entered in the books under date 3rd April, i.e.; after the expiration of the financial
st
year on 31 March.
8. A bill of ` 2,000 for old office furniture sold to Sethi was entered in the Sales Day Book.
9. An amount of ` 800 received on account of interest was credited to Commission Account.

66 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Journal Entries
Date Particulars L.F. Dr. (`) Cr. (`)
1. Proprietor’s Drawings Account Dr. 2,000
To Trade Expenses Account 2,000

(For the amount withdrawn for personal use wrongly
charged to the trade expenses account)
2. (a) Sales Account Dr. 3,000
To Nathan 3,000
(Being the cancellation of the entry passed through
the Sales Book)
(b) Purchases Account Dr. 3,000
To Nathan 3,000
(To record the credit purchases from Nathan)
Alternatively: It is better to pass a combine entry.
Sales Account Dr. 3,000
Purchases Account Dr. 3,000
To Nathan 6,000
(For cancellation of entry passed through the Sales
Book and record the credit purchases from Nathan)
3. Santhanam Dr. 2,000
To Purchases Account 1,000
(Rectification of the mistake caused by entering sale for
` 1,000 to Santhanam in the Purchases Book)
4. Mehrotra Dr. 1,500
To Malhotra 1,500
(Being the rectification of wrong credit given to
Mehrotra instead of Malhotra)
5. Salaries Account Dr. 3,750
To Dhawan 3,750
(Being the adjustment of salary wrongly debited to
the personal account of the cashier)
6. Building Account Dr. 27,500
To Building Repairs Account 27,500
(Being the adjustment of amount wrongly debited to
the builder account for building repairs)
7. Returns Inwards Account Dr. 5,000
To Akash Deep 5,000
(Being the entry necessary to record the return
inwards within the financial year)
Akash Deep Dr. 5,000
To Return Inwards Account 5,000
8. Sales Account Dr. 2,000
To Office Furniture Account 2,000
(Being the sale of old office furniture wrongly passed
through the sales book, error of principle)
9. Commission Account Dr. 800
To Interest Account 800
(Being the adjustment of amount wrongly credited
to the commission account for interest received)
rd
Note :- In entry 7, the entry passed to record the above returns made in 3 July, will have to be canceled by
passing a reverse entry under the same date.
Rectification after the Preparation of Trial Balance but before the Preparation of Final Accounts
(a) Errors Affecting One Account (One Sided Errors): Every one sided error detected after the preparation
of trial balance will be rectified opening suspense account.
Suspense Account:
When a trial balance does not agree efforts are made to locate errors and rectify them. However, if reason for
disagreement of trail balance cannot be found, a new account called suspense account is opened in order to
give trial balance an appearance of agreement. Then final accounts are prepared. Debit balance in suspense
account is shown on assets side while credit balance is recorded on liabilities side.
A suspense account is opened in two instances i.e.
(i) To balance a disagreed trial balance – In the trial balance, if the debits are short the difference has to
be debited to Suspense Account and if the credits are short, Suspense Account has to be credited to
make trial balance agree apparently. Thus trial balance is tallied and final accounts are prepared. Later
when errors are detected, the rectifying entries are passed. The suspense account will show balance
until all entries are corrected. When all errors affecting the trial balance have been re ctified by means
of journal entries, the Suspense Account will show no balance.
(ii) To post uncertain items: Sometimes, an item cannot be posted to the correct account because of lack
of information. In this case, all the errors are rectified by means of journal entries opening suspense
account. Thus, suspense account is opened and is given the debit or credit as the case may be. When
debit is short of credit, the difference is debited to Suspense Account making the debits equal to the
credits. Similarly, if in a rectifying journal entry, credit is otherwise short of debit, the difference is
credited to Suspense Account. Later when errors are detected, the rectifying entries are passed.
For instance, you received a remittance of ` 2,000, but you may not know who has sent the amount.
Therefore, for the time being you may pass the following entry:
Cash Account Dr. 2,000
To Suspense Account 2,000
(Being remittance received from unknown person)
Later when you get the information that Mr. Ram Singh had sent the amount, then pass the following
entry:
Suspense Account Dr. 2,000
To Ram Singh 2,000
(Being credit given for the sender for remittance
which had been credited previously to suspense
account)
Illustration 3:
Pass journal entries to rectify the following errors assuming the existence of the necessary Suspense Account:
(i) Goods bought from Mukesh amounting to ` 5,500 was posted to the credit of his account as ` 5,000.
(ii) Sales book was overcast by ` 10,000.
(iii) While carrying forward the total of one page of the Purchases Book to the next, the amount of ` 12,350
was written as ` 13,250.
(iv) Cartage ` 780 paid on machinery newly acquired was debited to carriage inward account.
(v) Purchases returns to Shivalker Bros. ` 3,100 were not recorded in purchases returns book but the
account of Shivalker Bros. was duly debited with the amount.
68 FP-FA&A
(vi) Drawings of goods costing 300 were not recorded in the books of account.
(vii) Whitewashing expenses, ` 670 were posted from cash book to the nominal account as ` 760.
Also prepare Suspense Account starting it with debit balance of ` 320. Have you any comments to offer on
Suspense Account?
Solution:
Journal
Date Particulars LF Dr. Cr.
(i) Suspense Account Dr. 500
To Mukesh 500
(For rectification of short credit to Mukesh)
(ii) Sales Account Dr. 10,000
(For rectification of wrong total of Sales Book)
(iii) Suspense Account Dr. 900
(For rectification of wrong carry forward of
total from one page to another in the
Purchases Book)
(iv) Machinery Account Dr. 780
To Carriage Inwards Account 780
(For rectification of wrong debit to carriage
inwards for cartage paid on newly acquired
machinery)
(v) Suspense Account Dr. 3,100
To Purchases Returns Account 3,100
(For rectification of omission of credit to
Purchases Returns Account for goods
returned to Shivalkar Bros.)
(vi) Drawings Account Dr. 300
(For rectification of omission of drawings of
goods costing ` 300 by the proprietor)
(vii) Suspense Account Dr. 90
To Whitewashing Account 90
(For rectification of excess debit to
whitewashing account)
LEDGER
Dr. Suspense Account Cr.
Particulars ` Particulars `
To Differnce in trial balance 320 (ii) By Sales Account 10,000
(i) To Mukesh 500
(iii) To Purchases Account 900
(v) To Purchases Returns 3,100
(vii) To Whitewashing Account 90
To Balance c/d 5,090 _____
10,000 10,000
Comment: As suspense account still shows a balance, it means all errors have not yet been rectified.
(b) Errors Affecting Two or More Accounts (Two Sided Errors): For rectification of two sided errors, the
following steps may be taken:
(i) Write down on the rough sheet, the correct entry necessary for recording the transaction.
(ii) Write down on the rough sheet, the entry that has actually been passed.
(iii) Pass in the journal, the requisite entry to arrive at the correct entry of step (i) and to cancel entry of
step (ii).
Example: Sale of old furniture for ` 3,000 has been credited to sales account. The rectification
of this error shall call for:
(a) Cash Account Dr. 3,000 (correct entry)
To Furniture Account 3,000
(b) Cash Account Dr. 3,000 (entry passed)
(c) The rectifying journal entry will be:
Sales Account Dr. 3,000 (rectifying entry)
Illustration 4:
Rectify the following errors by passing necessary journal entries:
(i) Goods purchased for proprietor’s use for ` 2,500 was debited to purchases account;
(ii) ` 2,750 received from Hari Chand was debited to his account;
(iii) Returns inward book was short totalled by ` 650.
(iv) Interest received on deposit ` 500 had been debited in the cash book, but had not been credited to
interest account.
(v) ` 2,000 being purchases returned were posted to the debit of purchases account.
(vi) Interest on overdraft ` 1,200 was not posted to the ledger from the cash book.
(vii) An invoice for the purchase of machinery costing ` 10,000 was erroneously passed again and entered
into the books.
70 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Rectifying Journal Entries
(i) Drawings A/c Dr. 2,500
To Purchases A/c 2,500
(Being goods purchased for personal use was
wrongly debited to purchases account, error
now rectified)
(ii) Suspense A/c Dr. 5,500
To Hari Chand 5,500
(Being cash received from Hari Chand of
` 2,750 was wrongly debited to his account,
now rectified)
(iii) Returns Inward A/c Dr. 650
To Suspense A/c 650
(Being returns inward book was under-cast
by ` 650, now rectified)
(iv) Suspense A/c Dr. 500
To Interest Received A/c 500
(Being interest received had not been credited,
error now rectified)
(v) Suspense A/c Dr. 4,000
To Purchases Returns A/c 2,000
(Being purchases returns wrongly debited to
purchases account, now rectified)
(vi) Interest A/c Dr. 1,200
To Suspense A/c 1,200
(Being interest on overdraft not posted to the
ledger from cash book, error now rectified)
(vii) Supplier’s A/c Dr. 10,000
To Machinery A/c 10,000
(Being invoice for purchase of machinery
recorded in books twice, now reversed)
Rectification in the Next Accounting Period

If errors are identified in the next accounting period, they are rectified as soon as they are detected. The
method of rectification of errors in the next accounting period depends upon the fact whether the account
affected was part of the trading and profit & loss account. If the account affected is not part of the trading and
profit & loss account, the rectification is done in usual manner. However, if error involves an account having
its impact on the profit, a Profit & Loss Adjustment Account is opened. While rectifying errors, all nominal
accounts are replaced by Profit & Loss Adjustment Account. Profit and Loss Adjustment Account is
transferred to capital account of the sole proprietor or partner’s capital accounts in the case of partnership. In
the case of a joint stock company the account is transferred to Profit and Loss Appropriation Account.
Examples:
(a) Wages of ` 2,500 paid for the installation of machinery charged to wages account. In
the same accounting period, the rectifying entry would be:
` `
Machinery Account Dr. 2,500
To Wages Account 2,500
But if the final accounts have been prepared, the wages account has been closed by
transfer to trading account, so the rectifying entry will be:
Machinery Account Dr. 2,500
To Profit and Loss Adjustment Account 2,500
(b) Salaries paid ` 3,500 posted to wages account in the ledger. In the same accounting
period, the rectifying entry would be:
Salaries Account Dr. 3,500
To Wages Account 3,500
But if the final accounts have been prepared, no entry is required to be passed
because both the accounts are nominal accounts and the profit has not been affected
by the error.
Ascertainment of Correct Profit for the previous period

If in an accounting period, errors affecting nominal accounts take place and they are not detected and
rectified before the close of the books of accounts for the period concerned, the profit as revealed by the
Profit and Loss Account for the period will be incorrect. The correct profit for the period can be ascertained in
the next accounting period after all such errors have been detected and rectified. If the Profit and Loss
Adjustment Account reveals a profit, it should be added to the profit, as revealed by the Profit and Loss
Account of the previous period to know the correct profit for the previous period. On the other hand, if Profit
and Loss Adjustment Account shows a loss, it would be deducted from the profit of the previous accounting
period, to ascertain the correct profit for the previous year.
Illustration 5:
The trial balance of M. Mukherjee did not tally on 31.3.2011. The following errors were detected afterwards.
Pass the necessary journal entries to rectify the errors and find out the difference in trial balance assuming
that all errors have been rectified.
(i) A sum of ` 600 received from Mathur on 31.3.2011 was entered in the cash book on 2.4.2011.
(ii) Returns inwards book was undercast by ` 300.
(iii) The purchase of typewriter for ` 25,000 was entered in the purchases day book.
(iv) Wages of workmen engaged in the construction of building amounting ` 35,000 were debited to wages
account.
(v) A purchase of ` 2,671 had been posted to the debit of supplier’s account as ` 2,617.
(vi) Goods amounting to ` 1,000 had been returned by Raju and were taken into stock, but no entry was
passed in the books for the transaction.
72 FP-FA&A
(vii) ` 24,000 paid for purchase of T.V. for proprietors own use had been charged to miscellaneous expense
account.
(viii) A sale of ` 600 to Sethi was credited to his account with ` 60.
(ix) A sale of ` 2,000 has been passed through the purchases journal.
(x) ` 75 paid for repairs to furniture had been entered in the total column of petty cash book, but not entered
in the appropriate analysis column, the total of which has been posted.
Solution:
(`) (`)
(i) Cash A/c Dr. 600
To Mathur 600
(Being cash received was not entered in the
cash book, error now rectified)
(ii) Returns Inwards A/c Dr. 300
To Suspense A/c 300
(Being returns inward book was undercast by
` 300, error now rectified)
(iii) Typewriter A/c Dr. 25,000
(Being typewriter purchased was wrongly passed
through purchases day book, error now rectified)
(iv) Building A/c Dr. 35,000
To Wages A/c 35,000
(Being wages paid for construction of building
was wrongly debited to wages account, error now
rectified)
(v) Suspense A/c Dr. 1,288
To Supplier’s A/c (` 2,671 + ` 2,617) 1,288
(Being purchase of ` 2,671 from supplier wrongly
debited to his account by ` 2,617, error now
rectified)
(vi) Returns Inwards A/c Dr. 1,000
To Raju 1,000
(Being goods returned by Raju not entered in
the books of account, now entered)
(vii) Drawings A/c Dr. 14,000
To Miscellaneous Expenses A/c 14,000
(Being purchase of T.V. for owner earlier
charged to miscellaneous expenses account,
error now rectified)
(`) (`)
(viii) Sethi (600 + 60) Dr. 660
To Suspense A/c 660
(Being goods of ` 600 sold to Sethi wrongly
credited to his account for ` 60, error now
rectified)
(ix) Suspense A/c Dr. 4,000
To Sales A/c 2,000
(Being a sale of ` 2,000 wrongly passed through
purchases journal, error now rectified)
(x) Repairs to Furniture Ae/c Dr. 75
To Suspense A/c 75
(Being repairs for furniture earlier posted in
the general ledger from petty cash book, error
now rectified)
Dr. Suspense A/c Cr.
Date Particulars Amount Date Particulars Amount

` `
To Supplier’s A/c 1,288 By Difference in trial balance 4,253

To Purchases A/c 2,000 By Returns Inwards A/c 300
To Sales A/c 2,000 By Sethi 660
By Repairs to Furniture A/c
_____ ___75
5,288 5,288
Illustration 6:
While closing his books of account, Om Prakash finds that the Trial Balance on that date, i.e. 31st March,
2011 is out by ` 907 excess debit. He places the difference in a newly opened Suspense Account and
prepares his final accounts which reveal a profit of ` 14,780 for the year ended 31st March, 2011. In April
2011, the following errors were detected in the accounts for the year 2010-11;
(i) Purchases book was undercast by ` 1,000.
(ii) Cash received from Jamna Das ` 687 was posted to the debit of Janki Das as ` 678.
(iii) Discount received ` 7,630 and discount allowed ` 6,873, the totals of the appropriate columns in cash
book were not posted to the ledger.
(iv) Schedule of debtors was totalled ` 16,280 instead of ` 16,380. Om Prakash maintains a provision for
bad debts @ 5%.
(v) Bank charges and interest, ` 115 remained unposted to the debit side of the nominal account.
(vi) Depreciation on furniture ` 2,970 was wrongly recorded as ` 2,790.
74 FP-FA&A
Pass journal entries to rectify the above mentioned errors, prepare Suspense Account and Profit and Loss
Adjustment Account and ascertain the correct amount of profit for the year ending 31st March, 2011.
Solution:
Journal
Date Particulars LF Dr. Cr.
(i) Profit and Loss Adjustment Account Dr. 1,000
(Being rectification of error caused by undercasting of
Purchases Book for the year 2010-11 by ` 1,000)
(ii) Suspense Account Dr. 1,365
To Jamna Dass 687
To Janki Dass 678
(Being rectification of wrong debit of
` 678 to Janki Das and omission of credit of ` 687
to Jamna Das, in 2010-11 books)
(iii) Suspense Account Dr. 757
To Profit and Loss Adjustment Account 757
(Being rectification of omission of posting of
discount received `7,630 and discount allowed
` 6,873 in 2010-11)
(iv) Schedule of Debtors Account Dr. 100
Profit and Loss Adjustment Account Dr. 5
To Suspense Account 100
To Provision for Bad Debts Account 5
(Being rectification of schedule of debtors and
also rectification of Provision for bad debts
account due to wrong basis on which the amount
of bad debts was calculated in 2010-11)
(v) Profit and Loss Adjustment Account Dr. 115
To Suspense Account 115
(Rectification of omission of posting to bank
charges and interest)
(vi) Profit and Loss Adjustment Account Dr. 180
To Furniture Account 180
(Being rectification of wrong entry for depreciation
on furniture)
Ledger Accounts
` `
2011 2011
March March By Difference in Trial
31 To Balance c/fd ___907 31 Balance ___907
2011 2011
April 1 To Jamna Das 687 April 1 By Balance b/fd 907
By P & L Adj. A/c 1,000
To Janaki Das 678 By Schedule of
Debtors 100
To P & L Adjustment 757 By P & L Adj. A/c 115
_______ ______
___2,122 _2,122
Dr. Profit and Loss Adjustment Account Cr.

(i) To Suspense Account 1,000 (iii) By Suspense Account 757
(iv) ” Provision for Bad Debts 5 By Loss transferred to
(v) ” Suspense Account 115 Capital A/c 543
(vi) ” Furniture Account __180 _____
1,300 1,300
Actual profit for the year ended 31st March, 2011 = ` 14,780 – ` 543 = `14,237.
Illustration 7:
The books of account of Bipin Lal for the year ended 31st March, 2011, were closed with a difference in the
trial balance carried forward. Subsequently the following errors were detected:
(i) ` 1,500 being the total of discount column on the credit side of the cash book was not posted in the
general ledger.
(ii) Closing stock was overstated by ` 9,000 being casting error in the schedule of inventory.
(iii) Returns outwards book was undercast by ` 150.
(iv) A credit sale of ` 870 was wrongly posted as 780 to the customer’s account in the sales ledger.
(v) ` 6,000 being the cost of purchase of office furniture was entered in the purchases book.
Pass rectification entries, prepare suspense account, and find the effect of correction on profit for the year
ended 31st March, 2011.
76 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Rectification Entries
L.F. Dr. Cr.
Date Particulars Amount Amount
(i) Suspense A/c Dr. 1,500
To Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c 1,500
(Being discount received not posted from cash
book to ledger, error now rectified)
(ii) Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c Dr. 9,000
To Stock in Trade 9,000
(Being closing was overcast by ` 9,000, error now rectified)
(iii) Suspense A/c Dr. 150
To Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c 150
(Being returns outwards undercast, error now rectified)
(iv) Customer’s Dr. 90
To Suspense A/c 90
(Being credit sale of ` 870 wrongly posted as 780,
to the customer’s account, error now rectified)
(v) Office Furniture A/c Dr. 6,000
To Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c 6,000
(Being purchase of office furniture wrongly entered
in purchases account, error now rectified)

Particulars Amount Particulars Amount
(`) (`)
To Profit and Loss By Balance b/fd
Adjustment A/c 1,500 (Balancing figure) 1,560
To Profit and Loss By Customer’s A/c 90
Adjustment A/c 150 ____
1,650 1,650
Particulars Amount Particulars Amount
(`) (`)
To Stock in Trade 9,000 By Suspense A/c 1,500
By Suspense A/c 150
By Office furniture A/c 6,000
By Loss transferred to
_____ Capital A/c 1,350
9,000 9,000
Illustration 8:
On 31st March 2011, an accountant of a sole proprietorship concern could not agree his trial balance. He put
the difference in a newly opened suspense account and closed the books of account for the year. In the
subsequent accounting year, the following errors in the books for the year 2010-11 were located:
(i) ` 8,000 paid for purchase of office furniture was posted to the purchases account.
(ii) The sales book was overcast by ` 100.
(iii) Wages paid for installation of machinery, ` 2,750 had been debited to wages account as ` 5,250
(iv) A cheque for ` 7,330 was received from Rao after allowing him a discount of ` 70. It was endorsed in
favour of Sen in full settlement of ` 7,500. The cheque was dishonoured, but no entry for dishonour
was passed in the books.
Pass journal entries to rectify the above-mentioned errors. Also prepare the suspense account and profit and
loss account assuming that all the errors have been located.
Solution:
Date Particulars L.F. Dr.(`) Cr.( `)
(i) Office Furniture A/c Dr. 8,000
To Profit & Loss Adjustment A/c 8,000
(Being the cost of office furniture purchased
wrongly debited to purchases account, error now
rectified)
(ii) Profit & Loss Adjustment A/c Dr. 100
To Suspense A/c 100
(Being rectification of error caused by over-casting
of sales books by `100)
(iii) Machinery A/c Dr. 2,750
Suspense A/c Dr. 2,500
To Profit & Loss Adjustment A/c 5,250
(Wages ` 2,750 paid for the erection of machinery
debited to wages account as ` 5,250, error now
rectified)
(iv) Rao (`7,330 + 70) Dr. 7,400
Profit & Loss Adjustment A/c Dr. 100
To Sen 7,500
(Being cheque received from Rao for ` 7,330 after
allowing ` 70 discount and endorsed to Sen
against ` 7,500 dishonoured; no entry made earlier
for dishonour, error now rectified)
Dr. Suspense A/c Cr.

To Profit & Loss Adjustment A/c 2,500 By Balance b/fd (difference in Trial
Balance—balancing figure) 2,400
_____ By Profit & Loss Adjustment A/c 100
2,500 2,500
78 FP-FA&A
Profit & Loss Adjustment A/c
To Suspense A/c 100 By Office Furniture A/c 8,000
To Sen 100 By Machinery A/c 2,750
To Capital A/c By Suspense A/c 2,500
(Transfer of profit) 13,050 _____
13,250 13,250
LESSON ROUND UP
 – Accounting errors can be classified into errors of principle and clerical errors.
– Clerical errors are further classified into errors of omission, errors of commission and compensating
errors.
– Some errors affect the agreement of trial balance and are disclosed by the trial balance i.e. errors in
casting, carry forward, totaling, balancing of accounts etc.
– Some errors do not affect the agreement of the trial balance and hence are not disclosed such as
errors of complete omission, errors of commission, compensating errors and errors of principles.
– Most of the errors are rectified by passing journal entries.
– The difference in trial balance is transferred to Suspense Account if the errors are not identified.
– Profit & Loss Adjustment Account is opened to rectify the entries in the next according period which
involves nominal accounts.
GLOSSARY
Accounting Mistakes committed by persons recording and keeping accounts.
Errors
Errors of These errors arise because of the failure to differentiate between capital expenditure
Principle and revenue expenditure and capital receipts and revenue receipts.
Errors of These errors arise due to some positive act of commission on the part of the person
Commission responsible for the maintenance of the books of account.
Errors of These errors arise as a result of some act of omission on the part of the person
Omission responsible for the maintenance of books of account.
Compensating The total effect of these errors is not reflected in the trial balance.
Errors
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
1. On 31st March, 2011 the accountant of a firm, while preparing the final accounts for the year, finds
that the trial balance is out by ` 1,000 excess credit. He places the amount in Suspense Account. In
April 2011, the under mentioned errors are discovered:
(i) The opening balance of furniture and fittings account for 2010-11 was written as ` 6,700
instead of ` 7,600. The firm depreciates furniture and fittings @ 10% p.a. on written down
value basis.
(ii) Sales Book for February 2011 was found overcast by `100.
(iii) A sum of ` 575 was received from I.N. Chakarvaty but the amount was wrongly credited to I.N.
Chaturvedy.
(iv) Cartage amounting to ` 125 paid in respect of new machinery purchased on 29th March was
debited to carriage inwards account.
(v) Goods invoiced at ` 130 were returned by Neelam Stores but by mistake an entry was passed
in Returns Outwards Book.
Pass journal entries necessary to rectify the errors without affecting the profit for 2011-12. Also
show Suspense Account.
2. How would you rectify the following errors?
(i) A sale of goods of the value of ` 2,500 to R. Roberts has been wrongly debited to Robertson
& Co.
(ii) A purchase of ` 1,500 from S. Narayan instead of being credited to him from the Invoice Book,
has been wrongly debited to him.
(iii) Cash ` 750 received from P.Basu and entered on the receipt side of the cash book has not
been posted.
(iv) A payment of ` 250 made to J. Jones for cash purchase of goods from him stands debited to
his account.
(v) A payment of ` 3,000 in respect of salary has been posted twice to salaries account.
(vi) An amount of ` 4,500 drawn by the proprietor for his personal use stands debited to general
expenses account.
(vii) The total of the discount column on the debit side of the cash book a month has been added
short by ` 200.
(viii) ` 400 relating to purchase of office stationery has been wrongly debited to the personal
account of the proprietor.
(ix) A credit purchase of ` 750 from Ramdas & Co. stands wrongly credited to Ramji & Co.
3. After getting an agreed trial balance, the account of M/s Senco brother drafted the trading and profit
loss a/c and the balance sheet. The following errors were then detected by the auditors:
(a) ` 2,500 received from the insurance company in full payment of claim for loss of stock in
transist was deposited by the proprietor into his private bank account and was not recorded in
the business books.
(b) Goods purchased for ` 2,000 were included in stock, but the invoice was not entered in the
books for the period under review.
(c) There were compensating errors in the books i.e. (i) a payment of ` 300 as commission to a
sales agent had not been posted from the cash book; (ii) dividends received were undercast
by ` 100; (iii) purchases amounting to ` 190 were not posted to the account of the supplier
from purchases journal and (iv) debit side of a customer’s account in the sales ledger was
overcast by ` 10.
(d) Goods sold for ` 500 were returned by a customer, but no record of this return was made in
the books although the returned goods were included in the stock at their cost price, ` 380.
Show the journal entries and effect of these errors and summarise the alterations necessary in the
originally drafted statement of accounts.
4. A merchant, while balancing his books of account, finds that the trial balance shows ` 3,765 excess
credit. Being required to prepare the final accounts, he places the difference to a newly opened
suspense account, which he carries forward. In the next accounting year, he locates the following
errors:
(i) A sale for ` 4,000 has been passed through the purchases book. The customer’s account has,
however, been correctly debited.
(ii) A sum of ` 896 paid to Dwarka Prasad has been credited to Durga Prasad as ` 869.
(iii) Salary ` 1,500 paid to a peon has been debited to the peon’s personal account.
80 FP-FA&A
(iv) Schedule of debtors has been totalled ` 66,560 instead of ` 76,560. A provision for bad debts
@ 5% of the debtors has been created.
Draft journal entries necessary for rectifying the above-mentioned errors.
Prepare the suspense account and show the ultimate effect of the errors on the last year’s profit by
preparing profit and loss adjustment account.
Lesson 4
Accounting Process – III
(Capital and Revenue Items)
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Capital Expenditure The main purpose of accounting is to ascertain
– Revenue Expenditure and present the true results of the business in

terms of profit or loss during a particular accounting
– Difference between Capital and Revenue
Expenditure period. The profit or loss of a business can be
ascertained by matching business revenues
– Deferred Revenue Expenditure
against the cost of the same period. Therefore, a
– Comparison between Capital and Deferred clear understanding between capital and revenue
Revenue Expenditure
(expenditures and receipts) is necessary for the
– Capital and Revenue Receipts correct ascertainment of profit or loss as revenue
– Difference between Capital and Revenue items are included only in income statement and
Receipts capital items form part of balance sheet figures.
– Capital and Revenue Profits The distinction between the capital and revenue
transactions is done by analysing the basic nature
– Capital and Revenue Losses
of transactions. The classification depends upon
– Review Questions the recurringness of the transaction and the
– Contingent Assets relation of the transaction to an accounting period.
– Contingent Liability In this lesson, we will study in detail about basic

concept of capital and revenue receipts and
– Lesson Round Up
expenditure. Herein, we would also touch in brief
– Glossary
about the concept of contingent assets and
– Self-Test Questions liabilities of business.
There is no business like show business, but there are several businesses like accounting.
David Letterman
82 FP-FA&A
CAPITAL EXPENDITURE
Capital expenditure is that expenditure which results in acquisition of an asset or which results in an increase
in the earning capacity of a business. The benefit of such expenditure lasts for a long period of time.
Examples: Purchases of land, buildings, machinery, furniture, patents, etc. All these assets stay in business
and are used again and again. Other examples are money paid for goodwill (like the right to use the
established name of an outgoing firm) since it will attract the old firm’s customers and thus will result in higher
sales and profits; money spent to reduce working expenses like conversion of hand-driven machinery to
power-driven machinery and expenditure enabling a firm to produce a large quantity of goods. Expenditure
which does not result in an increase in capacity or in reduction of day-to-day expenses is not capital
expenditure, unless there is a tangible asset to show for it.
All sums spent up to the point an asset is ready for use should also be treated as capital expenditure.
Examples are: fees paid to lawyer for drawing a purchase deed of land, overhauling expenses of second
hand machinery, cartage paid for bringing machinery to the factory from supplier’s premises and money spent
to install a machinery; and even interest on loans taken to acquire fixed assets only for the period before the
asset becomes operational.
REVENUE EXPENDITURE
Expenses whose benefit expires within the year of expenditure and which are incurred to maintain the earning
capacity of existing assets are termed as revenue expenditure. Amounts paid for wages, salary, carriage of
goods, repairs, rent and interest, etc., are items of revenue expenditure. Depreciation on fixed assets is also a
revenue expenditure. To the extent the materials are used up, they will be revenue expenditure. Similarly,
cost of goods sold is revenue expenditure. Costs incurred to acquire an asset are capital but costs incurred to
keep them in working condition or to defend their ownership are revenue. Fee paid to a lawyer for checking
whether all the papers are in order before land is purchased is capital expenditure. But if later a suit is filed
against the purchaser, the legal costs will be of revenue type.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CAPITAL AND REVENUE EXPENDITURE

The following are the points of distinction between capital expenditure and revenue expenditure:
(i) Capital expenditure is incurred in acquiring or improving permanent assets which are not meant for
resale. But revenue expenditure is a routine expenditure incurred in the normal course of business and
includes cost of sales as also the upkeep of fixed assets etc.
(ii) Capital expenditure seeks to improve the earning capacity of the business whereas revenue
expenditure is incurred to maintain the earning capacity of the business.
(iii) Capital expenditure is normally a non-recurring outlay but revenue expenditure is usually a recurring
item.
(iv) Capital expenditure produces benefits over several years. Hence, only a small part is charged as
depreciation to income statement and the rest appears in the balance sheet. But revenue expenditure
is consumed within an accounting year and the entire amount is charged to the (current year’s) income
statement. Hence, it does not appear in the balance sheet. Deferred revenue expenditure is however
an exception to this rule.
DEFERRED REVENUE EXPENDITURE

There are certain expenses which may be in the nature of revenue but their benefit may not be consumed in
the year in which such expenditure has been incurred; rather the benefit may extend over a number of years.
All such expenditures are basically in the nature of revenue expenditure, eg. heavy advertising expenditure
incurred in introducing a new line or developing a new market. Charges of these expenses are deferred
because such expenses benefit more than one accounting period. The matching principle demands this. The
basis of charge is usually proportionate to the benefit consumed/reaped.
Lesson 4  Accounting Process-III 83
The practice which varies considerably is to write off the amount over the period of years in which the benefit
is expected to accrue say 3 to 5 years. If the expenditure can be ear-marked as being in respect of a specified
object, the expenditure should be written off during the life of that object. Example: Heavy advertising
expenses on a new product, accidental losses like loss arising from a fire or an earthquake; the loss may be
spread over a few years. The deferred revenue expenditure not yet written off is shown on the assets side of
the balance sheet.
Thus, deferred revenue expenditure is revenue in character but —
(i) the benefit of which is not exhausted in the same year, or
(ii) is applicable either wholly or in part of the future years, or
(iii) is accidental with heavy amount and it is not prudent to charge against the profit of one year.
The deferred revenue expenditure may be classified into the following three categories:
(i) Expenditure partly paid in advance, where a portion of the benefit has been derived within the
accounting period and the balance will be reaped in a number of future years. Therefore, the benefit to
be reaped in future is shown in the balance sheet as an asset e.g. special advertising expenditure for a
new product.
(ii) Expenditure in respect of service rendered which for any sound reason is considered as an asset or
more properly not considered to be allocable to the one accounting period e.g. cost of experiments,
discount on issue of debentures etc.
(iii) Amounts representing loss of an exceptional nature e.g. property confiscated in a foreign country, loss
on uninsured assets, etc.
COMPARISON BETWEEN CAPITAL AND DEFERRED REVENUE EXPENDITURE

The main feature of capital expenditure is that it results in a benefit which will accrue to the business enterprise
for a long time, say 10 or 15 years. Deferred revenue expenditure also results in a benefit which will accrue in
future period but generally for 3 to 5 years.
The capital expenditure or the resulting asset is usually capable of being reconverted into cash though may be
at a loss. This is not possible in the case of deferred revenue expenditure. At times, heavy loss such as loss
due to earthquake is treated as deferred revenue expenditure in the sense that they are written off over a
period of 3 to 5 years. Such a loss cannot be treated as a capital expenditure.
CAPITAL AND REVENUE RECEIPTS

Capital receipts comprise of payments or contributions into the business by the proprietor, partners or
shareholders towards the capital of the firm and also any sum received from debenture-holders, any loans
and the proceeds of sale of any fixed assets of a business enterprise.
Revenue receipts is the outcome of a firm’s activity in the accounting period, part of its rewards for offering
goods or services to the public e.g. sales, commission, fees received for services, interest on investment, etc.
Revenue receipts must be set off against the revenue expenses in order to calculate the profit or loss of the
business in an accounting period. Capital receipts and expenditure have no bearing on the profit or loss for the
accounting period. The distinction between capital receipts and revenue receipts can be drawn as follows:
DEFFERENCE BETWEEN CAPITAL RECEIPTS AND REVENUE RECEIPTS
Capital Receipts Revenue Receipts
(i) Amount realised by the sale of fixed assets or by (i) Amount realised by sale of goods or rendering
issue of shares or debentures is a capital receipt. services is always revenue receipt.
(ii) A receipt in substitution of a source of income is (ii) A receipt in substitution of an income is a

a capital receipt. revenue receipt.
84 FP-FA&A
(iii) Amount received for surrender of certain rights (iii) Amount received as compensation under an
under an agreement is a capital receipt, because agreement for the loss of future profits is a
a capital asset is being given up in the form of revenue receipt.
these rights.
(iv) Instead of lump sum payment if the payment is (iv) If an income is received in a lump sum it is a
received in installments, it is a capital receipt. revenue receipt.
(v) Amount realised from the sale of a capital asset (v) Amount realised from the sale of an asset kept
or investment is capital receipt. for sale is revenue receipt.
CAPITAL AND REVENUE PROFITS

While preparing the final accounts, distinction has to be made between capital profits and revenue profits.
Revenue profits are earned in the ordinary course of business. They appear in the profit and loss account and
are available for distribution as profit, or for creating reserves and funds, or for being used in the business.
However, capital profits are those which are earned as a result of selling some fixed assets, or in connection
with raising capital for the firm. For instance, a building purchased for ` 1,50,000 was subsequently sold for `
1,75,000, this ` 25,000 will be profit of capital nature. Similarly, when a company issues its shares of the face
value ` 100 for ` 105 each, it is said that shares have been issued at a premium, which is capital profit.
Capital profits are either capitalized i.e. transferred to capital account or transferred to capital reserve account
which may be utilized for meeting capital losses.
CAPITAL AND REVENUE LOSSES

Revenue losses are the losses which arise during the normal course of business whereas capital losses are
those which occur when selling fixed assets or raising share capital. If a building purchased for ` 50,000 is sold
for ` 45,000, there will be capital loss of ` 5,000. Similarly, when shares of the face value of ` 100 are issued at
` 95 i.e. at a discount of ` 5, the amount of discount will be a capital loss.
Treatment of capital losses is not different from that of capital profits. Just as capital profits are not shown in the
profit and loss account, similarly capital losses are not shown in the profit and loss account. They are shown in
the balance sheet on the assets side. As and when capital profits arise, capital losses are gradually written off
against them. If however, capital losses are huge, the common practice is to spread them over a number of
years and charge a part thereof to profit and loss account of each such year. But if they are negligible, they are
debited to profit and loss account of the year in which they occur.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Expenses whose benefit expires within the year are _________.
2. _________ profits are earned in the ordinary course of business.
3. Payment into the business by proprietor is_________ receipt.
4. White washing charges of office building is an example of _______
expenditure.
Illustration 1:
State which of the following expenditures are capital, revenue, deferred revenue expenditures and capital loss:
(i) Cost of overhauling and painting a second hand truck newly purchased.
(ii) Cost of making more exits in a cinema hall under order of the Government.
(iii) ` 25,000 were spent on air conditioning the office of the General Manager.
(iv) An old machine which stood in the books at ` 15,000 was sold for ` 13,000.
(v) ` 2,000 were paid as municipal tax in connection with a building which was purchased last year for `
2,00,000.
(vi) ` 30,000 were spent on heavy advertising in connection with the introduction of a new product.
(vii) ` 500 was paid out in connection with carriage on goods purchased.
(viii) A temporary room constructed for ` 25,000 for storing raw material for the construction of a big
building.
(ix) ` 50,000 was spent on putting up a gallery in a theatre hall.
(x) Freight and cartage amounting to ` 4,000 were paid on purchase of a new plant and a sum of ` 2,000
was spent as erection charges of that plant.
Solution:
(i) When a second hand machine is purchased, the entire expenditure incurred in the beginning to make
it fit for working is treated as capital expenditure. The value of the machine is increased by the amount
spent. Therefore, the cost of overhauling and painting the truck will be treated as capital expenditure.
(ii) Making more exits in a cinema hall does not increase the capacity of the hall and therefore, it should
be treated as revenue expenditure.
(iii) The sum of ` 25,000 spent on air conditioning the office of General Manager is capital expenditure
because it represents a fixed asset. Moreover, the effect of air conditioning will be available for several
years to come, and it can possibly be disposed of, if desired, at a future date, when it will fetch some
amount.
(iv) The old machine costing ` 15,000 was sold for ` 13,000 only, and the loss of ` 2,000 is clearly a
capital loss.
(v) ` 2,000 paid by way of municipal tax on a building purchased is an item of revenue nature. It is an
expenditure of routine nature, which was necessary for using the building.
(vi) Since the benefit of ` 30,000 spent on advertising will occur for several years, it is of capital nature. It
may be treated as a deferred revenue expenditure and be written off against the profit and loss
account of a number of years.
(vii) The expenditure of ` 500 incurred on carriage on goods purchased is of revenue nature because the
goods are meant for resale.
(viii) ` 25,000 spent on construction of temporary room should be treated as capital expenditure because it
was necessary for the construction of the main building. The cost of the room will be added to the cost
of the building.
(ix) When a new gallery is put up, it will increase the number of seats (capacity) of the hall. Therefore, this
cost of ` 50,000 should be treated as a capital expenditure.
(x) The expenditure incurred by way of freight and cartage amounting to ` 4,000 and the erection
charges of ` 2,000 are both of capital nature. The former has been incurred in connection with the
receipt of a capital asset while the latter has been incurred for erecting it so that it may be used for
business purposes.
Illustration 2:
State whether the following expenses are capital, revenue or deferred revenue expenditure:
(i) A Ltd. spent ` 2,00,000 for overhauling the machinery which improved the capacity utilization and
saved running expenditure by ` 15,000 p.a.
(ii) M/s Capital Properties, property dealers, purchased ten flats @` 7,00,000 each.
(iii) A firm incurred ` 10,000 to retain the title of a land purchased for business in litigation with third party.
(iv) Compensation paid to undesirable employees.
86 FP-FA&A
(v) M/s Durga & Co. spent ` 2,50,000 for organizing an Inter-school Cricket Tournament in Delhi. This
was held for advertising their new school bag and certain books and stationery which they wanted to
market.
(vi) ` 12,000 paid to Mahanagar Telephone Nigam Ltd. for installing a telephone in the office.
(vii) Damages paid on account of breach of contract to supply certain goods.
(viii) ` 25,000 has accrued during the year on term loan obtained and utilized for the construction of factory
building and purchase of machinery, however, the production did not commence till the last date of the
year.
(ix) Imported goods worth ` 1,75,000 confiscated by customs authorities for non-disclosure of material facts.
(x) ` 20,000 spent for the trial run of newly installed machinery.
Solution:
(i) Expenses for overhauling the machinery increased capacity utilization which contributes to increase
the revenue generating capacity. Also, saving in revenue expenditure for more than one accounting
period will accrue from this overhauling which will increase future profits. Hence, this expense is
capital in nature.
(ii) Purchase of flats in the ordinary course of business by property dealers is revenue expenditure as flats
are stock in trade for them.
(iii) Legal expenses incurred to retain the title of land are expenses for maintaining the asset. The
expenses will not generate any revenue in future directly. Hence, it is revenue in nature.
(iv) Compensation paid to retrench undesirable employees is expected to increase revenue earning
capacity of the business because such undesirable employees would either waste resources or time
with adverse effect on profit. The expenditure is capital in nature.
(v) The purpose of expenses incurred for organizing the Inter-School Cricket Tournament is to advertise
for some new products. This advertisement has some enduring effect so far as the marketability of the
new products is concerned. The expense may be treated as deferred revenue expenditure.
(vi) The money deposited with Mahanagar Telephone Nigam Ltd. for acquiring a telephone connection is
treated as an asset; hence it is a capital expenditure.
(vii) Damages paid on account of the breach of contract to supply certain goods are treated as revenue
expenditure incurred in the ordinary course of the business.
(viii) Interest accrued on term loan obtained and utilized for the construction of factory building and
purchase of machinery should be treated as capital expenditure since commercial production did not
start till the last date of the accounting year.
(ix) The confiscation of imported goods by the customs authorities is a loss arisen on account of
negligence and is of abnormal nature. It is appropriate to write it off to profit and loss account over a
period of 2 to 5 years treating it as a deferred revenue expenditure.
(x) Expenses incurred for trial-run of newly installed machinery is capital expenditure in nature.
CONTINGENT ASSETS AND CONTINGENT LIABILITY
(i) CONTINGENT ASSETS: “A contingent asset is a possible asset

that arises from past events the
The assets in which the possibility of an economic
benefit depends solely upon future events that can't be existence of which will be confirmed
controlled by the company are contingent assets. Due to the only by the occurrence or non-
uncertainty of the future events, these assets are not placed on occurrence of one or more uncertain
the balance sheet. However, they are presented in the future events not wholly within the
company's financial statement notes. These assets are often control of the enterprise.”
simply rights to a future potential claim based on past events.
Contingent assets usually arise from unplanned or other unexpected events that give rise to the possibility of
an inflow of economic benefits to the enterprise.
Contingent assets are not recognized in financial statements since this may result in the recognition of income
that may never be realised. It is usually disclosed in the report of the approving authority where an inflow of
economic benefits is probable. However, when the realisation of income is virtually certain, then the related
asset is not a contingent asset and its recognition is appropriate.
Example: A potential settlement from a lawsuit or legal processes. The company does not have enough
certainty to place the settlement value on the balance sheet, so it can only mention about the potential in the
notes. This improves the accuracy of financial statements.
(ii) CONTINGENT LIABILITY
The possibility of an obligation to pay certain sums dependent

“A contingent liability is a possible
on future events is known as contingent liability. Contingent
liabilities are liabilities that may or may not be incurred by an obligation that arises from past events
entity depending on the outcome of a future event. and the existence of which will be
confirmed only by the occurrence or
They are defined obligations by a company that must be met,
but the probability of such payment is minimal. An enterprise non-occurrence of one or more
does not recognize a contingent liability. These liabilities are uncertain future events not wholly
recorded in a company's accounts and shown in the balance within the control of the enterprise. It is
sheet only when both probable and reasonably estimable. The a present obligation that arises from
nature and extent of the contingent liabilities is described in the past events but is not recognised
footnote to the balance sheet. because it is not probable that an
Some good examples of a contingent liability would be an outflow of resources embodying
outstanding lawsuit, bank guarantee etc. Suppose, if a company economic benefits will be required to
is sued by a former employee for `500,000 for age settle the obligation or a reliable
discrimination, the company will have a liability if it is found
estimate of the amount of the
guilty. However, if the company is not found guilty, the company
will not have an actual liability. Such a liability is known as a obligation cannot be determined”.
contingent liability.
LESSON ROUND UP
– All items of capital expenditure are taken in the balance sheet while all items of revenue nature are
taken in the profit and loss account.
– Deferred revenue expenditure is revenue in character but the benefit of it is not exhausted in the
same year, or is applicable either wholly or in part of the future years, or is accidental with heavy
amount and it is not prudent to charge against the profit of one year.
– Revenue receipts must be set off against the revenue expenses in order to calculate the profit or
loss of the business in an accounting period.
– Capital receipts and expenditure have no bearing on the profit or loss for the accounting period.
– Revenue profits appear in the profit and loss account and are available for distribution as profit, or
for creating reserves and funds, or for being used in the business.
– Capital profits are either capitalized i.e. transferred to capital account or transferred to capital
reserve account which may be utilized for meeting capital losses.
– Contingent assets are not recognized in financial statements since this may result in the recognition
of income that may never be realised.
– Contingent liabilities are recorded in a company's accounts and shown in the balance sheet only
when both probable and reasonably estimable.
88 FP-FA&A
GLOSSARY
Capital Expenditure Expenditure incurred in acquiring or improving an asset which is not meant for sale.
Revenue Expenditure of a routine nature and incurred to maintain an asset.
Expenditure
Deferred Revenue Heavy expenditure of revenue nature
Expenditure
Capital Receipts Payments or contributions into the business by the sole proprietor, partners or other
shareholders towards the capital of the firm.
Revenue Receipts Outcome of a firm’s activity as rewards for offering goods or services to the public.
Revenue Profits Earned in the ordinary course of business.
Capital Profits Earned as a result of selling some fixed assets or raising capital for the firm.
Revenue Losses They arise during the normal course of business
Capital Losses They occur on selling the fixed assets or in raising of share capital.
Contingent Assets They are rights to a future potential claim based on past events.
Contingent These are defined obligations by a company that must be met, but the probability of
Liabilities such payment is minimal.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
1. State the considerations which would guide you in deciding whether any particular expense should
be regarded as capital expenditure or revenue expenditure.
2. Explain deferred revenue expenditure with examples.
3. What are contingent assets and contingent liabilities? Give examples.
4. Distinguish between capital receipts and revenue receipts.
5. Differentiate between capital expenditure and deferred revenue expenditure.
6. State in each of the following cases whether the expenditure is (a) capital expenditure, (b) revenue
expenditure, or (c) deferred revenue expenditure.
–Repairs to furniture.
–Legal expenses incurred to defend a suit for breach of contract to supply goods.
–Custom duty paid on imported machinery.
–Heavy expenditure incurred on advertising a new product.
– Carriage paid on goods purchased.
–Amount spent to overhaul a motor truck purchased second-hand.
–Wages paid to workers for setting up new machinery.
–Preliminary expenses incurred in setting up a joint stock company.
–Wages paid to workers for converting raw material into finished goods.
–Office rent paid in advance for three years.
90 FP-FA&A
Lesson 5
Bank Reconciliation Statement
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Introduction In the modern times, business operates in a
– Bank financial system of the country wherein it uses
– Types of Personal Accounts in Bank
the facilities and services provided by the banks.
– Deposits
Most of the business houses conduct majority
– Withdrawals
of transactions through bank accounts. Business
– Bank Pass Book
enterprises record transactions with the bank
– Bank Reconciliation Statement
in the bank column of the cash book. Bank also
maintains accounts of customers in its ledger
– Causes of difference between bank
book which are supplied to customers by the
balance as per cash book and pass book
– Significance of Bank Reconciliation bank in the form of a statement or a book. So, it

Statement becomes necessary to compare and check the
– Procedure of Preparing Bank transactions done with the bank and those
Reconciliation Statement
recorded in the books of accounts of
– Preparation of Bank Reconciliation
organisation. Bank reconciliation statement is a
Statement when overdraft balances are
given tool for such comparison and arriving at the
– Preparation of Bank Reconciliation causes and amount of difference between the
Statement when extracts of cash book and
two, if any.
pass book are given
– Lesson Round-Up In this lesson, we will study in detail about
– Glossary reconciling the bank account with the bank

– Self-Test Questions balance as per cash book of any organization.
All the money’s kind of sitting in a bank account.
Alex Tew
92 FP-FA&A
INTRODUCTION
Bank
A bank is an institution which deals in money. Its main business is to accept deposits and to lend money. It
also collects money and makes payments on behalf of its clients. Bank account is a personal account and the
account-holders record their transaction with the bank in a similar manner as they do with any other person.
Types of Personal Accounts in Bank

Money can be deposited with a bank in following types of accounts.
(i) Current Account: In a Current Account, money can be deposited as often as desired and also, it can be
withdrawn without notice as often as necessary. In this account, with the permission of the bank, the amount
withdrawn can be in excess of the amount deposited; the excess amount withdrawn is called overdraft.
Generally, no interest is allowed by banks on deposits in current accounts. On the other hand, a charge is
made by the bank, known as bank charges periodically. The client can instruct the bank to collect money, say
interest or dividends on investments made by the client and to make payments say premiums of insurance
policy on his behalf. The bank credits the client’s account with such collections made and debits the client’s
account with such payments. It charges money for such services; the amount of the charge is debited by the
bank to the client’s account. Businessmen invariably prefer the current account to other two accounts as this
account alone meets all their requirements.
(ii) Savings Account: In a Savings Bank Account, deposits can be made as often as required but there are
restrictions on the number as well as amount of withdrawals that can be made and hence a savings bank
account fails to meet the requirements of most of the businessmen. But this account has the advantage that
bank allows interest on the deposits made in it. This account is really meant for individuals who wish to save
or institutions which do not need withdrawals very often.
(iii) Fixed Deposit Account: In a Fixed Deposit, money is deposited only once and cannot be withdrawn
before the expiry of that period for which it is made. The bank pays interest on such deposits. Fixed deposit is
evidenced by a receipt called Fixed Deposit Receipt issued by the bank in the name of the depositor. The
receipt has to be surrendered to the bank on the expiry on the stipulated date for withdrawal of money
deposited and interest allowed thereon by the bank.
(iv) Recurring Deposit Account: In Recurring Deposit Account, a fixed amount of money is deposited every
month for a fixed tenure mostly ranging from one to five years. The small monthly saving in the Recurring
Deposit Scheme enable the depositor to accumulate a handsome amount on maturity. The bank pays interest
on such deposits compounded quarterly at a fixed rate.
Deposits
In savings accounts and current accounts, a deposit is made by filling up a form called pay-in-slip. There is a
counterfoil which is stamped by the bank’s cashier and signed by him and returned to the client. This counter-
foil is evidence that money has been duly received by the bank. Separate pay-in-slips have to be filled in for
depositing cash and cheques. Also, there are different pay in slips for local and out-station cheques.
Withdrawals
Withdrawals are made by means of cheques. A cheque is an unconditional order on the bank made by the
client instructing the bank to pay a certain sum of money to the person named in the cheque or his order or
the bearer. In the case of a savings bank account withdrawals may be allowed by filling in withdrawal form
supplied by the bank rather than cheques.
The money deposited with bank is debited to bank account while money withdrawn from the bank is credited
to bank account. The record of money deposited and withdrawn from the bank is maintained by the business
in its cash book with bank columns which can be balanced on any date and the balance so arrived at is
known as bank balance as per cash book.
Lesson 5  Bank Reconciliation Statement 93
Bank Pass Book
The bank on its part maintains in its ledger the account of its customers. Pass book is a copy of the clients’
account in the bank’s ledger. Bank issues pass book to its clients. It is the duty of the client to send it to bank
at intervals so that transactions can be recorded up-to-date. Pass book shows the transactions already
entered into by the bank and the client (like cheques and cash deposited, amounts withdrawn, cheques paid
by the bank, collections and payments made by the bank on behalf of the client) and the balance or overdraft
shown by the client’s account at the bank. The money deposited by the customer is credited to his account
and the money withdrawn from the bank is debited to his account. The balance as per bank ledger indicated
in the bank pass book is called the bank balance as per pass book.

The bank pass book and bank columns of the cash book record the same transactions. In the pass book, the
transactions are recorded from the point of view of the bank whereas in cash book they are recorded from the
point of view of the client. The bank balance as per pass book, can therefore, be expected to be equal to the
bank balance as revealed by the cash book. However, in actual practice the two balances rarely agree
because of the time lag of a few days between the entries made by the firm in cash book and by the bank in
the pass book. Thus, a comparison is necessary to find out the items on account of which differences have
arisen and a need to reconcile the two balances. Thus, a bank reconciliation statement is a statement which
is prepared as on a particular date to reconcile the bank balance as per cash book with balance as per pass
book by showing all causes of difference between the two.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Fill in the blanks:
(a) A bank is an institution which deals in ___________.
(b) In a ________________, money can be deposited as often as desired
and also, it can be withdrawn without notice as often as necessary.
(c) In a savings bank account, restrictions are made on the __________
as well as _________of withdrawals.
(d) A deposit is made by filling up a form called _____________.
(e) In Recurring Deposit Account, deposits are made once in _____.
CASUSES OF DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BANK BALANCE SHOWN BY CASH BOOK AND

PASS BOOK
The following are the reasons for the difference between the balances shown by the cash book and the pass
book.
(i) Cheques issued but not presented for payment:
When a cheque is drawn or issued in favour of a third party, it is immediately recorded in the cash book by
debiting the party and crediting the bank and this has the effect of reducing the bank balance in the cash
book. But the bank will not debit client’s account until that cheque is presented for payment, and honoured.
So long as it is not presented, the balance shown in the pass book is more than the balance shown by the
cash book.
(ii) Cheques deposited for collection but not yet collected:
The client debits bank column of cash book as soon as he deposits cheques with the bank for collection, but
the bank credits client’s account only when it has collected cash on the cheque so deposited. It results in
bank balance as per cash book being higher than the balance as per pass book.
(iii) Bank charges not entered in the cash book:
The bank charges some amount from each customer by way of incidental charges, collection charges, etc.
94 FP-FA&A
and debits his account for this reason from time to time. As soon as these charges are made, the bank debits
the customer’s account in its own books and this reduces the bank balance. But the customer will know such
charges only when he receives a statement of account from the bank, until then, bank balance as per pass
book will be less than bank balance as per cash book.
(iv) Interest credited or debited by bank, not entered in the cash book:
When bank allows interest to a customer for deposits, it will credit customer’s account and his bank balance
as per pass book will increase. But the customer will not pass the entry in cash book simultaneously till he
knows the fact, thus the balances will differ. Likewise, interest on overdraft is debited to the customers’
account and till the same is not entered in the cash book, will result in a difference in the balances.
(v) Direct collections on behalf of customers:
A banker may receive amounts due to the customer by way of dividends, rent, interests etc. directly from the
persons concerned on account of standing instructions of the customer to such persons. Similarly, debtors
may also deposit the amounts directly to the bank. The bank credits the account of the customer for such
collections as soon as it gets such payments. But same will be entered in the cash book only when customer
receives the statement from the bank. Thus the balances differ.
(vi) Direct payment by bank:
Usually, the bank is given standing instructions for certain payments to be made, such as payment for
insurance premium, interest on loan, electricity bill etc. Bank, while making payments, debits pass book but
the customer has no information of the same till it is informed. It results in a difference in balances.
(vii) Dishonour of cheques/bills:
When cheque or bill of exchange discounted with the bank is dishonoured, the same is debited in the pass
book but not given effect in the cash book until the intimation is received. It will cause a difference in the two
balances.
(viii) Cheques received and entered in the cash book but omitted to be deposited into the bank.
When cheque is received, the same is entered in the cash book but it may not be deposited into the bank
immediately. This will cause a difference in the two balances.
(ix) Errors:
There may be errors in the accounts maintained by the customer or/ and by the bank. A wrong debit or credit
given by the customer or the bank leads to the difference in the balances.
SIGNIFICANCE OF BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT
 (i) It highlights the causes of difference between the bank balance as per cash book and the balance as
per pass book. Necessary adjustments can, therefore, be carried out at an early date.
(ii) It reduces the chance of fraud by the staff dealing in cash.
(iii) It acts as a moral check on the staff of the organization to keep the cash records always up to date.
(iv) Bank balance as per cash book cannot be accepted as final unless it is supported by statement of
passbook. When these two balances do not tally, reconciliation becomes essential to determine the
correct bank balance that can be used while finalizing the accounts.
(v) It helps in finding out actual position of the bank balance.
PROCEDURE OF PREPARING BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT

A bank reconciliation statement is prepared as on a particular date for a particular period to reconcile the bank
balance as per cash book with balance as per pass book by showing causes of difference between the two.
The statement starts with bank balance as per cash book and then additions to and subtraction from this
balance are made to arrive at the balance as per pass book. Alternate procedure is to start with bank balance
as per pass book and to end up with bank balance as per cash book.
Steps for preparing a bank reconciliation statement:

(i) The cash book should be completed and the balance as per bank column on a particular date should
be found out covering the period for which the statement has to be prepared.
(ii) The bank should be requested to complete and send to the firm the bank pass book upto the date
mentioned.
(iii) Check the entries of the debit and credit sides of the bank columns of the cash book with
corresponding entries on the credit and debit sides of the pass book relating to the same period.
(iv) The items not tallying should be classified into common groups according to their characteristics.
(v) The balance as shown by any one book (i.e. the cash book or the bank pass book) should be taken
as the base. This is, as a matter of fact, the starting point for determining the balance as shown by
the other book after making suitable adjustments taking into account the causes of difference.
(vi) The effect of the particular cause of difference on the balance shown by the other book should be noted.
(vii) In case, the cause has resulted in an increase in the balance shown by the other book, the amount of
such increase should be added to the balance as per the former book which has been taken as the base.
(viii) In case, the cause has resulted in a decrease in balance shown by the other book, the amount of such
decrease should be deducted from the balance as per the former book which has been taken as the base.
SPECIMEN OF BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT

(From Balance as per Cash Book)
Bank Reconciliation Statement as on....
Particulars ` `
Balance as per Cash Book XXX
Add :
Cheques issued but not yet presented for payment XXX
Interest allowed by the bank XXX
Direct payment by customers into bank XXX
Interest on investment received by the bank XXX
Dividend on shares collected by the bank XXX
Rebate on bills retired under rebate through the bank but full amount entered XXX
in the cash book
Any wrong entry on credit side of the pass book XXX XXX
XXX
Less :
Cheques deposited with the bank but not yet collected XXX
Bank charges XXX
Insurance premium paid by the bank XXX
Interest on overdraft charged by the bank XXX
Dishonoured cheques / bills XXX
Drawings made but not entered in the cash book XXX
Cheques received entered in the cash book but not yet deposited XXX
Any wrong entry on debit side of the pass book XXX (XXX)
Balance as per Pass Book XXX
96 FP-FA&A
Note: If the reconciliation statement has been started with balance, as per the pass book, to arrive at balance
as per cash book the entries made above should be reversed i.e. all added items should be deducted and
deducted items should be added.
SUMMARY
PREPARATION OF BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT
Transactions Starting with the Bank Balance Starting with the Bank
as per Pass Book Balance as per Cash Book
Cheques issued but not Deduct : The amount of Add : The amount of
presented unpresented cheques. unpresented cheques.
Cheques deposited but not yet Add : The amount of cheques Deduct : The amount of
collected deposited cheques deposited
Cheques received and Add : The amount of cheques. Deduct : The amount of
entered in the bank column of cheques.
the cash book but not
deposited
Dishonour of cheques Add : The amount of Deduct : The amount of

deposited with banks earlier dishonoured cheques dishonoured cheques
Collection of interest and Deduct : The amount of these Add : The amount of these
dividends and interest allowed items items.
by the banker not yet recorded
in the cash book.
Bank charges Add : The amount of bank Deduct : The amount of bank
charges charges.
Balance Bank Balance as per Cash Book Bank Balance as per Pass
Book
PREPARATION OF BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT WHEN OVERDRAFT BALANCES

ARE GIVEN
In case the books show an adverse balance i.e. an overdraft, the procedure is just the reverse of that which
has been discussed in the case of a favorable balance. Overdraft means overdrawing of a bank account. The
customer is allowed to draw from his account over and above his balance subject to a limit agreed upon. For
overdraft facility, the banker will charge interest. In the case of overdraft, the bank pass book will show a debit
balance in the account of the customer and similarly there will be a credit balance in the bank column of the cash
book.
SPECIMEN OF BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT
(From overdraft balances)
Bank Reconciliation Statement as on....
Particulars ` `
Overdraft as per Cash Book XXX
Add :
Cheques deposited into bank but not yet collected XXX
Bank charges XXX
Insurance premium paid by the bank XXX
Interest on overdraft charged by the bank XXX
Dishonoured cheques / bills XXX
Drawings made but not entered in cash book XXX
Cheques received and entered in the cash book but not deposited XXX
Any wrong entry on debit side of the pass book XXX XXX
Less :
Cheques issued but not yet presented for payment XXX
Interest allowed by the bank XXX
Direct payment by customers into bank XXX
Interest on investment received by the bank XXX
Dividend on shares collected by the bank XXX
Rebate on bills retired under rebate through the bank but full amount entered XXX
in the cash book
Any wrong entry on credit side of the pass book XXX (XXX)
Overdraft as per Pass Book XXX
Note: If the reconciliation statement has been started with overdraft as per the pass book to arrive at overdraft
as per the cash book the entries made above should be reversed i.e. all added items should be deducted and
all deducted items should be added.
SUMMARY
PREPARATION OF BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT
Transactions Starting with the Overdraft as Starting with the Overdraft
per Cash Book as per Pass Book
Cheques issued but not Deduct: The amount of Add: The amount of
presented unpresented cheques. unpresented cheques.
Cheques deposited but not yet Add: The amount of cheques Deduct: The amount of
collected deposited cheques deposited
Cheques received entered in Add: The amount of cheques. Deduct: The amount of
the bank column of the cash cheques.
book but not deposited
98 FP-FA&A
Dishonour of cheques Add: The amount of dishonoured Deduct: The amount of

deposited earlier cheques dishonoured cheques
Collection of interest and Deduct: The amount of these Add: The amount of these
dividends and interest by items items.
banks
Bank charges Add: The amount of bank Deduct: The amount of bank
charges charges.
Balance/ Overdraft Bank Overdraft as per Cash Bank Overdraft as per Pass
Book Book
Alternative Method is to keep two columns ‘Plus’ and ‘Minus’. All additions are to be shown in ‘plus’ column
while all deductions in the ‘minus’ column. Balance is to be shown in ‘plus’ column while overdraft is shown in
‘minus’ column.
PREPARATION OF BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT WHEN EXTRACTS OF CASH

BOOK AND PASS BOOK ARE GIVEN
In some instances, students are given extracts from the cash book and the pass book and are required to find
out causes of differences and prepare a bank reconciliation statement. In solving such a problem, the
following points should be noted:
(i) Heading of the pass book, and
(ii) Period for which cash book and pass book are given.
Heading of the pass book can be given in two ways:
(i) Party in account with bank: It means pass book is a copy of party’s account in the books of bank.
Generally, pass book is written in this form. The student should compare debit side of the cash book
with credit side/column of the pass book and also compare credit side of the cash book with debit side
of the pass book.
(ii) Bank in account with party: It means pass book is the copy of bank’s account (so far as it relates to the
party) in the books of bank. In this form the student should compare debit side of the cash book with
the debit side/ column of the pass book and credit side with credit side/column.
Practically in such situations, upto date bank statement is obtained and the cash book is amended by
incorporating only those transactions in respect of which entries have been made in the pass book. The errors
in the cash book are also rectified by suitable entries and thus the upto date bank balance as per cash book is
obtained. This balance appears in the balance sheet.
For examination purpose, a reconciliation statement may be prepared after amending the cash book
especially if it is mentioned or when the firm prepares reconciliation statement on the date of closing the
books of account.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Illustration 1:
On 31st March, 2011 the pass book of Mitra showed a credit balance of ` 2,16,000. A comparison of pass
book and cash book revealed the following:
`
(i) Cheques deposited but not cleared by 31st March 1,08,150
(ii) Cheques issued by Mitra but not presented for payment before 1st April, 2011 26,000
(iii) Insurance premium paid by bank on behalf of Mitra but not yet recorded in cash book 52,075
(iv) Commission charged by bank not yet recorded in cash book 750
(v) Interest on bonds collected by bank on behalf of Mitra not yet recorded in cash book 25,000
Bank balance as per cash book as on 31st March, 2011 is ` 3,25,975. Prepare a Bank Reconciliation
Statement as on 31st March, 2011.
Solution:
Bank Reconciliation Statement of Mitra
as on 31st March, 2011
Particulars ` `
Balance as per Pass Book 2,16,000
Add :
Cheques deposited into bank but not yet collected 1,08,150
Commission charged 52,075
Insurance premium paid by the bank 750 1,60,975
3,76,975
Less:
Cheques issued but not yet presented for payment 26,000
Interest on bonds received by the bank 25,000 _51,000
Balance as per Cash Book 3,25,975
Alternatively:
Bank Reconciliation Statement of Mitra
Particulars ` `
Balance as per Cash Book 3,25,975
Add :
Interest on bonds received by the bank 25,000 51,000
3,76,975
Less:
Cheques deposited into bank but not yet collected 1,08,150
Commission charged 52,075
Insurance premium paid by the bank ____750 1,60,975
Balance as per Pass Book 2,16,000
Illustration 2:
The cash book of Shri Gupta showed an overdraft of ` 30,000 on 31.3.2011. The scrutiny of the entries in the
cash book and the pass book revealed that:
(a) On 22nd March, cheques totaling ` 6,000 were sent to bankers for collection, out of these, a cheque
for ` 1,000 was wrongly recorded on the credit side of the cash book and cheques amounting to ` 300
could not be collected by bank within the accounting year.
(b) A cheque for ` 4,000 was issued to a supplier on 28th March, 2011. The cheque was presented to
bank on 4th April, 2011.
(c) There were debits in the pass book for interest ` 2,000 on overdraft and bank charges ` 600 not
recorded in the cash book.
100 FP-FA&A
(d) The credit side of the bank column of the cash book was undercast by ` 100.
(e) A cheque for ` 1,000 was issued to a creditor on 27th March, but the same was not recorded in the
cash book. The cheque was, however, duly en-cashed before 31st March.
(f) As per standing instructions, the banker collected dividend of ` 500 on behalf of Gupta and credited
the same to his account within 31st March, 2011. The fact was, however, intimated to Gupta on 3rd
April, 2011.
You are required to prepare a bank reconciliation statement as on 31st March, 2011.
Solution:
Shri Gupta
Bank Reconciliation Statement as on 31.3.2011
Particulars ` `
Bank Overdraft as per Cash Book 30,000
Add :
Cheques deposited into bank but not yet collected 300
Bank charges not yet recorded in cash book 600
Interest on overdraft charged by the bank 2,000
Credit side of the bank column of the cash book undercast 100
Cheques issued to creditor not recorded in the cash book but duly
encashed by 31st March 1,000 4,000
34,000
Less:
Cheque wrongly recorded on the credit side of the cash book (` 1,000 x 2) 2,000
Dividend collected by the bank but not recorded in the cash book __500 _6,500
Overdraft as per Pass Book 27,500
Illustration 3:
From the following information, prepare Bank Reconciliation Statement as on 31st March, 2011:
Cash Book of Mr. S. Ray
Dr. (Bank Columns only) Cr.
` `
2011 2011
Mar. 1 ToBalance b/fd 7,000 Mar. 5 By Drawings 5,000
” 5 ”Manohar Lal 4,000 ” 8 ” Interest 150
” 10 ”Deepak Kumar 10,000 ” 10 ” Cheque Book 100
” 17 ”Sher Singh 13,000 ” 15 ” Salaries 3,500
” 25 ”Mohan Lal 4,000 ” 17 ” Ajit Singh 4,000
” 31 ”Harish Kumar 1,900 ” 21 ” Abdul & Co. 5,000
” 25 ” Karim & Sons 7,000
” 30 ” Harish & Co. 1,000
______ ” 31 ” Balance c/fd 14,150
39,900 39,900
Bank Pass Book
(Bank in Account with Mr. S. Ray)
Dr. Cr.
` `
2011 2011
Mar. 1 To Balance b/fd 7,000 Mar. 5 By Drawings 5,000
” 8 ” Manohar Lal 4,000 ” 8 ” Interest 150
” 15 ” Deepak Kumar 10,000 ” 10 ” Cheque Book 100
” 24 ” Sher Singh 13,000 ” 15 ” Salaries 3,500
” 28 ” Interest on ” 22 ” Ajit Singh 4,000
Investment 1,200 ” 29 ” Abdul & Co. 5,000
” 30 ” Rent 300 ” 31 ” Bank charges 32
” 31 ” Bhura Mal 800 ” 31 ” Electricity charges 78
______ ” 31 ” Balance c/fd 18,440
36,300 36,300
Solution:

as at 31st March, 2011
Particulars ` `
Balance as per Cash Book 14,150
Add :
Cheques issued but not presented for payment 8,000
Interest on investment collected by bank 1,200
Rent collected by bank 300
Direct deposit by the customer 800 10,300
24,450
Less: Cheques deposited but not yet collected 5,900
Bank charges 32
Electricity charges 78 6,010
Balance as per pass book 18,440
Illustration 4:
On 30th April, 2011 the cash book of Sircar showed a bank overdraft of ` 1,970. A comparison of entries in
the pass book with those in the cash book revealed the following:
– Cheques deposited with the bank but not yet credited in the pass book ` 8,505.
– Cheques issued by Sircar but not yet presented by payees to bank for payment ` 12,500.
– Interest on fixed deposit credited by bank under standing instructions but not yet recorded in cash
book ` 650.
102 FP-FA&A
Prepare bank reconciliation statement as on 30th April, 2011 to ascertain the balance as per pass book.
Solution:
Mr. Sircar
Bank Reconciliation Statement as at 30th April, 2011
Particulars ` `
Overdraft as per cash book 1,970
Add :
Cheques deposited with the bank but not yet credited in pass book 8,505
10,475
Less :
Cheques issued but not yet presented to bank for payment 12,500
Interest on fixed deposit credited by bank under standing instructions ___650 13,150
Balance as per pass book 2,675
Illustration 5:
On 30th April, 2011 pass book of Ghosh showed a debit balance of ` 32,675. You are required to prepare
bank reconciliation statement taking into consideration the following information:
`
Total cheques deposited with bank for collection 1,38,000
But so far credited in the pass book 1,12,000
Interest collected by the bank but not recorded in cash book by Ghosh 1,200
Bank charges not yet entered in cash book 150
Solution:
Mr. Ghosh
Bank Reconciliation Statement as at April 30, 2011
Particulars ` `
Overdraft as per pass book 32,675
Add :
Interest collected by bank but not yet recorded in cash book by Ghosh 1,200 19,713
52,388
Less :
Cheques deposited with bank not yet credited in pass book 26,000
(`1,38,000 – `1,12,000)
Bank charges not yet entered in cash book 150 26,150
The bank reconciliation statement can also be prepared by having two amount columns, one for the amounts
that increase the positive balance (or reduce the overdraft) and one for those amounts that reduce positive
balance (or increase the overdraft). The first may be headed “+” and the second “-”, the opening balance is
first entered in the appropriate column and finally the two columns are balanced. The illustration given above
is solved below in the manner just stated:
Mr. Ghosh
Bank Reconciliation Statement as at April 30, 2011
Particulars (+) (-)
` `
Interest collected by bank but not yet recorded in cash book by Ghosh 1,200
Cheques deposited with bank not yet credited in pass book 26,000
Bank charges not yet entered in cash book 150
Overdraft Balance as per cash book 26,238
52,338 52,338
Illustration 6:
From the following information supplied by Shri Mehta, prepare his bank reconciliation statement as on 31st
March, 2011 after amending the cash book on that date:
`
1. Bank overdraft as per bank statement 1,65,000
2. Cheques issued but not yet presented for payment 87,500
3. Cheques deposited with the bank but not yet collected 1,05,000
4. Cheque recorded in the bank column of the cash book but not sent to the
bank for collection 20,000
5. Payments received from customers direct by the bank 35,000
6. Bank charges debited in the statement 200
7. A bill for ` 30,000 (discounted with the bank in February at ` 29,780) dishonored
on 31st March and noting charges paid by the bank 100
8. Premium on life policy of Mehta paid by the bank on standing advice 1,800
9. Overdraft balance (Credit) on 25.3.2011, ` 80,000 carried over as debit balance on

the next day.
104 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Cash Book
Dr. (Bank Column only) Cr.
Particular ` Particular `
31.3.2011 31.3.2011 `
To Balance b/fd 29,600 By Bank charges 200
(balancing figure) ” Customer 30,100
” Customer 35,000 (discounted bill
(amount directly dishonoured and noting
collected by Bank) charges paid by bank)
” Balance c/d 1,27,500 ” Drawings 1,800
(life insurance premium
paid by bank)
” Error 1,60,000
(overdraft balance carried
_______ over as debit balance) _______
1,92,100 1,92,100
1.4.2011
By Balance b/fd 1,27,500
Notes:
(a) Discounted value of the bill is immaterial here, because on dishonor, the bank has debited the pass
book with ` 30,100.
(b) Overdraft credit balance means overdraft as per Cash Book.
Bank Reconciliation Statement of Shri Mehta
Particulars ` `
Overdraft as per bank statement 1,65,000
Add:
Cheques issued but not presented for payment 87,500
2,52,500
Less:
Cheques deposited with the bank but not collected 1,05,000
Cheques recorded in cash book but not sent to bank for collection 20,000 1,25,000
Overdraft as per cash book 1,27,500
Illustration 7:
On 31st March, 2011, the cash book of Ajay Ghosh showed a bank overdraft of ` 3,458. On examination of the
cash book and bank statement, the following discrepancies were noted:
(i) Cheques issued for `1,200 were entered in the cash book but were not presented at the bank till first
week of April, 2011.
(ii) Cheques amounting to ` 1,000 were entered in the cash book on 30th March, 2011 but were banked
on 2nd April, 2011.
(iii) Cheques amounting to ` 500 were deposited in the bank but were not collected till March 31st, 2011.
(iv) A cheque for ` 300 received from Mr. Dass Gupta and deposited in the bank was dishonored but
advice of non-payment was not received from the bank upto 31st March.
(v) ` 3,000 being the proceeds of a bill collected on 20th March did not appear in the cash book.
(vi) ` 300 being the proceeds of a bill collected on 20th March was omitted to be credited in the pass book.
(vii) The pass book showed an amount of ` 340, being rent which his tenant Madan Gopal had directly
deposited on the bank on 31st March, 2011.
(viii) A bill payable of ` 600 was duly paid off on 31st March according to the instructions of Ajay Ghosh but
this was not entered in cash book.
(ix) Bank charges of ` 30 and interest an overdraft ` 170 appeared in the pass book but not in the cash
book.
Prepare a bank reconciliation statement and find out the balance as per pass book.
Solution:
Ajay Ghosh
Bank Reconciliation Statement as on 31st March, 2011
Particulars ` `
Add : Items increasing overdraft in pass book:
Cheques entered in cash book but not banked 1,000
Cheques deposited but not collected 500
Cheques deposited but dishonoured 300
Bill collected but omitted to be entered in pass book 300
Pay off of bills payable not entered in cash book 600
Bank charges 30
Interest on overdraft 170 2,900
6,358
Less : Items reducing overdraft in pass book:
Cheques issued, not presented for payment 1,200
Bill collected, not entered in cash book 3,000
Direct deposit of rent into bank 340 4,540
106 FP-FA&A
Illustration 8;
On 31st March 2011, the cash book of a trader showed a bank overdraft of ` 15,280. On a comparison of the
cash book with the bank pass book, the trader ascertained the following differences.
(` )
Cheques deposited with bank, but not credited by the bank 20,000
Interest on securities collected by the bank, but not yet
recorded in the cash book 2,560
Dividend collected by the bank, but not yet recorded in the cash book 2,000
Cheques issued, but not yet presented to the bank for payment 74,800
Bank charges not yet recorded in the cash book 680
Solution:
Bank Reconciliation Statement as on 31st March 2011
Particulars Plus items Minus items

(`) (`)

Cheques deposited with the bank but not yet
credited by bank 20,000
Interest on securities collected by the bank,
but not yet recorded in the cash bank 2,560
Dividend collected by the bank, but not yet
recorded in the cash book 2,000
Cheques issued, but not yet presented to the
bank for payment 74,800
Bank charges not yet recorded in the cash book ______ 680
79,360 35,960
Balance as per pass book = ` 79,360 – ` 35,960 = ` 43,400.
Dr. Cash Book (Bank Columns only) Cr.
To Interest on securities 2,560 By Balance b/d 15,280

To Dividends received 2,000 By Bank charges 680
15,960 15,960
By Balance b/d 11,400
Illustration 9:
The following is a summary of the Cash Book of Shri Mohan Das, for the month of June 2011.
` `
Receipts 14,690 Balance b/d 7,610
Balance c/d 5,540 Payments 12,620
20,230 20,230
All receipts are banked and payments are made by cheque.
On investigation it is found that:
– Bank charges of ` 1,360 entered on the bank statement had not been entered in the cash book.
– Cheques drawn amounting to ` 2,670 had not been presented to the bank for payment.
– Cheques received totaling ` 17,620 had been entered in the cash book and paid into the bank, but had
not been credited by the bank until July, 2011.
– A cheques for ` 1,220 had been entered as a receipt in the cash book instead of as a payment.
– A cheque for ` 1,250 had been debited by the bank in error.
– A cheque received for ` 800 had been dishonored. No adjustments had been made in the cash book.
– All dividends receivable are credited directly to the bank account. During June, amount totaling `
2,620 were credited by the bank and no entries were made in the cash book.
– A cheque drawn for ` 600 in favour of a creditor had been incorrectly entered in the cash book as `
6,000.
– The balance brought forward should have been ` 7,110
– The bank statement as on 30th June, 2011, showed an overdraft ` 17,820.
You are required to:
– Show the adjustments required in the cash book; and
– Prepare a bank reconciliation statement as on 30th June, 2011.
Solution:
Shri Mohan Das
Cash Book
Dr. (Bank column only) Cr.
30.6.2011 30.6.2011
To Dividend 2,620 By Balance b/d 5,540
To Creditor - cheque drawn By Bank charges 1,360
for ` 600 wrongly By Error - cheque issued
entered as ` 6,000 5,400 wrongly entered as
To Error - wrong carry received ` 1,220 2,440
forward of balance on By Customer - cheque
1st June, 2011 500 returned 800
10,140 10,140
108 FP-FA&A
as on 30th June, 2011
Particulars ` `
Bank balance as per cash book (overdraft) 1,620
Add: Cheques deposited but not credited by the
bank until after 30th June, 2011 17,620
Cheque debited by the bank in error 1,250 18,870
20,490
Less: Cheque issued but not presented for payment 2,670
Bank balance as per bank statement (overdraft) 17,820
LESSON ROUND UP
– Bank’s main business is to accept deposits and to lend money.

 – Money can be deposited with a bank in three types of accounts: Current Account, Savings Account
and Fixed Deposit Account
– Pass book is a copy of the client’s account in the bank’s ledger.
– The balance as per bank ledger indicated in the bank pass book is called the bank balance as per
pass book.
– Bank Reconciliation Statement is a statement prepared as on a particular date to reconcile the bank
balance as per cash book with balance as per pass book by showing all causes of difference between
the two.
– Overdraft means that the money withdrawn from bank account is in excess of the money deposited in
the bank.
– The following are the usual causes of difference between the balances as shown by the cash book
and pass book
– Cheques issued but not presented for payment
– Cheques deposited into the bank but not yet collected and credited by bank
– Bank charges not entered in the cash book
– Interest credited or debited by the bank not entered into the cash book
– Amount collected by the bank on behalf of customers
– Amount paid by the bank on standing instructions of the customers
– Dishonor of cheque(s)/bill(s)
– Cheques received and entered in the cash book but omitted to be deposited in to the bank
– Other Errors either in cash book or in pass book
GLOSSARY
Current Account Account in which money can be deposited as often as desired and can be
withdrawn without notice as often as necessary.
Savings Bank Account in which deposits can be made as often as required but there are
Account restrictions on the number as well as amount of withdrawals that can be made.
Fixed Deposit Account in which money is deposited only and cannot be withdrawn before the
expiry of that period for which it is made.
Recurring Deposits Account in which money is deposited monthly & withdrawn after the expiry of fixed
Account tenure.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
Theory Questions
1. What is a bank reconciliation statement?
2. What is the significance of preparing a bank reconciliation statement?
3. What are the types of personal accounts in bank?
4. Describe the reasons why bank balance as per cash book may not agree with the bank balance as per
pass book.
5. Briefly mention the steps of reconciliation.
Practical Questions
1. On 31st March, 2011 the cash book of Gupta showed a debit bank balance of ` 4,800. Prepare a bank
reconciliation statement as at that date taking into account the following additional information:
 – Cheques deposited but not yet credited by bank ` 3,610.
– Cheques issued but not yet presented by payees for payment in the bank ` 2,050.
– Bank charges appearing in pass book but not yet recorded in cash book ` 40.
– Collections made by the bank and appearing in pass book but not yet recorded in cash book ` 1,000.
[Balance as per Pass Book ` 4,200].
2. On 31st March, 2011 the cash book of a trader shows a bank overdraft of ` 1,800. A comparison of the
cash book with the pass book reveals the following facts:
– Cheques issued but not presented for payment upto 31st March, 2011 ` 8,500.
– Cheques deposited with the bank on 31st March, 2011 but credited by bank on 1st April, 2011 `
9,200.
– Bank charges debited by bank, ` 230 and dividends collected by bank on behalf of the trader `
5,000 have not been recorded in the cash book.
– A cheque of ` 1,400 received from X and deposited with the bank on 26th March, 2011 was
recorded as that of ` 400 in the cash book.
You are required to prepare a bank reconciliation statement after passing the necessary entries in the
cash book to bring its balance up-to-date. The firm closes the books on 31st March. How much will be
shown in the balance sheet as bank balance/overdraft?
(Balance as per Pass Book ` 3,270; Amended cash book balance ` 3,970.)
3. Following are the transactions recorded in the bank column of the Cash Book of Madhur for the month
ending 31 December, 2011 :
Dr. Cash Book (Bank Columns) Cr.
Date Particulars ` Date Particulars `

2011 2011
Dec. Dec.
19 To Cash 54,000 1 By Balance b/fd 60,000
24 ” Buddha 36,000 8 ” Ram 3,000
26 ” Chaitanya 15,000 10 ” Lakshman 600
31 ” Balance c/fd 11,460 19 ” Bharat 360
24 ” Shatrughan 52,500
_______ _______
1,16,460 1,16,460
On the receipt of Bank Statement on 31st December, 2011, Madhur collected the following
information:
110 FP-FA&A
– Credit in pass book not recorded in the cash book ` 300
– Interest on Government bonds collected by the bank but not entered in the cash book `
1,620.
– Cheques for ` 51,000 deposited but the bank collected only ` 36,000.
– Dividend collected by the bank directly but not intimated the same to Madhuri ` 1,500.
– Interest on overdraft charged by the bank but not entered in the cash book ` 1,500.
– Cheques for ` 56,460 issued by the trader but presented to the bank for payment only `
3,960.
Amend the Cash Book and prepare a Bank Reconciliation Statement from the above information.
4. From the following information supplied by Vikas, prepare bank reconciliation statement as on March
31, 2011.
– Bank balance as per passbook `7,700.
– Cheques issued for `1,75,200 were entered in cash book as `1,72,500. Cheques for `65,000
were not presented for payment till March 31, 2010.
– A cheque of `8,500 paid into the bank had been debited by the bank in error.
– Cheques received and recorded but not sent to bank for collection `12,400.
– Payment received from a customer direct by the bank `27,300 but no entry was made in the
cash book.
– `44,900 was entered in the cash book as paid into bank on 31.3.2010 but was credited by the
bank on 2.4.2010.
– The bank column on payment side of the cash book had been undercast by `1, 000.
5. From the following particulars, ascertain the balance as would appear in the bank pass book of Mohan
on 31st March, 2011. The cash book showed a credit balance of `82,000 on that date
– Cheques issued, but not presented for payment by 31st March, 2011 `23,000
– Cheques paid into bank, but not cleared by 31st March, 2011 `30,000
– Interest charged on overdraft appeared in the pass book only ` 500
– Bank charges debited by bank, but not recorded in the cash book ` 200
– Interest on debentures collected by bank, but not recorded in the cash book `6,000
– Bank paid insurance premium as per standing instructions, not yet recorded in the cash book
`2,200
– A customer paid into the firm’s bank account directly ` 10,000
6. The following is a summary of the Cash Book of Shri Mohan Das, for the month of June 2011.
Dr. Cr.
Receipts 14,690 Balance b/fd 7,610
Balance c/fd 5,540 Payments 12,620
20,230 20,230
All receipts are banked and payments are made by cheques. On investigation, it is found that:
– Bank charges of ` 1,360 entered on the bank statement had not been entered in the cash
book.
– Cheques drawn amounting to ` 2,670 had not been presented to the bank for payment.
– Cheques received totaling ` 17,620 had been entered in the cash book and paid into the
bank, but had not been credited by the bank until July, 2011.
– A cheques for ` 1,220 had been entered as a receipt in the cash book instead of as a
payment.
– A cheque for ` 1,250 had been debited by the bank in error.
– A cheque received for ` 800 had been dishonoured. No adjustments had been made in the
cash book.
– All dividends receivable are credited directly to the bank account. During June, amount
totaling ` 2,620 were credited by the bank and no entries were made in the cash book.
– A cheque drawn for ` 600 in favour of a creditor had been incorrectly entered in the cash
book as ` 6,000.
– The opening balance brought forward in the cash book should have been ` 7,110
– The bank statement as on 30th June, 2011, showed an overdraft ` 17,820.
You are required to: Show the adjustments required in the cash book; and Prepare a bank reconciliation
statement as on 30th June, 2011.
112 FP-FA&A
Lesson 6
Depreciation Accounting
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Introduction Capital expenditures results in the acquisition of

– Meaning of Depreciation fixed assets for utilisation in the process of
– Definition of Depreciation providing goods and services to the customers.
– Characteristics of Depreciation Fixed assets are utilised for a number of
– Causes of Depreciation accounting periods. Value of fixed asset
– Objectives of Providing Depreciation decreases with the passage of time. Moreover,
– Factors in Measurement of Depreciation the portion of asset utilised for generating
– Accounting Concept of Depreciation revenue, should be recovered during the
– Review Questions accounting year to match the expenses of a
– Methods of Providing Depreciation period with the revenue of the same period. This
– Uniform Charge Methods allocation of portion of fixed assets is the concept
– Declining Charge Methods of depreciation, which will be dealt in detail in
– Other Methods this lesson.
The objective of this lesson is to make students
– Change in Method of Depreciation
understand the meaning, causes and nature of
– Calculation of Profit or Loss on Assets Sold
depreciation and accounting treatment of
– Depreciation and Replacement of Assets
depreciation. It will provide an understanding of
– Lesson Round Up
the principles and methods of calculating and
– Glossary
accounting of depreciation.
After all, sustainability means running a corporation with depreciation, amortization & maintenance accounts.
In other words, keeping the asset whole, rather than under mining your natural capital.
Maurice Strong
114 FP-FA&A
INTRODUCTION
Meaning of Depreciation
A business enterprise acquires different types of fixed assets depending upon its requirements and financial
conditions. Fixed assets have a long life and are held for use in the business for production of goods and
services. Whenever an asset is used in business its value gets reduced and sooner or later the asset
becomes useless. Thus, depreciation is a permanent, continuous and gradual shrinkage in the book value of
a fixed asset. It is the fall in the quality or value of a fixed asset through physical wear and tear due to use or
passage of time or from any other cause. Depreciation takes place irrespective of regular repairs and
maintenance. As the asset is used for business purpose, the annual loss in the value of the asset is like any
other expenditure. Hence, the cost of fixed assets has to be written off over its useful economic life as a loss.
Thus, depreciation is a process of allocating the cost of a fixed asset over its estimated useful life in a rational
and systematic manner.
Definition of Depreciation
The Institute of Charted Accountants of India has defined depreciation as “a measure of the wearing out,
consumption or other loss of value of a depreciable asset arising from use, effluxion of time or obsolescence
through technology and market changes. Depreciation is allocated so as to charge a fair proportion of
depreciable amount in each accounting period during the expected useful life of the asset. Depreciation
includes amortisation of assets whose useful life is predetermined.”
Depreciation Accounting has been defined by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants as “ a
system of accounting which aims to distribute the cost or other basic value of tangible capital assets less
salvage (if any) over the estimated useful life of the unit (which may be a group of assets) in a systematic and
rational manner. It is a process of allocation and not of valuation.”
Characteristics of Depreciation
The following are the important characteristics of depreciation:
(i) Depreciation refers to a permanent, continuous and gradual decrease in the utility value of a fixed
asset and it continues till the end of the useful life of the asset.
(ii) Depreciation is a charge against profit (i.e. revenue earned) for a particular accounting period.
(iii) Depreciation is always computed in a systematic and rational manner since it is not a sudden loss.
(iv) Depreciation is a process of allocation of expired cost and not of valuation of fixed assets.
(v) Whatever method for calculating depreciation is followed, the exact amount of depreciation can never
be calculated, and it can only be estimated.
(vi) Depreciation is caused due to physical factors and functional factors.
(vii) The fundamental objectives of depreciation are - (a) to maintain the nominal capital invested in fixed
assets, and (b) to allocate the expired portion of the cost of fixed assets over a number of accounting
periods.
(viii) Depreciation is must, i.e. it always takes place whether the asset is carefully handled or neglected.
(ix) If the market value of a fixed asset is fluctuating, the same does not affect the amount of depreciation
so made on the respective assets.
(x) Depreciation is calculated in respect of fixed assets only, i.e. plant, machinery, furniture etc.
(xi) Total depreciation cannot exceed its depreciable value or original cost where the scrap value is nil.
Causes of Depreciation
(i) Physical Wear and Tear Resulting from Use: Tangible fixed assets like, machinery, buildings, furniture
Lesson 6  Depreciation Accounting 115
etc. get worn out or torn out on account of friction, strain, weathering, intensity of use, chemical
reaction, handling etc. This is the most important cause of charging depreciation in respect of such
assets which are in constant use.
(ii) Physical Deterioration Resulting from Atmospheric Exposure: Number of assets deteriorates with
passage of time and being continually exposed nature.
(iii) Passage of Time: A machine kept continuously idle also becomes potentially useless by the passage
of time.
(iv) Depletion: Wasting assets such as mines and quarries lose their value because they get exhausted on
account of continuous extractions.
(v) Obsolescence: Sometimes an asset becomes useless because of technical changes within the
industry, technical progress in other industries, changes in tastes and habits of consumers, changes in
supply and locations of natural resources etc.
Objectives of Providing Depreciation

The objectives of providing depreciation are as follows:
 (i) To ascertain the correct profit: When a particular asset is used for earning the income of the business,
the depreciation in the value of assets should be deducted from the income in order to calculate the
correct and real profit of the business.
(ii) To present true financial position: In order to show the true financial position of the business in the
balance sheet, it is necessary that assets must be shown at their true values after deducting
reasonable depreciation. If depreciation is not provided, the assets will be overstated in the financial
statements and it will be against sound business principles.
(iii) To make provision for replacement of assets: Since depreciation is a non-cash expense, the amount
charged can be kept separately and utilised for the replacement of the fixed asset after the expiry of
the useful life of the asset.
(iv) To ascertain the proper cost of the product: In order to ascertain the cost of production, it is necessary
to charge depreciation as an item of cost of production.
(v) To maintain the capital invested in the cost of the asset intact in the business so that it can be
reinvested in profit earning process.
(vi) To derive maximum tax benefit.
(vii) To meet the legal requirements: In the case of joint stock companies, it is necessary to charge
depreciation on fixed assets before declaring dividends.
Factors in Measurement of Depreciation
The factors which affect measurement of depreciation are given below:
(i) The original cost of asset: The cost includes all cost incurred in acquiring the asset, i.e. purchase price
including transportation and installation costs, if any.
(ii) The additions, if any, made to the assets during the year taking into consideration the date on which
these additions were made.
(iii) The estimated useful life of the asset.
(iv) The scrap or the residual value of the asset.
(v) Obsolescence, i.e., the chance of the asset going out of fashion.
(vi) The working hours of the asset concerned.
(vii) The repairs and renewals.
(viii) The skill of the operators who handle the asset.
(ix) The legal provisions or other restrictions relating to depreciation.
116 FP-FA&A
ACCOUNTING CONCEPT OF DEPRECIATION
Depreciable assets are assets which
– are expected to be used for more than one accounting period;
– have a limited useful life and
– are held by the organization for use in the production or supply of goods and services.
When a fixed asset is purchased, it is recorded in the books of account at its original cost. But, the fixed asset
is used to earn revenues for a number of accounting periods in future with the same acquisition cost until the
concerned fixed asset is sold or discarded. It is therefore, necessary that a part of the acquisition cost of the
fixed asset is treated or allocated as an expense in each of the accounting period in which the asset is used.
This allocation of cost in the form of an expense is known as depreciation in accounting.
Suppose, a business purchases a machinery for ` 10,00,000 and after using it for five years, it is sold for `
2,00,000. The cost of the machinery used in the business is ` 8,00,000 (`10,00,000 – `2,00,000). This cost
must be allocated as an expense of the business at the rate of `1,60,000 (8,00,000 ÷ 5 ) for each of five
accounting periods in which the machinery has been used to earn revenues. This ` 1,60,000 charge as
expense is called accounting concept of depreciation.
It is the cost for the services obtained from the use of the asset in the same manner as the cost of wages,
rent, etc. Depreciation is the expense charged to profit and loss account before arriving at the net profit for the
year. In other words, the cost of fixed asset in the form of depreciation has to be matched against the
revenues of the years over which the asset is used.
Thus, in accounting, depreciation means apportionment or allocation of the cost of the fixed asset over its
useful life. Its aim is to spread over and allocate or distribute the cost of the fixed asset to the years of its use
and charge the depreciable cost to profit and loss account before arriving at the profits of each the accounting
periods in which the fixed asset has been utilized.
Purpose of Depreciation Accounting: The primary purpose of depreciation accounting is cost allocation.
Provision for depreciation in the profit and loss account does not involve the outflow of cash and hence funds
to the extent of depreciation charged over the years will remain in the business and these funds can be easily
used for replacement of asset.
SUMMARY
– Depreciation accounting is the process of allocating the cost of the tangible fixed asset less its salvage
value over its serviceable life.
– Depreciation is an expense that is to be charged against the revenue whether the business makes
profit or incurs loss;
– Depreciation provides funds for replacing the asset when its useful life ends. Depreciation is not a
process of valuation but it is an allocation. Even if the market value of an asset increases, depreciation
has to be recorded because of allocation process.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
(1) WHEN THE DEPRECIATION IS DIRECTLY CHARGED TO ASSET ACCOUNT:
Depreciation Account Dr.

To Asset Account
The asset account in this case appears at its reduced value in the balance sheet i.e.
Cost or book value XXX
Less: Depreciation for the accounting period. XXX
Depreciation expense is transferred to the debit of profit and loss account.
Profit and Loss Account Dr.
To Depreciation Account
(2) WHEN PROVISION FOR DEPRECIATION ACCOUNT IS OPENED:
For charging depreciation:
To Provision for Depreciation Account
For transferring depreciation expense:
In this method, the asset account is not affected by the amount of depreciation and the value of asset appears
in the ledger and the balance sheet at its original cost until it is sold or discarded. The amount of depreciation
written off is accumulated in provision for depreciation account.
When the asset is sold or discarded or exchanged for a new asset, the total accumulated depreciation for that
asset in the provision for depreciation account is transferred to that asset account by the following journal entry.
Provision for Depreciation A/c Dr.
To Relevant Asset A/c
Thus, the balance in the provision for depreciation account always shows the accumulated depreciation on
the assets which are in use on not sold out.
In the balance sheet, the asset account is shown at its original cost less accumulated balance in the provision
for depreciation account.
On the assets side of the balance sheet
Relevant Asset A/c XXX
Less: Provision for Depreciation XXX
Alternatively, the asset account can be shown at its original cost on the assets side and provision for
depreciation account can be shown on the liabilities side.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Depreciation is the process of allocating cost of ____________ over its

estimated life.
2. ____,____,____ are some of the causes of depreciation.
3. The asset account is not affected by the amount of depreciation when
___ account is opened.
4. Fixed costs are recorded in the books of accounts at _____ value less
_________.
118 FP-FA&A
METHODS OF PROVIDING DEPRECIATION
FIXED INSTALMENT METHOD
ANNUITY METHOD
UNIFORM CHARGE DEPRECIATION FUND METHOD

METHODS
INSURANCE POLICY METHOD
DIMINISHING BALANCE METHOD
SUM OF YEARS DIGITS METHOD

DECLINING CHARGE
METHODS
DOUBLE DECLINING METHOD
GROUP DEPRECIATION METHOD
INVENTORY SYSTEM (VALUATION)

OTHER METHODS
DEPLETION METHOD
MACHINE HOUR RATE METHOD
A. UNIFORM CHARGE METHODS

Depreciation is charged uniformly every year for those assets which are uniformly productive. Four methods
fall in this category:
1. Fixed Instalment Method or Straight Line Method

Under this method, a fixed proportion of the original cost of the asset is written off each year so that asset
account may be reduced to its residual value at the end of its estimated economic useful life. It is assumed
that depreciation is a function of time. Depreciation is charged on a uniform basis every year till the asset is
written off.
Depreciation = Original Cost of the Fixed Assets – Estimated Scrap Value
Life of the Assets in Number of Year
Percentage of Depreciation = Depreciation x 100
Original Cost of the Fixed Assets
Note:
– Additional asset purchased during the year must be depreciated only from the date of purchase to the
close of the accounting period.
– When no date of addition is mentioned, depreciation may be charged for half of the year on the
assumption that addition was made in the middle of the year.
– Assets sold during the year should be depreciated from the beginning of the year till the date of sale.
ADVANTAGES DISADVANTAGES
– It is a simple and easy method. – The assumption that the asset shall be
– The value of the asset can be completely equally useful throughout its life seems to be
written off, i.e. the value can be reduced to illogical.
zero. – It does not take into account the effective
– This method can be applied where asset gets utilization of the asset.
depreciated because of effluxion of time like – Even though the asset is used uniformly from
furniture, equipments, patents, leasehold etc. period to period, the total charge for the use
– There is no change either in the rate or of the asset keeps on increasing every year.
amount of depreciation over the useful life of This is because cost of repairs in each
the asset. subsequent year rises though equal amount
of depreciation is written off every year.
– The value of the asset each year in the
balance sheet is reasonably fair.
Illustration 1:
A firm acquired a machinery on 1st July 2008 at a cost of ` 45,000 and spent ` 5,000 for its installation. The
firm writes off depreciation at 10% per annum on the original cost every year. The books are closed on 31st
March every year. Show Machinery Account and Depreciation Account for three years.
Solution:
Dr. Machinery Account Cr.
2008 2009
Jul 1 To Bank 45,000 Mar.31 By Depreciation
Jul 1 To Bank (Installation (10% on `50,000 for 9
Expenses) 5,000 months) 3,750
_______ Mar.31 By Balance c/d 46,250
50,000 50,000
2009 2010
April 1 To Balance b/d 46,250 Mar. 31 By Depreciation
(10% on `50,000) 5,000
_______ Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 41,250
46,250 46,250
2010 2011
(10% on `50,000) 5,000
_______ Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 36,250
41,250 41,250
2011
April 1 To Balance b/d 36,250

2009 2009
Mar.31 To Machinery A/c 3,750 Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c 3,750
2010 2010
2011 2011
120 FP-FA&A
2. Depreciation Fund (Sinking Fund) Method
Under depreciation fund method, funds are made available for the replacement of asset at the end of its
useful life. The depreciation amount is fixed and remains the same year after year and is charged to profit and
loss account every year through the creation of “depreciation fund” or “sinking fund”. The amount of annual
depreciation is invested outside the business every year in good securities bearing interest at a specified rate.
The aggregate amount of interest and annual provision is invested every year. When the asset is completely
written off or is to be replaced, the securities are sold and money realised by selling securities is used to
replace old asset. Depreciation fund account is closed by transfer of its balance to old asset account.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
(a) At the end of first year:
(i) For setting aside the amount of depreciation:
Depreciation A/c Dr. (with the installment calculated with the
To Depreciation Fund A/c help of Sinking Fund Tables)
(ii) For investing the amount of depreciation:
Depreciation Fund Investment A/c Dr. (with the amount in depreciation fund)
To Bank
Note: The depreciation account, of course, goes to the debit of Profit and Loss Account. The Depreciation
Fund Account and Depreciation Fund Investments Account are balanced and are shown in the Balance
Sheet, the former on the liabilities side and the latter on the assets side.
(b) In the second and subsequent years:
(i) For interest received on investments
Bank Dr.
To Interest on Depreciation Fund Investment A/c
(ii) For transferring interest to Depreciation Fund Account
Interest on Depreciation Fund Investment A/c Dr.
To Depreciation Fund A/c
(iii) For annual installment of depreciation:
Depreciation A/c Dr.
(iv) For investing the amount of depreciation and interest received on investment:
Depreciation Fund Investment A/c Dr. (with the total amount in depreciation fund)
To Bank
(c) At the end of the last year:
In the last year, interest is received on investments and annual installment of depreciation is transferred to
Depreciation Fund Account as usual. But the amount is not invested because at the end of the last year, old
asset is replaced by new one which will necessitate the selling of all investments. Therefore in the last year
entries Nos. (i), (ii) and (iii) are repeated. Thereafter, the following additional entries are passed.
(i) For sale of investments:
Bank Dr.
To Depreciation Fund Investment A/c
(ii) For transfer of profit or loss on sale of investments:
In case of profit :
Depreciation Fund Investment A/c Dr. (with the net profit on sale of investment
In case of loss :
Depreciation Fund A/c Dr. (with the net loss on sale of investment)
To Depreciation Fund Investment A/c
(iii) For sale of the old asset:
Bank Dr. (with the net amount realised on sale)
To Old Asset A/c
(iv) For transferring Depreciation Fund Account to Old Asset Account:
Depreciation Fund A/c Dr. (with the balance of depreciation
To Old Asset A/c fund account)
(The balance in the Old Asset Account represents profit or loss. It will be transferred to the Profit and
Loss Account.)
(v) For purchase of new asset:
New Asset A/c Dr. (with the cash realised on sale of old
To Bank assets & investments)
A separate sum is provided for replacing the There is a fixed charge for depreciation.
asset. Moreover, the charge for repairs increases every
year. Hence, the profit and loss account is unduly
burdened in later years.
Illustration 2:
A company purchased 3 years, lease on 1st April, 2008 for ` 50,000. It is decided to provide for the
replacement of the lease at the end of 3 years by setting-up a depreciation fund. It is expected that
investment will fetch at 12% p.a. Sinking fund tables shows that ` 0.296349 invested each year will produce
`1 at the end of 3 years at 12% per annum. The investments are sold for ` 28,500.
Give Lease Account, Depreciation Fund Account and Depreciation Fund Investments Account.
Solution:
Annual Depreciation = ` 50,000 x 0.296349 = ` 14,817.45
Dr. Lease Account Cr.

2008 2009
Apr. 1 To Bank 50,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 50,000
2009 2010
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 50,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 50,000
2010 2011
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 50,000 Mar.31 By Depreciation Fund A/c 47,088
______ By Profit & Loss A/c __2,912
50,000 50,000
122 FP-FA&A
Dr. Depreciation Fund Account Cr.

2009 2009
Mar.31 To Balance c/d 14,817.45 Mar.31 By Depreciation A/c 14,817.45
2010 2009
Mar.31 To Balance c/d 31,412.94 Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 14,817.45
2010
Mar.31 By Depreciation A/c 14,817.45
By Interest on
Depreciation Fund
________ Investment A/c 1,778.04
31,412.94 31,412.94
2011 2010
Mar.31 To Depreciation 2,912.00 April. 1 By Balance b/d 31,412.94
Fund Investment
A/c
To Lease A/c 47,088.00 2011
Mar.31 By Depreciation A/c 14,817.45
By Interest on
Depreciation Fund
________ Investment A/c 3,769.44
50,000.00 50,000.00
Dr. Depreciation Fund Investment Account Cr.

2009 2009
Mar.31 To Bank 14,817 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 14,817
2009
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 14,817
2010 2010
31,412 31,412
2010 2011
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 31,412 Mar.31 By Bank 28,500
______ By Depreciation Fund A/c _2,912
31,412 31,412
Illustration 3:
On 1st April 2007, Glory Ltd., purchased a machine for ` 1,10,000 and spent ` 6,000 on its installation. The
expected life of the machine is 4 years at the end of which the estimated scrap value will be ` 16,000.
Desiring to replace the machine on the expiry of its life, the company establishes a sinking fund. Investments
are expected to realize 12% interest.
On 31st March, 2011, the machine was sold off as scrap for ` 18,000 and the investments were realised at
5% less than the book value. On 1st April, 2011, a new machine was installed at a cost of ` 1,25,000, Sinking
fund tables show that Re. 0.2092 invested each year will produce Re. 1 at the end of 4 years at 12%. Show
the necessary ledger accounts in the books of Glory Ltd. for all the years.
Solution:
Dr. Machine Account Cr.

2007 To Bank (`1,10,000 2008
Apr. 1 + 16,000) 1,16,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 1,16,000
2008 2009
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 1,16,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 1,16,000
2009 2010
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 1,16,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 1,16,000
2010 2011
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 1,16,000 Mar.31 By Bank (sale of scrap) 18,000
By Sinking Fund A/c 96,470
_______ By Profit & Loss A/c __1,530
1,16,000 1,16,000
2011
Apr. 1 To Bank (installation
of new machine) 1,25,000
Dr. Sinking Fund Account Cr.

2008 2008
Mar.31 To Balance c/d 20,920 Mar.31 By Depreciation A/c 20,920
2009 2008
Mar.31 To Balance c/d 44,350 Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 20,920
2009
Mar.31 By Depreciation A/c 20,920
______ By Interest on Investment __2,510
44,350 44,350
2010 2008
2009
Mar.31 By Depreciation A/c 20,920
______ By Interest on Investment __5,322
70,592 70,592
2011 2010
Mar.31 To Sinking Fund April. 1 By Balance b/d 70,592
Investment A/c 3,530
(loss on sale) 2011
To Machinery A/c 96,470 Mar.31 By Depreciation A/c 20,937
_______ By Interest on Investment __8,471
100,000 100,000
124 FP-FA&A
Dr. Sinking Fund Investment Account Cr.

2008 2008
2008
2009 2009
Mar.31 To Bank (`20,920 + Mar.31 By Balance c/d 44,350
`2,510) 23,430 ______
44,350 44,350
2009 2010
2010
Mar. 31 To Bank (`20,920 +
` 5,322) 26,242
70,592 70,592
2010 2011 By Bank (Sale - 70,952 less
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 70,592 Mar.31 5%) 67,062
By Sinking Fund A/c (loss
______ on sale) _3,530
70,592 70,592
Working Notes:
(i) Amount required = ` 1,10,000 + ` 6,000 - ` 16,000 = ` 1,00,000

(ii) Annual contribution is therefore ` 1,00,000 X ` 0.2092 = ` 20,920
(iii) Accounting period must be assumed to end on 31st March.
(iv) In order to make sinking fund at ` 1,00,000, the depreciation amount in last year is suitably adjusted.
3. Insurance Policy Method

Under this method, the business takes an insurance policy for required amount to replace the asset when it is
worn out. A fixed amount of premium is paid every year. However, this amount will have to be paid in the
beginning of each year. At the end of the specified period, the insurance company pays the agreed amount
with which the new asset can be purchased.
(a) First year and subsequent years:
(i) At the beginning of the year, for insurance premium paid:
Depreciation Insurance Policy A/c Dr.
To Bank
(ii) At the end of the year:
Profit and Loss A/c Dr.
To Depreciation Reserve A/c
(b) At the end of the last year :
(i) On realisation of money from the insurance company:
Bank Dr.
To Depreciation Insurance Policy A/c
(ii) For transfer of profit on insurance policy:
Depreciation Insurance Policy A/c Dr.
To Depreciation Reserve A/c
(iii) For transfer of accumulated depreciation to the Asset Account:
Depreciation Reserve A/c Dr.
To Asset A/c
(iv) On purchase of new asset :
New Asset A/c Dr.
To Bank
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SINKING FUND METHOD AND INSURANCE POLICY METHOD
Sinking Fund Method Insurance Policy Method
(i) Interest is an integral part of sinking fund (i) Interest is not considered under insurance
method policy method
(ii) Investment in securities is the basic feature (ii) The money is not invested in any outside
of sinking fund method securities under insurance policy method.
Only an insurance policy is taken for the
required amount to replace the asset at the
end of the useful life of the asset.
(iii) Under sinking fund method, investments are (iii) Premium is paid in advance at the beginning
made at the end of the accounting period. of the year under insurance policy method.
(iv) Under sinking fund method, the amount (iv) But, under insurance policy method, the
realised is affected by fluctuations in interest amount realised at the end of the life of the
rate and value of securities. asset is fixed.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. The amount of depreciation charged remains same in __________

methods of depreciation.
2. Premium is paid at the _____ of the year under insurance policy

method.
Illustration 4:
A firm purchases a lease for 3 for years for ` 60,000 on 1.4.2008. It decides to provide for its replacement by
means of an insurance policy for ` 60,000. The annual premium is ` 19,000. On 1.4.2010, the lease is
renewed for a further period of 3 years for ` 60,000. You are required to show necessary ledger accounts.
Books are closed on 31st March every year.
126 FP-FA&A
Solution:
2008 2009
Apr. 1 To Bank 60,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 60,000
2009 2010
2010 2011
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 60,000 Mar.31 By Depreciation Reserve A/c 60,000
Dr. Depreciation Insurance Policy Account Cr.
2008 2009
Apr. 1 To Bank (premium) 19,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 19,000
2009
2010
To Bank 19,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 38,000
38,000 38,000
2010 2011
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 38,000 Mar.31 By Bank 60,000
To Bank 19,000
To Depreciation 3,000
Reserve A/c (profit
transferred) ______ ______
60,000 60,000
Dr. Depreciation Reserve Account Cr.
2009 2009
Mar.31 To Balance c/d 19,000 Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c 19,000
2010 2009
2010
______ Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c 19,000
38,000 38,000
2011 2010
Mar.31 To Lease A/c 60,000 Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 38,000
2011
Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c 19,000
By Depreciation Insurance
______ Policy A/c` 3,000
60,000 60,000
4. Annuity Method
The annuity method considers that the business besides losing the original cost of the asset also loses
interest on the amount used for buying the asset, which would have been earned in case the same amount
would have been invested in some other form of investment. Thus, this method takes into account the interest
factor. The amount of interest is calculated on the book value of the asset in the beginning of each year. The
amount of depreciation is uniform and is determined on the basis of annuity table.
Journal Entries
(i) On purchase of the asset:
Asset Account Dr.
To Bank
(ii) For charging interest on asset:
Asset Account Dr.
To Interest Account
(iii) For charging depreciation:
To Asset Account
(iv) For transfer of Interest Account to Profit and Loss Account:
Interest Account Dr.
To Profit and Loss Account
(v) For transfer of Depreciation Account to Profit and Loss Account:
Illustration 5:
A firm purchased a lease-hold property on 1st April 2006 for 5 years at a cost of ` 5,00,000. It decided to write
off the lease by annuity method presuming the rate of interest at 14%. The annuity table shows that annual
amount necessary to write off Re. 1 in 5 years at 14% is ` 0.291284. Show the lease account for 5 years.
Calculations to be made to the nearest rupee.
Solution:
2006 2007
April 1 To Bank 5,00,000 Mar.31 By Depreciation
2007 (`5,00,000 x 0.291284) 1,45,642
Mar.31 To Interest
(14% of 5,00,000) __70,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 4,24,358
5,70,000 5,70,000
2007 2008
April 1 To Balance b/d 4,24,358 Mar. 31 By Depreciation
2008 (`5,00,000 x 0.291284) 1,45,642
Mar.31 To Interest Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 3,38,126
(14% of 4,24,358) __59,410 ________
4,83,768 4,83,768
2008 2009
2009 (`5,00,000 x 0.291284) 1,45,642
(14% of 3,38,126) 47,338 ________
3,85,464 3,85,464
128 FP-FA&A
2009 2010
2010 (`5,00,000 x 0.291284) 1,45,642
(14% of 2,39,822) _33,575 ________
2,73,397 2,73,397
2010 2011
2011 (`5,00,000 x 0.291284) 1,45,642
Mar.31 To Interest _17,887 _______
1,45,642 1,45,642
Working Notes:
– Amount of depreciation ` 5,00,000 x ` 0.291284 = ` 1,45,642
– The amount of depreciation is fixed for all the years.
– The amount of interest is reduced every year because it is calculated on the written down balance.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN SINKING FUND AND ANNUITY METHODS OF DEPRECIATION
(i) Under sinking fund method, the annual amount is set aside to a separate fund account. However, the
annual amount is not set aside to a separate fund account in annuity method.
(ii) Since annual amount set aside are invested in outside securities, sufficient funds will be available for
replacement of asset under sinking fund method. However, there is no provision of funds at the time of
replacement of assets in annuity method.
(iii) In sinking fund method, as the investment is made at the end of the first year, the first interest is
earned only during the second year. In annuity method, interest is assumed to accrue in the first year
of purchase of asset, therefore, it is charged from the end of the first year.
(iv) Under sinking fund method, the total depreciation is less than the asset’s depreciable cost due to
deduction of interest. However, in annuity method, as the interest is added to the cost of the assets,
the total depreciation is more than the depreciable cost of the asset.
(v) Under sinking fund method, interest is actually realised since it is to be received from investments
outside the business. In annuity method, interest is only assumed as against actual receipt.
(vi) Under sinking fund method, annual net effect on profit and loss account is same because of uniform
fixed amount of depreciation. However, in annuity method, annual net effect on profit and loss account
increases due to fixed depreciation charge and declining interest.
(vii) Under sinking fund method, interest realised is credited to sinking fund account, while interest is
credited to profit and loss account and debited to asset account in annuity method.
B. DECLINING CHARGE METHODS
The amount of depreciation charged decreases for each subsequent year of the assets’ life. This method can
be applied:
(a) When the asset becomes old and receipts decline or
(b) When it is necessary to charge depreciation according to the asset’s expected earnings.
The following three methods fall in this category.
1. Diminishing Balance Method (Reducing Balance Method)
Under this method, depreciation is calculated at a certain percentage each year on the balance of the asset
which is brought forward from the previous year. The amount of depreciation charged on each period is not
fixed but it goes on decreasing gradually as the beginning balance of the asset in each year will reduce. Thus,
amount of depreciation becomes higher at the earlier periods and becomes gradually lower in subsequent
periods, when repairs and maintenance charges increase gradually.
Depreciation = 1 – Net Residual Value

n
Cost of Acquisitio n
Rate of Depreciation = 1 – n
Where, n = life of the asset in years.
– It is a simple and easy method. – It is difficult to determine an appropriate rate of
depreciation.
– Every year, there is an equal burden for using the – The value of the asset cannot be brought down to
asset. This is because depreciation goes on zero.
decreasing every year whereas cost of repairs
increases.
– The obsolescence problem is given due care – Depreciation is neither based on the use of the
since major part of the depreciation is charged in asset nor distributed evenly throughout the useful
earlier years and the management may find it life of the asset.
easy to replace the asset.
– Income tax authorities recognize this method.
 All items including additions are added together

and depreciated at the same rate.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN STRAIGHT LINE METHOD AND DIMINISHING BALANCE METHOD

OF DEPRECIATION
Straight Line Method Diminishing Balance Method
(i) Depreciation is charged at a fixed rate on the (i) Depreciation is charged at a fixed rate on
original cost of the asset. the original cost in the first year and on the
written down value (cost-minus total
depreciation) in the subsequent years.
(ii) The amount of depreciation remains the same (ii) The amount of depreciation goes on
in all the years of useful life of the asset. decreasing year after year.
(iii) The total burden on the profit and loss (iii) The total burden on the profit and loss
account is more in the later years because the account is almost same in the early years as
repair charges increase while the amount of well as is the later years because of more
depreciation remains the same. depreciation plus repairs cost in the
beginning and less depreciation plus more
repairs cost in the later years.
(iv) The book value of the asset becomes zero or (iv) The book value never becomes zero.
equal to scrap value.
(v) It is easy to calculate the rate of depreciation. (v) It requires the use of mathematical tables.
(vi) It is suitable where repair charges are less (vi) It is suited where repair charges are more in
and obsolescence is not frequent. later years and also where there is
obsolescence.
130 FP-FA&A
Illustration 6:
A firm acquired machinery on 1st July 2008 at a cost of ` 45,000 and spent ` 5,000 for its installation. The
firm writes off depreciation at 10% per annum on diminishing balance method. The books are closed on 31st
March every year. Show Machinery Account and Depreciation Account for three years.
Solution:
2008 2009
Jul 1 To Bank 45,000 Mar.31 By Depreciation
Jul 1 To Bank (Installation (10% on `50,000 for 9
Expenses) 5,000 months) 3,750
______ Mar.31 By Balance c/d 46,250
50,000 50,000
2009 2010
(10% on ` 46,250) 4,625
______ Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 41,625
46,250 46,250
2010 2011
(10% on ` 41,625) 4,163
______ Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 37,462
41,625 41,625
2011
2009 2009
2010 2010
2011 2011
2. Sum of Years’ Digits Method

In this method, the charge for depreciation for an accounting period is calculated in proportion of the
remaining life of the asset at the beginning of every accounting period. The rate of depreciation is determined
by the fraction where denominator is the sum of the digits representing the life of the asset and the
numerators are individual digits used in the life of asset taken in reverse order.
Depreciation goes on decreasing every year.
Depreciation = Remaining life of the asset including current year x Cost of the asset
Sum of the digits of the life of asset in years
3. Double Declining Balance Method

This method is similar to reducing balance method explained above except that the rate of depreciation is
double the straight line rate. Allowance for scrap value of the asset should not be allowed.
Advantages:
– The total cost of the asset is evenly spread over the economic life of the asset and such annual charge
includes cost of depreciation and repairs.
– Initially, the depreciation charged is more compared to subsequent years. This is advantageous since
there is considerable tax-saving, demand for funds in the initial year is more and money at present is
more beneficial than money in future.
C. OTHER METHODS
1. Depletion Method
This method is applicable in case of wasting assets, e.g. mines, quarries, oil well etc. from which a certain
quantity of output is expected to be obtained.
Under this, depreciation is charged on the basis of output extracted in comparison with the estimated total
contents of mine.
Rate of Depreciation = Total cost of mine
Total units
Depreciation = Quantity extracted during the year X Rate of Depreciation
– It relates depreciation with the use of the – It is difficult to estimate the output correctly.
asset.
2. Machine Hour Rate Method (Service Hours Method)

Under Machine hour rate method, depreciation is allocated in proportion to the degree of asset used for
production. The useful life of the asset is fixed in terms of hours. This method of depreciation can be charged
on plant, machinery, vehicles etc.
Rate of Depreciation = Original Cost of Asset - Scrap Value
Life of the Asset in Hours
Depreciation = Actual number of hours x Rate of Depreciation
Depreciation is related to actual working time of This method can be used only when the life of the
the asset. asset can be measured in terms of hours.
3. Group Depreciation Method

Assets having same average life expectancy are grouped together. Depreciation is not charged for each item
but is charged for the group as a whole.
4. Inventory System of Depreciation

In case of assets of small value, the life of the asset cannot be accurately determined, e.g., loose tools, cattle
etc. Depreciation in this case will be calculated as follows:
Value of asset at the beginning of the year XXX
Add : Additions during the year XXX
Total XXX
Less : Estimated value of asset at the end of the year XXX
Depreciation for the year XXX
132 FP-FA&A
CHANGE IN METHOD OF DEPRECIATION
Consistency principle of accounting requires that same accounting practices and methods should be
observed and followed from year to year as otherwise the reported profit or loss will not be comparable.
Hence, it is expected that the concern should consistently follow the method of depreciation which is once
chosen. However, sometimes, a change in the method becomes inevitable.
According to “Accounting Standard-6 (AS-6) Depreciation Accounting”, issued by the Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India, when a change in the method of depreciation is made, depreciation is re-calculated in
accordance with the new method from the date of asset coming into use. In brief, change in method is
permitted retrospectively, that is, from the date of purchase of existing assets.
Steps for change in method of depreciation
– Calculate the value of asset by the new method on the date of change.
– Calculate the depreciation of the past period of asset by both the existing and new method.
– Find the difference between the both.
– Then the difference has to be adjusted in the current year’s asset account by giving debit or credit to
profit and loss account.
Illustration 7:
M Ltd. which depreciates its machinery @ 10% per annum according to diminishing balance method, had on
1st April, 2010 ` 4,86,000 balance in its machinery account. During the year ended 31st March, 2011, the
machinery purchased on 1st April, 2008 for ` 60,000 was sold for ` 40,000 on 1st October, 2010 and a new
machinery costing ` 70,000 was purchased and installed on the same date; installation charges being `
5,000.
The company wants to change its method of depreciation from diminishing balance method to straight line
method w.e.f. 1st April, 2008 and adjust the difference before 31st March, 2011, the rate of depreciation
remaining the same as before.
Show the machinery account for the year ended 31st March, 2011.
Solution:

2010 2010
Apr. 1 To Balance b/d 4,86,000 Oct. 1 By Bank 40,000
Oct. 1 To Bank (cost and By Profit and Loss A/c
installation charges) __75,000 (loss on sale of 6,170
machinery)
2011
Mar. 31 By Depreciation A/c 60,180
By Profit and Loss A/c
(Additional
depreciation)
5,400
_______ By Balance c/d 4,49,250
_5,61,000 5,61,000
Working Notes:
`
(1) Calculation of loss on sale of machinery:
Cost of machinery on April 1, 2008 60,000
Less: Depreciation for 2008-09 6,000
54,000
Less: Depreciation for 2009-10 5,400
48,600
Less: Depreciation for half year 2,430
Book value as on 1st October, 2010 46,170
Less: Amount realised from sale 40,000
Loss on sale 6,170
(2) Additional depreciation:
 100 100 
Cost of machinery on 1st April, 2008  4,86, 000    6,00,000
 90 90 
Book value on 1st April, 2008 for machinery sold in 2010 60,000
Book value on 1st April, 2008 on original group 5,40,000
Depreciation for 2 years (2008-09 and 2009-10) @ 10% on ` 5,40,000 1,08,000
Less: Depreciation provided for 2 years under diminishing balance method 1,02,600
(` 54,000 + `48,600) ______
Additional depreciation due to change in the system charged to profit and loss account 5,400
______
(3) Depreciation for 2010-11
On machinery sold 2,430
On machinery purchased and installed 3,750
On machinery brought from previous year (i.e. on ` 5,40,000 on straight line method) 54,000
______
60,180
______
CALCULATION OF PROFIT OR LOSS ON ASSETS SOLD

Assets may be sold or discarded before or on the expiry of its useful life. Then it is necessary to calculate the
profit or loss, if any, on such sale. For this purpose the book value of the assets at the date of sale is to be
calculated by deducting the total depreciation from the date of purchase to the date of sale from the original
cost. If the sale price is more than the book value there is profit on sale of the assets and if the sale price is
less than the book value, the difference will be loss on sale.
Profit or loss on sale of assets = Sale price of asset - Book value of the asset on the date of
sale
Book value of the asset on the date of sale = Original cost of the asset – Total depreciation
on the asset till that date
134 FP-FA&A
The following journal entries are passed to record the above transactions when the depreciation is
directly credited to the asset account:
(i) On sale of assets:
Bank Dr.
To Assets Account (with the sale price)
(ii) For profit on sale of asset:
Asset Account Dr.
(In case of loss the above entry is reversed.)
When Provision for Depreciation Account is maintained then the asset account appears at its cost
price and the following accounting procedure is followed:
(i) Transfer of accumulated depreciation including the depreciation created at the time of sale:
Provision for Depreciation Account Dr.
To Asset Account
(ii) On sale of the asset:
Bank Dr.
To Asset Account
(iii) If the amount of accumulated depreciation and sale price put together is less than the original cost of
the asset, the difference is loss on sale and transferred to profit and loss account:
To Asset Account
(iv) In case the accumulated depreciation and sale price put together is more than the original cost of the
asset, the difference is treated as profit on sale and is credited to profit and loss account:
Asset Account Dr.
When Provision for Depreciation Account is maintained on sale of asset, alternatively, it is suggested
to open an `Asset Disposal Account’ in such case the following accounting entries may be passed:
(i) On transfer of original cost of asset to Asset Disposal Account:
Asset Disposal Account Dr.
To Asset Account
(ii) On sale of the asset:
Bank Dr.
To Asset Disposal Account
(iii) On transfer of Provision for Depreciation Account to Asset Disposal Account:
Provision for Depreciation Account Dr.
To Asset Disposal Account
(iv) For profit on disposal of asset:
Asset Disposal Account Dr.
(In case of loss the above entry is reversed.)
Illustration 8:
On 1st April, 2008, a firm purchased a machinery for ` 2,00,000. On 1st October in the same accounting year,
additional machinery costing ` 1,00,000 was purchased. On 1st October, 2009, the machinery purchased on
1st April, 2008, having become obsolete, was sold off for ` 90,000. On 1st October, 2010, new machinery
was purchased for ` 2, 50,000 while the machinery purchased on 1st October, 2008 was sold for ` 85,000 on
the same day.
The firm provides depreciation on its machinery @ 10% per annum on original cost on 31st March every year.
Show machinery account, provision for depreciation account and depreciation account for the period of three
accounting years ending 31st March, 2011.
Solution:

2008 2009
Apr. 1 To Bank 2,00,000 Mar.31 By Balance c/d 3,00,000
Oct. 1 To Bank 1,00,000
3,00,000 3,00,000
2009 2009
By Provision for
depreciation A/c 30,000
By Profit & Loss A/c 80,000
2010
_______ Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 1,00,000
3,00,000 3,00,000
2010 2010
Oct. 1 To Bank 2,50,000 By Provision for 20,000
depreciation A/c
To Profit & Loss A/c 5,000 2011
_______ Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 2,50,000
3,55,000 3,55,000

2009 To Provision for 2009
Mar.31 depreciation A/c 25,000 Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c 25,000
Oct. 1 depreciation A/c 10,000 Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c 10,000
2010 To Provision for
Mar.31 depreciation A/c 10,000 ______
20,000 20,000
Oct. 1 depreciation A/c 5,000 Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c 17,500
2011 To Provision for
Mar.31 depreciation A/c 12,500 ______
17,500 17,500
136 FP-FA&A
Dr. Provision for Depreciation Account Cr.

2009 2009 By Depreciation A/c
Mar.31 To Balance c/d 25,000 Mar.31 (` 20,000 + 5,000) 25,000
2009 To Machinery A/c 2009
Oct. 1 (` 20,000 + 10,000) 30,000 Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 25,000
Oct. 1 By Depreciation A/c 10,000
2010 2010
45,000 45,000
2010 To Machinery A/c 2010
Oct. 1 (` 5,000 + 10,000 + Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 15,000
5,000) 20,000
Oct. 1 By Depreciation A/c 5,000
2011 2011
32,500 32,500
2011
Apr.1 By Balance b/d 12,500
DEPRECIATION AND REPLACEMENT OF ASSETS

In the context of present inflationary conditions, it will be appropriate to provide for depreciation on the
replacement cost instead of on the historical cost. This is because of the fact that depreciation is provided for
replacing the asset. Sufficient funds will not be available for replacing an asset at the end of its serviceable life. If
depreciation is provided on the basis of historical cost, there is substantial increase in the cost of the new asset
to replace the old asset. But following difficulties may crop up when replacement cost system is used:
(a) Estimating replacement cost in advance is difficult.
(b) The method of charging depreciation on the basis of replacement cost is not recognized by income tax
authorities.
(c) The method of charging depreciation on replacement cost during inflationary conditions is preferred
but not during period of falling prices.
(d) According to the Companies Act, depreciation should be charged on the original cost of the asset and
any deficiency or surplus arising due to sale of such asset should be transferred to the profit and loss
account.
(e) Any new asset purchased, with few exceptions, is always of a better quality than the asset replaced.
Hence, it is difficult to calculate the cost of the asset replaced.
These difficulties can be obviated by taking the following steps:
(a) The additional amount required for replacing the asset over and above the original cost of the asset
may be estimated. Every year, an appropriate amount may be transferred from profit and loss account
besides usual depreciation on asset to provide for additional amount required for replacement of the
asset over and above the original cost of the asset. It may be debited to Profit and Loss Appropriation
Account and credited to Replacement Reserve account.
(b) The Replacement Reserve Account may be credited every year with interest at the current rate on the
accumulated balance standing on the credit of the account.
LESSON ROUND UP
– Depreciation is the process of allocation of cost of the asset to the period of its useful life. It is not the
process of valuation of asset.
 – Depreciation is used for recording the expired utility of a physical asset.
– Causes of depreciation are: physical wear and tear; deterioration in value of asset; disuse; depletion;
obsolescence; accidents, etc.
– Depreciation is provided to: ascertain the correct profit; present correct financial position; make
provision for replacement of asset; ascertain proper cost of the product; maintain uniform rate of
return; attain maximum tax benefit; to meet the legal requirements, etc.
– The main factors in measurement of depreciation are: total cost of the asset; estimated useful life;
estimated residual value, etc.
– The various methods of depreciation are: fixed installment method or straight line method; diminishing
balance method or written down value method and other methods.
– In order to adjust depreciation for past periods due to change of method, depreciation is to be
calculated for the past period of asset used both by existing as well as by the changed method and the
difference is adjusted in the current year’s asset account by giving debit or credit to profit and loss
account.
GLOSSARY
Depreciation Depreciation is a process of allocating the cost of a fixed asset over its
estimated useful life in a rational and systematic manner.
Useful Economic Life Useful economic life of an asset is either the period over which a depreciable
asset is expected to be used by the organization or the number of production
or similar units expected to be obtained from the use of the asset by the
organization.
Depreciable Value It is the cost price of the asset less scrap value or salvage value of the
asset.
Salvage Value The estimated value of an asset at the end of its useful life.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
Theory Questions
1. Why is correct calculation of depreciation necessary?
2. What are the methods of providing depreciation?
3. Discuss the various factors which are considered for calculating depreciation.
4. What are the various causes of depreciation on fixed assets?
5. Distinguish between straight line and diminishing balance methods of depreciation.
6. What do you mean by replacement cost? What are the difficulties faced while providing for
depreciation on the basis of replacement cost? What steps may be taken to obviate these difficulties?
138 FP-FA&A
7. Distinguish between sinking fund and annuity methods of depreciation.
8. “Depreciation is a process of allocation and not of valuation”. Comment.
Practical Questions
1. Deva Ltd. charges depreciation on its plant and machinery @10% per annum on the diminishing
balance method. On 31st March, 2011, the company decides to adopt straight line method of charging
depreciation with retrospective effect from 1st April, 2007, the rate of depreciation being 15%. On 1st
April, 2010, the plant and machinery account stood in the books at ` 2,91,600. On 1st July, 2010, a
sum of ` 65,000 was realised by selling a machine cost of which on 1st April, 2007 was ` 90,000. On
1st January, 2011, a new machine was acquired at a cost of ` 1,50,000. Show the plant and
machinery account in the books of the company for the year ended 31st March, 2011.
2. A firm acquired a machine for ` 5,00,000 on 1.4.2008. Depreciation was to be charged at 20% p.a. on
straight line method. During 2010-11, a modification was made to improve machine’s technical
reliability at a cost of ` 50,000 which it was considered would extend the useful to life of machine for 2
years. At the same time one important component of the machine was replaced at a cost of ` 10,000
because of excess wear and tear. Routine maintenance during the said accounting period cost `
7,500. Show the machine account, provision for depreciation on machine account and charge to profit
and loss account for the year ending 31st March, 2011.
3. Suman Enterprises purchased machinery on 1st April 2008 for `71,800 and paid `3,200 on its
installation. New machinery was acquired for `45,000 on October 1, 2008. On 1st April 2009, first
machinery was sold at `50,000 and on the same date fresh machinery was purchased for `45,000.
Depreciation is provided annually on 31st March at 10% p.a on written down value method. On April 1,
2010 the firm changed the method of providing depreciation and decided to provide depreciation at
10% p.a on the original cost with retrospective effect. Prepare machinery account to ascertain the
value of machinery as on 31st March 2011.
4. Simmon Ltd., charges deprecation on its plant and machinery @ 10% per annum on the diminishing
balance method. On 31st March, 2011, the company decided to adopt straight line method of charging
depreciation with retrospective effect from 1st April, 2008, the rate of depreciation being 15% p.a.
5. On 1st April, 2010, the plant and machinery account stood in the books of account at `5,00,000. On
1st August, 2010 a sum of `1,00,000 was realised by selling a machine the cost of which on 1st April,
2008 was `1,50,000. On 1st January, 2011 a new machine was acquired at a cost of `3,00,000. Show
the plant and machinery account in the books of the company for the year ended 31st March, 2011.
140 FP-FA&A
Lesson 7
Preparation of Final Accounts for Sole
Proprietors
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Introduction A sole trader is the sole owner and manager of
– Trading Account the business. At the end of a accounting year the
– Profit & Loss Account sole trader would like to know the financial results
– Main Principles for preparation of Trading and the financial position of his business. He
and Profit & Loss Account would be interested to know the profits or losses
– Difference between Trading and Profit & made by the business. For this purpose, he would
Loss Account prepare income statements i.e. trading and profit
– Review Questions and loss accounts. He would also be interested
– Balance Sheet to know the financial position of the business
– Classification of Assets which will be ascertained through the preparation
– Classification of Liabilities of balance sheet. Trading, profit and loss account
– Differences between Trading and Profit & and balance sheet together are called final
Loss Account accounts.
After recording transactions of a business for an
– Differences between Trial Balance and
accounting period in subsidiary books, posting
Balance Sheet
in the ledger and testing their accuracy with the
– Adjustment Entries
help of a trial balance, the last stage in the
– Closing Entries
accounting process is the preparation of final
– Manufacturing Account
accounts. In this lesson, we will learn in detail
– Limitations of Financial Statements
about the preparation of final accounts for a sole
– Lesson Round Up trading firm.
– Glossary
You have to know accounting. Its the language of practical business life. It was a very useful thing to
deliver to civilization. I’ve heard it came to civilization through Venice which ofcourse was once the
great commercial power in the mediterrarean. However, double entry book keeping was a hell of an
invention.
Charlie Munger
142 FP-FA&A
INTRODUCTION
Final Accounts or Financial Statements are the end products of the financial accounting process which
involves the preparation of a summary of the accounts with a view to determine:
(i) net profit from the trading activities in terms of profit made or loss incurred for a given period, and
(ii) its financial position in terms of assets and liabilities as on the last date of the given period.
For the purpose of determining the profit or loss, a statement known as Trading and Profit and Loss Account
(Income Statement) is prepared which incorporates all items of expenses and losses and all incomes and
gains occurring during the accounting period.
In order to show the financial position on the last date of the accounting period, another statement known as
Balance Sheet (Position Statement) is prepared which consists of all assets, liabilities and capital of the
business. These two statements are collectively known as Final Accounts.
Final Accounts are prepared from the balances appearing in the trial balance. Debit balances of assets are
transferred on the right hand side of the balance sheet while expenses and losses are debited to the Trading
Account or to the Profit and Loss Account, depending upon the nature of expenditure or loss. Credit account
balances like capital, liabilities, provisions and reserves are entered on the left hand side of the balance sheet
while incomes and gains are credited to Trading Account or Profit and Loss Account.
TRADING ACCOUNT
Trading Account is the first part of income statement which
is prepared to ascertain the gross profit or gross loss for a Gross Profit = Net Sales – Cost of the
given accounting period. Goods Sold.
Trading Account is prepared before the preparation of Gross Loss = Cost of the Goods Sold –
profit & loss account. It shows the result of trading Sales
activities relating to purchases & sales of goods &
Net Sales = Total Sales – Sales Returns
services. Trading account is prepared to calculate
(Return Inwards)
separately the profit from sale & purchase transactions
only. The profit or loss is termed as gross profit or loss as Cost of goods sold = Opening stock of
various other expenses of an organsiation like goods + net purchases - closing stock of
administrative, selling & distribution, maintenance goods at the end + all direct expense
expenses etc. are not deduction. Only the direct expenses
Net Purchases = Total Purchase –
which are incurred to bring goods into saleable condition
Purchases Returns (Return Inwards)
like freight, insurance, carriage inwards, rent & rates, fuel,
power, royalties on production, consumption of stores etc.
are taken into account to calculate gross profit/loss.
SPECIMEN OF TRADING ACCOUNT

Dr. Trading Account for the year ended...... Cr.
To Opening Stock XXX By Sales XXX
To Purchases XXX Less: Return Inwards XXX
Less: Return Outwards XXX By Closing Stock XXX
To Direct Expenses XXX
To Gross Profit (Balancing XXX
Figure)
____ ____
XXX XXX
– In case debit side exceeds the credit side, the balance will be gross loss and that will be shown on the
credit side of Trading Account as “By Gross Loss”.
– In trading account, closing stock is shown at cost price or net realisable price market value whichever
is lower.
Lesson 7  Preparation of Final Accounts for Sole Proprietors 143
– While taking stock for the purpose of preparation of trading account, stock in hand on the last day of
the accounting year should be adjusted for purchases recorded but goods not yet received, goods sold
but not yet delivered and goods that may be out of business premises because of consignment, goods
delivered on sale or return basis, etc.
– Gross profit or gross loss revealed by Trading Account is transferred to Profit and Loss Account.
PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT
Profit and Loss Account is prepared to calculate the net profit or loss of
the business for a given accounting period. The balance of Trading Net profit = Total Revenues –
Account i.e. gross profit/gross loss is transferred to the Profit and Loss Total Expenses
Account which is the starting point of the preparation of this account.
Thereafter, all those expenses and losses which have not been debited Net Loss = Total Expenses –
already to the Trading Account are debited to the Profit and Loss Total Revenues
Account. Other incomes and gains, if any, are credited to this account,
e.g. interest earned or commission received etc. The net profit, thus arrived, is transferred to Capital Account
of the proprietor/partners. Specimen of Profit & Loss Account is given on next page. Net profit increases the
capital whereas net loss decreases the capital.
MAIN PRINCIPLES FOR PREPARATION OF TRADING AND PROFIT & LOSS ACCOUNT
The following principles must be kept in mind while preparing Trading and Profit & Loss Account:
– Only revenue receipts i.e. sale proceeds and other incomes should be entered.
– Only revenue expenses together with losses should be taken into account.
– Profit or loss is determined by matching revenues and expenses according to the matching principle.
Application of Concept of Matching Principle
A fundamental principle which must be observed while preparing final accounts is that of `matching cost
and revenue’. It means that in final accounts, expenses and incomes for the full trading period whether
they have been paid or received or not, must be included and no expenditure or income which does not
pertain to the period for which final accounts are being prepared be included. The distinction between
capital and revenue items is also made on the basis of this principle.
DIFFERNCE BETWEEN TRADING AND ACCOUNT PROFIT & LOSS ACCOUNT
Trading Account Profit and Loss Account

(i) Trading account is prepared to calculate the (i) Profit and loss account is prepared to arrive
gross profit (loss) for a particular period. at the net profit (loss)
(ii) In trading account, cost of goods sold, sales (ii) In profit and loss account, indirect expenses,
and direct expenses are accounted. such as administrative expenses, selling
expenses, etc, are charged against the gross
(iii) The result of trading account i.e. gross profit profit and other revenues.
(loss) is transferred to profit and loss (iii) The balance in profit and loss account i.e. net
account. profit (loss) is transferred to capital account
which will be shown in the balance sheet.
SPECIMEN OF PROFIT & LOSS ACCOUNT

Profit & Loss Account for the year ended......
Dr. Cr.
To Gross Loss b/d XXX By Gross Profit b/d XXX
Management expenses: Other income:
To Salaries (administrative) XXX By Discount received XXX
To Office rent, rates and taxes XXX By Commission received XXX
To Printing and stationery XXX Non-trading income:
To Telephone charges XXX By Bank interest XXX
To Postage and telegrams XXX By Rent of property let-out XXX
144 FP-FA&A
To Insurance XXX By Dividend from shares XXX
To Audit fees XXX By Dividend from shares XXX
To Legal charges XXX Abnormal gains:
To Electricity charges XXX By Profit on sale of machinery XXX
Maintenance expenses: By Profit in sale of investment XXX
To Repairs and renewals XXX By Net Loss (transferred to Capital A/c)
To Depreciation on: (Balancing Figure) XXX
Office equipment XXX
Office furniture XXX
Office building XXX
Selling and distribution expenses:
To Salaries (selling staff) XXX
To Advertisement XXX
To Godown rent XXX
To Carriage outwards XXX
To Bad debts XXX
To Provision for bad debts XXX
To Selling commission XXX
Financial expenses:
To Bank charges XXX
To Interest on loans XXX
To Discount on bills XXX
To Discount allowed to customers XXX
Abnormal losses:
To Loss on sale of machinery XXX
To Loss on sale of investment XXX
To Loss by fire XXX
To Net Profit (transferred to Capital XXX
A/c) (Balancing Figure) ____ ____
XXX XXX
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Fill in the blanks:
(i) Trading account reveals __________ profit or _________ loss.
(ii) Profit and loss account reveals _________ profit or _________ loss.
(iii) Expenses appear on _________ side of trading and profit and loss
account.
(iv) Provision for bad debts account shows _________ balance.
(v) Reserve for discount on creditors account shows ________ balance.
(vi) Carriage inwards appears in ____________ account, whereas
carriage outwards appears in ___________ account.
Decide whether the following statements are true or false:
(i) Trade expenses account is transferred to trading account.
(ii) Capital account appears on assets side of balance sheet.
(iii) Drawing account is revenue expenditure to be shown on debit side of profit and loss account.
(iv) If trading account reveals gross loss, profit and loss account results in net profit in any case.
(v) Interest on capital and salary to proprietor are incomes and hence are shown on credit side of profit
and loss account.
Tick the correct answers:
(i) What type of account is goodwill? Fictitious/Intangible
(ii) What type of account is furniture? Fixed/Current
(iii) On which side of balance sheet is unexpired insurance shown? Assets/Liabilities
(iv) Which type of items appear in profit and loss account? Revenue/Capital/Both
(v) Is balance sheet an account or a statement? An Account/A Statement
(vi) Where will amount spent on stationery appear? In Profit and Loss Account/
In Balance Sheet.
BALANCE SHEET
Balance sheet is a statement which shows the financial position i.e. the balances of assets, liabilities and
capital, of a business entity at a given date. It is prepared from the real accounts and personal accounts of
trial balance. A debit balance in a real account or personal account represents an asset of the concern/firm.
Likewise a credit balance in a personal account represents a liability. There can be some newly opened
accounts as well on account of adjustment entries. These assets and liabilities are arranged in a proper way
and the resultant statement is the balance sheet. On the right hand side, assets are arranged while on the left
hand side, liabilities are recorded. The totals of the two sides of the balance sheet must agree because of the
equation, viz. Assets = Liabilities + Capital.
If there is a difference, it means that there is some mistake. The difference, if it does occur, should be placed
on the deficit side as Suspense Account to make the two sides agree apparently.
Features of Balance Sheet
– The primary objective of the preparation of balance sheet is to ascertain the financial position of a
concern.
– It shows (a) the nature and value of assets, (b) the nature and value of liabilities and (c) the position of
capital.
– Balance sheet is always prepared on a certain date, never for a particular period.
– Balance sheet, unlike a trading and profit and loss account, is not an account. It is a statement
containing information regarding assets, liabilities and capital.
Marshalling of Balance Sheet
The arrangement of assets and liabilities in accordance with a particular order is known as marshalling of
balance sheet. The items in the balance sheet are generally marshaled in two ways-
(i) Liquidity order or according to time: In liquidity order, the assets are stated in the order in which they
can be easily converted into cash and the liabilities in the order in which they have to be paid off.
(ii) Permanence order or according to purpose: In permanence order, assets which are to be used
permanently in the business and are not meant for sale are shown first and the assets that are liquid are
shown last in order. Similarly, liabilities may also be shown according to the permanence arrangement.
Specimen of Balance Sheet in permanence order is given below. The order will be reversed in liquidity
order.
146 FP-FA&A
SPECIMEN OF BALANCE SHEET
Balance Sheet as at...

Liabilities ` Assets `
Capital XXX Goodwill XXX
Add : Net profit XXX Land and building XXX
Less : Drawings XXX XXX Plant and machinery XXX
Loans on mortgages XXX Furniture and fixtures XXX
Outstanding expenses XXX Stock XXX
Bank overdraft XXX Sundry debtors XXX
Sundry creditors XXX Investments XXX
Bills payable XXX Bills receivable XXX
Cash at bank XXX
____ Cash in hand XXX
XXXX XXXX
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Arrange the following assets in order of their liquidity:

Furniture, Goodwill, Stock in trade, Unexpired insurance, Cash in hand,
Trade debtors, Readily saleable investments, Cash at bank, Land,
Buildings, Machinery, Bills receivable.
2. Arrange the following liabilities in order of permanency:
Capital, Creditors for expenses, Sundry trade creditors, Loan, Bills
payable
CLASSIFICATION OF ASSETS
(i) Fixed Assets are those which are acquired for long use in the business itself and not for resale. For
example, plant and machinery, land and buildings, furniture and fixtures, patents and trade marks are
examples of fixed assets.
(ii) Current or Floating Assets are those that are meant to be converted into cash as soon as possible.
Stock of goods, amount due from customers to whom goods have been sold on credit and balance at
bank are examples of current (or floating) assets.
(iii) Liquid Assets are those current assets which are already in the form of cash or which can be readily
converted into cash, such as Government Securities.
(iv) Wasting Assets are those fixed assets which have a fixed content, like coal in a coal mine; the value of
the asset goes down as the contents are taken out. When the minerals have been taken ou totally,, the
mine will become useless.
(v) Intangible Assets are those fixed assets which cannot be seen or touched or felt. Goodwill (the value
of one’s name) is an intangible asset because there is no physical form to show it. Intangible assets
are not necessarily useless.
(vi) Fictitious Assets are valueless assets but shown as assets in the financial statements (such as
useless trade marks) or expenses treated as assets (such as expenses incurred to establish a
company i.e. preliminary expenses).
CLASSIFICATION OF LIABILITIES
(i) Fixed and Long-term Liabilities: Fixed liabilities are those liabilities which are payable on the
termination of the business such as capital of the proprietor, whereas long-term liabilities are those
which will be redeemed after a long period of time e.g. long-term loans.
(ii) Current liabilities: These are liabilities which have to be redeemed in the near future, usually within a
year. Trade creditors, bank loans, bills payable etc. are examples of current liabilities.
(iii) Contingent liabilities: These are not actual liabilities but their becoming actual liability depends on the
happening of certain events. If such events do not occur, no liability is incurred. Liability in respect of
pending suit is a contingent liability because it is only if and when suit is lost that the liability will be
incurred. Bills discounted with a bank are also a contingent liability because if the acceptor fails to
meet the bill on due date, the firm will become liable to the bank. Such liabilities are not shown in
balance sheet; usually a foot note is appended at the balance sheet for such liabilities.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. The following are the names of assets. Classify them: Leasehold
premises, Accounting machines, Coal mine, Goodwill, Stock of raw
materials, Motor vehicles, Cash in hand, Government securities, Copyright
of book (no longer in demand),Amount due from customers, Loose tools
and Cost of floating a company.
2. Classify the following assets into fixed, current and fictitious assets,
mentioning sub-types, also in the case of fixed assets: Land and buildings,
Furniture, Bills receivable, Cash in hand, Cash at bank, Plant and
machinery, Coal mine, Loose tools, Preliminary expenses, Stock in trade,
Amount due from customers, Copyright of a book no longer in demand,
Stone quarries, Livestock, Motor vehicles, Government bonds and
Goodwill of a firm incurring heavy losses.
DIFFERNCE BETWEEN TRIAL BALANCE AND BALANCE SHEET
Trial balance Balance sheet

1. It is a statement of debit balances and credit 1. It is a statement of assets and liabilities
balances taken from the ledger.
2. It is prepared to test the arithmetical accuracy of 2. It is prepared to ascertain the financial position of
books of account. the organization on a particular date.
3. Balances of all types of accounts i.e. personal, 3. Balances of real and personal accounts only are
real, and nominal accounts are shown. shown.
4. It is usually prepared at the end of each month, 4. It is usually prepared at the end of the year after
three months, six months or at the end of the preparation of trading and profit and loss
accounting year before the preparation of trading account.
and profit and loss account.
5. Closing stock does not appear in the trial 5. Closing stock is shown on the assets side of the
balance. balance sheet.
6. It is prepared for internal use. 6. It is prepared for external use, i.e. for outside
parties such as, creditors, shareholders (in case
of companies), government authorities, etc.
148 FP-FA&A
DIFFERNCE BETWEEN PROFIT & LOSS ACCOUNT AND BALANCE SHEET
Profit & Loss Account Balance sheet

1. Profit and loss account is an account 1. Balance sheet is a statement of assets and
liabilities.
2. Profit and loss account shows the profits earned 2. Balance sheet shows financial position of the
or losses incurred for the accounting period business.
3. Profit and loss account is prepared for the 3. Balance sheet is prepared as at the last day of
accounting period the accounting period.
4. The accounts that are transferred to the profit 4. The accounts which are transferred to the
and loss account are closed and cease to exist. balance sheet do not lose their identity and
become the opening balances in the next
accounting period
ADJUSTMENT ENTRIES
Usually, final accounts are prepared from the balances given in the trial balance. However, at times some
account balances in the trial balance do not reflect the correct ‘amount’ when considered in relation to
accounting period. For example, payment on account of expense, say, rent, may be less or more than the
actual payment that ought to have been made during the accounting period. Similar situation may arise in
respect of some revenue items also, say interest on investments.
In order to ensure that the final accounts disclose the true trading results and correct balances, it is necessary
that all expenses incurred whether paid or not and the whole amount of loss sustained whether ascertained or
estimated should be taken into consideration. Similarly, incomes and gains whether actually received or not
during the accounting period should be accounted for. All this requires adjustment entries which are used to
establish correct values of account balances at the end of an accounting period. Thus, adjustment entries are
those entries which are passed at the end of each accounting period for the purpose of adjusting various
nominal and other accounts so that true net profit or loss is indicated in profit and loss account and the
balance sheet represents a true and fair view of the financial condition of an enterprise.
The following are the usual adjustment entries which are made while preparing the final accounts.
(I) CLOSING STOCK
The unsold stock at the end of the accounting period is termed as closing stock. There can be two entries for
closing stock.
When this entry is passed he closing stock at the end appears in
(a) Closing Stock Account Dr. trading account and on the asset side of balance sheet. It becomes the
To Trading Account opening stock for the next year.
(b) Stock Account Dr. In this case, closing stock will appear in the trial balance, it means that
To Purchases Account double entry has been completed in the accounting period itself by
reducing the purchases. Therefore it will appear as asset in the
balance sheet only.
(II) ACCRUED OR OUTSTANDING EXPENSES
Expenses which have been incurred during the year and whose benefit has been derived during the year but
payment in respect of which has not been made are called outstanding or accrued expenses. At the end of
the year, all such expenses must be brought into books, otherwise, the profit will be overstated and liability
will be understated. The following journal entry is passed:
Expense Account Dr.


To Outstanding/Accrued Expense Account
 – The outstanding expenses are shown on the debit side of the trading account or profit and loss
account, as the case may be, by way of addition to the respective expenses.
– These are also shown on the liabilities side of balance sheet.
– In the beginning of the next year, a reverse entry will be passed.
EXAMPLE 1:
Salary for March, 2011 ` 1,000 has not been paid. The adjustment entry will be:
` `
Salary Account Dr. 1,000
To Outstanding Salary Account 1,000
The entry will increase the balance in salary account by ` 1,000 which will be transferred to profit and
loss account. Outstanding salary account is a liability which will appear in balance sheet.
(III) UNEXPIRED OR PREPAID EXPENSES

Those expenses which have been paid in advance and whose benefit will be available in future are called
unexpired or prepaid expenses e.g. insurance premium, rent, etc., paid in advance. An adjustment entry is
made whereby the unexpired amount is credited to the appropriate expense account and debited to prepaid
(unexpired) account as under:
Prepaid Expense Account Dr.

To Expense Account
– The amount of prepaid expenses is shown in the profit and loss account by way of deduction from the
concerned expenses.
– These are also shown as an asset in the balance sheet.
– In the beginning of the next year, a reverse entry will be passed to cancel the effect of adjusting entry.
EXAMPLE 2:
Fire insurance premium of ` 2,000, paid for the year ending 30th June 2011. On 31st March, 2011
insurance policy has run only for 9 months and hence only 3/4th of the premium can be said to
pertain to 2010-11: 1/4th of the premium amount, i.e. ` 500 will be treated as an asset. Entry will be:
` `
Unexpired Insurance Premium Dr. 500
To Insurance Premium Account 500
Unexpired insurance premium will appear as an asset in the balance sheet and insurance premium
account will be reduced by ` 500.
(IV) ACCRUED OR OUTSTANDING INCOME
Accrued income means income which has been earned by the business during the accounting year but which
has not become due and hence has not been received. But outstanding income means any income which has
become due during the accounting year but has not been so far received by the firm. Though there is a
distinction between the two, for adjustment entry no such distinction is necessary, both the accrued income
and outstanding income are added to the given income figure in the trial balance. The following entry is
passed:
Accrued /Outstanding Income Account Dr.

To Income Account
150 FP-FA&A
– The amount of income is transferred to the credit side of profit and loss account as an addition to the
respective income account.
– The accrued/outstanding income account also appears as an asset in the balance sheet.
– In the beginning of next year, a reverse entry will be passed.
EXAMPLE 3: Interest earned but not yet received, ` 650. The entry will be:
` `
Interest Accrued Account Dr. 650
To Interest Account 650
Interest accrued account will appear as an asset in balance sheet and the amount of interest
account to appear on the credit side of profit and loss account will increase by ` 650.
(V) UNEARNED INCOME OR INCOME RECEIVED IN ADVANCE
That portion of the revenue which remains received in advance (unearned) at the end of the accounting
period is known as unearned income or income received in advance. For example, subscription received in
advance by a club, insurance premiums received in advance by the insurance company, rent received in
advance, etc. Any income in advance is not actually earned and it rather creates an obligation to return this
amount. The following adjustment entry is made at the end of the accounting year;
Income Account Dr.

To Income Received in Advance Account
– This item is shown on the credit side of the profit and loss account by way of deduction from the
income.
– It is also shown in the balance sheet on the liabilities side as ‘Income received in advance’.
EXAMPLE 4: Rent for April, 2011 ` 3,000 received in advance
` `
Rent Received Account Dr. 3,000
To Rent Received in Advance Account 3,000
The balance of rent received account appearing on the credit side of profit and loss account will
diminish by ` 3,000 and rent received in advance account will appear on liabilities side of balance
sheet because service for this rent is to be rendered in the year to come.
(VI) DEPRECIATION
Depreciation is the reduction in the value of fixed assets due to its use, wear and tear or obsolescence. When
an asset is used for earning purpose, it is necessary that reduction due to its use must be charged to the
profit for the year in order to show correct value in the balance sheet. The following journal entry is passed for
charging depreciation:

To Fixed Asset Account
– The amount of depreciation is debited to the profit and loss account.

– Again it is shown on the assets side of the balance sheet by way of deduction from the concerned
asset.
When depreciation is given in the trial balance, it means that the asset(s) has(ve) been credited with the
amount of depreciation and the necessary debit to depreciation account has been made. The only entry then
would be to transfer the depreciation account to profit and loss account and no adjustment entry would be
needed.
Note: There are various methods of providing depreciation, but in questions on final accounts, it is most likely
asked to be calculated at a fixed percentage on opening balance of the assets. If there are additions,
depreciation is provided only for that part of the year for which the new asset has been used.
EXAMPLE 5: If furniture stood at ` 1,00,000 on 1st April, 2010 and additional furniture was
purchased for `15,000 on 1st October, 2010, total depreciation @5% per annum would
amount to ` 5,375 calculated as under:
`
Depreciation on 1,00,000 @ 5% for full year 5,000
Depreciation on Rs. 15,000 @ 5% for 6 months i.e., from
1st October, 2010 to 31st March, 2011 375
` 15,000 x 5 x 6
10 x 12 _____
Total 5,375
Entry will be:

` `
Depreciation Account Dr. 5,375
Depreciation account will appear on the debit side of profit and loss account and the book
value of furniture will be reduced by ` 5,375 in the balance sheet.
WHEN PROVISION FOR DEPRECIATION ACCOUNT IS MAINTAINED:

To Provision for Depreciation Account
(VII) BAD DEBTS
Debts which cannot be recovered or become irrecoverable are called bad debts. It is a loss to the business
and is brought into account by debiting bad debts account and crediting debtors’ accounts who are not able to
pay the amount. The adjustment entry is as follows:
Bad Debts Account Dr.

To Sundry Debtors Account
– The bad debts account is debited to profit and loss account.

– The debtors balance is reduced by the same amount in the balance sheet.
– When the amount of bad debts is given in the trial balance itself no adjusting entry is required. It
should only be transferred to profit and loss account.
(VIII) PROVISION FOR BAD DEBTS
A firm may make provision at the end of the accounting year for likely bad debts which may happen during the
course of the next year. This is for the simple reason that if out of credit sales made during a particular year,
152 FP-FA&A
some sales are likely to become bad in the course of the next year, the proper course would be to charge in
the same accounting year with such likely bad debts in which the sales have been made. The following
journal entry is passed for creating provision for bad debts:

To Provision for Bad Debts Account
– The provision for bad debts is charged to profit and loss account.
– It is also deducted from debtors in the balance sheet.
– Provision for bad debts created out of profit of the current year should be carried forward to the next
period. Bad debts occurring during that period would be debited to bad debts account as usual, but
total debits given to this account should be transferred to provision for bad debts account. At the end
of the next year suitable adjustment entry is passed for keeping the provision for bad debts at an
appropriate amount to be carried forward.
– Sometimes the balance brought down from the previous year is so large that even after debiting the
current year’s bad debts and leaving the desired balance at the end of the year, a surplus is left. This
surplus is transferred to the credit side of profit and loss account.
EXAMPLE 6: If debts of 2010-11, prove to be bad in 2011-12 the loss is to be treated as one
for 2010-11. But on 31st March, 2011 when final accounts are be prepared, it will not be
possible to know accurately, which debts will prove bad in 2011-12. Hence, only an estimate
is made on the basis of past experience. If it is estimated that 6% of the debts may prove bad
and on 31st March, 2011 debtors amount to ` 40,000, then `2,400 will be provided for future
bad debts. The entry is:
` `
Profit and Loss Account Dr. 2,400
To Provision for Bad Debts Account 2,400
It will reduce the profit for 2010-11 by `2,400. Provision for bad debts will appear in the
balance sheet as a deduction from sundry debtors on assets side although it is a separate
account showing credit balance.
In the next year, the actual amount of bad debts will be debited to provision for bad debts
account which will then stand reduced. On 31st March, 2012 the amount of the provision will
be brought up by an appropriate debit to profit and loss account depending on the amount of
sundry debtors as at that date.
(IX) PROVISION FOR DISCOUNT ON DEBTORS
This is a charge made against profits in order to provide for an expected loss in the form of discounts which
are likely to be allowed to the debtors, for encouraging them to make prompt payments. In order to
incorporate such provision for discount on debtors, the following journal entry is passed:

To Provision for Discount on Debtors Account
– This provision is shown on the debit side of the profit and loss account.
– It is also shown in the balance sheet by way of deduction from sundry debtors.
Note: Provision for discount is always calculated on the amount of debtors left after deducting the provision
for bad debts i.e. provision should be calculated on good debts. It is because no discount will be allowed on
amounts which are not recovered and hence no provision for discount on such amount is required.
For example, if 2% discount is allowed, debtors are of ` 10,000 and 5% provision for bad debts is required
then provision for discount will be made @2% on ` 9,500, i.e., on ` 10,000 less 5% for provision for bad debts
amounting to ` 500.
(X) RESERVE FOR DISCOUNT ON CREDITORS
A firm may like to create reserve for discount on its creditors to record discounts expected to be received from
them. The adjustment entry for this purpose is as follows:
Reserve for Discount on Creditors Account Dr.

– The reserve for discount on creditors account is credited to the profit and loss account.
– It should also be deducted from the sundry creditors in the balance sheet. Keeping with the principle of
conservatism the provision for discount on creditors is often not made in actual practice.
(XI) INTEREST ON CAPITAL
It is a normal practice to charge business with interest on the capital employed in the business. The purpose
is to know whether the profits of the business are more than what could be earned from simple investments
outside business. Interest charged is an expense to the business but it is a gain to proprietor. The following
adjustment entries are passed:
(i) Interest on Capital Account Dr.
To Capital Account
(ii) Profit and Loss Account Dr.
To Interest on Capital Account
– Interest on capital is debited to the profit and loss account and
– It is shown on the liabilities side of the balance sheet by way of addition to the capital.
(XII) INTEREST ON DRAWINGS
As business allows interest on capital, it also charges interest on drawings made by the proprietor. This is a
gain to the business and an expense for the proprietor. The following adjustment entries are made:
(i) Capital Account Dr.
To Interest on Drawings Account
(ii) Interest on Drawings Account Dr.
– It is credited to the profit and loss account and
– Shown on the liabilities side of the balance sheet by way of deduction from capital.
(XIII) ACCIDENTAL LOSS OF AN ASSET
When asset is not insured:
Sometimes the assets of the organization may be destroyed due to earthquake, fire or accidents. The firm
has to bear the entire loss if such assets are not insured. The following entries are passed to make
adjustments for such losses:
(a) When loss is incurred due to accident
Accidental Loss Account Dr.
To Asset Account
154 FP-FA&A
(b) When loss is transferred to profit and loss account
To Accidental Loss Account
When asset is insured:
When the asset destroyed by accident is insured, then the firm will not have to bear the entire loss. The
insurance company will pay certain amount on loss of the asset. The amount of loss will be reduced to the
extent of amount recoverable from the insurance company. The difference in the book value of asset on the
date of accident and the amount of claim admitted by the insurance company is the loss suffered by the
company. This loss will be transferred to the profit and loss account.
On admission of claim:
Insurance Company Dr.
To Asset Account
On receipt of money claimed:
Bank Dr.
To Insurance Company
On transfer of loss:
To Asset Account
(XIV) ACCIDENTAL LOSS OF STOCK

Sometimes, stock in trade is lost due to fire or theft. If the firm has insured the stock, then loss can be made
good fully or partly by the insurance company. The following adjustment entries are made:
(a) If the stock is fully insured, the whole loss is fully recoverable from the insurance company. The journal
entry is:
Insurance Company Account Dr.
To Trading Account
Insurance company account is shown on the credit side of the trading account and in the balance
sheet it is treated as an asset until the amount is received.
(b) If the stock is not fully insured, the loss of stock covered by the insurance policy will be claimed from
the insurance company and the rest will be treated as loss. The journal entry in this case is:
Insurance Company Account Dr.
To Trading Account
(c) If the stock is not insured, nothing is recoverable from insurance company and the whole loss will be
born by the firm. The journal entry is:
To Trading Account
Thus in all cases, trading account is credited with the gross amount of stock lost.
(XV) MANAGER’S COMMISSION ON NET PROFITS
Sometimes, the manager of a business may be given a commission based on a fixed percentage of the net
profits of the business. There are two methods for the calculation of such commission. The adjustment entry
for such commission payable is as follows:
To Commission Payable Account
– The commission payable is shown on the debit side of the profit and loss account and on the liabilities
side of the balance sheet.
Calculation of Commission: It can be calculated in following two ways.
(a) Commission as a percentage of net profits before charging such commission
Manager’s commission = Profit before commission x Rate of commission
100
(b) Commission as percentage of net profits after charging such commission
Manager’s commission = Profit before commission x Rate of commission
100 + Rate of commission
(XVI) GOODS DISTRIBUTED AS FREE SAMPLES
Sometimes, in order to promote the sale of goods, some of the produced goods are distributed as free samples. It
may be treated like an expenditure on advertisement and the following adjustment entry is passed:
Free Samples/Advertisement Account Dr.
To Trading/Purchases Account
– It is shown on the credit side of the trading account or deducted from the purchases and
– It is also shown on the debit side of profit and loss account as free samples or advertisement expense.
(XVII) DRAWINGS OF GOODS BY THE PROPRIETOR FOR PERSONAL USE
If goods have been withdrawn by the proprietor for personal use and no entry has been passed during the
year, the following adjustment entry should be passed:
Drawings Account Dr.
To Purchases Account/ Trading Account
– Goods are deducted from the purchases on the debit side of the trading account or shown on the
credit side of trading account and
– They are included in proprietor’s drawings which are ultimately deducted from the capital shown on the
liabilities side of the balance sheet.
(XVIII) DEFERRED REVENUE EXPENDITURE
The expenditure which is incurred in one year but the benefit of which is available in subsequent years also is
called deferred revenue expenditure. Part of such expenditure is written off in each year and the rest is
capitalized. The adjustment entry to write off this expenditure is as follows:
To Expense (Respective) Account
The written off amount is debited to profit and loss account and shown as a deduction from the capitalized
expense in the balance sheet.
(XIX) GOODS ON SALE ON APPROVAL BASIS
Sometimes goods are sold to customers on approval basis. If consent is not received during the accounting
period, it cannot be treated as sale. In such case, the following adjustment entries are passed:
(i) Sales Account Dr.
To Debtors Account (with sale price)
(ii) Stock Account Dr.
To Trading Account (at cost price)
156 FP-FA&A
Thus, this item is shown on the credit side of trading account by way of deduction from the sales at sale price
and added to the closing stock at cost price. At the same time it is shown on the asset side as a deduction
from sundry debtors at sale price and added to the closing stock at cost price.
(XX) GOODS RECEIVED BUT NOT RECORDED IN BOOKS

Often, goods may have been received but invoice has not been received or omitted to be recorded. In such a
case, the following adjustment entry should be passed.
Purchases Account Dr.
To Creditors Account
This item is shown as addition to the purchases in the trading account and added to sundry creditors on the
liabilities side of the balance sheet.
(XXI) SALARY TO PROPRIETOR

If the proprietor charges salary for the work done by him, proprietor’s salary account is debited and capital
account is credited. If there are a number of proprietors called the partners, and salary is charged by them,
salary to partners account will be debited and the respective capital accounts will be credited with the
respective amounts of salary charged by them.
(XXII) RESERVE FUND

Reserve fund is created out of the Profit and Loss Account as appropriation of net profit for strengthening the
financial position of the business.
To Reserve Fund A/c
 Reserve fund is shown on the debit side of Profit and Loss Account and
 It is shown on the liabilities side of the Balance Sheet.
(XXIII) CASH DISCOUNT

Cash discount is allowed and received for prompt payment. When cash discount is allowed, a less amount is
accepted as a full payment of a debt. Similarly when cash discount is received, a less amount is paid in full
discharge of a liability. Discount allowed is debited to discount allowed account, cash received is debited to
cash account and the total amount is credited to debtor making the payment. Discount received is credited to
discount received account, cash paid is credited to cash account and the total of the two is debited to the
creditor to whom the payment is made.
(XXIV) TRADE DISCOUNT

Trade discount is a deduction from the list (or catalogue) price allowed by the manufacturers to the
wholesalers or by the wholesalers to the retailers for various reasons. The rate of trade discount allowed
varies considerably. From accounting point of view no entries are made either in seller’s books or in the
purchaser’s books for such discount. Entries for purchases and sales are made at net price i.e. after
deducting trade discount from the list price.
DIFFERNCE BETWEEN CASH DISCOUNT AND TRADE DISCOUNT
Cash Discount Trade Discount
(i) It is a reduction granted by a supplier from (i) It is a reduction granted by a supplier

the invoice price in consideration of from the list price of goods or services
immediate or prompt payment. on business consideration.
(ii) It is allowed to encourage the prompt (ii) It is allowed to promote sales.
payment.
(iii) It is not shown in the invoice (iii) It is shown by way of deduction in the
invoice itself.
(iv) Cash discount account is opened in the (iv) Trade discount account is not opened
ledger. in the ledger.
(v) It is allowed on payment of money (v) It is allowed on purchase of goods
(vi) It may vary with the time period within (vi) It may vary with the quantity of goods
which payment is received purchased or amount of purchases
made.
MAIN PRINCIPLES FOR PREPARATION OF FINAL ACCOUNTS:
The list of adjustment entries given above is not exhaustive. The student may analyse each transaction
and pass necessary journal entries for adjustments considering following principles:
(i) The items given in the trial balance will appear in only one of the statements i.e. the Trading
Account, the Profit and Loss Account or the Balance Sheet.
(ii) The amount in respect of adjustments will appear in two of the above mentioned
statements, normally in the Balance Sheet and in the Trading Account or in the Profit and Loss
Account.
The reason being that for items appearing in the trial balance, the double entry has already been
completed but in respect of adjustments, the double entry has yet to be completed, hence two accounts
will be affected.
CLOSING ENTRIES
In order to prepare final accounts, all nominal accounts have to be transferred to Trading and Profit and Loss
Account. It is done by passing journal entries which are called closing entries as they close the nominal
accounts. The entry to transfer the balance of profit and loss account itself is also one of the closing entries.
Some of the closing entries are given below:
(i) Trading Account Dr.

To Stock
To Purchases
To Sale Returns
To Carriage Inwards
(Transfer of various accounts to Trading Account)
(ii) Sales Account Dr.
Purchase Returns Dr.
158 FP-FA&A
Closing Stock Dr.
To Trading Account
(Transfer of sales account and purchases returns
account to trading account and recording of closing
stock)
(iii) Trading Account Dr.
To Profit and Loss A/c
(Transfer of gross profit from trading account to profit and
loss account)
(iv) Profit and Loss Account Dr.
To Rent
To Salaries
To Sundry Expenses
To Depreciation
(Transfer of various nominal accounts to profit and loss
account)
(v) Interest Received Dr.
(Transfer of credit balance of interest received account
to profit and loss account)
(v) Profit and Loss Account Dr.
To Capital Account
(Transfer of net profit to capital account)
MANUFACTURING ACCOUNT
A manufacturing concern may like to ascertain the cost of goods during the accounting period and may prepare
Manufacturing Account for this purpose. Trading Account is not capable of showing the cost of goods
manufactured because it deals with stock of finished goods also and because some of the expenses connected
with manufacture of goods (such as depreciation and repairs of machinery and factory) are debited to the Profit
and Loss Account. Manufacturing Account is debited with all expenses incurred in the factory on production of
goods. This means that depreciation and repairs to plant and machinery and factory building, salary to works
manager, etc. are also debited to this account. The total of such expenses plus cost of raw material used gives
cost of goods manufactured during the period. This is transferred to Trading Account which deals with stock of
finished goods and sales also. The remaining nominal accounts appear in Profit and Loss Account.
In fact, there is no prescribed format for the presentation of Manufacturing Account. However, a format
covering various elements is given below. The Trading Account and Profit and Loss Account should be
prepared in the same way as discussed earlier.
SPECIMEN OF MANUFACTURING ACCOUNT

Manufacturing Account for the year ended......
Dr. Cr.
To Work in progress (opening) XXX By Work in progress (closing) XXX
To Raw material consumed: By Sale of scrap XXX
Opening stock XXX By Cost of production of
Add: Purchases XXX finished goods transferred to
Trading Account
Less: Closing stock XXX XXX
To Direct wages XXX
To Direct expenses XXX
To Factory expenses:
Factory rent XXX
Plant repairs XXX
Indirect wages XXX
Depreciation on factory building XXX
____ ____
XXX XXX
LIMITATIONS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Financial statements are the result of the accounting process which begins with recording of transactions.
Accounting process involves recording, classifying and summarizing business transactions. Financial
statements are the result of the third process viz. summarizing. The financial statements are based on certain
accounting concepts and conventions which cannot be said to be foolproof.
The following are the limitations of the financial statements:
(i) Financial statements are essentially interim reports and therefore, cannot be final because the final
gain or loss can be computed only at the termination of the business. Financial statements only reflect
the progress and position of the business at frequent intervals during its life.
(ii) Financial statements though expressed in exact monetary terms, are not absolutely final and accurate.
As the balance sheet is prepared on the basis of the going concern concept, asset valuation
represents neither the realizable value nor replacement costs. Further, they depend on the judgment
of the management in respect of various accounting policies.
(iii) The values ascribed to the assets presented in the statements depend upon the standards of the persons
dealing with them. For instance, the method of depreciation, mode of amortization of fixed assets, treatment
of deferred revenue expenditure, all depend on the personal judgment of the accountant.
(iv) Financial statements take into consideration only the financial factors. They fail to bring out the
significance of non-financial factors which may have considerable bearing on the operating results and
financial conditions of an enterprise. For example, public image of the enterprise, the caliber of its
management, efficiency and loyalty of its workers etc.
(v) It is not always possible to discover false figures in financial statements. Unscrupulous managements
generally resort to ‘window dressing’ in the preparation of such statements.
(vi) Financial statements are prepared primarily for shareholders. Other interested parties have to
generally make many adjustments before they use them profitably.
160 FP-FA&A
(vii) Quite often, financial statements do not disclose current worth of the business. Only historical facts are
presented and the true current worth is not reflected.
(viii) Owing to the fact that financial statements are compiled on the basis of historical costs, while there is a
marked decline in the value of the monetary unit and resultant rise in prices, the balance sheet loses
its function as an index on current economic realities. Again, the financial statements contain both
historical and current costs items, hence figures are distorted.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Illustration 1:
A business house maintains provision of 5% against bad debts and 3% for discount on debtors and a reserve
for discount on creditors at 2%. On 1st April, 2009 it had the following balances:
Provision for Bad and Doubtful Debts ... ` 5,000
Provision for Discount on Debtors ... ` 2,850
Provision for Discount on Creditors ... ` 4,800
During the year 2009-10, bad debts, discount allowed to debtors and discount received from creditors
amounted to ` 3,950, ` 8,800 and ` 9,840 respectively while for 2010-11 they amounted to ` 1,800, ` 7,000
and ` 6,800 respectively. Sundry Debtors were ` 1,20,000 on March 31, 2010 and ` 80,000 on March 31,
2011. Sundry Creditors on these two dates were ` 2,10,000 and ` 1,95,000 respectively.
Show provision for bad debts account, provision for discount on debtors account and reserve for discount on
creditors account along with relevant portions of profit and loss account.
Solution:
Provision for Bad Debts Account
Dr. Cr.
2010 2009
March 31 To Bad Debts 3,950 April 1 By Balance b/fd 5,000
March 31 To Balance c/d 6,000
2010
March 31 By Profit & Loss A/c
(Balancing Figure) 4,950
9,950 9,950
2011 2010
March 31 To Bad Debts 1,800 April 1 By Balance b/d 6,000
(Balancing Figure) 200
March 31 To Balance c/d 4,000
6,000 6,000
2011
April 1 By Balance b/d 4,000
Provision for Discount on Debtors A/c
Dr. Cr.
2010 2009
March 31 To Discount Allowed 8,800 April 1 By Balance b/fd 2,850
March 31 To Balance c/d 3,420 2010
12,220 12,220
2011 2010
March 31 To Discount Allowed 7,000 April 1 By Balance b/d 3,420
March 31 To Balance c/d 2,280 2011
9,280 9,280
2011
April 1 By Balance b/d 2,280
Reserve for Discount on Creditors A/c

Dr. Cr.
2009 2010
April 1 To Balance b/fd 4,800 March 31 By Discount
Received 9,840
2010 To Profit & Loss A/c March 31 By Balance c/d 4,200
March 31 (Balancing Figure) 9,240
14,040 14,040
2010 2011
April 1 To Balance b/d 4,200 March 31 By Discount
Received 6,800
2011 March 31 By Balance c/d
March 31 To Profit & Loss A/c 3,900
10,700 10,700
2011
162 FP-FA&A
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2010
Dr. Cr.
Particulars ` ` Particulars ` `
To Bad Debts: 3,950 By Discount Received 9,840
Add: New Provision Add: New Reserve for
for Bad and Doubtful Discount on Creditors 4,200
Debts 6,000 14,040
9,950 Less: Old Reserve 4,800 9,240
Less: Old Provision 5,000 4,950
To Discount Allowed 8,800
Add: New Provision
for Discount 3,420
12,220
Less: Old Provision 2,850 9,370
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2011
Dr. Cr.
To Discount Allowed 7,000 By Old Provision for
Add: New Provision 2,280 bad and doubtful
for Discount 9,280 debts 6,000
Less: Old Provision 3,420 5,860 Less: Bad Debts 1,800
Less: New Provision 4,200 200
By Discount Received 4,000
Add: New Reserve for 6,800
Discount on Creditors 3,900
10,700
Less: Old Reserve 4,200 6,500
Illustration 2:
Following is the trial balance of Amar as on 31st March, 2011:
` `
Capital Account 80,000
Drawing Account 6,000
Stock (1.4.2010) 45,000
Purchases 2,60,000
Sales 3,10,000
Furniture 10,000
Sundry Debtors 40,000
Freight and Octroi 4,600
Trade Expenses 500
Salaries 5,500
Rent 2,400
Advertising Expenses 5,000
Insurance Premium 400
Commission 1,300
Discount 200
Bad Debts 1,600
Provision for Bad Debts 900
Creditors 20,000
Cash in hand 5,200
Bank 5,800
Goodwill (at cost) 20,000 _______
4,12,200 4,12,200
Adjustments:
(a) Stock on 31st March, 2011 was valued at ` 53,000.
(b) Salaries have been paid only for 11 months.
(c) Unexpired insurance included in the figure of ` 400 appearing in trial balance is ` 100.
(d) Commission earned but not yet received amounting to ` 122 is to be recorded in books of account.
(e) Provision for bad debts is to be brought upto 3% of sundry debtors.
(f) Manager is to be allowed a commission of 10% of net profits after charging such commission.
(g) Furniture is depreciated @10% per annum.
(h) Only 1/4th of advertising expenses is to be written off.
Prepare trading and profit and loss account for the year ended 31st March, 2011 and balance sheet as on
that date. Also show adjustments entries and closing entries.
Solution:
Mr. Amar
Trading and Profit and Loss Account
for the year ended 31st March, 2011
Dr. Cr.
To Stock (1.4.2010) 45,000 By Sales 3,10,000
To Purchases 2,60,000 By Closing Stock 53,000
To Freight & Octroi 4,600
To Gross Profit
transferred to P&L a/c 53,400
3,63,000 3,63,000
To Trade Expenses 500 By Gross Profit
To Depreciation 1,000 transferred from
trading A/c 53,400
To Salaries 5,500 Commission 1,300
Add: Outstanding 500 6,000 Add: Commission
To Rent 2,400 earned but not
To Advertising received 122 1,422
Expenses 5,000
Less: Amount C/f 3,750 1,250
164 FP-FA&A
To Insurance Premium 400
Less: Unexpired
Insurance 100 300
To Discount 200
To Provision for Bad
Debts @3% on `
40,000 1,200
Add: Bad Debts 1,600
Less: Old provision 900 1,900
To Commission
payable to Manager 3,752
To Net Profit
transferred to Capital
Account 37,520
54,822 54,822
st
Balance Sheet as on 31 March, 2011
Liabilities ` ` Assets ` `
Capital Fixed Assets:
Opening Balance 80,000 Goodwill 20,000
Add: Net profit 37,520 Furniture 10,000
Less: Drawings 6,000 1,11,520 Less: Depreciation 1,000 9,000
Creditors 20,000 Current Assets:
Outstanding Salary 500 Unexpired Insurance 100
Commission Payable Unexpired advertising
to Managers 3,752 expenses 3,750
Commission earned
but not received 122
Stock 53,000
Sundry Debtors 40,000
Less: Provision for bad
debts 1,200 38,800
Cash at bank 5,800
Cash in hand 5,200
1,35,722 1,35,722
Journal Book
Adjustment Entries
Particulars ` `
Stock Account Dr. 53,000
To Trading Account 53,000
(Being closing stock credited to trading account)
Salaries Account Dr. 500
To Salaries Outstanding Account 500
(Being the amount of salaries outstanding on 31st March,
2011)
Unexpired Insurance Dr. 100
(Being the amount of unexpired insurance premium as on 31st
March, 2011)
Commission Earned But not Received Account Dr. 122
To Commission Account 122
(Being the amount of commission earned but not received till
31st March, 2011)
Bad Debts Account Dr. 1,600
(Transfer of bad debts to provision for bad debts)
(Being credit given to provision for bad debts to make its
balance 3% of ` 40,000)
To Commission Payable to Manager 3,752
(Being commission payable to manager @10% of net profits
remaining after charging such commission)
Depreciation Account Dr. 1,000
(Being the amount of depreciation provided on furniture
@10% per annum)
Unexpired Advertising Expenses Account Dr. 3,750
To Advertising Expenses Account 3,750
(For advertising expenses carried forward to next year)
166 FP-FA&A
Closing Entries:
Particulars ` `
Trading Account Dr. 3,09,600
To Stock Account (1.4.2010) 45,000
To Purchases Account 2,60,000
To Freight & Octroi Account 4,600
(Transfer of various nominal accounts showing debit balances
to trading account)
Sales Account Dr. 3,10,000
To Trading Account 3,10,000
(Transfer of sales account to trading account)
Note: Entry for closing stock has already been passed by way
of adjustment
Trading Account Dr. 53,400
To Profit and Loss Account 53,400
(Transfer of gross profit from trading account to profit and loss
Account)
To Trade Expenses Account 500
To Salaries Account 6,000
To Rent Account 2,400
To Advertising Expenses Account 1,250
To Discount Account 200
To Depreciation Account 1,000
(Transfer of various nominal accounts showing debit balances
to profit and loss account)
Commission Account Dr. 1,422
To Profit and Loss Account 1,422
(Transfer of credit balance in commission account to profit and
loss Account)
To Capital Account 37,520
(Transfer of net profit to capital account)
Note: Profit and Loss Account has already been debited in respect of provision for bad debts and commission
payable to manager. Refer to adjustments entries.
Illustration 3:
Following are the balances in the ledger of Mr. Patel for the year ended 31st March, 2011:
`
Stock (1.4.2010):
Raw materials 1,00,000
Semi-finished goods 50,000
Finished goods 2,60,000
Purchases:
Raw materials 8,00,000
Carriage inwards on raw materials 30,000
Manufacturing wages 1,00,000
Salary of the supervisor 36,000
Rent of the factory 70,000
Gas and water 30,000
Return of raw materials 13,000
Fuel and coal 33,000
Factory power 1,25,000
Fire insurance 13,000
Sales returns 1,20,000
Depreciation on factory building 12,000
Stock on 31.3.2011:
Raw materials 80,000
Semi-finished goods 1,30,000
Sales 22,00,000
Carriage outwards 35,000
Office salaries 1,50,000
Prepare manufacturing account and trading and profit and loss accounts for the year ended March, 2011.
Manufacturing Account
Dr. Cr.
To Opening stock: By Closing stock:
Raw materials 1,00,000 Raw materials 80,000
Semi-finished Goods __50,000 1,50,000 Semi-finished goods 1,30,000 2,10,000
To Purchases 8,00,000 By Cost of production
Less : Returns __13,000 7,87,000 transferred to
Trading Account 11,76,000
To Carriage on raw
materials 30,000
To Manufacturing
wages 1,00,000
To Factory expenses:
Salary of supervisor 36,000
Rent of factory 70,000
Gas and water 30,000
Fuel and coal 33,000
Factory power 1,25,000
Fire insurance 13,000
Depreciation 12,000 3,19,000
13,86,000 13,86,000
168 FP-FA&A
Trading and Profit and Loss Account
Dr. Cr.
To Opening stock of finished By Sales 22,00,000
goods 2,60,000 Less: Returns 1,20,000 20,80,000
To Cost of production transferred By Closing Stock of finished
from Manufacturing Account 11,76,000 goods 2,20,000
To Purchases 1,70,000
To Gross Profit c/d 6,94,000
23,00,000 23,00,000
To Carriage outwards 35,000 By Gross Profit b/d 6,94,000
To Office salaries 1,50,000
To Net Profit transferred to
Capital A/c 5,09,000
6,94,000 6,94,000
Illustration 4:
From the following particulars of Mr. Murthy, prepare Manufacturing, Trading and Profit and Loss Accounts for
the year ended 31.3.2011 and the Balance Sheet as on the date after making necessary adjustments:
`
Capital (1.4.2010) 2,50,000
Drawings account 70,000
Sundry creditors 80,000
Discount received 7,020
Bank overdraft 40,000
Provision for bad and doubtful debts 6,000
Purchases returns 5,300
Sales 6,75,000
Sales returns 860
Stock of finished goods (1.4.2010) 90,000
Plant and machinery (including machinery for ` 50,000 purchased on 1.1.2011) 1,70,000
Furniture 15,000
Building 1,50,000
Purchases 3,02,300
Sundry debtors 1,10,000
Manufacturing wages 60,000
Manufacturing expenses 50,000
Carriage inwards 4,000
Carriage outwards 4,200
Bad debts 1,500
Salaries 28,000
Interest and bank charges (Dr.) 1,260
Discount allowed 1,500
Insurance (Dr.) 3,000
Cash at bank 1,400
Cash in hand 300
Stock of finished goods (31.3.2011) 75,500
The following adjustments are to be made:
(i) Interest on capital at 10% p.a. (no interest is to be provided on drawings)
(ii) Outstanding expenses:
`
(a) Salaries 1,000
(b) Manufacturing wages 500
(c) Interest on bank loan 1,000
(iii) Depreciation on:
(a) Machinery at 10%
(b) Furniture at 10%
(c) Building at 2.5%
(iv) Pre-paid expenses: `
(a) Insurance 1,000
(b) Salary 500
(v) Provision for bad and doubtful debts at 10% on debtors.
Furniture costing ` 5,000 was sold for ` 3,500 on 1.4.2010 and this amount was later credited to furniture
account.
Solution:
Mr. Murthy
Manufacturing, Trading and Profit and Loss Account
Dr. Cr.
To Purchases 3,02,300 By Trading Account
Less : Returns __5,300 2,97,000 (transfer of cost of goods
produced) 4,24,750
To Carriage inwards 4,000
To Manufacturing
wages 60,000
Add: Outstanding ____500 60,500
To Manufacturing
expenses 50,000
To Depreciation on
Machinery 13,250
4,24,750 4,24,750
To Opening stock 90,000 By Sales 6,75,000
Less: Returns ____860 6,74,140
170 FP-FA&A
To Manufacturing A/c By Closing Stock 75,500
(cost of goods
produced) 4,24,750
To Gross profit c/d 2,34,890
7,49,640 7,49,640
To Salaries 28,000 By Gross Profit b/d 2,34,890
Add : Outstanding ___1,000 By Discount 7,020
29,000
Less : Pre-paid ____500 28,500
To Interest and bank
charges 1,260
Add : Outstanding __1,000 __2,260
To Discount allowed 1,500
To Insurance 3,000
Less : Pre-paid __1,000 2,000
To Carriage outwards 4,200
To Provision for bad
debts 6,500
To Loss on sale
of furniture 1,500
To Depreciation on:
Building 3,750
Furniture 1,350 5,100
To Interest on capital 25,000
To Net profit
transferred to
capital account 1,65,350
2,41,910 2,41,910
Mr. Murthy
Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2011
Capital 2,50,000 Fixed Assets:
Add: Profit 1,65,350 Building 1,50,000
Interest 25,000 Less: Depreciation 3,750 1,46,250
4,40,350 Plant and machinery 1,20,000
Less: Drawings 70,000 3,70,350 Add: Additions 50,000
Current Liabilities: 1,70,000
Bank overdraft 40,000 Less: Depreciation 13,250 1,56,750
Sundry creditors 80,000 Furniture 18,500
Outstanding expenses: Less: Cost of
Salaries 1,000 furniture disposed of
Manufacturing wages 500 during the year 5,000
Interest on bank loan 1,000 2,500 Less: Depreciation 1,350 12,150
Current Assets:
Stock 75,500
Debtors 1,10,000
Less: Provision for
bad and doubtful
debts 11,000 99,000
Cash at bank 1,400
Cash in hand 300
Pre-paid expenses:
Insurance 1,000
Salary 500 1,500
4,92,850 4,92,850
Working Note:
(i) Provision for bad and doubtful debts:
`
Provision required 11,000
Add: Bad debts 1,500
12,500
Less: Existing provision 6,000
6,500
(ii) Book value of furniture sold has been deducted for calculating depreciation.
172 FP-FA&A
LESSON ROUND UP
– Final accounts are the end product of financial accounting process. It consists of trading and profit loss
account and balance sheet
– Manufacturing account shows cost of production; trading account shows the gross profit while profit
and loss account shows the net profit earned or loss suffered by the organization during a particular
period.
– Balance sheet discloses the financial position i.e. the balances of assets, liabilities, and capital of the
business as on a particular date.
– Balance sheet is prepared with assets on the right hand side and liabilities on the left hand side.
– Assets and liabilities are classified into fixed and current and are shown in the balance sheet either in
the order of liquidity or permanence
– Adjustment entries are passed at the end of the accounting period in order to adjust various nominal
accounts to find out the correct profit or loss.
– Closing entries are journal entries required for transferring all accounts relating to expenses and gain
to trading and profit loss account.
GLOSSARY
Closing Stock Unsold stock at the end of the accounting period

Contingent These liabilities depend on the happening of certain events.
Liabilities
Intangible Fixed assets which cannot be seen or touched or felt.
Assets
Outstanding Expenses which have been incurred during the year but payment in respect of which
or Accrued has not been made.
Expenses
Unexpired or Expenses which have been paid in advance and whose benefit will be available in
Prepaid future.
Expenses
Accrued Income Income which has been earned by the business during the accounting year but which
has not become due and hence has not been received.
Income Received The revenue which remains received in advance (unearned) at the end of the
in Advance accounting period.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
1. The following are the balances taken from the books of Mr. Atma Ram:
Balances on 31st March, 2011
`
Atma Ram’s capital 30,000
Atma Ram’s drawings 5,000
Furniture and fittings 2,600
Bank overdraft 4,200
Creditors 13,300
Business premises 20,000
Stock on 1st April, 2010 22,000
Debtors 18,600
Rent from tenants 1,000
Purchases 1,10,000
Sales 1,50,000
Sales returns 2,000
Discount-debit 1,600
Discount-credit 2,000
Taxes and insurance 2,000
General expenses 4,000
Salaries 9,000
Commission-debit 2,200
Carriage on purchases 1,800
Provision for bad and doubtful debts 600
Bad debts written off 800
Stock on hand on 31st March, 2011 was estimated at ` 20,000. Rent
` 300, is still due from the tenant. Salaries, ` 750 are as yet unpaid. Write off bad debts ` 600 and
depreciate business premises by ` 300 and furniture and fittings by ` 266. Make a provision of 5% on
debtors for bad and doubtful debts and provision of 2% for discounts. Allow interest on capital at 5 per cent
and carry forward ` 700 for unexpired insurance. The manager is entitled to a commission of 10% on
profits remaining after charging his commission.
Prepare Trading Account, Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet on 31st March, 2011.
Hints: Suspense Account (difference in trial balance) = 500.
[Ans : G.P = 34,200, N.P. = 13,220, B/s Total = 59,792].
2.Below is the trial balance of Suresh as at 31st March, 2011.
Debit Balance ` Credit Balance `
Suresh’s Current Account 1,500 Capital Account 50,000

Adjusted purchases 6,99,200 Loan from Mohan @9%
Salaries 4,200 (taken on 1st October, 2010) 20,000
Carriage on purchases 400 Sales 7,20,000
Carriage on sale 500 Discount 500
Lighting 300 Sundry creditors 20,000
Rates and insurance 400
Buildings 27,000
Sundry debtors 8,000
Furniture 6,000
Cash in hand 250
Cash at bank 1,500
Stock (31st March, 2011) 61,250 _______
8,10,500 8,10,500
Rates have been prepaid to the extent of `175. Bad debts totaling ` 500 have to be written off. A provision
for doubtful debts @5% on debtors is necessary. Buildings have to be depreciated at 2% and furniture
174 FP-FA&A
@10%. The manager is entitled to a commission of 5% of net profits before charging such commission.
You are required to prepare the profit and loss account for the year ended 31st March, 2011 and the
balance sheet as on that date.
[Hints: (a) The trial balance gives “Adjusted Purchases”. It means that the opening stock has already been
transferred to the Purchases Account and has thus been closed. Further, entry for closing stock has
already been passed by debiting the Closing Account and crediting Purchases Account. That is why closing
stock appears in the trial balance. It will now be shown in the Balance Sheet and not in the Trading Account
since Purchases already stand reduced.
(b) There is a loan of Mohan @ 9% taken in October, 2010. The trial balance makes no mention of any
interest being paid to him. Hence, interest @9% must be provided for six months i.e. from October 2010 to
March 2011.]
[Ans.: G.P. = 20,400, N.P. =12,122, Total B/S =1,02,160].
3.The following figures were taken from the books of Amar on 31st March, 2011.
` `
Cash at bank 26,400 Royalties received 400
Cash in hand 30 Trade and general expenses 5,020
Sales 2,61,230 Reserve on patents 5,000
Stock (1st April, 2010) 27,410 Interest on loan 1,240
Sales returns 3,300 Repairs 840
Discount (Dr.) 6,380 Sundry creditors 20,780
Bills receivable 1,820 Buildings 95,820
Sundry debtors 52,720 Patent rights 50,000
Depreciation 4,780 Loan (raised on
Purchases 1,84,030 mortgage of buildings) 45,000
Discount on purchases 3,900 Agent’s commission 6,500
Wages 14,040 Bad debts 1,900
Provision for bad debts 5,400 Plant and machinery 30,000
Provision for discounts Capital 2,00,000
on debtors 1,970 Drawings 30,000
Advertising 1,000
Carriage 450
In addition, the following information is given:

(a) Stock on 31st March, 2011 was ` 32,250.
(b) The stock includes materials worth ` 2,250 for which bills had not been received and, therefore, not
accounted for yet.
(c) During the year, a sum of ` 3,000 was paid as ground rent for 2010-11 and 2011-12. This sum
stands debited to buildings account.
(d) Included in sales is an amount of ` 7,500 representing goods on sale or return, the customers still
having the right to return the goods. The goods invoiced were showing a profit of 20% on sales.
(e) A customer’s bill for ` 2,780 had been discounted with bank. The bank has sent intimation that the
bill has been dishonored. No entry has yet been passed in respect of this.
(f) A provision for bad debts is to be maintained at 5% of the debtors and a provision for discounts on
debtors is also to be maintained at 2% of the debtors.
Prepare trading and profit and loss account of Amar for the year ended 31st March, 2011and his balance
sheet as on that date.
[Ans.: G.P. = ` 60,500; N.P. = ` 39,698; Total of B/S =` 2,77,728].
4. Mr. T.P.’s trial balance as on 31st March, 2011 is as under:

Debit Balance ` Credit Balance `
Land and building 20,000 Capital 80,000
Machinery 50,000 Sundry creditors 8,000
Furniture and fixtures 4,000 Discounts received 400
Opening stock 16,300 Outstanding expenses 1,550
Purchases 80,000 Sales 1,50,500
Salaries 6,000 Repairs and renewals
Carriage on sales 1,500 provision 2,000
Freight on purchase 8,000
Advertising 5,400
Wages 15,000
Rent 3,000
Postage and stationery 1,500
General expenses 3,200
Loan to Santhanam @
9% (given on 1st Oct., 2010) 5,000
Prepaid insurance 200
Cash in hand 250
Cash in bank 3,100 _______
2,42,450 2,42,450
The following further information is given:
(a) Stock on 31st March, 2011 was ` 14,900.
(b) Machinery was purchased on 31st October, 2010 for ` 10,000 and was installed by own workmen.
The wages for this purpose amounted to ` 500. This amount is included in wages account.
(c) Depreciation is to be written off @
3% on land and buildings;
10% on machinery; and
5% on furniture and fixtures.
(d) Provision for repairs and renewals is credited with ` 1,500 every year.
(e) A reserve of 2% is to be made on creditors for discount.
From the information given above, prepare trading account and profit and loss account for the year ended
31st March, 2011 and balance sheet as at that date.
[Hints:
(a) Prepaid insurance and outstanding expenses are given in trial balance. This means double entry in
respect of these of items has been completed. Therefore, they will appear in balance sheet only.
(b) There is a provision for repairs and renewals. Actual repairs will, therefore, be debited to this
account and not to the profit and loss account, the provision for repairs and renewals account will be
credited with ` 1,500 by debiting profit and loss account.]
st
5. On 31 March 2011, the following Trial Balance was extracted from the books of Ghosh:
Dr.(`) Cr. (`)
Capital Account 90,000
Plant and Machinery 80,000
Sales 4,07,000
176 FP-FA&A
Purchases 2,60,000
Returns 6,000 5,750
Opening Stock 30,000
Discount 350 800
Bank Charges 75
Sundry Creditors 25,000
Salaries 26,800
Manufacturing wages 40,000
Carriage Inwards 750
Carriage Outwards 1,200
Bad Debts Provision 525
Rent, Rates and Taxes 10,000
Advertisements 2,000
Cash in Hand 900
Cash in Bank 6,000
Furniture & Fittings 20,000 _______
5,29,075 5,29,075
st
Prepare the final accounts for the year ended 31 March, 2011 and the Balance Sheet as on that date.
The following adjustments are required:
(i) Clocking Stock ` 35,000.
(ii) (i) Depreciation on Plant and Machinery @ 15% p.a. and on furniture & Fittings @ 10% p.a. to be
provided.
(iii) Bad Debts Provision to be adjusted to ` 500.
(iv) Interest on Capital to be allowed at 10% per annum.
(v) 15% of the profits remaining after providing interest on capital is to be carried to General Reserve.
[Ans.: G.P. = ` 1,11,000; N.P. = ` 41,140; Total of B/S =` 1,72,400].
st
6. From the following, prepare the Trading and Profit and Loss Accounts for the year ended 1 March 2011
and Balance Sheet of Niyati as at 31a March, 2011:
`
Capital 3,00,000
Trade Creditors 60,000
Bills Payable 20,000
General Reserve 50,000
Provision for Bad and Doubtful Debts 2,000
st
Profit and Loss Account, 1 April, 2010 10,900
Sales 11,50,000
Discount Allowed 9,500
st
Stocks at 1 April, 2010 1,10,000
Purchases 8,96,000
Discount Received 8,800
Buildings 1,00,000
Machinery, Plant and Furniture (Cost Rs.2,50,000) 1,50,000
Book Debts 72,800
Bank Balance (Dr.) 48,800
Investment, 9% Government Loan at par 20,000
Bills Receivable 45,000
Salaries an Wages 66,000
Audit Fees 10,000
Office Expenses 44,000
Repairs and Renewals 23,600
Interest Paid 1,400
Bad Debts Recovered 500
st
The value of stocks on hand as at 31 March, 2011 was `1,36,000 including goods costing `1,800 received on
th
30 March, 2011 in respect of which supplier’s bill had not yet been received. Goods of the cost of ` 3,000 were
sent to a customer on sale or approval basis. The invoice for ` 4,000 was entered in the Sales Book. Provision is
to be made for bad debts to the extent of ` 800, and for depreciation of buildings at 2% per annum: Machinery,
Plant and Furniture have been depreciated at 20% of the diminishing value; “Niyati” however, considers that the
st
proper method is 8% of the original cost and wishes to adopt it with effect from 1 April, 2009.
[Ans.: G.P. = ` 1,38,600; N.P. = ` 65,250; Total of B/S =` 2,86,600].
178 FP-FA&A
Lesson 8
Partnership Accounts
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Basic Concepts of Partnership As we know, sole proprietorship form of business
– Goodwill
organisation has limited financial and managerial
– Methods of Valuation of Goodwill
resources. It is also not possible to expand the
– Average Profit Method
business activities beyond a certain limit. So, in
– Super Profit Method
order to overcome these drawbacks, another
– Capitalization Method
form, i.e., partnership form of business has come
– Preparation of Final Accounts of
Partnership into existence. When two or more persons come
– Profit & Loss Appropriation Account together to share profits of the business carried
– Interest on Capital on by them, it is called partnership from of
– Interest on Drawings organIsation. Accounting for partnership firm is
– Salary or Commission payable to different from sole proprietorship in certain
Partners
aspects as there are more than one contributor
– Past Adjustments of Profit
to capital who shares profits and losses.
– Guarantee of Profit to a Partner
– Reconstitution of Partnership Here in this lesson, we will study about
– Change in Profit Sharing Ratio partnership form of business and preparation of
– Admission of a Partner accounts under various situations like admission
– Retirement of a Partner of new partner, retirement and death of partner
– Death of a Partner
and dissolution of partnership firm. We would also
– Dissolution of Partnership Firm
cover the concept of goodwill & valuation of
– Lesson Round-Up
goodwill for partnership firms under various
– Glossary
situations.
– Self Test Questions
“The main reason businesses should care now is because they need to acount for the liability & in
order to account for a liability in a year’s time you need to start acounting for it now.”
Steve Nathan
180 FP-FA&A
BASIC CONCEPTS OF PARTNERSHIP

Partnership: Partnership is defined in Section 4 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932 as “the relation between
persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business carried on by all or any of them acting for all”.
Partners and Firm: Persons who have entered into partnership with one another are individually known as
‘partners’ and collectively a ‘firm’. The name under which the business is carried on is called ‘firm’s name’. In
other words, a firm is a collection of the partners. The assets of the firm are joint property of the partners and
the partners are personally liable for all liabilities of the firm.
Essential features of Partnership: The following features must exist in order to constitute a partnership -
(i) There must be an agreement and for an agreement, at least two persons are required. The agreement
must be entered into by all the persons concerned. The persons must be competent to contract.
(ii) The Partnership Act does not lay down any maximum number of partners. But according to section 11
of the Companies Act, a partnership for a banking business must not have more than ten partners and
that for any other business it must not have more than twenty partners.
(iii) There must be a ‘business’ and for this purpose business would include any trade, profession or
occupation; For example, the jobs of medical practitioners or lawyers are not called business but there
can be a partnership between doctors or lawyers.
(iv) The business must be carried on for the purpose of earning profits which would be divided among the
partners i.e. there must be an agreement among the partners to share the profit (including negative
profits, i.e., losses) of a business.
(v) The business must be carried on by some or all of the partners for the benefit of all of them.
Consequently in partnership, there is a mutual agency among the partners and in the ordinary course
of business acts of one partner are considered to be the acts of the firm.
Partnership Deed: A contract for partnership need not necessarily be in writing although it is advisable to
reduce it in writing to minimize the disputes among the partners. But when the contract is put in black and
white, the written contract is called a partnership deed. It is a legal document signed by all the partners and
contains the following:
The name of the partners; name of the firm; nature of the business to be carried on by the firm; the powers of
the partners; when termination is certain, the term of duration of partnership; the amount of capital to be
contributed by each partner, the restrictions on working of each partner; methods of division of profits or
losses; salary; commission, interest on capital etc. payable to the partners; interest on drawings to be charged
on withdrawals; interest on loan payable to a partner; valuation of goodwill when there is a change in the
constitution of the firm; methods of accounting and the arbitration clause, etc.
If there is no partnership deed or if there is no provision in it indicating a contrary intention, the following
provisions of the Partnership Act, apply.
(i) Every partner has a right to take part in the conduct of the business of the firm and also the right of
free access to all records, books and accounts of the firm.
(ii) Partners share profits and losses equally. It is so, even when partners contribute capital unequally.
(iii) Partners are not entitled to any interest on capital contributed by them nor can they claim any salary
for the work done by them for the firm. In case a partnership deed provides for payment of interest on
capital or salary, it is payable only if there is a profit.
(iv) On amounts advanced by a partner to the firm in excess of his agreed share of capital, the partner is
entitled to receive interest on such excess at the rate of 6% per annum. Such interest is payable even
if there is a loss.
(v) No interest is to be charged on drawings.
Lesson 8  Partnership Accounts 181
REVIEW QUESTION
1. State whether the following statements are true false?

(i) There can be a partnership between two chartered accountants.
(ii) At the most, there can be fifty partners in a firm.
(iii) In every partnership, there must be a partnership deed.
(iv) Unless provided otherwise, partners are deemed to be sharing
profits and losses in the ratio of their capitals.
2. Fill in the blanks:
(i) If partnership deed is silent on the profit sharing ratio; interest
@_______ per annum is allowed on loans advanced by partners.
(ii) At the most there can be ____________ partners in a banking
business and _______ partners in any other business.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PARTNERSHIP AND JOINT VENTURE
Partnership Joint Venture
(i) It is not limited to a specific venture. (i) It is limited to a specific venture.
(ii) It is a continuing profit seeking enterprise. (ii) It is a terminable profit-seeking venture.
(iii) It is carried on under firm’s name. (iii) There is no common firm’s name in joint
venture.
(iv) Persons carrying on partnership business are (iv) Parties are called co-venturers.
called partners.
(v) Profit or loss is ascertained on an annual basis. (v) Profit or loss is ascertained after the end of the
specific venture.
(vi) Partnership firms are governed by Indian (vi) There is no specific act for joint ventures.
Partnership Act, 1932.
(vii) The doctrine of implied authority is applicable (vii) The doctrine of implied authority is not
to partners. applicable to co-venturers.
Loan Accounts: If a partner advances to the firm a sum over and above the amount of capital required to be
contributed by him under the partnership contract, the amount is credited to a loan account opened in his
name. In the event of dissolution of partnership, a partner is entitled to receive the amount of loan advanced
by him in priority to repayment of capital to the partners. However, if capital is insufficient to meet losses on
dissolution, the amount of the loan can be used to meet losses.
Capital Accounts: There are only a few points of difference between the accounts of a partnership firm
and those of a sole proprietorship concern. One difference is that in a sole proprietorship concern
there is only one capital account, whereas, in the firm’s ledger there are as many capital accounts as
there are partners in the firm (unless some partner is not required to contribute capital at all). Amount
contributed by a partner whether in cash or in the form of some other asset or assets is credited to his capital
account.
Types of Capital Account: The capital account of a partner may be either a Fixed Capital Account or a
Fluctuating Capital Account.
182 FP-FA&A
(i) Fixed Capital Account : Under Fixed Capital Account method, there will be two accounts for each partner,
i.e. (i) Partner’s Capital Account – recording only capital of the partner and (ii) Partner’s Current Account –
recording the transactions relating to drawings, interest on capital, commission, salary, share of profit or loss,
etc of the partner. Under this method, capital accounts are not touched at all and debits and credits for
interest on capital, interest on drawings, profits, losses, drawings, etc., are made in separate accounts called
current accounts or drawing accounts. Capital account is credited only when fresh (or further) capital is
introduced or debited when capital is withdrawn.
If there is no addition or withdrawal of capital during the year, the capital account does not change and it
remains fixed through-out the year. Sometimes, there may be current accounts as well as drawings accounts.
Drawings accounts are used to record only the withdrawals made by partner; and transferred to the respective
current accounts at the end of the year. Such drawings accounts are maintained when drawings are irregular
and extensive to facilitate calculation of interest on drawings.
(ii) Fluctuating Capital Account : Just as in a sole proprietorship concern, in partnership also, profits or losses,
drawings, interest on capital, interest on drawings, salary (to partners), commission, additional capital
introduced, etc., may all be recorded in the capital accounts. Such capital accounts are called Fluctuating
Capital Accounts because the balances of these accounts continue to fluctuate due to various debits and
credits. Under this method, there is no need to maintain respective current accounts because all transactions
passing through current accounts are passed through capital accounts.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN FIXED & FLUCTUATING CAPITAL METHODS
Fixed Capital Method Fluctuating Capital Method
(i) Two accounts of each partner are maintained, (i) Only one account of each partner i.e. capital
i.e. capital account and current account account is maintained.
(ii) Balance in capital account remains the same (ii) The balance in capital account changes every
except when capital is introduced or capital is year because of profits/losses, drawings, interest
withdrawn. on capital, interest on drawings, etc.
(iii) All adjustments in respect of profit, loss, (iii) All adjustments in respect of profit, loss,
drawings, interest on capital, interest on drawings, interest on capital, interest on
drawings, salary, commission, etc. are made in drawings, salary, commission, etc. are made in
the current account. the capital account.
(iv) The capital account will always have plus or (iv) Fluctuating capital account may sometimes show
credit balance while the current account may a debit (negative) balance.
have debit (negative) balance.
GOODWILL
Goodwill is the value of reputation of a business house in respect of the profits expected in future over and
above the normal level of profits earned by undertakings belonging to the same class of business. In other
words, goodwill is the present value of a firm’s anticipated super normal earnings. The term super normal
earnings means the earnings over and above the normal rate of return earned by representative firms in the
same industry. Goodwill refers to the reputation of a business enterprise acquired by it over the period of time
through its successful operations and customer’s satisfaction. It is an attribute of business which enables it to
earn more than other firms in the industry. Goodwill is an intangible asset but not a fictitious one. The
following are some of the factors that generally contribute to the value of goodwill of a firm:
– Quality of goods sold by the firm
– Location of the business unit
– Reputation of the owners of the firm
– Monopolistic nature of the business
– Risk involved in the business
– Efficiency of management
– Possibility of competition
– Government attitude
– Possession of special contracts for availability of materials
– Trends of profits, etc.
Need for valuation of goodwill

Whenever there is any change in the existing relationship of the partners, some partners may have to
sacrifice their future profits and some other partners may gain. Those who are sacrificing future profit should
be compensated by others who are gaining. As a result, the need for the valuation of goodwill in a firm may
arise in the following circumstances:
– Where the profit sharing ratio amongst the partners is changed.
– When a new partner is admitted.
 – When a partner retires or dies.
– When the business is sold, and
– When a firm is amalgamated with another firm.
METHODS OF VALUATION OF GOODWILL

One of the main factors contributing to the value of goodwill is the earning capacity of the business. Following
are the usual methods of calculating the value of goodwill:
(i) Average Profit Method:

Under this method, goodwill is valued on the basis of a certain number of years’ purchase of the average
profits of the past few years.
Example: Suppose on 1st April, 2011 on the admission of a new partner, it is agreed that goodwill of the
firm is valued at three years purchase of average profits for the last five years. Further, suppose the
profits for last five years have been as follows:
`
For the year ended 31st March 2011 10,740
For the year ended 31st March 2008 400 (loss)
Value of goodwill will be calculated as follows:
Total profits for the last 5 years = ` (10,740 + 7,900 + 5,430 – 400 + 8,500)
= ` 32,170
32170
,
Average profits = ` = ` 6,434
5
Three years’ purchase of the above mentioned average profit= ` 6,434 x 3 = ` 19,302
Hence, value of goodwill = ` 19,302
184 FP-FA&A
(ii) Super Profit Method
In this case the future maintainable profits of the firm are
Note: Normal rate of earning is that rate of
compared with the normal profits for the firm. Normal earnings earning which investors in general expect on their
of a business can be judged only in the light of normal rate of investments in the particular type of industry.
earning and the capital employed in the business. Hence, this Normal rate of earning depends upon the risk
method of valuing goodwill would require the following attached to the investment, bank rate, market
need and the period of investment.
information:
Capital employed is the aggregate of capital and
(i) A normal rate of return for representative firms in the reserves less the amount of non-trading assets
industry. such as investments. The capital employed may
also be ascertained by adding up the present
(ii) The fair value of capital employed. values of trading assets and deducting all
liabilities therefore. Super profit is the simple
(iii) Estimated future maintainable profits. difference between future maintainable operating
profit and normal profit.
There are three methods of calculating goodwill based on
super profit:
(a) Purchase of super profit
As per this method, value of goodwill is obtained by multiplying super profit by a certain number of years.
(b) Annuity method
Goodwill according to the annuity method is the present value of a terminal annuity of super profit for a
reasonable period during which the super profit is likely to occur. It is calculated as:
Super profit x Annuity rate.
(c) Capitalization of super profit
In this method, the value of goodwill is arrived at by capitalizing the super profit at the normal rate of return. It
is calculated as:
Super profit x 100
Normal rate of return
Example: A firm of X,Y and Z has a total capital investment of ` 2,25,000. The firm earned net profit
during the last four years as ` 35,000, ` 40,000, ` 60,000 and ` 50,000. The fair return on the net capital
employed is 15%. Find out the value of goodwill if it is based on 3 years’ purchase of the average super
profits of past four years.
Solution:
`
Total Profits earned during four years 1,85,000
Average annual profit ` 1,85,000 / 4 46,250
Fair return on capital employed: 15% of ` 2,25,000 33,750
Super Profit: ` 46,250 – ` 33,750 12,500
Value of goodwill being 3 years’ purchases of the average
Super profit = ` 12,500 x 3 37,500
(iii) Capitalization Method
The capitalization of profit method values goodwill at the excess of capital that should have been employed
for earning the average profit over the capital which has been actually employed. In this method, the value of
whole business is found by using the formula:
Average annual profit x 100

Normal rate of return
From this figure, the net assets (excluding goodwill) of the firm are deducted and the resultant value will be
the goodwill.
Example: Average profit of a firm is ` 48,000. The rate of capitalization is 12%. Assets and liabilities of the
firm are ` 4,00,000 and 1,70,000 respectively.
Value of goodwill be:
= `48,000 x 100 - (400,000-1,70,000)
12
= ` 4, 00,000 – ` 2, 30,000
= ` 1, 70,000
REVIEW QUESTION
On the admission of a new partner, it is decided that goodwill of the firm
be calculated at 2 years purchase of average profits for the past three
years which amounted to ` 8,620, ` 9,430 and ` 11,800 respectively.
What is the value of goodwill?
PREPARATION OF FINAL ACCOUNTS OF PARTNERSHIP FIRM

Final accounts of a partnership firm are prepared in the usual way in which they are prepared for a sole
proprietorship concern except that the profits in the partnership have to be distributed among the various
partners according to the terms of the partnership contract and the amount of profit may be arrived at after
making adjustments for interest on capital, interest on drawings, salaries to partners, etc. for this another
account “Profit & Loss Appropriation Account” is prepared after preparing Profit & Loss Account.
PROFIT AND LOSS APPROPRIATION ACCOUNT
As against the proprietorship business, the profits of the partnership firm are divided among partners in a given
ratio. The profit has to be divided between the partners in the agreed profit sharing ratio after making
necessary adjustments stated in the partnership deed such as interest on capitals, interest on drawings,
salaries or/commission to partners, etc. For this purpose an additional account is prepared, known as Profit
and Loss Appropriation Account in which the net profit is transferred from Profit and Loss Account and
necessary adjustments are made therein before the profit is divided between the partners. Following are the
adjustment to be made in the profit & loss appropriation account:-
1. Interest on Capital
Where the profit sharing ratio is different from the ratio of capitals contributed by the partners, interest on
capitals may be allowed to partners and charged against the profits of the firm to make the distribution of
profits equitable. Interest on capital being an appropriation of profits, should be charged only out of the profits
available. In case of loss, no interest on capital is provided. Interest is mostly calculated on the capitals at the
commencement of the year. Where fresh capital has been introduced during the course of the year, interest is
also allowed on this additional amount for the period for which the amount has been in business. Journal
entry for interest on capital will be:
Profit and Loss Appropriation A/c Dr.

To Partner’s Capital/Current account
2. Interest on Drawings
Interest may be charged on drawings made by partners to make distribution of profit more equitable. Interest
on drawings should be charged on different amounts withdrawn for different periods. Journal entry for interest
on drawing will be:
Partner’s Capital/Current A/c Dr.

To Profit and Loss Appropriation A/c
186 FP-FA&A
Note: If a partner withdraws a fixed sum at the end of each month, the interest on his drawings for the
year will be equal to the interest on his total drawings for a period of 5½ months.
If a partner withdraws the fixed amount in the middle of each month, interest will be calculated on his
total drawings for a period of 6 months.
If he withdraws the amount at the beginning of each month, interest will be calculated on his total
drawings for the period of 6½ months.
REVIEW QUESTION
st
P, a partner withdraws the following sums during the year ended 31
March 2011:
On 1st May 2010 ` 1,000
On 1st August 2010 ` 3,000
On 1st January 2011 ` 2,000
On 1st March 2011 ` 1,000
Calculate interest on his drawing @6% p.a.
3. Salary or Commission Payable to Partners

If in a firm there are some active partners and some sleeping partners, the active partners may be allowed
salary for the work. The payment of salaries is regarded as a distribution of part of the profit of the firm. Thus,
the amount of profit is reduced before it is divided in the agreed profit sharing ratio. The accounting treatment
is same when a partner is paid commission or bonus. Journal entry will be as follows:

To Partner’s Capital/Current A/c
Commission as a % of Net Profit before charging such commission
= Net Profit before Commission X Rate of Commission

100
Commission as a % of Net Profit after charging such commission
= Net Profit before Commission X Rate of Commission__

100 + Rate of Commission
A pro-forma of profit and Loss account is as follows: (It is assumed that there are two partners X & Y)
SPECIMEN OF PROFIT AND LOSS APPROPRIATION ACCOUNT

Profit and Loss Appropriation Account
Dr. Cr.
To Interest on Capital : By Profit and Loss Account
X’s Capital/ Current A/c XXX (profit of the current year) XXX
Y’s Capital / Current A/c XXX XXX By Interest on drawings:
To Partners’ Salary: X’s Capital /Current A/c XXX
X’s Capital/ Current A/c XXX Y’s Capital/Current A/c XXX XXX
Y’s Capital / Current A/c XXX XXX By Loss transferred to:
To Partners’ Commission: X’s Capital/ Current A/c XXX
X’s Capital/ Current A/c XXX Y’s Capital/ Current A/c XXX XXX
Y’s Capital / Current A/c XXX XXX
To Transfer to Reserve XXX
To Profit transferred to:
X’s Capital/ Current A/c XXX
Y’s Capital/ Current A/c XXX XXX
Note: - Interest on loan is charged against profit in Profit & Loss Account only. It is not the appropriation of
profits.
4. Past Adjustments of Profit

Sometimes, amounts already distributed among the partners as profits or losses for a particular year require to
be readjusted after the close of accounts for the year either due to discovery of some mistakes subsequent to
the closing of the books or due to revision of certain condition of the partnership contract with retrospective
effect. In such a case, the revenue accounts which have already been closed off are not reopened. Amounts
already debited or credited to various partners are compared with the amounts which should have been
debited or credited and an entry is passed for the difference to adjust the various accounts.
5. Guarantee of Profit to a Partner

Sometimes to induce a person to become a partner, a guarantee is given to him by other partners that his
share of profits will not be below a certain figure. Usually when such a guarantee is given, it is also agreed that
if in a year his share of profit exceeds the minimum limit, he would have to refund the excess in repayment of
amount previously credited to him in excess of his normal share of profits. When such an agreement exists,
first profits should be divided as if no guarantee has been given. Then, the amount by which the actual share
falls short of the guaranteed share should be credited to the partner to whom the guarantee has been given
and debited to other partners in their mutual profit sharing ratio. For recoupment of excess in subsequent
years, a reverse entry will be passed.
Instead of all the partners, one partner may give the guarantee to a new partner that should the share of profits
to the new partner fall below a certain figure; guarantor will make up the difference. In such case, the capital
account of the partner in whose favour the guarantee is given will be credited and the capital account of the
guarantor partner will be debited for the excess of the guaranteed amount over the actual share of the partner
in whose favor guarantee has been given.
There can also be an arrangement that should profit due to the new partner exceed a certain figure, a
particular partner, may bear the burden of such excess. It is really a guarantee to the other partners that the
share of the new partner will not exceed a stipulated figure.
188 FP-FA&A
REVIEW QUESTION
On 1st April 2010, X’s Capital Account showed a balance of ` 50,000
while Y’s Capital Account showed a balance of ` 20,000. In 2010-11 the
firm earned a profit of ` 30,000 before adjustment for salary to Y
amounting to ` 6,000 for the year and interest on capital @ 7% per
annum. Show how the profits would be distributed between X and Y
assuming that they are equal partners.
Illustration 1:
On 1st April, 2010 P and Q started business in partnership agreeing to share profits and losses equally. P
contributed ` 30,000 while Q contributed ` 20,000 by way of capital. It was agreed that interest be allowed on
capital @6% per annum and charged on drawing @ 8% per annum. P withdrew ` 200 at the end of every
month whereas Q withdrew ` 450 in the middle of every month.
Profits before the above noted adjustments for the year ended 31st March, 2011 amounted to ` 8,970. Show
the necessary ledger accounts assuming:
(a) capital accounts are fluctuating
(b) capital accounts are fixed.
Solution:
Working Notes:
30,000 6
Interest on P’s Capital = `
100
= ` 1,800
20,000 6
Interest on Q’s Capital = `
100
= ` 1,200
Total drawing by P = ` 200 12
= ` 2,400
Total drawings by Q = ` 450 12 = ` 5,400
2,400 11 8
Interests on P’s drawings = ` = ` 88
2 12 100
5,400 6 8
Interest on Q’s drawings = `
12 100
= ` 216
(a) When capital accounts are fluctuating:
Dr. Cr.
To Interest on Capital: By Profit and Loss Account 8,970
P’s Capital A/c 1,800 By Interest on drawings:
Q’s Capital A/c 1,200 P’s Capital A/c 88
To Profit transferred to: Q’s Capital A/c 216
P’s Capital A/c (1/2 of Profit) 3,137
Q’s Capital A/c (1/2 of Profit) 3,137
9,274 9,274
P’s Capital Account
Dr. Cr.
2011 2010
Mar. 31 To P’s Drawings A/c 2,400 Apr.1 By Cash A/c 30,000
Mar. 31 To Profits and Loss 2011 By Profits and Loss
Appropriation A/c Mar. 31 Appropriation A/c
(Interest on Drawings) 88 (Interest on Capital) 1,800
Mar. 31 To Balance c/d 32,449 Mar. 31 By Profits and Loss
Appropriation A/c 3,137
34,937 34,937
2011
Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 32,449
Q’s Capital Account
Dr. Cr.
2011 2010
Mar. 31 To Q’s Drawings A/c 5,400 Apr.1 By Cash A/c 20,000
Mar. 31 To Profits and Loss 2011 By Profits and Loss
Appropriation A/c Mar. 31 Appropriation A/c
(Interest on Drawings) 216 (Interest on Capital) 1,200
Mar. 31 To Balance c/d 18,721 Mar. 31 By Profits and Loss
24,337 24,337
2011
Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 18,721
(b) When capital accounts are fixed:
Dr. Cr.
To Interest on Capital : By Profit and Loss Account 8,970
P’s Current A/c 1,800 By Interest on drawings:
Q’s Current A/c 1,200 P’s Current A/c 88
To Profit transferred to: Q’s Current A/c 216
P’s Current A/c (1/2 of Profit) 3,137
Q’s Current A/c (1/2 of Profit) 3,137
9,274 9,274
190 FP-FA&A
P’s Capital Account
Dr. Cr.
2011 2010
Mar. 31 To Balance c/d 30,000 Apr.1 By Cash A/c 30,000
2011
Q’s Capital Account
Dr. Cr.
2011 2010
Mar. 31 To Balance c/d 20,000 Apr.1 By Cash A/c 20,000
2011
P’s Current Account
Dr. Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 31 To P’s Drawings A/c 2,400 Mar. 31 By Profits and Loss
Mar. 31 To Profits and Loss Appropriation A/c
Appropriation A/c (Interest on Capital) 1,800
(Interest on Drawings) 88 Mar. 31 By Profits and Loss
Mar. 31 To Balance c/d 2,449
4,937 4,937
2011 By Balance b/d 2,449
Apr. 1
Q’s Current Account
Dr. Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 31 To Q’s Drawings A/c 5,400 Mar. 31 By Profits and Loss
Mar. 31 To Profits and Loss Appropriation A/c
Appropriation A/c (Interest on Capital) 1,200
(Interest on Drawings) 216 Mar. 31 By Profits and Loss
Mar. 31 By Balance c/d 1,279
5,616 5,616
2011
Apr.1 To Balance b/d 1,279
Illustration 2:
On 1st April, 2011 the capital accounts of A, B and C stood at ` 30,000, ` 20,000 and ` 10,000
respectively. They shared profits and losses equally. Profit and Loss account for the year ended 31 March,
2011 revealed a net profit of `12, 000 which was transferred to capital accounts of the partners equally.
It was decided in April 2011 that profits should be distributed equally after allowing interests on capital @ 6%
per annum with effect from 1st April, 2010. While going through the books of account for 2010-11 it was
discovered that repair charges for A’s personal scooter amounting to ` 90 had been charged to Repairs
Account.
Show the journal entries necessary to adjust the current account of the partners.
Solution:
` `
Profits as already distributed 12,000
Add: Repair charges to be charged to A’s Current Account 90
12,090
Less : Interest on:
A’s Capital 1,800
B’s Capital 1,200
C’s Capital 600 3,600
Net profit after adjustment 8,490
Each partner will get ` 8,490 = ` 2,830
3
Revised Distribution
A B C
` ` `
Net Profit 2,830 2,830 2,830
Interest of Capital 1,800 1,200 600
4,630 4,030 4,430
Less : Repair charges 90 – –
4,540 4,030 3,430
Distribution as already made of ` 12,000 4000 4000 4000
Net Adjustment to be made +540 +30 – 570
Journal Entry
Particulars Dr. (`) Cr. (`)
C’s Current Account Dr. 570
To A’s Current Account 540
To B’s Current Account 30
(Adjustment effected for change on the basis of
distribution of profit for 2010-11 and error located in
the accounts for 2010-11)
Illustration 3:
C and D were sharing profits in the ratio of 3:1. Profits as per books for 2010-11 amounted to ` 40,000. In
April 2011, they agreed to change the profit sharing ratio to 5:3 with retrospective effect from 1st April, 2010. It
was found that outstanding expenses of ` 4,000 as on 31st March, 2010 and outstanding expenses of `
3,000 as on 31st March, 2011 had not been taken into account while drawing up the final accounts for 2009-
10 and 2010-11. Also by mistake interest on drawings had been ignored while preparing the accounts for
2010-11 such interest being ` 600 on C’s drawings and ` 300 on D’s drawings. Pass the necessary journal
entries to adjust the capitals of partners.
192 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Working Notes:
C D
Old ratio 3:1 or 6 : 2
New Ratio 5 : 3
D gets 1/8 more
C D
` `
Old distribution of ` 40,000 (A) 30,000 Cr. 10,000 Cr.
New distribution of ` 40,000 +
` 600 + ` 300 or ` 40,900
in the ratio of 5 : 3 25,562.50 Cr. 15,337.50 Cr.
Interest on Drawings 600 Dr. 300 Dr.
(B) 24,962.50 (Net) Cr. 15,037.50 (Net) Cr.
Difference (A) – (B) 5,037.50 Dr. 5,037.50 Cr.
Outstanding expenses of ` 4,000 as on 31st March, 2010 will be debited to partners’ capital accounts in the
old ratio (to raise Outstanding Expenses Account) and then will be credited to partners’ capital accounts in
the new ratio (to write off Outstanding Expenses Account). Outstanding Expenses of ` 3,000 will be debited
to capital accounts in the new ratio and credited to Outstanding Expenses Account. In the entry shown
below, only the net effect has been recorded:
Journal Entries
Particular Dr. (`) Cr. (`)
C’s Capital Account Dr. 2,375*
D’s Capital Account Dr. 625*
To Outstanding Expenses Account 3,000
(Adjustment entry for outstanding expenses of
` 4,000 as on 31st March, 2010 and of ` 3,000 as on
31st March, 2011)
C’s Capital Account Dr. 5,037.50

To D’s Capital Account 5,037.50
(Entry to adjust capital accounts on redistribution of
profit for 2010-11)
C D
* 31.3.2010 (Ratio 3 : 1) Dr. 3,000 Dr. 1,000
1.4.2010 (Ratio 5 : 3) Cr. 2,500 Cr. 1,500
31.3.2011 (Ratio 5 : 3) Dr. 1,875 Dr. 1,125
Dr. 2,375 Dr. 625
Note: If capital accounts are fixed, current accounts will be debited and credited instead of capital accounts.
Illustration 4:
With effect from 1st April, 2010, D, the manager in the firm of A,B, and C who were sharing profits and losses
in the ratio of 5:3:2 respectively was admitted as a partner in the firm with 1/11th share of profit. It was agreed
that should D’ share of profits exceed his remuneration as the manager, A will bear the burden of such an
excess. The manager D was entitled to a salary of ` 10,000 p.m. plus a commission of 2% of net profit
remaining after charging his salary but before charging his commission.
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2011 showed a profit of ` 22, 00,000. Show how the
profit will be distributed among the four partners.
Solution:
The main point is that B and C are not to suffer due to D’s becoming a partner. Suppose, D is still the
manager; then:
`
Profit as given 22,00,000
Less: Salary which D would have received 1,20,000
20,80,000
Less: D’s commission @ 2% on ` 20,80,000 41,600
Net profit 20,38,400
A (5/10) B (3/10) C (2/10) D (as Manager)

Distribution 10,19,200 6,11,520 4,07,680 1,61,600
Under the new arrangement D will receive 1/11th of ` 22,00,000 i.e., ` 2,00,000. It means that D will
get ` 38,400 more than what he would have got as manager. This will be deducted from A’s share. Hence,
the profit of ` 22,00,000 will be distributed as follows:
A ` 9,80,800
B ` 6,11,520
C ` 4,07,680
D ` 2,00,000
Illustration 5:
P and S were in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 7:3 respectively. As a mark of
appreciation of the services of their manager Z, they admitted him into partnership on 1st April, 2010 giving
him 1/10th share of the future profits; the mutual ratio between P and S remaining unchanged. Before
becoming a partner, Z was getting a salary of ` 4,000 per month and a commission of 5% on the net profits
remaining after charging his salary and commission. It was agreed that any excess over his former
remuneration to which Z as a partner becomes entitled will be provided out of P’s share of profit.
The net profit for the year ended 31st March, 2011 amounted to ` 19,80,000. Prepare the profit and loss
appropriation account for the year ended 31st March, 2010 showing the distribution of the profits of the net
profits amongst the partners. Show your working notes clearly.
Solution:
In the books of P, S and Z

Profits and Loss Appropriation Account
Dr. for the year ended 31st March,2011 Cr.
To Profit transferred to By Net profit b/d 19, 80,000
Capital Accounts:
P 12, 30,000
S 5, 52,000
Z 1, 98,000 ________
19, 80,000 19, 80,000
194 FP-FA&A
Working Notes:
` `
(1) Z’s share: 1/10 of ` 19, 80,000 1, 98,000
Less: Z’s share as manager:
Salary: ` 4,000 x 12 48,000
Commission:  5 of ` 1,98,000-48,000  92,000 1, 40,000
 105 
_______
Excess amount chargeable to P 58,000
(2) When Z acted as manager, divisible profit of the old
partner would have been (` 19,80,000 – ` 1,40,000) 18,40,000
P’s share of profit would have been
( 7 of ` 18,40,000) 12,88,000
10
S’s share of profits would have been
( 3 of ` 18,40,000) 5,52,000
10
(3) When Z becomes a partner, share of profit of each:
P (` 12,88,000 – ` 58,000) 12,30,000

S 5, 52,000
Z 1, 98,000
19, 80,000
Alternatively, the final distribution of profit can be arrived at as follows:
Dr. Cr.
To Z’s Capital A/c (1/10) 1, 98,000 By Net Profit b/d 19, 80,000
To Balance c/d 17, 82,000 _________
19, 80,000 19, 80,000
To P’s Capital A/c (7/10) 12, 88,000 By Balance c/d 17, 82,000
To S’s Capital A/c (3/10) 5, 52,000 By P’s Capital A/c 58,000
18, 40,000 18, 40,000
Final Distribution
`
P=` 12,88,000 - `58,000 = 12,30,000
S = 5,52,000
Z = 1,98,000
19,80,000
RECONSTITUTION OF PARTNERSHIP
When there is any change in the existing agreement of partnership, it is reconstitution of partnership. As a
result of reconstitution, the existing agreement of partnership comes to an end & a new agreement is formed.
The firm continues its business in usual manner. Some special adjustments are to be made in the accounts of
partnership firm in cases of change in the constitution of the firm.
There may be changes in the constitution of the firm due to following reasons:
Change in the constitution of the

firm
Change in Profit Sharing Ratio
Admission of New Partner
Retirement of Partner
Death of partner
CHANGE IN PROFIT SHARING RATIO

Whenever there is a change in profit sharing ratio of the existing partners, there arises the need for valuation
of goodwill. A change in profit sharing ratio results in gain to one partner and loss to the other. As a result, the
partner who gains from the new ratio has to compensate the partner who loses. The gaining partner, in
respect of share of profit, may buy his share of profits from any one or two partners, as the case may be. The
partners who sell the shares may sacrifice in equal or unequal proportions. The amount of goodwill credited to
partner(s) from whom the gaining partner purchases his share is always in proportion to the sacrifice made.
The journal entry for this purpose is to debit the partner’s capital account (one who gains) with the
proportionate share of goodwill and credit the capital account or accounts of the partners (who lose) with the
same amount.
Illustration 6:
On 1st April, 2011 A, B and C who were sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 5:3:2 respectively decided to
become equal partners. Goodwill of the firm was valued at ` 45,000. It was also decided to appreciate the
book value of land and buildings by ` 14,000. No goodwill account appeared in the books of the firm and none
was opened on change in profit sharing ratio. Pass journal entries to make the necessary adjustments.
196 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Journal Entries
Land and Buildings Account Dr. 14,000
To Revaluation Account 14,000
(Appreciation in the value of land and buildings)________
Revaluation Account Dr. 14,000
To A’s Capital Account 7,000
To B’s Capital Account 4,200
To C’s Capital Account 2,800
(Transfer of profit on revaluation to partners’ capital
accounts in old profit sharing ratio)
B’s Capital Account Dr. 1,500
Capital Account Dr. 6,000
(Adjustment for goodwill on change in profit sharing ratio)
Working Notes:
Old profit sharing ratio = 5 : 3 : 2
10 10 10
1 1 1
: :
New profit sharing ratio = 3 3 3
5 1 15 10 5
A loses = 10 3 30 30
B gains = 1 3 10 9 1
3 10 30 30
C gains = 1 2 10 6 4
3 10 30 30
A will be credited with 5 45,000 or ` 7,500 for goodwill

30
B will be debited with 1 45,000 or ` 1,500

30
and
C will be debited with 4 45,000 or ` 6,000.
30
REVIEW QUESTION
On 1st April, 2011 A and B who are sharing profits and losses in the ratio
of 3:2 decided to become equal partners with effect from 1st April, 2010
with the additional provision that interest on capitals will be allowed @7%
per annum. A and B started the firm on 1st April, 2010 with a capital of
`30,000 and ` 20,000 respectively. The profit for the year ended 31st
March, 2011 amounted to ` 18,000. Pass the necessary adjustment entry.
ADMISSION OF A NEW PARTNER
A new partner can be admitted with the consent of all existing partners. The various reasons for admission of
a new partner may be requirement of more capital, influence or managerial skill of the new partner etc.
A new partner may either purchase his share of profits from one or more of the existing partners or he may
contribute to a share in the assets of the firm. In the former case, the total capital of the firm does not change;
the amount brought in by the new partner is paid to the partners from whom share is purchased. In the latter
case, however, the total capital of the firm is increased by the amount brought in by the new partner.
Suppose, A and B share profits and losses in the ratio of 2:1 respectively and their capitals stand at
1
15,000
` 10,000 and ` 5,000 respectively. If C is admitted and he buys 1/5th share from A, C will bring ` 5
` 3,000 in cash which will be withdrawn by A. The new balances of the capital accounts of A, B and C will be
` 7,000, ` 5,000 and 3,000 respectively. If C contributes to the capital for 1/5th share of profits, he will
5 1
bring ` 15, 000x x  ` 3,750. Total capital of the new firm will be ` 18,750.
4 5
Admission of new partner results in the reconstitution of partnership firm, as a new agreement to carry on the
business as a partnership firm comes into existence. When there is a change in the constitution of
partnership, the profit sharing ratio of the existing partners may be revised. When a new partner is admitted,
he is entitled to a share in the assets of the firm and in the future profits of the firm.
For acquiring shares in the assets of the firm Contribute Capital

partner has to
For acquiring right to future profits in the firm Contribute towards

new partner has to Goodwill of the firm
When a new partner is admitted, the amount may be contributed to the capital of the firm in the form of assets
other than cash also. Journal Entry will be :
Cash A/c Dr.

Any other Asset A/c Dr.
To New Partner’s Capital A/c
Example: X and Y are carrying on business in partnership. Z is admitted as a new partner who brings in `8,
000 in cash and trademarks and patents valued at ` 2,000. The journal entry will be:
Cash Dr. 8,000
Patents and Trade Marks Dr. 2,000
To Z’s Capital Account 10,000
(Capital brought in by Z in the form of cash, patents &
and trade marks)
When a new partner is admitted, a number of adjustments have to be made. Some of the major adjustments
to be made are as follows:
 – Calculation of new profit sharing ratio
– Calculation of sacrificing ratio
– Transfer of accumulated profits and reserves to existing partners
– Revaluation of assets and liabilities
– Treatment of goodwill
198 FP-FA&A
Calculation of New Profit Sharing Ratio
Case 1:When the new profit sharing ratio is not specially mentioned but only the share given to the new
partner is mentioned, the assumptions is that the old partners among themselves continue to share profits in
the same relative ratio in the which they were sharing profits prior to admission of the new partner. In such a
case, the share given to the new partner should be deducted from 1 and then the remainder should be
divided among the old partners in the old ratio. Suppose, A and B are partners sharing profits and losses in
the ratio of 3:2 and they admit C as a new partner giving him 1/5 share in future profits. Then the new ratio will
be calculated as follows:
1
C’s share =
5
1 4
Remaining share = 1 - =
5 5
4 3 12
A' s share = =
5 5 25
4 2 8
B' s share = =
5 5 25
1 5
C' s share = =
5 25
New ratio for A, B, and C is 12: 8: 5
Case II: Sometimes the new partner purchases his share from the other partner in different proportions.
th th
Suppose, in the above example C purchases 4/25 share from A and 1/25 share from B. Then the new ratio
will be calculated as follows:
3 4 15 - 4 11
A' s share = - = =
5 25 25 25
2 1 10 - 1 9
B' s share = - = =
5 25 25 25
4 1 5
C’s share =
25 25 25
Hence, the new ratio = 11: 9: 5.
REVIEW QUESTION
1. P and Q are equal partners. R is admitted as a new partner and he is
given 1/5th share in the profit of the firm. What will be the new profit
sharing ratio?
2. A & B are partners sharing profits in the ratio of 3:2. They admit C, a
th th
new partner who acquires 1/5 share from A and 4/25 share from B.
Calculate new profit sharing ratio.
Calculation of Sacrificing Ratio

In partnership business when a partner is admitted into a firm, the old partners have to surrender a portion of
their shares of profits in favor of the new partner. Thus, sacrificing ratio is the difference between old profit
sharing ratio and the new profit sharing ratio of the old partners. In this case, sacrifice made by the existing
partners may either be in the ratio in which they were sharing profit prior to the admission or in some other
ratio. This may be as follows:
(i) Besides the old ratio of old partners, if the new ratio of the incoming partners has been given without
mentioning the details of the sacrifice made by the old partners, then the presumption is that the old
partners have made sacrifice in the old ratio.
(ii) Sometimes, the new ratio of all the partners and old ratio of old the partners are given. In that
case sacrificing ratio must be calculated by deducting the new share from the old share of the old
partners.
For example, if A and B share profits in the ratio of 5:3 and on admission of C the new ratio between A, B and
C is agreed upon as 7:5:4 respectively, the ratio of sacrifice will be calculated as follows:
Sacrifice by A = A’s old share – A’s new share = 5 – 7 3

8 16 16
3 5 1
Sacrifice by B = B' s old share B' s new share = =
8 16 16
3 1
Hence ratio of sacrifice between A and B = : or 3 : 1
16 16
Transfer of Reserves to Existing Partners
Reserves created out of profits or balance in Profit and Loss Account at the time of admission of a new
partner must be transferred to the capital accounts of the old partners in the old profit sharing ratio. It is done
because the new partner is not entitled to any share of the accumulated profits and similarly, he is not liable to
bear any part of the past losses. So, the accumulated losses should also be transferred to the capital
accounts of the old partners in the old profit sharing ratio. Transfer to reserves is done even when no new
partner is admitted but the partners change their profit sharing ratio. The journal entry will be:
Reserves Account/Profit and Loss Account Dr.

To Old Partner’s Capital/Current Accounts
Example: A and B are partners in a business sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2 respectively.
The Profit and Loss Account shows an undistributed profit of ` 5,000 and the general reserve of ` 10,000.
th
They admitted a new partner ‘N’ with 1/4 share in the profits. The journal entry will be:
Profit and Loss A/c Dr. 5,000
General Reserves A/c Dr. 10,000
To A’s Capital A/c 9,000
To B’s Capital A/c 6,000
(Being the amount of Profit and Loss A/c
and the General Reserve distributed among
the old partners in the old profit sharing ratio.)
Revaluation of Assets and Liabilities on Admission of a Partner

A new partner is not to be benefited by any appreciation in the values of assets of the firm or by any decrease
in the values on liabilities of the firm. Similarly, he is not to bear any part of the loss that is due to decrease in
the values of the assets or increase in the values of the liabilities of the firm till the date of his admission.
Therefore, before a new partner is admitted, the assets and liabilities of the firm are revalued and any profit or
loss resulting from such a revaluation is transferred to old partners’ capital accounts in the old profit sharing
ratio. For this purpose, the following entries should be passed:
200 FP-FA&A
Revaluation Account Dr.

To Assets A/c (individually)
To Liabilities A/c (individually)
(To record decrease in the book values of assets and increase in
the book values of liabilities as agreed upon on admission of the
new partner).
Assets A/c (individually) Dr.
Liabilities A/c (individually) Dr.
To Revaluation Account
(To record increase in the book values of assets and decreases in
the book value of liabilities as agreed upon on admission of the
new partner).
Revaluation Account Dr.
To Old Partners’ Capital/Current Accounts (individually)
(Transfer of profit on revaluation to old partners capital
accounts in their old profit sharing ratio)
OR
Old Partners’ Capital/Current Accounts (individually) Dr.
To Revaluation Account
(Transfer of loss on revaluation to old partners capital accounts
in their old profit sharing ratio).
Sometimes, all the partners including the new partner may agree not to alter the book value of assets and
liabilities even when they agree to revalue them. In order to record this, Memorandum Revaluation Account
is opened. It has two parts. In the first part, the entries for revaluation of assets and liabilities are made in the
usual manner. But no record of revaluation of assets and liabilities is made through the respective ledger
accounts. The resultant profit or loss on revaluation in the first part is transferred to the capital accounts of old
partners in the old profit sharing ratio. In order to complete the double entry, entries regarding assets and
liabilities made in the first part are reversed in the second part so that the value of assets and liabilities remain
unchanged. The balance in the second part is transferred to the capital accounts of all the partners including
new partner in their new profit sharing ratio. If there is a profit, the following entries are passed.
Memorandum Revaluation Account Dr.

To Old Partners’ Capital/Current Accounts (individually)
(Profit on revaluation transferred to old partners’ capital accounts
in old profit sharing ratio.)
All Partners’ (including new) Capital Accounts/Current
(individually) Dr.
To Memorandum Revaluation Account
(Transfer of Memorandum Revaluation Account to all the
partners’ (including the new partners) capital accounts in the
new profit sharing ratio).
Note: If there is a loss on revaluation, the above entries will be reversed.

DIFFERNCE BETWEEN REVALUATION A/C AND MEMORANDUM REVALUATION A/C
Revaluation account Memorandum revaluation account
(i) Revaluation account is prepared to find out the (i) Memorandum revaluation account is also
profit or loss on revaluation of assets and prepared to record the effect of revaluation of
liabilities which appear in the new balance sheet assets and liabilities but they are recorded at
at the revalued figures. their old figures in the new balance sheet.
(ii) Revaluation account is not divided in parts. The (ii) Memorandum revaluation account has two parts.
profit or loss of goes to old partners only. The profit or loss of first part goes to old partners
while the profit or loss of the second part goes to
all the partners including the new partner.
Treatment of Goodwill on Admission
Whenever a new partner is admitted, he is generally expected to pay cash to old partners for his share of
goodwill for the right he acquires to share in super profits of the firm in future. Strictly, such a payment should
be made only when there are super profits but in actual practice, some premium or goodwill may have to be
paid by the new partner on his admission even when the business of the firm is not unusually profitable and
consequently there are no super profits. The payment is made to the old partners for the sacrifice they make
on their shares of profits for future. It is not necessary that the new partner must bring cash for his share of
goodwill, only adjustment may be made for goodwill. The various alternative courses for the accounting
treatment of goodwill on admission of a partner are as follows:
Important Note: Concept of accounting treatment of Goodwill
1) Goodwill should be recorded in the books of account only when some consideration in money or
money’s worth has been paid for it. Whenever a business is acquired for a price (payable in cash or in
shares or otherwise) which is in excess of the value of the net assets of the business taken over, the
excess should be treated as goodwill. For example, when a partnership firm of X and Y purchases the net
assets of Z amounting to ` 6,00,000 for ` 6,50,000 in cash, the additional payment of ` 50,000 is a
payment for goodwill in cash. It is a case of purchased goodwill (an asset) and can be recorded in the
books of account of X and Y. Thus, only purchased goodwill is recorded in the books of account when the
payment is made directly in cash or money’s worth.
2) When no payment is made for the purchase of goodwill, it is a case of internally, generated goodwill or
inherent goodwill. For instance, in the event of reconstitution of the firm as a result of admission, retirement,
death or change in profit sharing ratio, goodwill of the firm is evaluated. In such cases, the value of goodwill
should not be brought into books of account as it is an inherent or self generated goodwill and no money or
money’s worth has been paid for it. The goodwill is calculated as per any of the methods of valuation of
goodwill and adjusted through the capital accounts of the partners. No goodwill account is raised in the
books of accounts on reconstitution of the firm or change in the profit sharing ratio among the partners.
Therefore, the internally generated or inherent goodwill is not raised in the books of account. It is treated
through the capital accounts of the concerned partners. Always remember that in this case the goodwill
raised will not be shown in the balance sheet.
(i) When the incoming partner brings in the required amount of goodwill in cash and this amount is
retained in the business:
 – The amount of goodwill brought in by the incoming partner along with his share of capital is credited to
his capital account and
– Then this amount of goodwill is debited to the old partners capital account and credited to the old
partners in the sacrificing ratio.
202 FP-FA&A
JOURNAL ENTRIES:
(a) Bank Dr.
(Being amount of goodwill and capital brought by the new partner)
(b) New Partner’s Capital A/c Dr.
To Old Partners’ Capital Accounts
(Being the amount of goodwill brought in by the new partner is
shared by the old partners in the sacrificing ratio)
(ii) When the required amount of goodwill brought in by the new partner in cash is immediately
withdrawn by the old partners
In this case the amount of goodwill is withdrawn by the partners in the sacrificing ratio and the entry for
withdrawal will be:
JOURNAL ENTRIES:
(a) Bank A/c Dr.
(Being amount of goodwill and capital brought by the new partner)
(b) New Partner’s Capital A/c Dr.
(Being the amount of goodwill brought in by the new partner is
shared by the old partners in the sacrificing ratio)
(c) Old Partners’ Capital Accounts Dr.
To Bank
(Being the amount of goodwill brought in by the new partner is withdrawn
by the old partners in the sacrificing ratio)
(iii) Where the new partner pays amount of goodwill privately to the old partners
In this case, no entry is passed in the books of the firm. The amount to be paid to each partner should be
calculated as per the profit-sacrificing ratio.
(iv) Where the partner is unable to bring anything for goodwill
In this case, the value of goodwill should not be raised in the books. Since it is inherent goodwill, it is
preferable that such value of goodwill should be adjusted through partners’ capital accounts. The new
partner’s capital is debited with his share of goodwill and the amount is credited to old partners’ capital
accounts in the ratio in which they make sacrifice of profits. The journal entry will be:
New Partner’s Capital A/c Dr.

(Being the amount of goodwill credited to old
partners’ capital accounts in the sacrificing ratio
by debiting the new partners’ capital account)
(v) When the new partner brings a portion of the required amount of goodwill
In this case, the amount brought in by the new partner will be shared by the old partners in the sacrificing ratio
and the portion of amount of goodwill not brought in by the new partner is adjusted through the capital
accounts of partners by debiting, new partner’s capital account with the amount and crediting the old partners’
capital accounts in their sacrificing ratio.
(vi) When the goodwill is already appearing in the books of accounts:
When the goodwill is already appearing in the firm’s books, first of all goodwill is to be written off from the
books by debiting old partners’ capital accounts in their profit sharing ratio and crediting goodwill account.
Then new partner’s capital account is debited with his difference in share of goodwill not brought in cash and
this amount is credited to old partners’ capital accounts in sacrificing ratio.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
(a) Old Partners’ Capital Accounts Dr.
To Goodwill A/c
(Being goodwill written off from the books)
(b) Bank A/c Dr. (Cash brought in)

New Partner’s Capital A/c Dr. (Difference not brought in cash)
To Old Partners’ Capital A/c
(Being the amount of goodwill brought in by
the new partner is shared by the old partners
in the sacrificing ratio)
(vii) Hidden goodwill:

Sometime the value of goodwill has to be inferred from the agreement of capitals and profit sharing ratio
among the partners.
(a) Suppose, A and B share profits in the ratio 2:1 and their capitals stand at ` 20,000 and ` 10,000 and they
admit C who brings ` 14,000 and is given 1/4th share in future profits. Now C’s capital should be 1/4th of the
total capital.
th
For 1/4 share, the capital of C = `14000
Therefore, total capital of the firm should be = ` 56,000
Total capital of A, B and C= `20,000 + `10 000 + `14,000 = `44,000
Value of Goodwill= Total Estimated Capital- Actual Capital
` 56,000- `44,000 = `12,000
(b) Suppose, A and B form partnership agreeing to share profits equally and they contribute ` 12,000 and `
9,000 respectively, it can be inferred that a goodwill of ` 3,000 attaches to A.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
X and Y are sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 7:4. They admit Z as
5
new partner and the new profit sharing ratio is agreed upon to be X ,Y
11
3 3
and Z . Z brings in ` 20,000 by way of his share of goodwill. How will
11 11
this amount be distributed between X and Y?
Adjustment Regarding Capitals of Partners
It is often agreed that after the admission of a new partner, capitals of all the partners should be in proportion
to their respective shares in profit. The basis may be the amount of capital brought in by the new partner or
the new partner himself may be required to bring in capital equal to his share with the firm. If the new
partner’s capital is given, the total capital of the firm should be ascertained on that basis. Then, the capital
required for each one of the old partners should be ascertained and it should be compared with the actual
balances in the accounts of the partners concerned, adjustments may then be made in cash or through
204 FP-FA&A
current accounts to bring the balances of capital accounts of all the old partners to the desired figures.
Suppose, C brings in ` 10,000 for 1/5th share of profits. Total capital of the firm should be ` 10,000 x 5 or `
1 3
50,000. If A and B are to share profits as to A and B , then A’s capital account should show a balance of
2 10
1 3
` 50,000 or ` 25,000 and B’s capital should show a balance of ` 50,000 or ` 15,000. If A’s capital
2 10
account shows a balance of ` 24,000 and the capital account of B shows a balance of ` 16,500, A will bring
in ` 1,000 and B will withdraw ` 1,500.
Alternatively, the new partner may be required to bring capital on the basis of capital of old partners.
Suppose, the capital accounts A and B after all adjustments are ` 32,000 and ` 18,000 respectively and C is
admitted as a new partner to whom 1/5th share of profits is given. Then
1
C’s Share =
5
1 4
Remaining share = 1
5 5
Combined capital of A and B = ` 32,000 + ` 18,000 = ` 50,000
5
Total Capital = 50,000 = ` 62,500
4
1
C’s Capital = ` 62,500 = ` 12,500
5
If A and B are to share profits as to A 1/2 and B 3/10, then
1
A’s Capital = ` 62,500 = ` 31,250
2
3
B’s Capital = ` 63,500 = ` 18,750
10
A will withdraw ` 750 and B will bring in ` 750.
Illustration 7:
On 31st March, 2011 the following was the Balance Sheet of A and B who were equal partners:
Sundry Creditors 8,940 Cash in hand 950
General Reserve 10,000 Stock 32,710
A’s Capital Account 35,000 Debtors 11,000
B’s Capital Account 20,000 Less: Provision
for Bad Debts 220 10,780
Furniture and Fittings 9,500
Land and Buildings 20,000
_____ _____
73,940 73,940
On 1st April 2011, C was admitted as a new partner on the following conditions:
(i) A, B and C share profits and losses in the ratio 4:3:2 respectively.
(ii) Prior to C’s admission appreciation of ` 15,000 in the value of land and buildings would be recorded
and provision for bad debts would be brought upto ` 820.
(iii) C would bring ` 20,000 in cash as his capital.
Pass journal entries to record the above mentioned transactions and show the balance sheet of firm
immediately after C’s admission.
Solution :
Journal Entries
Particulars Dr. (`) Cr.( `)
General Reserve Dr. 10,000

(Transfer of general reserve to old partners in
old profit sharing ratio)________________________
Land and Building Account Dr. 15,000
(Appreciation in the value of land and buildings
as agreed on admission of C as a new partner)._____
Revaluation Account Dr. 600
To Provision for Bad Debts 600
(Increase in provision for bad Debts by ` 600)_______
(Transfer of net profit on revaluation to old
Partners’ capital accounts in old profits sharing ratio)_
(Cash brought in by C as in his capital)_____________
Balance Sheet of A, B and C as on 1st April, 2011
Cash 20,950
A’s Capital Account 47,200
Stock 32,710
B’s Capital Account 32,200
Debtors 11,000
C’s Capital Account 20,000
Less:
Bad Debts 820 10,180
_______ Land and Buildings 35,000
1,08,340 1,08,340
Revaluation Account
Dr. Cr.
To Provision for Bad Debts 600 By Land and Buildings 15,000
15,000 15,000
206 FP-FA&A
Dr. Capital Accounts Cr.
Particulars A B C Particulars A B C
` ` ` ` ` `
To Balance c/d 47,200 32,200 20,000 By Balance b/fd 35,000 20,000
By General 5,000 5,000
Reserve
By Revaluation 7,200 7,200
By Cash 20,000
47,200 32,200 20,000 47,200 32,200 20,000
By Balance b/d 47,200 32,200 20,000
Alternative Solution:
If the values of assets and liabilities were not to be changed, the following would have been the solution:
Journal Entries
(Transfer of general reserve to old partners in old
profit sharing ratio)
Memorandum Revaluation Account Dr. 14,400
(Record of profit on revaluation)
Cash Dr. 20,000
To C’s Account 20,000
(Cash brought in by C as his capital)
A’s Capital Account Dr. 6,400
C’s Capital Account Dr. 3,200
To Memorandum Revaluation Account 14,400
(Transfer of Memorandum Revaluation Account after
C’s admission to all the partners’ capital accounts in the
profit sharing ratio)
Balance Sheet of A, B and C on 1st April, 2011

Sundry Creditors 8,940 Cash 20,950
A’s Capital account 40,800 Stock ` 32,710
B’s Capital Account 27,400 Debtors 11,000
C’s Capital Account 16,800 Less: Provision
Land and Buildings 20,000
______ ______
93,940 93,940
Working Notes:
Dr. Memorandum Revaluation Account Cr.

To A’s Capital Account 7,200 By A’s Capital account 6,400
To B’s Capital Account 7,200 By B’s Capital Account 4,800
By C’s Capital Account 3,200
_____ _____
14,400 14,400

(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
To Memorandum 6,400 4,800 3,200 By Balance b/fd 35,000 20,000
Revaluation A/c
To Balance c/d 40,800 27,400 16,800 By General 5,000 5,000
Reserve
By Revaluation 7,200 7,200
By Cash 20,000
47,200 32,200 20,000 47,200 32,200 20,000
By Balance b/d 40,800 27,400 16,800
Illustration 8:
On 31st March, 2011 the following was the balance sheet of P and Q who were carrying on business in
partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 5:3 respectively.
Sundry Creditors 10,900 Furniture and Fittings 15,000
Capital Accounts Stock 48,000
P 45,000 Sundry Debtors 16,500
Q 27,000 Cash 3,400
82,900 82,900
On 1st April, 2011 R is admitted to the firm as a new partner, the new profit sharing ratio between P, Q and R
208 FP-FA&A
is agreed upon as 7:5:4 respectively. R brings in ` 24,000 as his capital. R’s share of goodwill is fixed at `
5,000.
Show journal entries and balance sheet immediately after R’s admission in each of the following cases:
(a) R brings cash for his share of goodwill and the old partners withdraw half of the amounts credited to
their accounts for goodwill brought in by R.
(b) R does not bring anything by way of his share of goodwill.
(c) R brings ` 3,000 as his share of goodwill and an adjustment in capital accounts is made for the
balance amount.
Solution:
Case (a):
Journal Entries
Cash A/c Dr. 24,000
To R’s Capital A/c 24,000
(Cash brought in by R as his capital)
To P’s Capital Account 3,750
To Q’s Capital Account 1,250
(Goodwill brought in by R credited to old partners in
their ratio of sacrifice i.e., 3:1)
P’s Capital Account Dr. 1,875
Q’s Capital Account Dr. 625
To Cash 2,500
(Half of the amount of goodwill credited to old
partners withdrawn by them in cash)
Balance Sheet of P, Q and R as on 1st April, 2011


Q 27,625 Cash 29,900
R 24,000
_______ _______
1,09,400 1,09,400
Case (b):
Journal Entries
Particulars ` `

To R’s Capital Account 24,000
(Capital brought in by R)
R’s Capital Account Dr. 5,000
To Q’s Capital Account 1,250
(Being R’s share of goodwill credited to
old partners’ capital account in the sacrificing
ratio on his admission, credit being given to
old partners in their old profit sharing ratio).
Balance Sheet of P,Q and R as on 1st April, 2011


Q 28,250 Cash 27,400
R 19,000 _______
1,06,900 1,06,900
Case (c):
Journal Entries
To R’s Capital Account 24,000
(Capital brought in by R)
To Q’s Capital Account 750
(Being the amount of goodwill brought on by R
credited to old partners in sacrificing ratio)
210 FP-FA&A
Particulars ` `
R’s Capital Account Dr. 2,000
To Q’s Capital Account 500
(Being portion of R’s share of goodwill adjusted
through the capital account by debiting his capital
account and credited old partners capital accounts in
the sacrificing ratio.)
Balance Sheet of P, Q and R
as on 1st April, 2011
Q 28,250 Cash 30,400
R 22,000 _______
1,09,900 1,09,900
Illustration 9:
A and B sharing profits in proportion of three-fourth and one-fourth showed the following as their Balance
Sheet as on 31st March, 2011:
Creditors 37,500 Cash at Bank 22,500
General Reserve 4,000 Bills Receivable 3,000
Capital Account: Debtors 16,000
A 30,000 Stock 20,000
B 16,000 46,000 Office Furniture 1,000
_____ Land and Buildings 25,000
87,500 87,500
They admit C into partnership on 1st April, 2011 on the following terms:
(1) That C pays ` 10,000 as his capital for a fifth share in the future profits.
(2) That goodwill of the new firm is valued at ` 20,000 and C brings his share of goodwill in cash.
(3) That a stock and furniture be reduced by 10% and a 5% provision for doubtful debts is created on
debtors.
(4) That the value of land and buildings be appreciated by 20%.
(5) That the capital accounts of all the partners be re-adjusted on the basis of their profits-sharing
arrangements and any additional amount be immediately withdrawn by them.
Pass the journal entries; prepare the Profit and Loss Adjustment Account (Revaluation Account) Partners’
Capital Accounts and the Opening Balance Sheet of the new firm.
Solution:
Journal Entries
Profit and Loss Adjustment Account Dr. 2,900
To Stock 2,000
To Office Furniture 100
To Provision for doubtful debts 800
(Being the adjustment for writing down the values
of assets)_________________________________________
Land and Buildings Account Dr. 5,000
(Being the adjustment for appreciation in the value
of Land and Buildings)______________________________
General Reserve Account Dr. 4,000
To A’s capital Account 3,000
(Being the transfer of General Reserve to partners’
capital accounts in the profit sharing ratio) _____________
To B’s Capital Account 525
(Being the transfer of profit arising from adjustments
to partners’ capital accounts in their profit-sharing
proportions)________________________________ _
Bank Dr. 14,000
(Being the amount brought in by C as his share
capital and ¼th share of goodwill)__________ ______
(Being the share of goodwill brought in by the incoming
partner credited to old partners in their sacrificing ratio) _ _
To Bank 7,575
(Being the withdrawal of excess of capital over profit-
sharing proportion)____________________________ _
To Bank 8,525
(Being the withdrawal of excess of capital over his profit
sharing proportion)
212 FP-FA&A
Profit and Loss Adjustment account

Dr. Cr.
To Stock 2,000 By Land and Buildings 5,000
To Office Furniture 100
To Provision for Doubtful Debts 800
To Transfer of Profits of Capital
Accounts:
A 3/4th 1,575
B 1/4th 525 2,100 _____
5,000 5,000
Dr. A’s Capital Account Cr.

To Bank 7,575 By Balance b/fd 30,000
To Balance c/d 30,000 By General Reserve 3,000
By Profit and Loss
Adjustment A/c 1,575
______ By C’s Capital A/c 3,000
37,575 37,575
Dr. B’s Capital Account Cr.

To Bank 8,525 By Balance b/fd 16,000
To Balance c/d 10,000 By General Reserve 1,000
By Profit and Loss
Adjustment A/c 525
______ By C’s Capital A/c 1,000
18,525 18,525
C’s Capital Account

To A’s Capital A/c 3,000 By Bank 14,000
To Balance c/d 10,000 ______
14,000 14,000
Balance Sheet of A, B and C

as at 1st April, 2011
Sundry Creditors 37,500 Cash at Bank 20,400
Capital Account: Bills Receivable 3,000
A 30,000 Office Furniture 900
B 10,000 Sundry Debtors 16,000
C 10,000 50,000 Less: Provision for
Doubtful Debts
@ 5% 800 15,200
Stock 18,000
______ Land and Building 30,000
87,500 87,500
Note: from the above balance sheet, it is clear that the capitals of the partners now bear the same proportions
as their profit sharing arrangements.
Illustration 10:
st
Ajay and Binoy are partners in a firm sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2:1 respectively. On 31 March,
2011 their balance sheet stood as follows:
Liabilities (`) Assets (`)
Bills payable 6,000 Cash at bank 90,000
Sundry creditors 90,000 Bills receivable 20,000
General reserve 42,000 Sundry debtors 1,00,000
Ajay’s capital 2,82,000 Stock 1,60,000
Binoy’s capital 2,40,000 Furniture 40,000
Machinery 2,50,000
6,60,000 6,60,000
st
On 1 April 2011, a new partner Harry was admitted into partnership on the following terms:
(i) That Harry brings in cash ` 60,000 as goodwill for his one-third share in future profits.
(ii) That Harry brings such an amount that his capital will be one-third of total capital of the new firm.
(iii) That the value of stock to be raised to ` 1,68,000.
(iv) That furniture and machinery be depreciated by 5% and 10% respectively.
(v) That a provision for doubtful debts be created at 5% on sundry debtors.
(vi) That the capital accounts of the partners be re-adjusted on the basis of their profit sharing ratio
through their current accounts.
Prepare the necessary ledger accounts and the opening balance sheet of the new firm.
214 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Revaluation Account
Dr. Cr.
To Furniture A/c 2,000 By Stock A/c 8,000
To Machinery A/c 25,000 By Ajay’s Capital A/c(2/3 loss) 16,000
To Provision for doubtful debts By Binoy’s Capital A/c (1/3 loss) 8,000
A/c 5,000
32,000 32,000
Capital Accounts
Dr. Cr.
Particulars Ajay Binoy Harry Particulars Ajay Binoy Harry
` ` ` ` ` `
To Revaluation By Balance b/fd 2,82,000 2,40,000
A/c (Loss) 16,000 8,000 -- By General
To Ajay’s Reserve 28,000 14,000
Capital A/c By Bank
(Goodwill) 40,000 (Goodwill) 60,000
To Binoy’s By Harry’s
Capital A/c Capital A/c
(Goodwill) 20,000 (Goodwill) 40,000 20,000
To Binoy’s By Bank 3,00,000
Current A/c 66,000 By Ajay’s
To Balance c/d 4,00,000 2,00,000 3,00,000 Current A/c 66,000 _______ _______
4,16,000 2,74,000 3,60,000 4,16,000 2,74,000 3,60,000
Balance Sheet of Ajay, Binoy and Harry
st
as on 1 April, 2011
Bills Payable 6,000 Cash at Bank 4,50,000
Sundry Creditors 90,000 Bills Receivables ` 20,000
Binoy’s Current A/c 66,000 Sundry Debtors 1,00,000
Ajay’s Capital A/c 4,00,000 Less : Provision for
Binoy’s Capital A/c 2,00,000 Doubtful Debts 5,000 95,000
Harry’s Capital A/c 3,00,000 Stock 1,68,000
Furniture 38,000
Machinery 2,25,000
________ Ajay’s Current Account __66,000
10,62,000 10,62,000
Working Notes:
(i) Calculation of Harry’s Capital
Total capital:
Ajay’s capital: ` (2,82,000 + 28,000 + 40,000 – 16,000) = ` 3,34,000
Binoy’s capital: ` (2,40,000 + 14,000 + 20,000 – 8,000) = ` 2,66,000
Total capital of Ajay and Binoy before Harry’s Admission = ` 6,00,000
This capital is for 1-(1/3) = 2/3 share
So total capital of new firm (`6,00,000 x 3/2) = ` 9,00,000
Harry’s Capital = 1/3 x `9, 00,000 = ` 3,00,000
(ii) Calculation of new profit sharing ratio and capital of Ajay and Binoy:
Harry’s share = 1/3
Balance = 1-(1/3) = 2/3 to be shared by Ajay and Binoy
Ajay’s new share = 2/3 x 2/3 = 4/9
Binoy’s new share = 2/3 x 1/3 = 2/9
New profit share ratio = 4:2:3
Ajay’s capital in new firm = 4/9 x `9,00,000 = `4,00,000
Binoy’s capital in new firm = 2/9 x `9,00,000 = `2,00,000
Adjustment of capitals is made through partners’ current accounts
Sacrifice by Ajay = (2/3) – (4/9) = 2/9
Sacrifice by Binoy = (1/3) – (2/9) = 1/9
Sacrificing ratio = 2:1
So goodwill is distributed to Ajay and Binoy in the ratio of 2 : 1 respectively.
Illustration 11:
st
Bansal and Chandar are partners in a firm sharing profits and losses equally. Their balance sheet as on 31
March, 2011 was as follows:
Liabilities ` ` Assets `
Sundry Creditors 1,26,000 Cash at Bank 14,000
General Reserve 70,000 Debtors 1,40,000
Capital Accounts: Stock 1,68,000
Bansal 2,10,000 Furniture 28,000
Chander 1,68,000 3,78,000 Buildings 2,24,000
5,74,000 5,74,000
Sagar was admitted as a partner and was given one-fourth share of profits on the following terms:
– He would bring ` 2,10,000 in cash as his capital.
– His share of goodwill was valued at `70,000 but he was unable to bring it in cash.
– Stock and furniture be depreciation by 10%.
– A provision of 5% on debtors be created for doubtful debts.
– An amount of `14,000 included in creditors not to be treated as a liability.
– A provision of `7,000 be created against bills discounted.
– The buildings be treated as worth `2,80,000.
It was agreed that except cash, the other assets and liabilities were to be shown at old figures in the balance
sheet. Give journal entries to record the transactions and prepare Memorandum Revaluation Account and
Capital Accounts of the partners. Also prepare the balance sheet after admission of Sagar.
216 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Journal Entries
Particulars Dr. Cr.
(`) (`)
General Reserve Account Dr. 70,000
To Bansal’s Capital Account 35,000
To Chander’s Capital Account 35,000
(Being the transfer of general reserve to capital accounts
of old partners in the old ratio)
Bank Dr. 2,10,000

To Sagar’s Capital Account 2,10,000
(Being the Amount brought in by Sagar as his capital)
Sagar’s Capital Account Dr. 70,000

(Being Sagar’s share of goodwill credited to old partners’
capital accounts in the ratio of sacrifice which is 1: 1)
Memorandum Revaluation A/c Dr. 36,400

(Bing the profit on revaluation credited to the old partners
in the old ratio)
Bansal’s Capital Account Dr. 13,650

Chander’s Capital Account Dr. 13,650
Sagar’s Capital Account Dr. 9,100
(Being Memorandum Revaluation Account closed by
debiting all the partners in the new profit sharing ratio)
Dr. Memorandum Revaluation Account Cr.
To Provision for Doubtful By Buildings 56,000
Debts 7,000 By Sundry Creditors 14,000
To Stock 16,800
To Furniture 2,800
To Provision for Bills
Discounted 7,000
To Profit transferred to :
Bansal ½ 18,200
Chander ½ 18,200 36,400 ______
70,000 70,000
To Buildings 56,000 By Provision for Doubtful Debts 7,000
To Sundry Creditors 14,000 By Stock 16,800
By Furniture 2,800
By Provision for Bills Discounted 7,000
By Loss transferred to:
Bansal (3/8) 13,650
_______ Chander (3/8) 13,650
_70,000 Sagar(1/4) 9,100 ___36,400
___70,000
Particulars Bansal Chander Sagar Particulars Bansal Chander Sagar

(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
To Bansal’s By Balance
Capital A/c 35,000
b/fd 2,10,000 1,68,000
To Chander’s By General
Capital A/c 35,000 Reserve 35,000 35,000
To By Bank 2,10,000
Memorandum By Sagar’s
Revaluation Capital A/c 35,000 35,000
A/c 13,650 13,650 9,100 By
To Balance Memorandum
c/d Revaluation
2,84,550 2,42,550 1,30,900 A/c _18,200 _18,200 _______
2,98,200 2,56,200 2,10,000 2,98,005 2,56,200 2,10,000
By Balance
b/d 2,84,550 2,42,550 1,30,900
Balance Sheet of Mr. Bansal, Chander and Sagar
To Sundry Creditors 1,26,000 By Cash at Bank 2,24,000
To Capital Accounts: By Debtors 1,40,000
Bansal 2,84,550 By Stock 1,68,000
Chander 2,42,550 By Furniture 28,000
Sagar 1,30,900 6,58,000 By Buildings 2,24,000
7,84,000 7,84,000
RETIREMENT OF A PARTNER
According to Section 32(1) of the Indian Partnership Act, a partner may retire:
(a) with the consent of all the partners;
(b) in accordance with an express agreement by the partners;
(c) where the partnership is at will, by giving notice in writing to all the other partners of his intention to
retire.
Generally, the business of the partnership firm may not come to an end when one of the partners retires.
Other partners continue to run the business of the firm. Just as a number of adjustments have to be made on
the admission of a partner, a number of similar adjustments have to be made before a partner retires. These
adjustments may be as regard to reserves and undistributed profits, revaluation of assets and liabilities,
profits sharing ratio, goodwill etc.
218 FP-FA&A
Calculation of New Profit Sharing Ratio on Retirement
Unless an intention to the contrary is expressed, the assumption should be made that on the retirement of a
partner, the remaining partners continue to share profits and losses in the same relative ratio in which they were
sharing profits and losses prior to retirement of the partner.
The absolute share of the remaining partners may increase but the ratio between the increased shares does not
change because the increase itself is in that very ratio.
Example 1: A, B and C share profits and losses in the ratio of 7:4:3 respectively and B retires.
Now in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, A and C will continue to share profits and losses in the
ratio of 7:3 respectively.
However, their absolute shares will go up. New shares will be: 7/10 and 3/10.
th th
Previously, A and C got 7/14 and 3/14 of the profit respectively.
Example 2: If the remaining partners decide to distribute among themselves the share left by the retiring
partner in a different ratio, the relative profit sharing ratio between the remaining partners will also change.
Suppose, A and C agree that one half of B’s share be added to A’s share and the other half of B’s share be
added to C’s share.
7 1 4 9
Then A’s share will be or
14 2 14 14
3 1 4 5
and C’s share will be or .
14 2 14 14
The new ratio between A and C will be 9:5 respectively.
Calculation of Ratio of Gain

On retirement of a partner, the shares of profit to other partners increase. In order to find ratio in which the
remaining partners have gained, old shares should be deducted from the new shares of remaining partners.
Example: If A, B and C share profits and losses in the ratio of 7:5:3 respectively and after B’s retirement A
and C decide to share profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2 respectively, then the ratio of gain will be
calculated as follows:
7
A’s old share =
15
3
A’s new share =
5
3 7 9 7 2
A’s gain =
5 15 15 15
3
C’s old share =
15
2
C’s new share =
5
2 3 6 3 3
C’s gain =
5 15 15 15
Hence, ratio of gain between A and C is 2:3 respectively.
Treatment of Reserves and Undistributed Profits on Retirement
Before a partner retires, reserves created out of profits or balances in profit and loss account must be
transferred to the capital accounts of all the partners in the ratio in which they share profits and losses at the
time of retirement (old ratio). It is done so that the retiring partner may get his share of accumulated profits
and may contribute his share of the loss that has not been transferred to capital accounts so far.
The journal will be:
Reserves or Profit and Loss A/c Dr.

To All Partners’ Capital Accounts
(Reserves/balance in profit and loss account
transferred to the capital accounts of all the
partners in old profit sharing ratio)
Alternative Method: Only the share of the retiring partner is credited to his capital account for his share of
profit.
Reserves or Profit and Loss A/c Dr.

To Retiring Partner’s Capital A/c
(Retiring partner’s share in reserves/balances
in profit and loss account transferred to the
capital account of retiring partner)
Revaluation of Assets and Liabilities on Retirement of a Partner

Before a partner retires, all the assets and liabilities of the firm are revalued as in the case of admission of a
partner. Any profit or loss resulting from such revaluation is transferred to all the partners’ capital accounts in
their profit sharing ratio. A Revaluation Account or Profit and Loss Adjustment Account is opened which is
debited for all decrease in the book values of assets and all increases in liabilities and is credited for all
increases in the value of assets and all decreases in liabilities. The balance is transferred to the capital
accounts of all the partners.
If adjustments have to be made for profit or loss on revaluation without altering the values of assets and
liabilities, a Memorandum Revaluation Account is opened. In this case, besides the entries required for
recording the profit or loss on revaluation of assets and liabilities some additional entries are necessary.
These additional entries are made by reversing the original entries. The profit or loss disclosed by the original
entries is transferred to all partners’ capital accounts in the old ratio, but the profit or loss disclosed by the
reversed entries is transferred to remaining partners’ capital accounts in the new ratio. Hence, revaluation
account under this method is called memorandum revaluation account.
If there is a loss on revaluation, first all the partners’ capital accounts are debited and Memorandum
Revaluation Account is credited with the amount of such a loss. Then after retirement has taken place,
Memorandum Revaluation Account is closed by transfer of the amount to the remaining partners’ capital
accounts in the new profit sharing ratio.
Illustration 12:
A, B and C are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2:1 and on the retirement of C, the various
assets and liabilities are revalued as under:
Book Value Revalued Value
` `
Plant and machinery 35,000 43,000
Sundry creditors 10,000 9,000
Stock 15,000 13,000
Pass journal entries on revaluation of these assets and liabilities.
220 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Journal Entries
To Stock 2,000
(Being fall in value of stock debited to revaluation
account)
Plant and machinery A/c Dr. 8,000
Sundry creditors Dr. 1,000
To Revaluation A/c 9,000
(Being gain on revaluation of plant and machinery
and sundry creditors credited to revaluation
account)
To A’s Capital A/c 3,500
To C’s Capital A/c 1,167
(Being revaluation profit transferred to all partners
in the old profit sharing ratio.)
Treatment of Goodwill on Retirement

In case of retirement of a partner, goodwill is valued in the same manner in which it is valued in case of
admission of a partner.
In this case, the continuing partners will gain in terms of profit sharing ratio. Hence, the continuing partners
have to share the goodwill of the retiring partner in the gaining ratio. In this case, the retiring partner’s capital
account is credited with his share of goodwill and the continuing partners’ capital accounts are debited with
the amount in the gaining ratio.
It is not necessary that Goodwill Account must be opened; only capital accounts of the partners may be
debited and credited with the necessary amounts
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Mahesh, Ramesh and Dinesh were sharing profits and losses in the ratio
of 3:2:1 respectively. On 31st March, 2011 Ramesh decides to retire.
Mahesh agrees to purchase 1/3rd Ramesh’s share while Dinesh purchases
the balance of Ramesh’s share. Find out the new profit sharing ratio
between Mahesh and Dinesh.
2. P, Q and R, partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 7:4:3
respectively. On 31st March, 2011 Q retires and P and R decide to become
equal partners. Goodwill of the firm is valued at ` 28,000. What adjustment
will you make if no Goodwill Account is to be opened and none already
exist. What will be the entry if Goodwill Account already appears at `
21,000 and it is desired that Goodwill Account be allowed to show the
same balance?
Capitals in Profit Sharing Ratio
After the retirement of a partner, the remaining partners may decide that their capitals be in their new profit
sharing ratio. For this purpose, the total capital of the new firm may be fixed which will then be divided among
the remaining partners in their new profit sharing ratio. Alternatively, the total of the balance of capital accounts
of the remaining partners after all the adjustments in respect of retirement have been made may be considered
to be the total capital of the firm which may then be reallocated to the different partners in their new profit
sharing ratio. The adjustments in the capital accounts for this purpose may be made either by bringing in or
payment of cash or through current accounts.
Computation of Retiring Partner’s Interest in the Firm

The terms of the partnership agreement are to be observed while ascertaining the amount due to the retiring
partner. Usually, following items are taken into consideration while calculating the total amount due to the
retiring partner:
(a) Balance of the capital account of the retiring partner appearing in the ledger on the date of retirement;
(b) Share of undistributed reserve and profit (loss) in the firm;
(c) Share in firm’s goodwill;
(d) Share in the profit and loss on the revaluation of assets and liabilities;
(e) Share of profit and loss till the date of retirement,
(f) Salary and interest on capital or drawing till the date of his retirement.
Payment of Retiring Partner’s Interest

The amount due to the retiring partner can be paid as per the terms of the partnership agreement. In case the
terms of the agreement are silent, the payment may be made as mutually agreed. The payment can be made
by any of the following methods:
(i) Lump Sum Payment Method: If the firm has adequate funds, the amount due to the retired partner
may be paid forthwith. His Capital Account will be debited and Bank Account will be credited.
(ii) Installment Payment Method: In order to avoid financial difficulties, a part or full payment due to the
retired partner, may be deferred, In this case, the balance of his Capital Account will be transferred to
his Loan Account which will be credited periodically with interest at the agreed rate on the outstanding
balance and debited with payment on account until the balance is extinguished. The arrangement of
installments may take the following two forms.
(a) Decreasing Payment Method: In this method, the total amount due is divided in a number of
equal installments and the installment amount plus interest on the outstanding balance is paid
out.
(b) Equal Payment Method: In this method, the total amount to be paid is divided in a number of
equal installments in such a way that the amount after including interest on the outstanding
balance is always equal.
st
Example: On 31 March, 2008 D retired from a partnership firm leaving ` 15,000 in the firm as a loan to
be repaid in three annual installments of ` 5,000 each plus interest at 8%p.a. on outstanding balances.
Show D’s Loan Account
Solution:
D’s Loan Account
Dr. Cr.
2008 2008
Mar.31 To Balance c/d 15,000 Mar.31 By D’s Capital A/c 15,000
2009 2008
Mar. 31 To Bank 6,200 Apr. 1 By Balance b/d 15,000
222 FP-FA&A
Mar. 31 To Balance c/d 10,000 2009
Mar. 31 By Interest @ 8%
_____ on ` 15,000 1,200
16,200 16,200
2010 2009
Mar. 31 To Bank 5,800 Apr.1 By Balance b/d 10,000
Mar. 31 To Balance c/d 5,000 2010
_____ Mar.31 By Interest @ 8% 800
10,800 10,800
2011 2010
Mar. 31 To Bank 5,400 Apr.1 By Balance b/d 5,000
2011
Mar. 31 By Interest @ 8% 400
_____ on ` 5,000 _____
5,400 5,400
Purchase of Retiring Partner’s Share by Remaining Partners

The retiring partner’s share may be purchased by the remaining partners in an agreed ratio. In such a
case, retiring partner’s capital account is closed by transfer to the remaining partners’ capital accounts in
the ratio in which they agree to purchase his share. When the remaining partners purchase the retiring
partner’s share, the retiring partner has to look to the remaining partners’ individual capacities for the
satisfaction of his claim; the new firm as such will not be responsible.
Note: In the examination, if the question states that the remaining partners purchase the retiring partner’s
share but does not specify the proportion in which they purchase his share, the candidate should assume that
it is done in the relative profit sharing ratio between the remaining partners; and if the new profit sharing ratio
is given, the purchase should be taken to be in the ratio of gain.
Illustration 13:
On 31st March, 2011 the following was the balance sheet of A, B and C who were equal partners:
Sundry Creditors 89,400 Cash in hand 1,800
General Reserves 1,50,000 Cash at Bank 39,700
A’s Capital Account 2,40,000 Investments 50,000
B’s Capital Account 1,90,000 Debtors 2,10,000
C’s Capital Account 1,75,000 Less:
Provision for Bad debts 2,200 2,07,800
Stock 3,70,100
_______ Furniture and Fittings 1,75,000
8,44,400 8,44,400
On that date, A decided to retire due to ill health and the following adjustments were agreed upon by the
partners:
– Investments be appreciated by ` 15,000
– Provision for bad debts be brought upto 5% of debtors.
– Furniture be depreciated by 10%
– Stock be depreciated by ` 7,200
A was paid the amount due to him by means of cheque, the bank agreed to allow the necessary overdraft.
Pass journal entries to record the above mentioned transactions and show the balance sheet of the firm
immediately after A’s retirement.
Solution:
JOURNAL ENTRIES
Particulars Dr.(`) Cr.(`)
General Reserve Dr. 1,50,000
(Transfer to general reserve to capital accounts)______
Investments Dr. 15,000
(Increase in the value of investments)
To Provision for Bad Debts 8,300
To Furniture 17,500
To Stock 7,200
(Various adjustments as agreed upon by partners)
(Transfer of loss on revaluation to partners’ capital
account)
A’s Capital Account Dr. 2,84,000
To Bank 2,84,000
(Payment of the amount due to A on his retirement)
Balance Sheet of B and C as on 1st April, 2011

Bank Overdraft 2,44,300 Cash in Hand 1,800
Sundry Creditors 89,400 Investment ` 65,000
C’s Capital Account 2,19,000 Less:
Provision for Bad
Debts 10,500
1,99,500
Stock 3,62,900
7,86,700 7,86,700
____________________________________________________________________________
224 FP-FA&A
Alternative Method:
If the values of assets and liabilities were not being changed, the following would have been the journal
entries:
JOURNAL ENTRIES
General Reserve Dr. 1,50,000

(Transfer of general reserve to capital accounts)
(Transfer of loss on revaluation to partners’ capital
accounts)
A’s Capital Account Dr. 2,84,000
To Bank 2,84,000
(Payment to A on his retirement)
Memorandum Revaluation Account Dr. 18,000
(Transfer to memorandum revaluation account to
remaining partners’ capital accounts in new profit
sharing ratio)
Balance Sheet of B and C as on 1st April, 2011

Bank Overdraft 2,44,300 Cash in Hand 1,800
Sundry Creditors 89,400 Investments ` 50,000
C’s Capital Account 2,28,000 Less: Provision for
Bad Debts 2,200 2,07,800
Stock 3,70,100
8,04,700 8,04,700
Illustration 14:
Following is balance sheet of A, B and C who share profits and losses in the ratio of 7: 5: 3 respectively.
Balance Sheet of A, B and C as on 1st March, 2011
Capital Accounts: Sundry Debtors 16,000
A 40,000 Stock 44,000
B 25,000 Cash at Bank 18,400
C 10,000 ______
90,400 90,400
On 31st March, 2011 C retires on the condition that he be immediately paid the amount due to him after
making adjustment for goodwill which is valued at `22,500. A and B agree to share profits and losses in the
ratio of 8:7 respectively in future.
Show journal entries and balance sheet in each of the following cases:
(a) Goodwill Account is raised only with C’s share of goodwill.
(b) No Goodwill account is raised but adjustments are made in the capital accounts with retiring partner’s
share of goodwill.
(c) A and B pay privately to C for goodwill.
Solution:
Case (i)
Journal Entries
Goodwill Account Dr. 4,500
(Credit given to C for his share of goodwill)
To Bank 14,500
(Payment to C)__________________________________
To Goodwill Account 4,500
(Transfer of Goodwill Account to the remaining
partners in the ratio of gain which turns out to be 1:2)*
*The ratio of gain in this case has been calculated as under:
A’s old share = 7
15
A’s new shares = 8
15
226 FP-FA&A
A’s gain = 8 7 1
15 15 15
B’s old share = 5
15
B’s new share = 7
15
B’s gain = 7 5 2
15 15 15
Hence ratio of gain between A and B is 1:2
Balance Sheet of A and B as on 1st April, 2011
A’s Capital Account 38,500 Sundry Debtors 16,000
B’s Capital Account 22,000 Stock 44,000
______ Cash at Bank 3,900
75,900 75,900
Case (ii)
Journal Entries

(Retiring partner being credited with his share of
goodwill which is debited to remaining partners in
the ratio of gain 1:2)
C’ Capital Account Dr. 14,500

To Bank 14,500
(Payment to C)
Balance Sheet will be the same as in cases (i).

Case (iii)
Journal Entries
To Bank 10,000
(Payment to C)
Balance Sheet of A and B as on 1st April, 2011
A’s Capital Account 40,000 Sundry Debtors 16,000
B’s Capital Account 25,000 Stock 44,000
______ Cash at Bank 8,400
80,400 80,400
Illustration 15:
The balance sheet of Anil, Bashin and Cyril who were sharing profits in proportion to their capitals stood as
follows on 31st March, 2011.
Liabilities ` Assets ` `
Sundry Creditors 6,900 Cash in Bank 5,500
General Reserve 18,000 Sundry Debtors 5,000
Capital Accounts: Less : Provision for Bad Debts 100 4,900
Anil 20,000 Stock 26,000
Bashin 15,000 Plant and Machinery 13,500
Cyril 10,000 Land and Buildings 20,000
______ ______
69,900 69,900
Bashin retired on the above date and the following was agreed upon:
– That the provision for bad debts be brought upto 5% on debtors.
– That land and buildings be appreciated by 25%.
– That a provision of ` 350 be made in respect of outstanding legal charges.
– That the goodwill of the entire firm be fixed at ` 10,800 and Bashin’s share of it be adjusted into the
accounts of Anil and Cyril who are going to share future profits in the ratio of 5:3 respectively.
– That the entire capital of the new firm be fixed at ` 48,000 and the capital accounts of the partners be
made in their new profit sharing ratio; actual cash to be brought in or paid off as the need be.
Pass journal entries, show profit and loss adjustment account and capital accounts and prepare balance
sheet of Anil and Cyril.
Solution:
Journal Entries
Particulars ` `
To Anil’s Capital Account 8,000
To Bashin’s Capital Account 6,000
To Cyril’s Capital Account 4,000
(Transfer of general reserve to capital accounts)
Profit and Loss Adjustment Account Dr. 500
To Provision for Bad Debts 150
To Outstanding Legal Expenses 350
(Increase in provision for bad debts and record of
outstanding legal expenses)
Land and Building Dr. 5,000
(Appreciation in the value of land and buildings)
228 FP-FA&A
Particulars ` `
(Transfer of profit on revaluation)
Anil’s Capital Account Dr. 1,950

Cyril’s Capital Account Dr. 1,650
(Bashin’s share of goodwill debited to Anil and Cyril in
ratio of gain which is 13:11 respectively)
Bashin’s Capital Account Dr. 26,100
To Bashin’s Loan Account 26,100
(Transfer of Bashin’s Capital Account to his Loan
Account)
Bank Dr. 6,600
(Cash brought in by Anil and Cyril)
To Provision for Bad Debts A/c 150 By Land and Buildings 5,000
To Outstanding Legal Expenses A/c 350
To Anil’s Capital A/c (4/9 profit) 2,000
To Bashin’s Capital A/c (3/9 profit) 1,500
To Cyril’s Capital A/c (2/9 profit) 1,000 _____
5,000 5,000
Particulars Anil Bashin Cyril Particulars Anil Bashin Cyril
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
To Bashin’s By Balance
Capital A/c 1,950 1,650 b/fd 20,000 15,000 10,000
To Bashin’s By General
Loan A/c 26,100 Reserve 8,000 6,000 4,000
To Balance By P & L
c/d 30,000 18,000 Adjustment
A/c 2,000 1,500 1,000
By Anil’s
Capital 1,950
By Cyril’s
Capital 1,650
_______ _______ ______ By Bank __1,950 _____ __4,650
31,950 26,100 19,650 31,950 26,100 19,650
By Balance
b/d 31,950 26,100 19,650
Balances Sheet of Anil and Cyril
as on 1st April, 2011
Sundry Creditors 6,900 Cash in Bank 12,100
Outstanding Legal Expenses 350 Sundry Debtors 5,000
Bashin’s Loan Account 26,100 Less: Provision
Capital Accounts:
Anil 30,000 Stock 26,000
Cyril 18,000 48,000 Plant and Machinery 13,500
______ Land and Buildings 25,000
81,350 81,350
Working Notes:
5 4 45 32 13
Anil’s gain in profit =
8 9 72 72
3 2 27 16 11
Cyril’s gain in profit =
8 9 72 72
Ratio of Gain = 13:11
3
Bashin’s share of goodwill = ` 10,800 x or ` 3,600
9
13
Anil’s will be debited with ` 3,600 or ` 1,950, and
24
13
Cyril will be debited with ` 3,600 or ` 1,650 for goodwill.
24
Illustration 16:
On 31st March, 2011 the balance sheet of M/s. Ashok, Basu, and Clement, who were sharing profits and
losses in proportion to their capitals, stood as follows:
Capital Accounts: Land and Buildings 2,00,000
Ashok 3,00,000 Machinery 2,00,000
Basu 2,00,000 Closing Stock 1,00,000
Clement 1,00,000 6,00,000 Sundry Debtors 2,00,000
Sundry Creditors 2,00,000 Cash and Bank Balances 1,00,000
8,00,000 8,00,000
On 31st March, 2011, Ashok desired to retire from the firm and the remaining partners decided to carry
on. They agreed on the following terms and conditions:
230 FP-FA&A
(i) Land and buildings be appreciated by 30%
(ii) Machinery be depreciated by 20%
(iii) Closing stock to be valued at ` 80,000.
(iv) Provision for bad debts be made at 5%.
(v) Old credit balances of sundry creditors amounting to ` 10,000 be written back.
(vi) Joint Life Policy of the partner be surrendered and cash obtained was ` 60,000.
(vii) Goodwill of the entire firm be valued at ` 1,80,000 and Ashok’s share of the goodwill be adjusted in the
accounts Basu and Clement who would share the future profits equally.
(viii) The total capital of the firm was to be the same as before retirement. Individual capitals of
partners were to be in their profit sharing ratio.
(ix) Amount due to Ashok was to be settled on the following basis:
50% on retirement and balance 50% within one year.
Prepare Revaluation Account, Capital Accounts of the Partners, Loan Account of Ashok, Cash Book and
st
Balance Sheet as on 1 April 2011 of M/s. Basu and Clement.
Solution:
Dr. Revaluation Account Cr.

To Machinery A/c 40,000 By Land and Building 60,000
To Closing Stock 20,000 By Sundry Creditors 10,000
To Provision for Bad By Bank A/c (Joint Life Policy) 60,000
Debts A/c 10,000
To Capital Accounts:
Ashok 30,000
Basu 20,000
Clement 10,000 60,000 _______
1,30,000 1,30,000

Particulars Basu Clement Particulars Basu Clement
` ` ` `
To Ashok By Balance b/fd 2,00,000 1,00,000
Capital A/c
(Goodwill) 30,000 60,000 By Revaluation A/c 20,000 10,000
To Balance c/d 3,00,000 3,00,000 By Bank (Additional
_______ _______ capital) 1,10,000 2,50,000
3,30,000 3,60,000 3,30,000 3,60,000
By Balance b/d 3,00,000 3,00,000
Dr. Ashok’s Capital Account Cr.
To Bank 2,10,000 By Balance b/d 3,00,000
To Ashok’ Loan A/c 2,10,000 By Revaluation A/c 30,000
By B’s Capital A/c
(Goodwill) 30,000
By C’s Capital A/c
_______ (Goodwill) 60,000
4,20,000 4,20,000
Dr. Ashok’s Loan Account Cr.
To Balance c/d 2,10,000 By Ashok’s Capital A/c 2,10,000
By Balance b/d 2,10,000
Dr. Cash Book Cr.

To Balance b/fd 1,00,000 By A’s Capital A/c 2,10,000
To Revaluation A/c By Balance c/d 3,10,000
(J.L. Policy surrendered) 60,000
To Basu’s Capital A/c 1,10,000
To Clement’s Capital A/c 2,50,000 _______
5,20,000 5,20,000
To Balance b/d 3,10,000
M/s. B and C
Balance Sheet as on 1.4.2011
Capital Accounts: Land and Building 2,60,000

Basu 3,00,000 Machinery 1,60,000
Clement 3,00,000 6,00,000 Closing Stock 80,000
A’s Loan 2,10,000 Sundry Debtors 2,00,000
Sundry Creditors 1,90,000 Less: Provisions
for Bad Debts 10,000 1,90,000
Cash and Bank
________ Balances 3,10,000
10,00,000 10,00,000
232 FP-FA&A
Working Notes:
(1) Calculation of ratio of gain of remaining partners.
Ratio of gain = New ratio – Old ratio
Basu = 1/2 – 1/3 = 1/6
Clement = 1/2 – 1/3 = 2/6
Ratio of gain = 1:2.
(2) Goodwill borne by Basu and Clement:
Total goodwill of the firm = ` 1,80,000
Ashok’s share = 1/2 x ` 1,80,000 = ` 90,000
Ashok’s share to be borne by Basu and Clement in their ratio of gain.
Basu = 1/3 x ` 90,000 = ` 30,000
Clement = 2/3 x ` 90,000 = ` 60,000
DEATH OF A PARTNER
All the problems which arise on the retirement of a partner also arise in case of the death of a partner.
However, there are a few additional points which have to be noted.
If the balance of deceased partner’s capital account is not immediately paid in cash, the amount should be
transferred to the deceased partner’s Executors Account and not to any Loan Account.
A partner usually retires at the close of an accounting year when his capital account is credited with his share
of profits for the year. But a partner’s death may take place any day. Partnership deed may provide that in
case of death of a partner during the accounting year, the deceased partner’s capital account will be credited
with his share of profits for the period for which he remained alive during the year on the basis of profits of the
year preceding the year in which death takes place. Suppose, a partner C getting 1/3 share in profits died on
30 June 2011 and the profits for the year ended 31st March, 2011 have been ` 18,000. Then C’s Capital
3 1
Account will be credited with ` 1500 (` 18,000 = ` 1,500) for his share of profits for 3 months. Of
12 3
course, some other basis may also be provided for, or the partnership deed may provide that final accounts
will be prepared to ascertain profits for the part of the year.
Joint Life Policy

Partners often take out a joint life policy to provide funds for settling the claim of the deceased partner. Annual
premium is paid by the firm and on the death of a partner, the amount of the policy is received from the
insurance company.
It is possible to treat a joint life policy in any of the three ways in the books of account.
1. When premium paid is treated as an expense
Under this method, the annual premium is treated as an expense and debited to the Profit and Loss Account.
On the death of a partner, the amount of the policy received by the firm is credited to all the partners’ capital
accounts in the profit sharing ratio.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
(i) For payment of premium of the joint life policy
(a) Joint Life Insurance Premium A/c Dr.
To Bank
(Being amount of premium paid on joint life policy)
(b) Profit and Loss A/c Dr.

To Joint Life Insurance Premium A/c.
(Being the amount of premium charged to Profit
and Loss A/c)
(ii) For Receipt of the Policy Money
Bank Dr.
(Being the policy money distributed among all
partners in the profit sharing ratio)
2. When premium paid is treated as an asset and surrender value is taken into account
Under this method, Joint Life Policy Account is debited with the amount of premium as and when paid. At the
end of the year, the amount in excess of surrender value is treated as loss and transferred to Profit and Loss
Account. The balance in Joint Life Policy Account is shown as an asset in the balance sheet. The amount
received on maturity of policy in excess of surrender value will be net gain and divided among all the partners
in their profit sharing ratio.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
(i) Joint Life Policy A/c Dr.
To Bank
(Being the premium paid on policy) ________
(ii) Profit and Loss A/c Dr.
To Joint Life Policy A/c
(Being the adjustment of book value with the
surrender value i.e. excess of joint life policy
over the surrender value)______________ __
(iii) Bank Dr.
(Being amount received on maturity of policy)_
(iv) Joint Life Policy A/c Dr.
(Being the amount received minus the
surrender value on that date distributed
among the partners.)__________________ _
3. When premium paid is treated as an asset and life policy reserve account is maintained.
Under this method, whenever premium is paid, the amount of the premium is debited to Joint Life Policy
Account. At the end of the year, Profit and Loss account is debited and Joint Life Policy Reserve Account is
credited with the amount of the premium paid for the year. Then, in order to reduce the balances of Joint Life
Policy Account and Joint Life Policy Reserve Account to the figure of surrender value of the policy, Joint Life
Policy Reserve Account is debited and Joint Life Policy Account is credited with the difference between
balance of Joint Life Policy Account and surrender value of the policy. The entries are repeated every year.
On maturity of the policy, the amount received from the insurance company is credited to Joint Life Policy
Account, Joint Life Policy Reserve Account is transferred to Joint Life Policy Account and the balance in Join
Life Policy Account is transferred to all the partners’ capital accounts in their profit sharing ratio. The amount
standing at the credit of Joint Life Policy Reserve Account may alternatively be transferred directly to partners’
capital accounts in their profit sharing ratio.
234 FP-FA&A
JOURNAL ENTRIES
(i) For payment of premium of the Joint Life Policy
Joint Life Policy A/c Dr.
To Bank
(Being the amount of premium paid on
Joint Life Policy)
(ii) For appropriation of amount equal to annual premium
Profit and Loss A/c Dr.
To Joint Life Policy Reserve A/c
(Being the amount transferred to Joint Life
Policy Reserve Account)
(iii) For adjusting the difference between the premium paid and the
increase in the surrender value
Joint Life Policy Reserve A/c Dr.
(Being excess of premium over surrender value adjusted)
(iv) For receipt of the policy money
(a) Bank Dr.
(Being the amount received of joint life policy on maturity)
(b) Joint Life Policy Reserve A/c Dr.
(Being the credit balance of joint life policy
reserve account transferred
to Joint Life Policy A/c)
(c) Joint Life Policy A/c Dr.
(Being the final balance is transferred to capital accounts in
the old profit sharing ratio of all the partners)
4. Individual policies on the life of each partner
If instead of one joint life policy, a number of individual policies are taken, on the death of a partner, the
amount of the policy of the life of the deceased partner will be received in cash. The other policies will be
shown at their respective surrender values while ascertaining the amount due to the executors of the
deceased partner.
Repayment of the Amount due to Deceased Partner

On death of a partner, the amount due his legal representatives will have to be paid. It may not be possible to
pay the whole amount in a lump sum. As a rule, the payment is made according to the terms of partnership
agreement. The various courses available are –
(a) Repayment in installments over a period of time and interest is paid on outstanding balance.
(b) The amount due may be treated as a loan to the firm. The firm may pay interest at an agreed rate or
share of profit of the firm.
(c) An annuity may be paid to the heirs of deceased partner.
Illustration 17:
A, B and C are partners in a firm sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 5:4:3 respectively. The firm had
insured the partners’ lives severally, A’s life for ` 20,000, B’s life for ` 16,000 and C’s life for ` 14,000. The
premiums were charged to the firm’s profit and loss account. The surrender values of these policies were
20% of the policy amount. B died on 1.4.2011. Calculate B’s share in policies.
Solution:
Claim on B’s policy ` 16,000

Surrender value of A’s and C’s Life policies (20%)
(` 4,000 + `2,800) ` 6,800
` 22,800
4
B’s Share =` 22,800 ` 7,600
12
Illustration 18:
A, B and C are partners sharing profits in the ratio of 2:1:1 respectively. On 30th June, 2011 their balance
sheet was as follows:
Creditors 4,000 Goodwill 3,000

Bills Payable 2,000 Freehold Property 10,000
Capitals: Joint Life Policy 2,000
A 10,000 Stock 5,500
B 6,000 Debtors 4,500
C 4,000 Cash 1,000
26,000 26,000
A died on July 1, 2011. The firm had taken a joint life policy for ` 15,000, the payment for which was received on
July 31, 2011. According to the partnership agreement, on retirement or death of a partner, the goodwill was to be
valued at 1-1/2 times the average profit of the last four years. The profits for the last four years were ` 6,000, `
7,500, ` 9,000 and ` 9,500 respectively. For paying the amount due to A’s legal representative, B and C brought as
much cash as would bring their capitals in profit-sharing ratio and the firm would have cash in hand ` 3,000.
Calculate goodwill, prepare partners’ capital accounts and the balance sheet.
Solution:
Calculation of goodwill
6,000 7,500 9,000 9,500
Average Profit for four years = = ` 8,000
4
1 1
Goodwill at 1 times = 8,000 1 `12,000
2 2
Less: Existing goodwill ` 3,000
Increase in the value of goodwill ` 9,000
Calculation of gain in joint life policy
Sum received from insurance Company 15,000
Less: Joint life policy amount 2,000
Net gain to be distributed amongst the partners 13,000
236 FP-FA&A
Dr. Partners’ Capital Accounts Cr.

(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
To Cash A/c 21,000 By Balance
To A’s Capital b/fd 10,000 6,000 4,000
A/c 2,250 2,250 By B’s Capital 2,250
To Balance By C’s Capital 2,250
c/d 10,000 10,000 By Joint Life
Policy A/c 6,500 3,250 3,250
By Cash 3,000 5,000
_______ _______ _______ _______ ______ ________
21,000 12,250 12,250 21,000 12,250 12,250
Calculation of cash brought in by B and C:
` `
Amount payable to A’s legal representatives 21,000
Add: Desired cash in hand 3,000
Amount required 24,000
Less: Amount received from Insurance company 15,000
Existing balance of cash in hand 1,000 16,000
Shortage of cash to be brought in By B and C 8,000
B’s Capital after adjustment of Goodwill and Life Policy 7,000
C’s Capital after adjustment of Goodwill and Life Policy 5,000
Shortage of cash to be brought in 8,000
Total Capital of B and C after A’s death 20,000
Share of B being 1/2th of ` 20,000 10,000
Less: Already in the business 7,000
Cash to be introduced by B 3,000
Share of C being 1/2 of ` 20,000 10,000
Less: Already in the business 5,000
Cash to be introduced by C 5,000
Balance Sheet of B and C
Creditors 4,000 Goodwill 3,000

Bills Payable 2,000 Freehold Property 10,000
Capitals: Stock 5,500
B 10,000 Debtors 4,500
C 10,000 20,000 Cash 3,000
26,000 26,000
Illustration 19:
st
On 31 March, 2011 the balance sheet of Sen, Sil and Som who shared profits and losses in the ratio of 4 : 3
: 2 respectively stood as follows:
Joint Life Policy Reserve 6,000 Joint Life Policy
Capital Accounts: (Policy for ` 18,500) 10,000
Sen 10,000 Sundry Debtors 17,500
Sil 30,000 Stock 30,500
Som 10,500 Cash at Bank 7,100
77,100 77,100
th
On 30 June, 2011 Sen died. According to partnership deed, at the time of death, goodwill of the firm was to
be valued at 2 years’ purchase of average profits of the last three years and deceased partner’s capital
account was to be credited with the share of profits for the period he lived in the year of death on the basis of
profit of immediately previous year.
th
Find out the amount due to Sen’s executors on 30 June, 2011. Profits for the past three years have been as
follows:
st
For the year ended 31 March, 2011 ` 36,000
st
st
Solution:
Total profits for the past three years = ` 36,000 + ` 30,000 + ` 25,800
= ` 91,800
91800
,
2 years’ purchases of average profit =` 2 = ` 61,200
3
Total Goodwill = 61,200
4
Sen’s share = ` 61200
, = ` 27,200
9
st
Sen’s share of profits for 3 months on the basis of profit for the year ended 31 March, 2011
4 1
= ` 36,000 = ` 4,000
9 4
4
Sen’s share in policy = ` (18,500 + 6,000 – 10,000) = ` 6,444
9
Total amount due to Sen’s executors = ` 10,000 + ` 27,200 + ` 4,000 + ` 6,444 = ` 47,644.
Illustration 20:
Following is the balance sheet of A, B and C as at 1st April, 2011:
Sundry Creditors 20,000 Goodwill 40,000
ReserveFfund 32,000 Plant and Machinery 60,000
Capital Accounts: Stock 40,000
A 1,00,000 Sundry Debtors 60,000
B 50,000 Cash at Bank 50,000
C 50,000 Cash in Hand 2,000
2,52,000 2,52,000
238 FP-FA&A
C died on 30th June, 2011. Under the terms of partnership deed, the executors of a deceased partner were
entitled to –
(a) Amount standing to the credit of partner’s capital account;
(b) Interest on capital balance at 15% per annum;
(c) Share or goodwill on the basis of twice the average of the past three years’ profit; and
(d) Share of profit form the closing of the last financial year to the date of death on the basis of the
average of the three completed years’ profits before the death.
Profits for the years ended 31st March, 2009, 2010 and 2011 were ` 60,000, ` 70,000 and ` 80,000
respectively. Profits were shared in the ratio of capitals.
Pass the necessary journal entries and draw up C’s Capital Account to be rendered to his executors.
Solution:
Journal Entries
Reserve Fund Dr. 8,000
(Being the share of reserve fund transferred
to capital account)
Interest on Capital A/c Dr. 1,875
(Being the interest @ 15% credited to C’s
Capital Account)
A’s Capital A/c Dr. 16,667
B’s Capital A/c Dr. 8,333
(Being the share of goodwill due to C, debited
to the capital accounts of existing partners)
(Being the share of profit till 30th June, 2011 based on
the average profit of the preceding three years credited
to C’s Capital Account)
Dr. C’s Capital Account Cr.

To C’s Executors 89,250 By Balance b/fd 50,000
By Reserve fund 8,000
By Interest on Capital 1,875
By A’s Capital A/c 16,667
By B’s Capital A/c 8,333
_______ By Profit and Loss A/c 4,375
89,250 89,250
Working Notes
(i) Calculation of Goodwill
Total profit of three years = ` 2,10,000
Average Profit = ` 2,10,000 x 3 = ` 70,000
Goodwill = ` 70,000 2 = ` 1,40,000
Existing Goodwill ` 40,000
Goodwill to be increased by ` 1,00,000
C’s Share = ` 1,00,000 x 4 = ` 25,000
(ii) Calculation of C’s Share of Profit
Average Profit = ` 70,000
1 3
C’s Share for 3 months = ` 70,000 = ` 4,375
4 12
DISSOLUTION OF PARTNERSHIP
Dissolution of a firm means that the business of the firm is put to an end, assets are disposed of, liabilities are
paid off, and the accounts of all the partners are also settled. Dissolution of a firm differs from dissolution of a
partnership. A partnership is dissolved on the expiry of the term or on the completion of the specified venture,
death, retirement or insolvency of a partner. However if the remaining partners decide to continue to run the
business, the partnership firm is not dissolved. If they do not continue then the firm is also dissolved
automatically. Thus, there is difference between dissolution of partnership and dissolution of firm which may
be summarized as under:
– In case of dissolution of firm, the firm ceases to continue its business i.e. the business comes to an
end. But in the case of dissolution of partnership, the business of the firm is continued.
– In dissolution of firm, the partnership among all the partners no longer exists while in case of
dissolution of partnership, the partnership among all the partners does not come to an end.
– Dissolution of partnership does not necessarily mean dissolution of firm whereas dissolution of firm
necessarily implies dissolution of partnership.
A firm is dissolved when:
– the partners of the firm decide to dissolve it,
– all the partners or all the partners except one become insolvent,
– the business of the firm is declared illegal,
– in case partnership at will, a partner gives notice of dissolution,
– The Court orders dissolution of the firm which may happen in the following circumstances:
(a) where a partner has become of unsound mind,
(b) where a partner suffers from permanent incapacity,
(c) where a partner is guilty of misconduct affecting the business,
(d) where there is persistent disregard of partnership agreement by a partner,
(e) where a partner transfers his interest or share to a third person,
(f) where a business cannot be carried on except at a loss, and
(g) where a dissolution appears to the Court to be just and equitable on any other ground.
Settlement of Accounts of Partners

The Indian Partnership Act has certain provisions for the dissolution of partnership firm. According to section
48, in settling the accounts of a firm after dissolution, the following rules shall be observed subject to
agreement by the partners:
(a) Losses, including deficiencies of capital, shall be paid first out of profits, next out of capital, and, lastly, if
240 FP-FA&A
necessary, by the partners individually in the proportions in which they were entitled to share profits;
(b) The assets of the firm, including any sums contributed by the partners to make up deficiencies of capital,
shall be applied in the following manner and order:
– in paying the debts of the firm to third parties;
– in paying to each partner ratably what is due to him from the firm for advances as distinguished from
capital;
– in paying to each partner ratably what is due to him on account of capital; and
– the residue, if any, shall be divided among the partners in the proportions in which they were entitled
to share profits.
Thus, on dissolution the assets of the firm are sold out and the proceeds are applied in the following order:
– in paying debts due to third parties.
 – in paying ratably the loans advanced by partners to the firm.
– in paying to the partners the sums due to them on account of capital, and
– if there is a surplus, it has to be distributed among the partners in the profit sharing ratio. On the other
hand, if there is a loss on dissolution, it has to be made up first out of past accumulated profits, then
out of capitals of the partners and lastly out of contributions from private estates of the partners in the
profit sharing ratio.
Important principles
– The private property of a partner should be used to pay his private debts first and if there is
any surplus it can be used to pay firms liabilities.
– Similarly, firm’s assets should be first used to pay firm’s liabilities. A partner can use his
share of the surplus only to pay his private liabilities.
– The liability of partners is joint and several. It means that if a partner is unable to bring in
his share of loss, the other partners have to make up his share of loss also.
Accounting Treatment on Dissolution of Partnership

On dissolution, the books of accounts of the partnership firm are closed. The various steps to be followed are
as follows:
1. Open a “Realisation Account” and transfer to it all the assets except Cash in hand and at bank. Sundry
Debtors will be transferred at gross amount.
2. Transfer to Realisation Account all liabilities to outsiders and provisions against assets like Provision
for Bad Debts. However, accounts denoting accumulated losses or profits will not be transferred to
Realisation Account.
3. Now, Realisation Account will be credited with the actual amount realised by sale of assets. If a
partner takes over an asset the capital account of that partner is debited and Realisation Account is
credited with the value agreed upon.
4. Actual amount paid to the creditors of the firm is debited to Realisation Account. If a partner takes over a
liability, his capital account is credited and Realisation Account is debited with the amount agreed upon.
5. Expenses during the course of dissolution are debited to Realisation Account and credited to cash.
6. Profit or loss revealed by Realisation Account is transferred to all the partners’ capital accounts in their
profit sharing ratio. Realisation Account is thus closed.
7. Loans advanced by partners to the firm are repaid.
8. Any reserve or accumulated profit or loss lying in the books of accounts is transferred to capital
accounts in the profit sharing ratio.
9. Partners whose capital accounts may be showing a debit balance bring cash to clear their accounts.
10. Payment is made to the partners whose capital accounts are showing credit balances. This will close
the books of accounts.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN REVALUATION ACCOUNT AND REALISATION ACCOUNT
Realisation Account
Revaluation Account
(i) The effect of the revaluation of assets and (i) It records the sale of various assets and
liabilities is recorded in revaluation account. payment of liabilities.
(ii) Revaluation account is prepared at the time (ii) It is prepared only at the time of dissolution of
of reconstitution of the firm. the firm.
(iii) Revaluation account is prepared to find out (iii) Realisation account is prepared to find out the
the profit (loss) on the revaluation of assets profit (loss) on the realization of assets and
and liabilities. settlement of liabilities.
(iv) It contains only those assets and liabilities (iv) It contains generally all assets and liabilities.
which are revalued.
(v) The balance of this account is transferred to (v) The balance of this account is transferred to the
the old partners’ capital accounts. capital accounts of all partners.
(vi) Accounting entries are made on the basis of (vi) Accounting entries are made at the book values
the difference between book value and of assets and liabilities.
revalued figures.
(vii) On revaluation, the accounts of assets and (vii) The accounts of assets and liabilities are closed
liabilities are not closed. on preparation of realization account.
Return of Premium on Dissolution

If a partner on his admission pays to the other partner an amount for goodwill (also known as premium) and it
is agreed that the partnership would be for a fixed term, then, if the firm is dissolved before the expiry of such
a term, the partner will be entitled to a refund of a ratable amount of the premium so paid. Suppose, A and B
admit C as a new partner on the condition that C pays ` 10,000 for goodwill and it is agreed that the
partnership would be for 10 years. But if the firm is dissolved after 4 years, C will be entitled to a refund of `
6,000 depending upon the circumstances.
However, such a refund cannot be claimed under the following conditions:
(i) When the firm is dissolved due to the death of a partner.
(ii) When the dissolution takes place mainly due to the misconduct of the partner making the claim, or
(iii) Where the dissolution is in pursuance of an agreement that no such refund will be made.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
C, on his admission paid ` 20,000 for goodwill on the condition that
partnership will be for 10 years. But after only 3 years, the firm has to be
dissolved due to misconduct of B, an old partner. Will C be entitled to get
refund of the amount paid by him by way of goodwill?
(Ans. : Yes, but only ` 14,000)
Will it make any difference if the firm is dissolved due to misconduct of C
himself?
(Ans.: Yes, C won’t get anything)
What will be the position if the partnership firm has to be dissolved due to
B’s death?
(Ans.: Won’t get anything)
242 FP-FA&A
Insolvency of a Partner
In dissolution, if the capital account of a partner shows a debit balance, he will have to pay the amount to the
firm. But if he is insolvent, he will not be able to do so; he will not be able to pay the full amount of such a
debit balance. The sum which becomes irrecoverable from a partner due to his insolvency is a loss to be
borne by other partners. Before the decision in Garner v. Murray case was made, such loss used to be
treated as an ordinary loss and transferred to the capital accounts of the solvent partners in their relative profit
sharing ratio. But decision in Garner v. Murray changed the position.
Decision in Garner Vs. Murray
According to the decision in Garner v. Murray, in case of insolvency of a partner:
(a) first the solvent partners should bring in cash equal to their respective shares of the loss on realisation,
and
(b) then, the loss due to the insolvency of a partner should be divided among the other partners in the
ratio of capitals then standing.
The effect of this decision practically is that the deficiency in the capital Important Note:
account of the insolvent partner has to be borne by the solvent partners in
the ratio of capitals standing just prior to dissolution. If on the date of dissolution, a
partner had no credit balance in
If the capitals are fixed, then the loss due to the insolvency of a partner will his capital account, he will not
be borne by the solvent partners in the ratio of their capitals. bear any loss on account of
insolvency of another partner.
If the capitals are fluctuating, all necessary adjustments in respect of This is irrespective of his private
reserves or profit and loss account are first made (but the loss on wealth.
realisation is not adjusted) in the capital accounts of all the partners, and
then the ratio of their capitals is calculated to transfer the deficiency of the insolvent partner.
ACCOUNTING IN CASE OF INSOLVENCY - STEPS SUMMARIZED

– Prepare Realisation Account in the usual manner.
– Transfer profit of loss on realisation to all the partners in profit sharing ratio.
– Prepare insolvent partner’s capital account. If anything is received from his estate, it should be
credited to his account.
– The debit balance of insolvent partner should be transferred to all other solvent partners in the ratio of
capitals before dissolution (or in the ration of fixed capitals if capitals are fixed).
– Then settle claims of solvent partners.
Insolvency of All Partners

If all the partners become insolvent, creditors will not be able to get their amounts in full. All the cash available
together with whatever can be received from the private estates of the partners will be paid to the creditors
after the expenses of realisation have been met. In case of insolvency of all the partners, creditors should not
be transferred to Realisation Account; only assets should be transferred to this account. Amount realised from
assets should be credited to Realisation Account. Expenses should be debited to Realisation Account. Now
the balance in Realisation Account should be transferred to the Capital Accounts in profit sharing ratio. Now
Cash Account should be prepared. After recording the amounts which are received from the estates of the
partners, the entire cash should be distributed among the creditors ratably. The balances in the accounts of
creditors and in the capital accounts should be transferred to Deficiency Account. Thus, all the accounts will
be closed.
Illustration 21:
On 31st March, 2011 the following was the balance sheet of A, B and C when the firm was dissolved:
Capital Accounts: Goodwill 10,000
A 30,000 Plant & Machinery 20,000
B 30,000 Furniture 8,000
C 30,000 Investments 10,000
B’s Loan 5,000 Debtors 23,600
Mrs. A’s Loan 5,000 Less: Provision for Bad
Current Accounts debts 1,020 22,580
A 2,860
C 1,240 Bill Receivable 5,000
Bill Payable 10,000 Cash at Bank 2,760
Sundry Creditors 6,530 Unexpired Insurance 125
_______ B’s Current Account 105
1,29,630 1,29,630
Investments were taken over by A for ` 13,000 whereas bills receivable were taken over by B for ` 4,800,
fixed assets fetched ` 17,000 whereas stock realised ` 60,000. All the debtors paid the amounts due from
them. Total rebate of ` 110 was received on retiring all bills payable immediately. Expenses of realisation
came to ` 1,441. Pass Journal entries to close the books of the firm and show Realisation Account, Bank
Account, and the Capital Accounts of all the partners.
Solution:
Journal Entries
Realisation Account Dr. 1,27,785
To Goodwill 10,000
To Plant and Machinery 20,000
To Furniture 8,000
To Investments 10,000
To Stock 51,060
To Debtors 23,600
To Bills Receivable 5,000
To Unexpired Insurance 125
(Transfer of assets to Realisation Account)
Provision for Bad Debts Dr. 1,020
Mrs. A’s Loan Dr. 5,000
Bills Payable Dr. 10,000
Sundry Creditors Dr. 6,530
To Realisation Account 22,550
(Transfer of liabilities to outsiders to Realisation
Account)
Note: Mrs. A is also an outsider
Bank Dr. 1,00,600
To Realisation Account 1,00,600
(Sale proceeds of fixed assets and stock and amount
received from debtors)
244 FP-FA&A
Particulars ` `
A’s Current Account Dr. 13,000
B’s Current Account Dr. 4,800
(For investments taken over by A for ` 13,000 and bills
receivable taken over by B for `4,800)
Realisation Account Dr. 21,420
To Bank 21,420
(Payment made to pay of liabilities to outsiders – `
5,000 to Mrs. A. ` 9,890 for bills payable and ` 6,530 to
Creditors)
Realisation Account Dr. 1,441
To Bank 1,441
(Expenses of realisation amounting ` 1,441)
A’s Current Account Dr. 3,232

B’s Current Account Dr. 3,232
C’s Current Account Dr. 3,232
(Transfer of loss on realisation)
B’s Loan Account Dr. 5,000
To Bank 5,000
(Payment of B’s loan)
To A’s Current Account 3,000
To B’s Current Account 3,000
To C’s Current Account 3,000
(Transfer of General Reserve)
To A’s Current Account 10,372
To B’s Current Account 5,137
(Transfer of debit balances of current accounts of A and
B to their Capital Accounts)
C’s Current Account Dr. 1,008
(Transfer of credit balance in C’s Current Account to C’s
Capital Account)
To Bank 75,499
(Payment to Partners)
Ledger Accounts
Dr. Realisation Account Cr.
To Sundry Assets: By
Provision for Bad Debts 1,020
Goodwill 10,000 By
Mrs. A’s Loan 5,000
Plant and Machinery 20,000 By
Bills Payable 10,000
Furniture 8,000 By
Investments 10,000 By
Bank 1,00,600
Stock 51,060 By
A’s Current Account
Debtors 23,600 (Investments) 13,000
Bills Receivable 5,000 By B’s Current Account
Unexpired Insurance 125 (B/R) 4,800
To Bank (Liabilities) 21,420 By A’s Current Account
To Bank (Expenses) 1,441 (1/3rd loss) 3,232
By B’s Current Account
(1/3rd loss) 3,232
By C’s Current Account
_______ (1/3rd loss) 3,232
1,50,646 1,50,646
Dr. Bank Cr.
Particulars ` Particular `
To Balance b/fd 2,760 By Realisation (liabilities) 21,420

To Realisation A/c By Realisation (expenses) 1,441
(Sale proceeds of assets) 1,00,600
By B’s Loan Account 5,000
By A’s Capital Account 19,628
By B’s Capital Account 24,863
_______ By C’s Capital Account 31,008
1,03,360 1,03,360
246 FP-FA&A
Dr. Partners’ Current Accounts Cr.
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
To Balance 105 By Balance
b/fd b/fd 12,860 1,240
To Realisation 13,000 4,800 By General
To Realisation Reserve 3,000 3,000 3,000
(loss) 3,232 3,232 3,232 By A’s Capital 10,372
To C’s Capital 1,008 By B’s Capital 5,137
_______ _______ _______ _______ ______ ________
16,232 8,137 4,240 16,232 8,137 4,240
Dr. Partners’ Capital Accounts Cr.
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
To A’s Current By Balance
A/c 10,372 b/fd 30,000 30,000 30,000
To B’s Current By C’s Current
A/c 5,137 A/c 1,008
To bank 19,628 24,863 31,008 _______ ______ ________
30,000 30,000 31,008 30,000 30,000 31,008
Illustration 22:
A, B and C commenced business on 1st April, 2010. They agreed to share the profits and losses in the ratio
of 2: 2: 1. Their capitals were ` 30,000, ` 22,500 and ` 15,000 respectively. The partnership deed provided for
interest on capital at 6% per annum. During 2010-11 the firm earned a profit of ` 20,050 (before providing for
interest on capital). During the year the partners’ drawings were A – `7,000; B – ` 6,250; and C – 4,000.
The relation between partners was not good. They decided to dissolve the firm on 31st March, 2011. The
assets were sold which realised ` 75,000. There were creditors to the extent of ` 12,000 which were paid off
at a discount of 5%. Expenses of realisation amounted to ` 1,200.
Prepare the necessary accounts to close the books of the firm.
Solution:
Profit and Loss Account

Dr. Cr.
2011 2011
Mar. 31 To Capital Accounts Mar. 31 By Net Profit 20,050
(interest)
A 1,800
B 1,350
C 900 4,050
To Profit trans-
ferred to:
A 6,400
B 6,400
C 3,200 16,000 _____
20,050 20,050
2011 2010
Mar.31 To Drawings 7,000 Apr.1 By Cash 30,000
To Balance c/d 31,200 2011
Mar.31 By Profit & Loss A/c
(interest) 1,800
By Profit & Loss A/c
_____ (share of profit) 6,400
38,200 38,200
2011 2011
Mar. 31 To Realisation (loss) 3,160 Mar. 31 By Balance b/d 31,200
To Cash A/c 28,040 ______
31,200 31,200
2011 2010
Mar. 31 To Drawings 6,250 Apr. 1 By Cash 22,500
Mar. 31 By Profit & Loss A/c
(interest) 1,350
30,250 30,250
2011 2011
To Cash A/c 20,840 ______
24,000 24,000
2011 2010
Mar. 31 To Drawings 4,000 Apr. 1 By Cash 15,000
Mar. 31 By Profit & Loss A/c
(interest) 900
19,100 19,100
2011 2011
To Cash A/c 13,520 ______
15,100 15,100
248 FP-FA&A
Balance Sheet as at 31st March, 2011
Sundry Creditors 12,000 Sundry Assets 82,300
Capital Accounts:
A 31,200
B 24,000
C 15,100 70,300 ______
82,300 82,300

2011 2011
Mar. 31 To Sundry Assets 82,300 Mar.31 By Sundry Creditors 12,000
To Cash (expenses) 1,200 By Cash
To Cash (creditors (assets realised) 75,000
` 12,000 By Loss transferred to:
less 5%) 11,400 A – 3,160
B – 3,160
______ C – 1,580 7,900
94,900 94,900
Cash Account

2011 2011
Mar. 31 To Realisation A/c Mar. 31 By Realisation
(assets realised) 75,000 (expenses) 1,200
By Realisation A/c
(creditors) 11,400
By Capital Accounts:
A – 28,040
B – 20,840
______ C – 13,520 62,400
75,000 75,000
Illustration 23:
On 31st March, 2011 the following was the balance sheet of A, B and C who shared profits and losses in the
ratio of 2:1:1 respectively.
Creditors 16,000 Cash in hand 200
Capital Accounts: Debtors 11,300
A 30,000 Furniture 12,500
B 20,000 Plant & Machinery 20,000
C 1,000 Goodwill 9,200
72,000 72,000
The firm was dissolved on this date due to C’s insolvency. Assets realised `32,000. Expenses of dissolution
came to ` 200. C’s estate paid 50% of what was due to C. Close the books of the firm assuming that the loss
due to insolvency has been divided:
(i) in the ratio of fixed capitals.
(ii) in the ratio of fluctuating capitals.
Solution:
Case (i) Loss due to deficiency is divided in the ratio of fixed capital accounts
To Stock 18,800 By Creditors 16,000
To Debtors 11,300 By Cash (Assets) 32,000
To Furniture 12,500 By A’s Capital Account 20,000
To Plant & Machinery 20,000 By B’s Capital Account 10,000
To Goodwill 9,200 By C’s Capital Account 10,000
To Cash (Creditors) 16,000
To Cash (Expenses) 200
______ ______
88,000 88,000

(` ) (` ) (` ) (` ) (` ) (` )
To Realisation 20,000 10,000 10,000 By Balance
b/d 30,000 20,000 1,000
To C’s Capital 2,325 1,550 By General
Reserve 2,500 1,250 1,250
To Cash A/c 30,175 19,700 By Cash A/c 20,000 10,000 3,875
By A’s Cap 2,325
______ ______ ______ By B’s Cap ______ ______ 1,550
52,500 31,250 10,000 52,500 31,250 10,000
250 FP-FA&A
To Balance b/fd 200 By Realisation A/c (creditors) 16,000
To Realisation A/c (assets) 32,000 By Realisation A/c (expenses) 200
To A’s Capital Account 20,000 By A’s Capital Account 30,175
To C’s Capital Account 3,875 ______
66,075 66,075
Note: Since, current accounts have not been specified in the question the adjustments have been made in
capital accounts.
Case (ii) Loss due to deficiency is divided in the ratio of fluctuating capital accounts
Realisation Account will be the same as in the case (i)
Capital Accounts
(` ) (` ) (` ) (` ) (` ) (` )
To Realisation 20,000 10,000 10,000 By Balance
b/d 30,000 20,000 14,000
To C’s Capital 2,343 1,532 By Gen. Res. 2,500 1,250 1,250
To Cash A/c 30,157 19,718 By Cash A/c 20,000 10,000 3,875
By A’s Capital
(26/43ths share) 2,343
By B’s Capital A/c
_____ _____ _____ (17/43ths share) _____ 1,532 _____
52,500 31,250 10,000 52,500 31,250 10,000
Balances in A’s Capital Account and B’s Capital Account after adjustment for General Reserve
are ` 32,500 and ` 21,250 respectively. Hence, A and B will bear the loss of ` 3,875 due to C’s
insolvency in the ratio of 32,500 : 21,250 or 26 : 17 respectively.
A’s share = ` 3,875 26 = ` 2,343
43
B’s share = ` 3,875 17 = ` 1,532
43
To Balance b/fd 200 By Realisation A/c (Creditors) 16,000
To Realisation A/c (Assets) 32,000 By Realisation A/c (Expenses) 200
To A’s Capital Account 20,000 By A’s Capital Account 30,157
_____ _____
66,075 66,075
Illustration 24:
A, B, C and D are partners in a firm sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 4 : 1 : 2 : 3. The following is
the balance sheet as at March 31st, 2011.
Sundry creditors 30,000 Cash in hand 14,000
Capital Accounts: Sundry debtors 35,000
A 70,000 Less: Provision 5,000 30,000
D 30,000 1,00,000 Other assets 51,000
Capital Accounts:
B 20,000
C 15,000 35,000
_______ _______
1,30,000 1,30,000
On March 31st, 2011, the firm is dissolved. The partnership agreement provides that the deficiency of an insolvent
partner will be borne by the solvent partners in the ratio of capitals as they stand just before dissolution.
The following arrangements are agreed upon:
(i) A is to take over 60% of book debts at 70% and D is to take over the balance at 75%. Further, they
are to be allowed ` 2,100 and 1,100 respectively to cover future losses.
(ii) D is to realise other assets and to pay off the creditors. He is to receive 5% gross commission on the
amounts finally payable to other partners but to bear expenses of realisation. He reports the results of
realisation as follows:
Other assets realised at a loss of 2% on net collection and pays of the creditors at a discount of 30%.
Realisation expenses amount to ` 3,000 but the same is paid by the firm. B is declared insolvent and a
dividend of 20% in a rupee is realised from his estate.Prepare Cash account, Realisation Account and Capital
Accounts.
Solution:
To Balance b/fd 14,000 By Realisation A/c
To Realisation A/c 50,000 (payment to creditors) 21,000
To B’s Capital A/c By D’s Capital A/c (expenses) 3,000
(20% dividend) 4,000 By A’s Capital A/c 44,000
To C’s Capital A/c 15,000 By D’s Capital A/c 15,000
______ ______
83,000 83,000
To Debtors 35,000 By Provision for bad debts 5,000
To Other assets 51,000 By Sundry creditors 30,000
To Cash A/c By Cash A/c (realisation
(30,000 – 9,000) of other assets) 50,000
(payment to creditors) 21,000 By A’s Capital A/c
(debtors taken over) 12,600
By D’s Capital A/c
_______ _______
1,07,000 1,07,000
252 FP-FA&A
To Realisation A/c By Balance b/fd 70,000
To B’s Capital A/c
(deficiency) 11,200
To D’s Capital A/c
(commission) 2,200
To Cash A/c
(final payment) 44,000
_____ _____
70,000 70,000
To Balance b/fd 20,000 By Cash A/c 4,000
By A’s Capital A/c
(7/10ths deficiency) 11,200
By D’s Capital A/c
(3/10ths deficiency) 4,800
_____ ______
20,000 20,000
To Balance b/fd 15,000 By Cash A/c 15,000
_____ _____
15,000 15,000
Dr D’s Capital Account Cr.
To Realisation A/c By Balance b/fd 30,000
(debtors taken over) 9,400 By A’s Capital A/c
To Cash A/c (expenses) 3,000 (commission) 2,200
To B’s Capital A/c (deficiency) 4,800
To Cash A/c (final payment) 15,000
_____ _____
32,200 32,200
Working Notes:
Sundry Debtors taken over by A:
` 35,000 x 60% x 70% = ` 14,700
Less: Allowance for further loss = ` 2,100
` 12,600
Sundry Debtors taken over by D:
` 35,000 x 40% x 75% = ` 10,500
Less : Allowance for further loss = ` 1,100
` 9,400
D’s Commission
Gross amount payable ` 46,200
5
Commission 46,200 ` 2,200
105
Illustration 25:
Below is the Balance Sheet of C, D and E as on 31st March, 2011
Sundry Creditors 2,00,000 Cash 31,200
Loan 1,00,000 3,00,000 Stock 1,56,300
Capital Accounts: Debtors 47,200
C 80,000 Furniture 95,300
D 60,000 Profit & Loss Account 1,20,000
E 10,000 1,50,000 _______
4,50,000 4,50,000
The firm was dissolved due to insolvency of all the partners. Stock was sold for ` 1,09,000 while furniture
fetched ` 40,000. ` 41,000 were received from Debtors. Expenses were ` 2,200. Nothing could be recovered
from D and E but C’s private estate showed a surplus of ` 6,000. Close the books of the firm.
Solution:
To Stock 1,56,300 By Cash A/c (assets) 1,90,000
To Debtors 47,200 By C’s Capital A/c 37,000
To Furniture 95,300 By D’s Capital A/c 37,000
To Cash A/c (expenses) 2,200 By E’s Capital A/c 37,000
_______ _______
3,01,000 3,01,000
Particulars C D E Particulars C D E
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
To Profit and By Balance b/fd 80,000 60,000 10,000
Loss A/c - By Cash A/c 6,000
Transfer 40,000 40,000 40,000 By Deficiency 17,000 67,000
To Realisation
(Loss) 37,000 37,000 37,000
To Deficiency A/c 9,000
_____ _____ _____ ______ ______ _____
86,000 77,000 77,000 86,000 77,000 77,000
254 FP-FA&A
To Balance b/d 31,200 By Realisation A/c (expenses) 2,200
To Realisation A/c (assets) 1,90,000 By Loan A/c 75,000
To C’s Capital Account 6,000 By Sundry Creditors 1,50,000
_______ _______
2,27,200 2,27,200
Dr. Loan Account Cr.
To Cash A/c 75,000 By Balance b/fd 1,00,000
To Deficiency A/c 25,000
_______ _______
1,00,000 1,00,000
Dr. Sundry Creditors Cr.
To Cash A/c 1,50,000 By Balance b/fd 2,00,000
To Deficiency A/c 50,000 _______
2,00,000 2,00,000
Dr. Deficiency Account Cr.
To D’s Capital Account 17,000 By Loan Account 25,000
To E’s Capital Account 67,000 By Sundry Creditors 50,000
_____ By C’s Capital 9,000
84,000 84,000
LESSON ROUND UP
– Partnership is the relationship between persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business
carried on by all or any of them acting for all.
– Following are the features of partnership:
– There must be an agreement entered into by all the persons concerned.
– There must be a ‘business’ and for this purpose business would include any trade, profession or
occupation.
– The business must be carried on for the purpose of earning profits which would be divided among
the partners.
– The business must be carried on by some or all of the partners for the benefit of all of them.
– In partnership accounts, capital accounts of the partners may be fixed or fluctuating depending upon
the method of recording.
– Profit and loss appropriation account is prepared to make adjustments regarding salary to partners,
interest on capital and drawing, commission, etc. and then the profit is distributed among the partners
in the agreed ratio.
– When there is a change in profit sharing ratio, it results in gain to one partner and loss to the other.
– On admission of a new partner, one is required to: calculate new profit sharing ratio, find out sacrificing
ratio, adjust the re-value of assets and liabilities, treat the goodwill, and make adjustment for reserves,
past profit or loss and capital according to new profit sharing ratio.
– The difference between the old ratio and the new ratio is known as sacrificing ratio.
– Revaluation account is prepared to find out the effects of revaluation of assets and liabilities on
admission and retirement/death of a partner and the effect of net increase or decrease in assets and
liabilities is transferred to old partners in old profit sharing ratio.
– On the admission of a new partner, capitals of all the partners are required to be in proportion to their
respective share in profit and the capital brought in by the new partner may be taken as the basis.
– On retirement of a partner, adjustments may be made for reserves and undistributed profits,
revaluation of assets and liabilities, profit sharing ratio, goodwill, share of the partner in the profit or loss
up to the date of retirement, share of joint policy, etc.
– The net amount payable to the retiring partner after making all adjustments will be settled by paying
cash or by transferring it to a separate loan account.
– Whenever a partner dies, the deceased partner’s share is calculated and the payment is made to the
legal representatives of the deceased partner.
– Dissolution of partnership is different from dissolution of firm. In case of dissolution of firm, the firm
ceases to continue its business but in the case of dissolution of partnership, the business of the firm is
continued.
– On dissolution, the books of accounts of the firm are closed. For this a realisation account is prepared.
Capital accounts of the partners are also prepared, the partners with debit balances in their capital
accounts are required to bring in the required cash while partners with credit balances in their capital
accounts are paid off.
– When a partner cannot bring cash because of insolvency, the other partners have to share such a
deficiency according to the rule laid down in Garner vs. Murray.
GLOSSARY
Partners Persons who have entered into partnership with one another.
Partnership The written contract of partnership.
deed
Goodwill Present value of a firm’s anticipated super normal earnings.
Sacrificing ratio The difference between old profit sharing ratio and the new profit sharing ratio of the
old partners.
Surrender The sum of money an insurance company will pay to the policy holder in the event of
Value voluntary termination of the policy before its maturity if the insured event occurs.
256 FP-FA&A
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
Theory Questions:
1. What is meant by partnership?
2. What is partnership deed?
3. Distinguish between fluctuating and fixed capital accounts.
4. Why is interest allowed on capital?
5. Why is interest charged on drawings? How is it calculated?
6. What is goodwill? In what a ways can it be treated on admission of a partner?
7. Why are adjustments in the values of assets and liabilities made on the admission of a partner?
8. What are the accounting adjustments necessary at the time of retirement of a partner?
9. What is the significance of purchase of shares of a retiring partner by the remaining partners?
10. What is dissolution of a firm? How does if differ from dissolution of a partnership?
11. When is a firm dissolved?
12. When may the Court order dissolution of a firm?
13. On dissolution of a firm, in what order are payments made to creditors and partners?
14. What is Garner v. Murray rule? What is its effect in case of insolvency of a partner? Will it make any
difference if capital accounts of the partners are fixed or fluctuating?
15. How does insolvency of all the partners of a firm affect the creditors of the firm?
1. 1st March, 2011 the following was the balance sheet of A and B who were carrying on business in
partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2 respectively:
Capital Accounts Goodwill 5,000

A 18,000 Machinery 20,000
B 14,000 32,000 Furniture 10,000
Debtors 10,000
General Reserve 9,000 Less: Provision for
Sundry Trade Creditors 19,700 Bad Debts 500 9,500
Bank Overdraft 6,100 Stock 22,300
66,800 66,800
C was admitted to the firm on this date on the following terms:
(i) C would get 1/5th share of future profits.

(ii) C would bring ` 3,000 by way of his share of Goodwill and ` 15,000 as capital.
(iii) Provision for bad debts would be reduced to ` 350.
(iv) Capitals of the partners would be in their profit sharing ratio; A and B bringing in cash or withdrawing
cash as need be.
Pass journal entries, show the important ledger accounts and prepare Balance sheet as it would appear
immediately after C’ admission.
2. Following is the balance sheet of A and B (sharing profit and losses in the ratio of 3:2 respectively
on 31st March, 2011:
Outstanding Expenses 500 Goodwill 20,000

Creditors 13,600 Plant and Machinery 18,500
8% Loan 20,000 Furniture and Fittings 6,700
Capital Accounts: Stock 24,600
A 30,000 Debtors 9,350
B 20,000 Cash at Bank 4,950
84,100
84,100
A retires on that date. Goodwill is valued at ` 25,000. It is also agreed that plant and machinery be
depreciated by 10% and provision for bad debts amounting to ` 150 be made. A new partner named C is
admitted who buys one half of A’s share, B buying the remaining half share. Find out the amount brought in
by C and prepare the initial balance sheet of B and C.
st
3. Balance Sheet C, D and E as on 31 March, 2011
Capital Accounts Fixed Assets :

C 50,000 Goodwill 25,000
D 30,000 Plant and Machinery 30,000
E 20,000 Furniture 10,000
Current Accounts Current Assets:
D 1,500 Investments 15,000
E 1,300 Stock 40,000
Current Liabilities Debtors 8,000
Trade Creditors 16,250 Cash In Hand 500
Bills Payable 10,000 Current Account
Outstanding Expenses 350 C 900
1,29,400 1,29,400
C died on 31st December, 2011 by which date he had withdrawn ` 8,500. Partnership deed provided that in
case of death of a partner, in addition to the amount standing to the credit of capital and current accounts of
such a partner, the executors will also been titled to a share of the profits from the closing of the last accounting
year to the date of death on the basis of the last year’s profits. It also provided that goodwill of the firm in case of
death of a partner should be revalued at 2 years’ purchase of the average profits of the last three years. Profits
for 2008-09, 2009-10, and 2010-11 were ` 37,500, ` 45,800 and ` 37,700 respectively.
Investments were sold for ` 24,000 net at the stock exchange to pay immediately to C’s executors for one-
third of the total amount due to them.
Find out the balance left in C’s Executors Account? Calculations may be made to the nearest rupee.
(Hints: Profit on sale of investment will be shared by the executors also since it is due to appreciation in the
value of assets within the life time of C.)
258 FP-FA&A
4. A, B and C were carrying on business in partnership sharing profit and loses in the ratio 3:2:1
respectively. On 31st March, 2011 balance sheet of the firm stood as follows:
Bills Payable 15,000 Cash at Bank 8,900

Sundry Creditors 18,340 Creditors 8,000
Capital Accounts ` Stock 23,440
A 15,000 Furniture 5,000
B 10,000 Buildings 23,000
C 10,000 35,000 ______
68,340 68,340
B retired on the above mentioned date on the following terms:

(i) Buildings be appreciated by ` 7,000.
(ii) Provision for bad debts be made @ 5% on debtors.
(iii) Goodwill of the firm be valued @ ` 9,000 and adjustment in this respect be made without raising
Goodwill Account.
(iv) ` 7,000 be paid to B immediately and the balance due to him be treated as a loan carrying interest
@ 6% per annum.
Pass journal entries to record the above mentioned transactions and show the balance sheet of the firm as it
would appear immediately after B’s retirement.
5. A, B and C were equal partners. On 31st March, 2011 their balance sheet stood as follows:
Sundry Creditors 1,80,000 Cash in hand 10,000

General Reserve 60,000 Debtors 1,25,000
A’s Capital Account 1,80,000 Stock 1,85,000
B’s Capital Account 80,000 Furniture 1,04,000
C’s Capital Account
– overdrawn 76,000
_______ _______
5,00,000 5,00,000
On this date, the firm was dissolved due to C’s insolvency. Only ` 1,17,000 could be realised from debtors
while stock and furniture fetched ` 1,16,800 and ` 80,000 respectively. Expenses came to ` 1,800. C’s
estate could pay only 50% of what was due from C. Show Realisation Account and the accounts of the
partners. Assume the capitals are fluctuating. Apply Garner v. Murray rule.
260 FP-FA&A
Lesson 9
Introduction to Company Accounts
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Basic Concepts of Company Accounts The company form of business organization is
– Issue of Shares formed to overcome the limitations of partnership
– For Cash form of business organization. A company is an
– Under Subscription of Shares association or collection of individual real persons
– Over Subscription of Shares and/or other companies, who provide some form
– Calls in Advance and Interest on Calls in of capital with a common purpose or focus and
Advance
an aim of gaining profits. Thus, a company can
– Calls in Arrears and Interest on Calls in
Arrears be defined as an “artificial person” created by law,
– Issue of shares for consideration other with a discrete legal entity, perpetual succession
than cash and a common seal. It is not affected by the death,
– Review Questions insanity or insolvency of an individual member.
– Forfeiture of Shares
Company accounting is different from sole
– Re-issue of Forfeited Shares
proprietorship and partnership accounting.
– Forfeiture and Re-issue of Shares allotted
on Pro-Rata basis in case of over Company being a legal entity, has to maintain
subscription proper books of accounts to give a true and fair
– Issue of Debentures view of the state of affairs of the company. The
– For cash books are kept on accrual basis and according
– For consideration other than Cash to double entry system of accounting. The
– As Collateral Security company has to prepare its balance sheet and
– Redemption of Preference Shares profit & loss account from the books of account
– Out of the profits of the company
maintained by it.
– Out of the proceeds of the fresh issue
– Out of the profits of the company and In this lesson, we will study some basic concepts
proceeds of the fresh issue of company accounts like shares, share capital,
– Lesson Round Up entries for issue of share, debentures, forfeiture
– Glossary and re- issue of shares and redemption of
– Self-Test Questions preference shares.
We are not going to see a signficant upside until we get a clearer sense of how companies make their money
and how it is accounted for.
Charles Pradilla
262 FP-FA&A
BASIC CONCEPTS OF COMPANY ACCOUNTS

The Company form of business organization is a voluntary association of persons to carry on business.
Normally, it is given a legal status and is subject to certain legal regulations. It is an association of persons who
generally contribute money for some common purpose. The money so contributed is the capital of the company.
The persons who contribute capital are its members. The proportion of capital to which each member is entitled
is called his share, therefore members of a joint stock company are known as shareholders and the capital of
the company is known as share capital. The total share capital is divided into a number of units known as
‘shares’. The companies are governed by the Indian Companies Act, 1956. The Act defines a company as an
artificial person created by law, having separate entity, with perpetual succession and a common seal.
Meaning of Shares
Share as defined in Section 2(46) of the Companies Act, 1956 means a share in the share capital of a
company and it also includes stock except where a distinction between stock and share is expressed or
implied. A share is one unit into which the total share capital is divided. It is a fractional part of the share
capital and forms the basis of ownership in the company. For example, when a company has a share capital
of ` 5,00,000 divided into 50,000 shares of ` 10 each and a person who has taken 50 shares of that company
is said to have a share in the share capital of the company to the tune of ` 500. In other words, shares are
divisions of the share capital of a company.
Types of Shares
There are two basic types of share capital based on the types of shares which can be issued by a company
under the Companies Act, 1956. They are as follows:
(a) Preference Shares
Preference shares are those which carry the following preferential rights as to:
– the payment of dividend at a fixed rate; and
 – the return of capital on winding up of the company.
Both the rights must exits to make a share Preference Share; these rights are conferred by the Articles of
Association. Preference shareholders can enforce their rights of getting dividend in priority over the equity
shareholders only if there are profits and the directors decide to distribute them by way of dividend. Unless
the Articles otherwise provide, preference shares will be cumulative, i.e., they will be entitled to receive
arrears of their dividend.
Preference shareholders do not have any voting right except when dividend is outstanding for more than two
years for Cumulative Preference Shares and three years for non-cumulative preference shares. They have
the right to vote only on any resolution for winding up of the company & reduction or repayment of share
capital.
If the Articles of the company so provide, the preference shareholders may also be given the following rights
in addition to the preferential rights mentioned above:
– To participate in the surplus profits remaining after the equity shareholders have received dividend at a
fixed rate.
– To receive arrears of dividend at the time of winding up; if the Articles are silent, preference
shareholders will be entitled to receive the arrears of dividend also.
 – To receive premium on redemption of Preference Shares.
 – To participate in the surplus remaining after the equity shares are redeemed in winding up.
(b) Equity Shares
An equity share is one which is not a preference share. These are normally risk bearing shares. Equity
shareholders will get dividend and repayment of capital after meeting the claims of preference shareholders.
In other words, if the shareholder is not entitled to dividend at a fixed rate in preference to others or if there is
Lesson 9  Introduction to Company Accounts 263
no preferential right for the capital to be repaid, the share capital will be treated as equity share capital. After
payment of dividend at a fixed rate on preference shares, if profit is left, it can be distributed as dividend
among the equity shareholders. During liquidation of the company, equity shareholders are paid out but are
usually entitled to all the surplus assets after the payment of creditors and preference shareholders. The
value of these shares in the market fluctuates with the fortunes of the company.
Equity shareholders have the right to vote on any resolution placed before the company. The voting right to
every shareholder will be proportionate to his share of the paid up equity capital. The right to claim dividend
will arise only when the dividend is declared by the company in the general meeting. The usual practice is for
the board of directors to recommend dividend and the annual general meeting to declare the same.
Types of Share Capital

(a) Nominal or Authorized Capital: It refers to that amount which is stated in the Memorandum of
Association as the share capital of the company. The company is registered with this amount of capital. This
is the maximum limit of capital which the company is authorized to issue and beyond which the company
cannot issue shares unless the capital clause in the Memorandum is altered and the authorized capital is
increased.
(b) Issued Capital: It refers to that part of the authorized capital of the company which has actually been
offered to the public for subscription in cash and the shares allotted to vendors/promoters for consideration
other than cash. It sets the limit of the capital available for subscription. The prescribed form of the Balance
Sheet requires that under the head “Issued Capital”, should be stated (i) the different classes of share capital
as also the sub-classes of the preference shares, (ii) the date and terms of redemption or conversion (if any)
of any redeemable preference capital, and (iii) any option on un-issued share capital.
(c) Subscribed Capital: It refers to that part of the issued capital which has actually been subscribed by the
public and subsequently allotted to them by the directors of the company which are fully paid or partially paid.
(d) Called up Capital: It is that portion of the subscribed capital which the shareholders are called upon to
pay on the shares applied by them. A company does not necessarily require the full amount at once on the
shares subscribed and hence calls up only such portion as it needs. The balance then remaining is known as
uncalled capital.
(e) Paid-up Capital: It refers to that part of the called up capital which has actually been paid by the
shareholders. This is the actual capital of the company which is included in the total of the Balance Sheet.
Paid-up capital identifies with the called up capital if all the shareholders have paid the amount called up by
the company.
ISSUE OF SHARES
When a public company desires to raise capital by issuing its shares to the public, it has to invite the public to
subscribe for its shares. The invitation is made through a document called the prospectus. The person who
intends to subscribe to those shares should make an application for the desired number of shares to the
company. Then, the company will allot shares to the applicant.
Allotment means the appropriation of a certain number of shares to an applicant in response to his
application. The company cannot allot more than the number of shares offered to the public for subscription
through the prospectus. Moreover, the company cannot make allotment unless the amount stated in the
prospectus as the minimum subscription has been subscribed and the sum payable on application for the
stated amount has been received by the company.
If the number of shares applied for is less than the number of shares offered, the allotment can be only for the
shares applied for provided minimum subscription is raised. The minimum subscription is the 90% of the
issued amount.
264 FP-FA&A
ISSUE OF SHARES
FOR CASH
AT PAR At A PREMIUM AT A DISCOUNT
FOR CONSIDERATION
OTHER THAN CASH
ISSUES OF SHARES TO ISSUES OF SHARES TO

VENDORS PROMOTORS
ISSUE OF SHARES FOR CASH
Issue of Shares at par

Shares are said to be issued at par when the issue price is equal to the face value or nominal value of the
shares i.e. issue price is ` 10 and face value is also ` 10. When the shares are issued, the company may ask
the payment of the shares either in one lump sum or in installments.
(a) When shares are issued at par and are payable in full in a lump sum:
1) On receipt of application money -

Bank Dr. (With the amount received on application)
To Share Application and Allotment A/c
(2) On allotment of shares -
Share Application and Allotment A/c Dr. (With the money received on the number of
To Share Capital A/c shares allotted)
Note:
(i) When the capital of the company consists of shares of different classes, a separate share application
account will be opened for each class of shares, i.e. equity share application account/preference share
application account etc.
(ii) Unless shares are allotted by the company, the receipt of application is simply an offer and cannot be
credited to Share Capital Account.
(iii) If the company fails to raise the minimum subscription, then no shares can be allotted and the application
money has to be returned to the applicants. For this, the entry will be as follows:
Share Application and Allotment A/c Dr. (With the application money
To Bank received now refunded)
(iv) In actual practice, the cash transactions are not journalised but the same have to be entered in the cash
book. The entry in the Cash Book will be as follows:
Cash Book (Bank Columns)
Dr. Cr.
To Share Application and By Share Application and

Allotment A/c
Allotment A/c XXX XXX
(Refund of application money
(Application money on..... shares @
on......... shares @ `........ per
`...................per share)
share)
Example: A Ltd. issued 10,000 equity shares of ` 10 each payable in full on application. The company
received application for 10,000 shares. Applications were accepted in full.
Journal Entries
Particulars Dr. Cr.
Bank Dr. 1,00,000
To Equity Share Application and Allotment A/c 1,00,000
(Application money on 10,000 equity shares @ `10
per share)
Equity Share Application and Allotment A/c Dr. 1,00,000
To Equity Share Capital A/c 1,00,000
(Allotment of 10,000 equity shares of ` 10 each)
(b) When shares are issued at par and the amount is payable in installments:
When shares are not payable in a lump sum, they can be called in a number of installments. After allotment,
whenever the need arises, the directors may demand further money from the shareholders towards payment
of the value of shares taken up by them. Such demands are termed as calls. The different calls are
distinguished from each other by their serial numbers, i.e. first call, second call, third call and so on. The last
installment is also termed the final call along with the number of the last call.
– First installment is called ‘application money’
– Second installment is called ‘allotment money’
– Third installment is called ‘first call money’ and
– The last installment is called ‘final call money’.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
(i) On receipt of application money
Bank Dr. (with the amount received
To Share Application Account on application)
(Being the application money received in respect
of...... shares @ `.........per share)
(ii) On allotment of shares

Share Application Account Dr. (with the amount of application
To Share Capital Account money on allotted shares)
266 FP-FA&A
(Being the application money on allotted shares
now transferred to share capital account)
(iii) On refund of application money on rejected applications

Share Application Account Dr. (with the amount actually repaid)
To Bank
(Being application money on ____ shares refunded)
(iv) On making the allotment money (second installment) due

Share Allotment Account Dr. (with the amount due on
To Share Capital Account allotment)
(Being the allotment money due in respect of
allotment of........ shares @ `....... each)
(v) On receipt of allotment money is received the following journal entry is made
Bank Dr. (with the actual amount
To Share Allotment Account received as allotment money)
(Being the amount received on.......shares @
`........ each)
(vi) On making the first call

Share First Call Account Dr. (with the amount due
To Share Capital Account on first call)
(Being the amount due on first call @ `.....
per share on......shares)
(vii) On receipt of first call money

Bank Dr. (with the amount received
To Share First Call Account on first call)
(Being the amount received in respect of first
call @ `..... per share on......shares)
(viii) When second call is made

Share Second Call Account Dr. (with the amount due on
To Share Capital Account second call)
(Being the amount due on second call
@ `.... per share on.... shares)
(ix) On receipt of second call money:

Bank Dr. (With the amount actually
To Share Second Call Account received on second call)
(Being the amount received in respect of second
call @ `.......... per share on.............. shares)
(x) When the final call is made:

Share Final Call Account Dr. (with the amount due on
To Share Capital Account final call)
(Being the amount due on final call @ `................
per share on........shares)
(xi) On receipt of final call money:
Bank Dr. (with the amount actually
To Share Final Call Account received on final call)
(Being the amount received in respect of final call
@ `................ per share on.................. shares)
Issue of Shares at a Premium

The shares of many successful companies which offer attractive rates of dividend on their existing
capitals fetch a higher price than their face value in the market. When shares are issued at a price higher
than the face value, they are said to be issued at a premium. Thus, the excess of issue price over the face
value is the amount of premium. For example, if a share of ` 10 is issued at ` 12, ` (12 – 10) = ` 2 is the
premium.
The magnitude of the premium depends on the intensity of demand for such shares and the existing money
market conditions. According to the SEBI guidelines a new company set up by entrepreneurs without a track
record can issue capital to public only at par.
The premium on issue of shares must be treated as capital receipt. The Companies Act requires that when a
company issues shares at a premium whether for cash or otherwise, a sum equal to the aggregate amount of
the premium collected on shares must be credited to a separate account called “Securities Premium
Account”. Securities Premium Account must be shown separately on the liabilities side of the balance sheet
under the head “Reserves & Surplus”.
The premium is usually payable with the installment due on allotment. In such a case, the amount of premium
included in the allotment money should be segregated and credited direct to the Securities Premium Account.
However, it can be charged with share application money or partly with share application money and partly at
the time of allotment of shares also by some companies. It may be included in call money also.
JOURNAL ENTRY
When allotment money becomes due:
Share Allotment A/c Dr. (with the money due on allotment
including premium)
To Securities Premium A/c (with the premium amount)
To Share Capital A/c (with the share allotment amount)
(Being allotment money due on shares
issued at premium)
Issue of Shares at a Discount

When shares are issued at a price lower than the face value, they are said to be issued at a discount. Thus,
the excess of the face value over the issue price is the amount of discount. For example, if a share of ` 10 is
issued at ` 9 then ` (10 – 9) =` 1 is the discount. The company cannot issue shares at a discount if:
– it is a new company; or
 – it is a new class of shares even though of an old company.
The discount on issue of shares must be treated as a loss of capital nature and debited to a separate
account called ‘Discount on Issue of Shares Account’. Until it is written off, it must be distinctly shown on the
assets side of the Balance Sheet under the head “Miscellaneous Expenditure”. Though there is no legal
obligation on the part of the company to write off such discount, a sound business policy demands that since
it is not represented by value, it should be written off gradually out of profits over a reasonable number of
years.
268 FP-FA&A
In the absence of any instructions to the contrary, discount on the issue of shares is generally recorded at the
time of allotment. Whenever shares are issued at a discount, Share Allotment Account is debited only with the
net amount due and the discount allowed is debited to ‘Discount on Issue of Shares Account", the total being
credited to Share Capital Account.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
1. When allotment money becomes due:
Share Allotment A/c Dr. (with the amount due)
Discount on Issue of Shares A/c Dr. (with the discount allowed)
To Share Capital A/c (with the total amount)
2. When some portion of discount is written off:
Profit and Loss A/c Dr. (with the amount written off)
To Discount of Issue of Shares A/c
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. When shares are issued at a price higher than the face value, they are
said to be issued at _____.
2. ____ means the appropriation of a certain number of shares to an
applicant in response to his application.
3. When shares are issued at a price lower than the face value, they are
said to be issued at ________.
Illustration 1:
P Ltd. was registered with an authorised capital of ` 10,00,000 divided into 1,00,000 equity shares of ` 10
each out of which 50,000 equity shares were offered to the public for subscription. The shares were payable
as under:
` 3 per share on application
` 2 per share on allotment
` 2 per share on 1st call
` 3 per share on 2nd and final call
The shares were fully subscribed for and the money was duly received.
Show the journal and cash book entries.
Solution:
In the books of P Ltd.
Journal Entries
Date Particulars Debit Credit
(`) (`)
Equity Share Application A/c Dr. 1,50,000
Equity Share Allotment A/c Dr. 1,00,000
(Being capitalization of application money @ ` 3 per share
and allotment money due on 50,000 equity shares
transferred as per Boards resolution dated.....)
Date Particulars ` `
Equity Share First Call A/c Dr. 1,00,000
(Being the first call money on 50,000 equity shares @ `2 per
share due as per Board’s resolution dated.....)
Equity Share Second & Final Call A/c Dr. 1,50,000
(Being the second and final call money due on 50,000 Equity
Shares @ 3 per share as per Board’s resolution dated.....)

Dr. Cr.
To Equity Share Application A/c 1,50,000 By Balance c/d 5,00,000
To Equity Share Allotment A/c 1,00,000
To Equity Share First Call A/c 1,00,000
To Equity Share Second & Final 1,50,000
Call A/c
5,00,000 5,00,000
Illustration 2:
Wonder Ltd. issued 10,000, 12% Preference Shares of ` 100 each at a premium of ` 10 per share payable as
follows:
On Application ` 30
On Allotment ` 30 (including premium)
On First Call ` 25
On Final Call ` 25
Applications were received for 12,000 shares and the directors allotted 10,000 shares and rejected applications
for 2,000 shares and the money received thereon was refunded.
The allotment money was duly received while the first call money was received on 9,000 shares and the final
call money on 8,000 shares.
Show the cash book and journal entries and prepare the balance sheet of the company.
Solution:
In the books of Wonder Ltd.
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
12% Preference Share Application and Allotment A/c Dr. 6,00,000
To 9% Preference Share Capital A/c 5,00,000
To Securities Premium A/c 1,00,000
(Capitalisation of application money @ ` 30 per share and
allotment money due @ ` 30 per share shares including ` 10
as premium on 10,000, 12% preference as per Board’s
resolution dated.....)_______________________________ _
270 FP-FA&A
12% Preference Share First Call A/c Dr. 2,50,000
(First call money due @ ` 25 per share on 10,000, 12%
Preference Shares as per Board’s resolution dated.......)
Calls-in-Arrear A/c Dr. 25,000
To 12% Preference Share First Call A/c 25,000
(First call money due on 1,000, 12% Pref. Shares @ ` 25 per
share transferred to Call-in-Arrear A/c)
12% Preference Share Final Call A/c Dr. 2,50,000
2,50,000
(Final call money due @ ` 25 per share on 10,000, 12% Pref.
shares as per Board’s resolution dated...)
To 12% Preference Share Final Call A/c 50,000
(Final call money due on 2,000, 12% Pref. Shares @ ` 25 per
share transferred to Calls-in-Arrear A/c)

Dr. Cr.
To 12% Preference Share By 12% Preference Share
Application and Allotment 3,60,000 Application and Allotment
A/c A/c 60,000
(Application money on 12,000, (Refund of Application money
12% Pref. Shares @ ` 30 per on 2000, 12% Pref. Shares @
share) ` 30 per share)
To 12% Preference Share By Balance c/d 10,25,000
Application and Allotment A/c 3,00,000
(Allotment money @ ` 30 per
share on 10,000, 12% preference
shares)
To12% Preference Share First
Call A/c 2,25,000
(First call money @ ` 25 per
share on 9,000, 12% Pref.
Shares)
To 12% Preference Share
Final Call A/c 2,00,000
(Final call money @ ` 25 per
share on 8,000, 12% Pref.
shares)
10,85,000 10,85,000
Balance Sheet of Wonder Ltd.
as at ___________
Authorised Capital ____XXX Current Assets, Loans and
Advances
Issued, Subscribed and Paid Up A. Current Assets
10,000 12% Preference Shares of Cash at Bank 10,25,000
` 100 each fully called up 10,00,000
Less: Calls in arrear 75,000
9,25,000
Reserves and Surplus:
Securities premium Account 1,00,000
10,25,000 10,25,000
Illustration 3:
Elegant Ltd. issued 25,000 equity shares of ` 10 each at a discount of 10% payable as follows:
On Application ` 3.00 per share
On Allotment ` 1.00 per share
On First Call ` 2.50 per share
On Final Call ` 2.50 per share
Applications were received for 30,000 shares and the directors allotted 25,000 shares and refunded the excess
application money for 5,000 shares.
The allotment money was duly received on all the shares. One shareholder holding 1,000 shares did not pay
the first call money while another shareholder holding 200 shares paid the final call money along with the first
call money. The company did not make the final call.
Show the Cash book, Journal entries and prepare the Balance sheet of the company.
Solution:
Dr. Cr.
To Equity Share Application A/c 90,000 By Equity Share Application A/c 15,000
(Application money on 30,000 (Refund of Application money
Equity Shares @ ` 3 per share) on 5,000 Equity Shares @ ` 3
per share)
To Equity Share Allotment A/c 25,000 By Balance c/d 1,60,500
(Allotment money on 25,000
Equity Shares @ ` 1 per share)
To Equity Share First Call A/c 60,000
(First call money on 24,000
Equity Shares @ ` 2.5 per share)
To Calls in Advance 500
1,75,500 175,500
272 FP-FA&A
In the books of Elegant Ltd.
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
Equity Share Application A/c Dr. 75,000
Equity Share Allotment A/c Dr. 25,000
Discount on Issue of Shares A/c Dr. 25,000
(Capitalisation of application money @ ` 3 per share and
allotment money due @ Re. 1 per share excluding discount @
Re. 1 per share on allotment of 25,000 equity shares of ` 10
each at a discount of 10% as per Board’s resolution dated .....)
Equity share First Call A/c Dr. 62,500
To Equity Share Capital A/c 62,500
(First call due on 25,000 shares ` 2.50 per share as per
Board’s resolution dated...)
(First call due on 1,000 shares ` 2.50 per share transferred to
Calls-in-Arrear A/c)
Balance Sheet of Elegant Ltd.
as at ___________
Authorised Capital ____XXX Current Assets, Loans and
Issued, Subscribed Capital Advances
25,000 Equity Shares of ` 10 each 2,50,000 A. Current Assets
Paid up Capital Cash at Bank 1,60,500
25,000 Equity Shares of ` 10 Miscellaneous Expenditure
each, `7.5 per share called up 1,87,500 Discount on issue of shares 25,000
Less: Calls in arrear 2,500
1,85,000
Add: Calls in advance 500
1,85,500 1,85,500
UNDER-SUBSCRIPTION OF SHARES
In actual practice, it rarely happens that the number of shares applied for is exactly equal to the number of
shares offered to public for subscription. If the number of shares applied for is less than the number of shares
issued the shares are said to be undersubscribed. When an issue is under-subscribed, entries are made on the
basis of number of shares applied for, provided the minimum subscription is raised and the company proceeds
to allot the shares.
OVER-SUBSCRIPTION OF SHARES
When the number of shares applied for exceeds the number of shares issued, the shares are said to be over-
subscribed. In such situation, the directors allot shares on some reasonable basis because the company can
allot only that number of shares actually offered for subscription. Moreover, as per the guidelines issued by
SEBI, the company cannot reject out-rightly any application for shares unless it has incomplete information or
absence of signature(s) or insufficient application money and so on. In short, the following procedure is
adopted:
(i) Total rejection of some applications;
(ii) Acceptance of some applications in full; and
(iii) Allotment to the remaining applicants on pro-rata basis.
The shares should be issued in tradable lot. In case of pro-rata allotment, no applicant for shares is refused
and no applicant is allotted the shares in full. Each applicant receives the shares in some proportion. In such
cases, the excess amount of application money (i.e. overpaid amount) is not refunded but retained and treated
as a payment towards allotment money. The following journal entry is made to transfer excess application
money to allotment account.
Share Application A/c Dr. (with the excess application

To Share Allotment A/c money)
(Being the surplus application money transferred
to share allotment account)
Surplus money exceeding that due on allotment should be refunded to the allottees. However, the company
may transfer this to Calls-in-Advance Account if:
(i) Acceptance of calls in advance is permitted by the Company’s Articles.
(ii) The consent of the applicant has been taken either by a separate letter or by inserting a clause in the
company’s prospectus.
The company can retain the calls in advance at the most so much amount as is sufficient make the allotted
shares fully paid up ultimately.
The journal entry will be as follows:
Share Application A/c Dr. (with the excess application

To Calls-in-Advance A/c money left over the amount
(Being the surplus application money transferred due on application and
to Calls-in-Advance Account) allotment)
CALLS-IN-ADVANCE AND INTEREST ON CALLS-IN-ADVANCE

If authorised by the articles, a company may receive from a shareholder the amount remaining unpaid on
shares, even though the amount has not been called up. This is known as calls-in-advance. It is a debt of a
company until the calls are made and the amount already paid is adjusted. Calls-in-advance may also arise
when the number of shares allotted to a person is much smaller than the number applied for and the terms of
issue permit the company to retain the amount received in excess of application and allotment money. Of
course, the company can retain only so much as is required to make the allotted shares fully paid ultimately.
When calls are made, the calls-in-advance account is ultimately closed by transfer to the relevant call accounts.
It is noted that the money received on calls-in-advance does not become part of share capital. It is shown under
a separate heading, namely ‘calls-in-advance’ on the liabilities side. No dividend is paid on calls-in-advance.
Accounting Treatment
(i) On receipt of call money in advance:
Bank Dr. (with the amount of call
To Call-in-Advance A/c money received in advance)
(Being the calls received in advance)
(ii) As and when calls are made:
Calls-in-Advance A/c Dr. (with the amount adjusted on
To Relevant Call A/c relevant call becoming due)
274 FP-FA&A
The amount received as calls-in-advance is a debt of the company, the company is liable to pay interest on the
amount of Calls-in-Advance from the date of receipt of the amount till the date when the call is due for
payment. Generally the Articles of the company specify the rate at which interest is payable. If the articles do
not contain such rate, Table A will be applicable which leaves the matter to the Board of directors subject to a
maximum rate of 6% p.a.
It is to be noted that the interest payable on Calls-in- Advance is a charge against the profits of the company.
As such, Interest on Calls-in-Advance must be paid even when no profit is earned by the company.
Accounting Treatment
(i) If Interest on Calls-in-Advance is paid in cash -
Interest on Calls-in-Advance A/c Dr. (with the amount of
To Bank interest paid)
(Interest on Calls-in-Advance paid @ .....% p.a. on
`........... for............ months)
(ii) If interest on Calls-in-Advance is not paid in cash -
Interest on Calls-in-Advance A/c Dr. (with the amount of
To Sundry Shareholders A/c interest payable)
(iii) At the end of the year, when interest on Calls-in-Advance is transferred to Profit and Loss A/c -
Profit and Loss A/c Dr. (with the amount of interest)
To Interest on Calls-in-Advance A/c
Note: The liability to sundry shareholders is to be treated as outstanding liability and should be shown under
the head “Current Liabilities” in the balance sheet.
Illustration 4:
Newlook Ltd. issued, 1,00,000 Equity Shares of ` 10 each payable as follows:
On Application (On 1st March, 2011) `4
On Allotment (On 1st April, 2011) `1
On First Call (On 1st August, 2011) `3
On Final Call (On 1st October, 2011) `2
Application were received for 2,60,000 shares. Of these 10,000 shares were in disorder; 40,000 shares in lots of
100 shares; 1,20,000 shares in lots of exceeding 100 but less than 500 shares; 60,000 shares in lots of exceeding
500 but less than 1,000 shares and the balance in lots of exceeding 1,000 shares.
Allotment was made as follows:
Application for the 10,000 shares in disorder were rejected.
Application for 100 shares in full, i.e. 100% 40,000

Application over 100 shares but not exceeding 500 shares - 40% 48,000
Application over 500 shares but not exceeding 1,000 shares - 15% 9,000
Applications over 1,000 shares - 10% 3,000
Money received in excess on shares partially allotted was retained to the extent possible. Show the cash book
and journal entries assuming that all the installments were duly received and interest was paid by the directors
on calls-in-advance @ 6% per annum on 1st October, 2011.
Solution:
Dr. Cash Book (Bank Column) Cr.

1.3.2011 To Equity Share 1.4.2011 By Equity Share
Application A/c 10,40,000 Application A/c 2,80,000
(application (refund of application
money @ ` 4 money)
per share)
1.4.2011 To Equity share 1.10.2011 By Interest on Call
Allotment A/c 40,000 in Advance A/c 7,200
(balance of (interest @ 6% on
allotment money) ` 1,80,000 for 4
1.8.2011 To Equity Share months = 3,600 and
1st Call A/c 1,20,000 on ` 1,20,000 for 6
(balance of share months - ` 3,600)
1st call money) 1.10.2011 By Balance c/d 9,92,800
1.10.2011 To Equity Share
Final A/c 80,000 ________
12,80,000 12,80,000
Journal Entries
Date Particulars Dr. (`) (Cr. (`)
1.4.2011 Equity Share Application A/c Dr. 4,00,000
(Being the application money on 1,00,000 shares transferred
to share capital account)
1.4.2011 Equity Share Allotment A/c Dr. 1,00,000
(Being the allotment money due in respect of 1,00,000 equity
shares @ Re. 1 per share)
1.4.2011 Share Application A/c Dr. 3,60,000
To Share Allotment A/c 60,000
To Calls in Advance A/c 3,00,000
(Being the transfer of surplus application money received on
60,000 shares)
1.8.2011 Equity Share 1st Call A/c Dr. 3,00,000
(Being the 1st call money due on 1,00,000 equity shares @
` 3 per share)
1.8.2011 Calls in Advance A/c Dr. 1,80,000
To Equity Share 1st Call A/c 1,80,000
(Being the amount transferred from calls in advance
account)
276 FP-FA&A
Date Particulars Dr. (`) (Cr. (`)
1.10.2011 Equity Share Final Call A/c Dr. 2,00,000
(Being the final call money due on 1,00,000 equity share @
` 2 per share)
1.10.2011 Calls-in-Advance A/c Dr. 1,20,000
To Equity Share Final Call A/c 1,20,000
(Being the amount transferred from calls-in-advance
account)
Working Note
Statement showing the adjustment of Application Money and
Calls in Advance Money
Shares Shares Amount Amount Balance of Amount Amount Surplus to

applied alllotted received due on appli-cation due on received on be trans-
on appli- appli- money allotment allotment ferred to
calls-in-
cations cations advance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
` ` ` ` ` `
10,000 Nil 40,000 Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
40,000 40,000 1,60,000 1,60,000 Nil 40,000 40,000 Nil
1,20,000 48,000 4,80,000 1,92,000 2,88,000 48,000 Nil 2,40,000
60,000 9,000 2,40,000 36,000 2,04,000 9,000 Nil 45,000
30,000 3,000 1,20,000 12,000 1,08,000 3,000 Nil 15,000
2,60,000 1,00,000 10,40,000 4,00,000 6,00,000 1,00,000 40,000 3,00,000
Amount to Amount Calls-in- Amount Surplus Amount Calls-in- Amount

be st Advance to payable on remaining due on final advance to payable on
refunded due to 1 be adjusted
st
1 call in calls in call be adjusted final call
st
call against 1 advance against
call final call
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
` ` ` ` ` ` ` `
40,000 Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
Nil 1,20,000 Nil 1,20,000 Nil 80,000 Nil 80,000
Nil 1,44,000 1,44,000 Nil 96,000 96,000 96,000 Nil
1,50,000 27,000 27,000 Nil 18,000 18,000 18,000 Nil
90,000 9,000 9,000 Nil 6,000 6,000 6,000 Nil
2,80,000 3,00,000 1,80,000 1,20,000 1,20,000 2,00,000 1,20,000 80,000

CALLS IN ARREAR AND INTEREST ON CALLS IN ARREAR
When calls are made upon shares allotted, the shareholders holding the shares are bound to pay the call
money within the date fixed for such payment. If a shareholder makes a default in sending the call money
within the appointed date, the amount thus failed is called Calls-in-Arrear.
The interest on Calls-in-Arrear is recoverable according to the provisions in this regard in Articles of
the company. But if the Articles are silent, Table ‘A’ shall be applicable which prescribes that if a sum
called in respect of shares is not paid before or on the day appointed for payment, the person who failed to
pay shall pay thereof from the day appointed for payment to the time of actual payment at a rate not
exceeding 5% per annum. However, the directors have the right to waive the payment of interest on
Calls-in-Arrear. The interest on Calls-on-Arrear Account is transferred to the Profit and Loss Account at the end
of the year.
Journal Entries
(i) When call money is in arrear:
Calls-in-Arrear A/c Dr. (with the amount-failed by
To Relevant Call A/c the shareholders)
(ii) On receipt of amount of Calls-in-Arrear with interest, on a subsequent date:

Bank Dr. (with the amount received)
To Calls-in-Arrears A/c
Illustration 5:
On 1st January, 2011, New Ventures Ltd. issued 1,00,000 equity shares of `10 each payable as follows:
On application `3
On allotment `2
On 1st Call ` 2 (Payable after 2 months, from the
date of allotment)
On Final Call ` 3 (Payable after 2 months from the
date of 1st call)
Applications were received on 15th January, 2011 for 1,20,000 shares and allotment was made on 1st
February, 2011. Applicants for 50,000 shares were allotted in full, those for 60,000 shares were allotted 50,000
shares and applications for 10,000 shares were rejected.
Balance of amount due on allotment was received on 15th February. The calls were duly made on 1st March,
2011 and 1st April, 2011 respectively. One shareholder did not pay the 1st Call money on 3,000 shares which
he paid with the final call together with interest at 5% p.a. Another shareholder holding 2,000 share did not pay
the final call money till end of the accounting year which ends on 30th June. Show the Cash Book and Journal
Entries.
278 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Journal Entries
Date Particulars Dr. (`) Cr.( `)

1.2.2011 Equity Share Application A/c Dr. 3,00,000
(Being the transfer of application money on 1,00,000 shares
@ ` 3 per share transferred to share capital account)
1.2.2011 Equity Share Allotment A/c Dr. 2,00,000

(Being the amount due on allotment of 10,00,000 shares @ ` 1
per share)
1.2.2011 Equity Share Application A/c Dr. 30,000

To Share Allotment A/c 30,000
(Being the transfer of excess application money)
1.3.2011 Equity Share Ist Call A/c Dr. 2,00,000

(Being the Ist call amount due on 1,00,000 shares @ ` 2 per
share)
1.4.2011 Calls-in-Arrear A/c Dr. 6,000

To Equity Share Ist Call A/c 6,000
(Being the transfer of Ist call money on 3,000 equity shares
@ ` 2 per share)
1.4.2011 Equity Share Final Call A/c Dr. 3,00,000

(Being the final call amount due on 1,00,000 shares @ ` 3
per share)
1.5.2011 Calls-in-Arrear A/c Dr. 6,000

To Equity Share Final Call A/c 6,000
(Being the transfer of final call money on 2,000 equity shares
@ `3 per share)
30.6.2011 Sundry Shareholders A/c Dr. 50

To Interest on Calls-in-Arrears A/c 50
(Being the interest due on ` 6,000 @5% for two months)
Date Pariculars ` Date Particulars `

15.1.2011 To Equity Share 1.2.2011 By Equity Share
Application A/c 3,60,000 Application A/c 30,000
(application money (refund of application
@ ` 3 per share money @ ` 3 per
2,20,000 shares) share on 10,000
shares rejected)
Allotment A/c 1,70,000 1.5.2011 By Balance c/d 9,94,025
(balance of allot-
ment money on
` 1,00,000 shares)
1st Call A/c 1,94,000
(1st call money
on 97,000 shares)
Final A/c 2,94,000
(final call money
on 98,000 shares)
1.5.2011 To Calls-in-Arrear A/c 6,000
(arrears of 1st call
money @ ` 2
per share on
3,000 shares)
1.5.2011 To Interest on Calls-
in-Arrear A/c 25
(interest on
` 6,000
for one month
@ 5% p.a.) ________ ________
10,24,025 10,24,025
ISSUE OF SHARES FOR CONSIDERATION OTHER THAN CASH

A company may also issue shares for consideration other than cash to vendors who sell some assets to the
company or to the promoters for their services. When shares are so issued, the Companies Act requires that
the same must be clearly stated in the balance sheet and must be distinguished from the issue made for cash.
ISSUE OF SHARES TO VENDORS

A company may purchase assets from the vendors and instead of paying the vendors cash, may settle the
purchase price by issuing fully paid shares of the company. This type of issue of shares to the vendors is called
issue of shares for consideration other than cash. Such shares may be issued by the vendors either (i) at par,
or (ii) at a premium, or (iii) at a discount.
280 FP-FA&A
Journal Entries
(i) When assets are acquired from the vendors -
Sundry Assets A/c (individually) Dr. (with the purchase price
To Vendors payable for the assets
acquired)
(ii) When fully paid shares are issued to vendors at par -
Vendors Dr. (with the nominal value
To Share Capital A/c of the shares allotted)
(iii) When fully paid shares are issued to vendors at a premium -
Vendors Dr. (with the purchase price)
To Share Capital A/c (with the nominal value of
the shares allotted)
To Securities Premium A/c (with the amount of premium)
(iv) When fully paid shares are issued to vendors at a discount -
Vendors Dr. (with the purchase price)
Discount on Issue of Shares A/c Dr. (with the discount allowed)
To Share Capital A/c (with the total)
Illustration 6:
Rocket Ltd. purchased the business of Comet Ltd. for ` 2,70,000 payable in fully paid shares. Rocket Ltd.
allotted equity shares of ` 10 each fully paid in satisfaction of the claim by Comet Ltd. Show the necessary
journal entries in the books of Rocket Ltd. assuming that:
(a) Such shares are issued at par,
(b) Such shares are issued at premium of 20% and
(c) Such shares are issued at a discount of 10%.
Solution:
Journal Entries

Sundry Assets Dr. 2,70,000
To Comet Ltd. 2,70,000
(Purchase of assets from Comet Ltd. as per agreement
dated.....)
(a) If shares are issued at par
Comet Ltd. Dr. 2,70,000
(Allotment of 27,000 equity shares of ` 10 each to vendors
as fully paid-up for consideration other than cash as per
(b) If shares are issued at a premium of 20%
To Securities Premium A/c 45,000
(Allotment of 22,500 equity shares of ` 10 each at a
premium of `2 per share to vendors as fully paid-up for
consideration other than cash as per Board’s resolution
dated.....)
(c) If shares are issued at a discount of 10%
Discount on Issue of Shares A/c Dr. 30,000
(Allotment of 30,000 equity shares of ` 10 each at a discount
of Re. 1 per share to vendor as fully paid-up for
consideration other than cash as per Board’s resolution
dated.....)
Working Notes:
1. When shares are issued at a premium of 20%
 20 
Issue price per share = ` 10   = ` 12
 100 
No. of shares to be allotted = ` 2, 70, 000  ` 22, 500

`12
2. When shares are issued at a discount of 10%
 10 
Issue price per share = ` 10  = ` 9
 100 
No. of shares to be allotted = ` 2, 70, 000  ` 30, 000

`9
ISSUE OF SHARES TO PROMOTERS

A company may allot fully paid shares to promoters or any other party for the services rendered by them by
way of furnishing technical information, engineering services, plant layout, drawing and designing, etc. without
payment. This type of issue of shares to promoters is called issue of shares for consideration other than cash.
As the amount paid to promoters for services rendered by them is supposed to be utilised by the company over
a long period of time, such expenditure should be treated as capital expenditure and debited to Goodwill
Account. The accounting entry in such a case will be as follows:
Goodwill A/c Dr. (with the nominal value of

To Share Capital A/c the shares allotted.)
Illustration 7:
Bright Ltd. was registered with a share capital of ` 10,00,000 in equity shares of ` 10 each. The company
acquired factory building worth ` 1,00,000 and plant and machinery worth ` 80,000 from Delite Ltd. and issued
18,000 equity shares of ` 10 each to the vendors as fully paid-up. The directors also decided to allot 2,000
equity shares credited as full paid to the promoters for their services. Further capital was issued to the public
for cash to the extent of ` 3,00,000 payable in full with the application. All the shares were taken up by the
public and fully paid for. Show the necessary journal entries and the balance sheet.
282 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Journal Entries
Factory Building A/c Dr. 1,00,000
Plant and Machinery A/c Dr. 80,000
To Delite Ltd. 1,80,000
(Purchase of assets from Delite Ltd. as per agreement dated.....)
Delite Ltd. Dr. 1,80,000
(Allotment of 18,000 equity shares of ` 10 each to vendors as fully paid-
up for consideration other than cash as per Board’s resolutions dated.....)
Goodwill A/c Dr. 20,000
(Allotment of 2,000 equity shares of ` 10 each to promoters as fully paid-
up for consideration other than cash as per Board’s Resolution dated.....)
Bank Dr. 3,00,000
To Equity Share Application and Allotment A/c 3,00,000
(Application money on 30,000 equity shares ` 10 each per share)
(Allotment of 30,000 equity shares of ` 10 each as fully paid as per
Board’s resolution dated.....)
Balance Sheet of Bright Ltd., as at.....
Share Capital: Fixed Assets:

Authorised Capital - 1,00,000 Goodwill 20,000
equity shares of ` 10 each 10,00,000 Factory Building 1,00,000
Issued, Subscribed and Paid-up Plant and Machinery 80,000
Capital - 50,000 equity shares Current Assets,
of ` 10 each, fully paid-up 5,00,000 Loans & Advances
(Of the above shares, 20,000 A. Current Assets
shares have been issued to Cash at Bank 3,00,000
vendors and promoters for B. Loans and Advances Nil
consideration other than cash) _______ _______
5,00,000 5,00,000
FORFEITURE OF SHARES
If a shareholder fails to pay the allotment money and/or calls made on him, his shares are liable to be
forfeited. Forfeiture of shares may be said to be the compulsory termination of membership by way of penalty
for non-payment of allotment and/or any call money.
The Companies Act does not contain any specific provisions regarding forfeiture. The directors must follow
certain procedure for forfeiting the shares. They have to give notice to the defaulting shareholder calling upon
him to pay the amount due from him together with interest before a specified date (not being earlier than the
expiry of fourteen days from the date of service of the notice). This notice must also state that if the
shareholder fails to pay the amount along with interest due within the specified date, the shares will be
forfeited. If the payment is not received within the specified time, the directors meet to consider the forfeiture
and they can proceed to forfeit the shares. The directors must pass a resolution for forfeiting the shares at a
duly constituted meeting of the Board of Directors and the defaulting shareholder should be informed about
the forfeiture of his shares.
The effect of forfeiture of shares is that the defaulting shareholder loses all his rights in the shares and ceases
to be a member. The name of the shareholder is removed from the Register of Members and the amount
already paid by him is forfeited. He is not entitled in future to dividends and the rights of membership.
However, the directors have the right to cancel such forfeiture before the forfeiture shares are re-issued.
Forfeited shares account is to be shown in the balance sheet by way of addition to the paid-up share capital
on the ‘liabilities’ side, until the concerned shares are reissued.
Accounting Entries on Forfeitures of Shares
Issued at Par
Issued at A Premium
Issued at A Discount
Forfeiture of Shares Issued at Par
JOURNAL ENTRIES
The forfeiture of shares can be recorded in two ways:
1. Where the unpaid calls have already been transferred to Calls-in-Arrear A/c and the respective
call accounts have been closed:
Share Capital A/c Dr. (with the amount of called up value of shares forfeited i.e.
no. of shares forfeited x the called up value per share.
To Shares Forfeited A/c with the amount already paid-up by the shareholders on
the shares forfeited.)
To Calls-in-Arrear A/c (with the amount of unpaid calls.)
OR
2. Where the unpaid calls have not been transferred to Calls-in-Arrear A/c and the respective call
accounts are showing balances representing unpaid amounts:
Share Capital A/c Dr. (with the amount of called up value of shares forfeited i.e.,
no. of shares forfeited x the called up value per share.)
To Shares Forfeited A/c (with the amount already paid up by the shareholders on
the shares forfeited.)
To Share Allotment A/c (with the amount failed on allotment, if any.)
To Share First Call A/c (with the amount failed on first call, if any.)
To Share Final Call A/c (with the amount failed on final call, if any.)
284 FP-FA&A
Forfeiture of Shares Issued at a Premium
Case 1: Where shares to be forfeited were issued at a premium and the premium money remained unpaid:
In this case the credit already given to the ‘Securities Premium A/c’ will be cancelled at the time of forfeiture of
the shares by debiting “Securities Premium A/c”.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
Share Capital A/c Dr. (with the amount of called up value of
shares forfeited, i.e., no. of shares
forfeited x called up value per share
excluding premium).
Securities Premium A/c Dr. (with the amount of premium money
remaining unpaid on shares forfeited.)
To Shares Forfeited A/c (with the amount already paid by the
shareholders on the shares forfeited.)
To Calls-in-Arrear A/c (with the amount unpaid on calls.)
OR
shares forfeited, i.e., no. of shares
excluding premium.)
Securities Premium A/c Dr. (with the amount of premium money
remaining unpaid on shares forfeited.)
To Share Allotment A/c (with the amount failed on allotment, if
any.)
To Share First Call A/c (with the amount failed on first call, if
any.)
To Share Final Call A/c (with the amount failed on final call, if
any.)
Case 2: Where shares to be forfeited were issued at a premium and the premium money was duly received
on the shares to be forfeited:
In this case Securities Premium Account is already credited at the time of making call will not be cancelled at
the time of forfeiture of the shares. In such a case, the accounting entry on forfeiture will be the same as the
one passed in case of shares issued at par.
Forfeiture of Shares Issued at a Discount

If shares to be forfeited were issued at a discount, a proportionate amount of discount allowed on such shares
should be written off. Since discount on issue of shares, being a loss, is debited to “Discount on Issue of
Shares Account” at the time of issue of shares, it should be credited at the time of forfeiture of the shares. On
re-issue of such forfeited shares again, Discount on Issue of Shares Account is debited making the discount
on issue of shares proportionate to the shares actually issued. Thus, the position in respect of discount is
quite distinct from the position in respect of premium on issue of shares.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
shares forfeited, i.e., No. of shares
including discount.)
shareholders on the shares forfeited i.e.,
No. of shares forfeited x amount paid per
share.)
To Discount on Issue of Shares A/c (with the amount of discount allowed
previously on shares forfeited, i.e., No. of
shares forfeited x discount allowed per
share.)
To Calls-in-Arrear A/c (with the amount of unpaid calls i.e., No.
of shares forfeited x unpaid amount per
share.)
OR
shares forfeited, i.e., No. of shares
including discount.)
To Shares Forfeited A/c (with the amount of already paid by the
To Discount on Issue of Shares A/c (with the amount of discount allowed
previously on shares forfeited.)
To Respective Calls (with the amount unpaid on respective
calls, i.e., No. of shares forfeited x amount
due on respective call per share.)
RE-ISSUE OF FORFEITED SHARES

The Board of Directors can sell/ reissue or dispose of forfeited shares on such terms as it thinks fit. However,
the amount receivable on re-issue of such shares together with the amount already received from the
defaulting member, shall not, in any case, be less than the face value of the shares. Forfeited shares may be
re-issued at par, at a premium or even at a discount.
Re-Issue of Forfeited Shares - At Par

the forfeited shares can be re-issued at par. In such a case, the entire amount standing to the credit of Shares
Forfeited Account for those shares would be treated as net gain and transferred to Capital Reserve Account.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
1. On re-issue of shares:
Bank Dr. (with the amount received on reissue
To Share Capital A/c i.e. no. of shares re-issued x amount
received per share.)
286 FP-FA&A
2. On transfer of Shares Forfeited Account to Capital Reserve Account:

Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. (with the forfeited amount on shares
To Capital Reserve A/c re-issued.)
Re-Issue of Forfeited Shares - At a Premium

If forfeited shares are re-issued at a premium, the amount of such premium should be credited to Securities
Premium Account. In such a case also, the entire amount standing to the credit of Shares Forfeited Account
would be treated as net gain and transferred to Capital Reserve Account.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
Bank Dr. (with the total amount received on re-
issue.)
To Share Capital A/c (with nominal value or paid-up value of
shares.)
To Securities Premium A/c (with the premium amount received.)
2. On transfer of Shares Forfeited A/c to Capital Reserve A/c:
Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. (with the forfeited amount on shares

To Capital Reserve A/c re-issued)
Re-Issue of Forfeited Shares - At a Discount
If forfeited shares are re-issued at a discount, the amount of discount can, in no case, exceed the amount
credited to Shares Forfeited Account. Discount thus allowed on re-issue has to be debited to Shares Forfeited
Account. If the discount allowed on re-issue is less than the forfeited amount, there will be a surplus left in the
Shares Forfeited Account which will be treated as net gain on forfeiture. As this gain is in the nature of capital
profits, it should be transferred to Capital Reserve Account. Capital Reserve Account will appear on the
liabilities side of the balance sheet under the head “Reserves and Surplus”.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
Bank Dr. (with the amount received on re-issue.)
Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. (with the discount allowed on re-issue.)
To Share Capital A/c (with the total.)
2. On transfer of balance in Shares Forfeited Account, if any, to Capital Reserve Account:

Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. (with the net gain, if any, on shares
Re-Issue of Forfeited Shares - At a Discount - Which were Originally Issued at a Discount

On re-issue of forfeited shares which were originally issued at a discount, Discount on Issue of Share Account
should be reinstated with the proportionate amount to the shares re-issued so that the discount on issue of
shares may be proportionate to the shares issued. In such a case, net gain on re-issue should be calculated
after taking into account such discount.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
Bank Dr. (with the amount received on re-issue.)
Discount on Issue of Shares A/c Dr. (with the amount of discount originally
allowed.)
Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. (with the amount of short fall, if any.)
To Share Capital A/c (with the total.)
2. On transfer of balance in Share Forfeited A/c, if any, to Capital Reserve A/c:
Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. (with the net gain, if any on shares
Important Note: In case only a part of the forfeited shares are re-issued, only the
proportionate amount representing the net gain on the shares re-issued should be
transferred to Capital Reserve Account and the balance representing the amount received
on forfeited shares not yet re-issued should be left in the Shares Forfeited Account itself.
This amount should be shown as addition to the paid up capital on the liabilities side of the
balance sheet.
Illustration 8:
X Ltd. forfeited 1,000 equity shares of ` 10 each issued at par for non-payment of the first call of ` 2 per share
and the final call of ` 3 per share. Give journal entry for the forfeiture.
Solution:
In the books of X Ltd.
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
Equity Share Capital A/c (1,000 x `10)* Dr. 10,000
To Shares Forfeited A/c (1,000 x ` 5)* 10,000
To Calls-in-Arrear A/c (1,000 x ` 5)
(Forfeiture of 1,000 equity shares for non-payment of the first
call @ ` 2 per share and the final call @ ` 3 per share as per
Alternatively:
(Forfeiture of 1000 equity shares for non-payment of the first
call @ ` 2 per share and the final call @ ` 3 per share as per
Shown by way of explanation.

288 FP-FA&A
Illustration 9:
X Ltd. forfeited 1,500 equity shares of ` 10 each, issued at a premium of ` 5 per share for non-payment of
allotment money of ` 8 per share (including share premium ` 5 per share) the first call @ ` 2 per share and the
final call @ ` 3 per share. Give the journal entry for the forfeiture.
Solution
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
Securities Premium A/c (1,500 x `5)* Dr. 7,500
To Equity Share Allotment A/c 12,000
(Forfeiture of 1,500 equity shares of ` 10 each for non-

payment of allotment money @ ` 8 per share, including a
premium @ ` 5 per share, first call money @ ` 2 per share
and the final call money @ ` 3 per share as per Board’s
resolution dated...)
Illustration 10:
X Ltd. forfeited 1,500 equity shares of ` 10 each issued at a premium of ` 5 per share payable with the
allotment money, for non-payment of the first call money of ` 2 per share and the final call money of ` 3 per
share. Give journal entries.
Solution:
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
(Forfeiture of 1,500 equity shares of ` 10 each for non-

payment of the first call money @ ` 2 per share and the final
call money @ ` 3 per share as per Board’s resolution dated...)
Note: As the premium has already been received on these shares, Securities Premium Account will not be
debited.
Illustration 11:
X Ltd., forfeited 1,000 equity shares of ` 10 each, issued at a discount of 10% for non-payment of the first call
of ` 2 and the final call of ` 3 per share. Show the necessary journal entry.
Solution:
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
Equity Share Capital A/c (1,000 x `10) Dr. 10,000
To Shares Forfeited A/c (1,000 x ` 4) 4,000
To Discount on issue of shares (1,000 x `1) 1,000
To Equity Share First Call A/c (1,000 x ` 2) 2,000
To Equity Share Final Call A/c (1,000 x ` 3) 3,000
(Forfeiture of 1,000 equity shares of ` 10 each issued at 10%

discount for non-payment of the first call money @ ` 2 per
share and the final call money @ ` 3 per share as per Board’s
resolution dated...)
Illustration 12:
Give journal entries for the forfeiture and re-issue of shares in the following cases:
(a) P Ltd. forfeited 300 shares of ` 10 each, fully called up for non-payment of final call @ ` 4 per share.
These shares were subsequently re-issued by the company @ ` 10 per share as fully paid-up.
(b) Q Ltd. forfeited 300 shares of ` 10 each, fully called up for non-payment of final call @ ` 4 per share.
These shares were subsequently re-issued by the company @ ` 12 per share as fully paid-up.
(c) R Ltd. forfeited 200 shares of ` 10 each, ` 8 per share being called up on which a shareholder paid
application and allotment money @ ` 5 per share but did not pay the first call money @ ` 3 per share.
Of these forfeited shares, 150 shares were subsequently re-issued by the company as fully paid-up @
` 8 per share.
(d) S Ltd. forfeited 100 shares of ` 10 each, ` 8 per share having been called up, which were issued at a
discount of 10% for non-payment of first call money @ ` 3 per share. Of these forfeited shares, 80
shares were subsequently re-issued by the company @ ` 5 as ` 8 paid-up.
Solution:
(a) In the books of P Ltd.
Journal Entries

(`) (`)
Share Capital A/c (300 x `10) Dr. 3,000
To Shares Forfeited A/c (300 x ` 6) 1,800
To Share Final Call A/c (300 x ` 4) 1,200
(Forfeiture of 300 shares of ` 10 each for non-payment of the

final call money @ ` 4 per share as per Board’s resolution
dated...)
290 FP-FA&A
Bank Dr. 3,000
To Share Capital A/c (300 x `10) 3,000
(Re-issue of 300 forfeited shares of ` 10 each fully paid-up as
per Board’s resolution dated...)
Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. 1,800
To Capital Reserve A/c 1,800
(Transfer of profit on re-issue of forfeited shares to Capital
Reserve A/c)
(b) In the books of Q Ltd.
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
To Share Final Call A/c (300 x ` 4) 1,200
(Forfeiture of 300 shares of ` 10 each for non-payment of the

final call money @ ` 4 per share as per Board’s resolution
dated...)
Bank (300 x `12) Dr. 3,600
To Securities premium A/c (300 x ` 2) 600
(Re-issue of 300 forfeited shares of ` 10 each at a premium of
` 2 per share as per Board’s resolution dated...)
Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. 1,800
(Transfer of profit on re-issue of forfeited shares to Capital
Reserve A/c)
(c) In the books of R Ltd.
Journal Entries
Date Particulars Debit (`) Credit (`)
To Share First Call A/c (200 x ` 3) 600
(Forfeiture of 200 shares of ` 10 each, ` 8 being called up for
non-payment of the first call money @ ` 3 per share as per
Bank (150 x `8) Dr. 1,200
Shares Forfeited A/c (150 x `2) 300
(Re-issue of 150 forfeited shares of ` 10 each fully paid-up @
` 8 per share as per Board’s resolution dated...)
Date Particulars Debit (`) Credit (`)
Shares Forfeited A/c Dr. 450
To Capital Reserve A/c 450
(Transfer of capital profit proportionate to forfeited shares re-
issued i.e. on 150 shares to Capital Reserve A/c)
(d) In the books of S Ltd.
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
Share Capital A/c (100 x `8) Dr. 800
To Shares Forfeited A/c (100 x ` 4) 400
To Discount on issue of shares (100 x ` 1) 100
To Share First Call A/c (100 x `3) 300
(Forfeiture of 100 shares of ` 10 each, ` 8 being called up,
issued at a discount of Re. 1 per share for non-payment of
first call @ ` 8 per share as per Board’s resolution dated...)
Bank Dr. 400
Discount on Issue of Shares A/c Dr. 80
Share Forfeited A/c Dr. 160
To Share Capital A/c (300 x `10) 640
(Re-issue of 80 forfeited shares of ` 10 each, ` 8 being called
up originally issued at a discount of 10% for ` 5 per share
credited as ` 8 per share as per Board’s resolutions dated...)
(Transfer of capital profit proportionate to forfeited shares re-
issued, i.e., on 80 shares to Capital Reserve A/c)
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. A company forfeited 1,000 shares of ` 10 each held by Mr. X for non payment
of allotment money of ` 4 per share. Called up value is ` 9 what will be total
amount debited to share capital?
2. A company forfeited 2000 shares of ` 100 each for non payment of
final call of ` 20 per share. What will be the amount of share forfeiture account?
FORFEITURE AND RE-ISSUE OF SHARES ALLOTTED ON PRO-RATA BASIS IN CASE OF

OVER-SUBSCRIPTION
In case, the shares of a Company are over-subscribed, it is not possible for the company to satisfy the
demand of all the applicants. In such a case allotment may be made on pro-rata basis, i.e., proportionately.
For example, 10,000 shares are allotted pro-rata among the applicants for 12,000 shares. In this case, the
292 FP-FA&A
ratio between allotment of shares and application for shares will be 10,000: 12,000 or 5: 6, i.e., those applying
for every 6 shares will be allotted 5 shares.
If shares are allotted on pro-rata basis, the excess application money received on shares allotted will be
retained by the company and adjusted subsequently against allotment money and/or call money.
If such shares are subsequently forfeited for non-payment of allotment money and/or call money, the entries
will be the same, but it may involve some difficulty in calculation. In such a case, it is to be noted carefully that
if there is any excess amount received along with the application and it is adjusted against the allotment
money which is failed by the shareholder, such amount should be deducted from the amount due on allotment
to arrive at the net amount defaulted by the shareholder.
Illustration 13:
A limited company issued a prospectus inviting applications for 2,000 shares of ` 10 each at a premium of ` 2
per share payable as follows:
On Application -- `2
On Allotment -- ` 5 (including premium)
On First Call -- `3
On Second and Final Call -- `2
Applications were received for 3,000 shares and allotment was made pro-rata to the applicants of 2,400
shares. Money overpaid on applications was employed on account of sum due on allotment.
Ramesh, to whom 40 shares were allotted, failed to pay the allotment money and on his subsequent failure to
pay the first call, his shares were forfeited. Mohan, the holder of 60 shares failed to pay the two calls and his
shares were forfeited after the second and final call.
Of the shares forfeited, 80 shares were sold to Krishna credited as fully paid for ` 9 per share, the whole of
Ramesh’s share being included. Show journal and cash book entries and the Balance Sheet.
Solution:
Working Notes:
1. Ratio between allotment of shares and application for shares = 2,000: 2,400 = 5: 6,
2. Ramesh was allotted 40 shares.
Therefore, Ramesh must have applied for 40 x 6/5 = 48 shares.
3. Ramesh must have paid excess application money on (48 - 40) = 8
Excess applications @ ` 2 per share, i.e., 8 x ` 2 = ` 16 retained by the company for adjustment
against allotment money.
4. Allotment money due from Ramesh on 40 shares @ ` 5 per share = 40 x ` 5 = ` 200.
5. As the allotment money was failed by Ramesh against which excess money paid on application was
adjusted, the net amount failed by Ramesh on Allotment = ` (200 - 16) = ` 184.
6. As Mohan paid the allotment money and the excess amount paid by him along with the application had
already been adjusted, pro rata allotment in this case has no significance.
7. Amount to be transferred to Capital Reserve A/c from Shares Forfeited A/c has to be determined as
follows:
`
Amount forfeited on 40 shares held by Ramesh (48 x ` 2) 96
Amount forfeited on 60 shares held by Mohan (60 x ` 5) 300
Total amount credited to Shares Forfeited A/c 396
Less: Amount on 20 forfeited shares held by Mohan which are not yet re-issued
(20 x ` 5) 100
296
Less: Discount allowed @ ` 1 on 80 shares (80 x ` 1) 80
Net gain on 80 forfeited shares which are reissued to ___
be transferred to Capital Reserve 216

To Share application A/c 6,000 By Share Application A/c 1,200
(Application money on 3000 (Refund of application
shares @ ` 2 per share) money on 600 shares
rejected @ ` 2 per share)
To Shares Allotment A/c 9,016 By Balance c/d 24,036
(Balance of allotment money
on 2,000 shares less amount
failed by Ramesh)
To Share First Call A/c 5,700
(First call money on 1900
shares, i.e., 2000 shares -
(40 + 60) shares @ ` 3
per share)
To Shares Final call A/c 3,700
(Final call money on 1900
shares, i.e., 1960 shares less
60 shares held by Mohan who
failed @ ` 2 per share)
To Share Capital A/c 720
(Amount received on re-issue
of 80 forfeited shares
@ ` 9 per share) ______ ______
25,236 25,236
To Balance b/d 24,026
Journal Entries
Share Application A/c Dr. 4,000
To Share Capital A/c 4,000
(Transfer of application money to share capital account as per
Board’s resolution dated…)
Share Allotment A/c Dr. 10,000
(Allotment of 2000 shares to the applicants for 2400 shares pro-rata
and allotment money due @ ` 5 per share including premium of
` 2 per share as per Board’s resolution dated…)
Share Application A/c Dr. 800
To Share Allotment A/c 800
(Surplus application money adjusted towards share allotment account)
294 FP-FA&A
Share First Call A/c Dr. 6,000
(First call money due on 2000 shares @ ` 3 per share as per
Board’s resolution dated…)
Share Capital A/c Dr. 320
Securities Premium A/c Dr. 80
To Shares Forfeited A/c 96
To Share Allotment A/c 184
To Share First Call A/c 120
(Forfeiture of 40 shares held by Ramesh for non-payment of allotment
of money @ ` 5 per share including premium @ ` 2 per share and first
call money @ ` 3 per share as per Board’s resolution dated...)
Share Final Call A/c Dr. 3,920
(Share final call due on 1960 shares (i.e., 2000 shares-Ramesh’s 40
shares forfeited) @ ` 2 per share as per Board’s resolution dated...)
Share Capital A/c Dr. 600
To Shares Forfeited A/c 300
To Share First Call A/c 180
To Share Final Call A/c 120
(Forfeited of 60 shares held by Mohan for non-payment of first call
money @ ` 3 per share and final call money @ ` 2 per share as per
To Share Capital A/c 80
(Discount allowed on re-issue of 80 forfeited share @ Re. 1 per
(Transfer of net gain on re-issue of 80 forfeited shares to capital
Reserve A/c)
Balance Sheet of.....Ltd. as at.....
Issued, Subscribed and Paid-up Current Assets, Loans and
Capital 1980 shares of ` 10 each Advances
fully paid-up 19,800 A. Current Assets
Shares Forfeited A/c 100 Cash at Bank 24,036
Securities Premium Account 3,920
Capital Reserve Account 216 ______
24,036 24,036
ISSUE OF DEBENTURES
Meaning of Debentures
Besides raising capital by the issue of shares, a company may supplement its capital by borrowings. Such
borrowings may take the form of both short-term and long-term borrowings. Short-term borrowings by way of
promissory notes, bills of exchange, bank overdrafts, cash credits, public deposits, etc., are needed by a
company to provide for its working capital while long-term borrowings by way of loan on mortgage of property,
term loans from financial institutions, public deposits for a long period, issue of debentures, etc., are needed
by a company for financing expenditure of a capital nature. Loan capital of a company refers to the long-term
borrowings of which issue of debentures is the most important and common method adopted by companies.
Debentures are part of loan capital and the company is liable to pay interest thereon whether it earns profit or
not.
Issue of Debentures
Subject to the restrictions imposed by Section 293 of the Companies Act, 1956, a company can issue
debentures. The procedure for issuing debentures by a company is very much similar to that of an issue of
shares. Applications for debentures are invited from the public through the prospectus and the applicants are
asked to pay the application money along with the applications. The company may ask for payment of the
whole of the amount along with the application itself or in installments.
ISSUE OF DEBENTURES
FOR CASH
AT PAR AT A PREMIUM
AT A DISCOUNT
FOR CONSIDERATION OTHER THAN CASH
AS COLLATERAL SECURITY
Issue of Debentures for Cash

When debentures are issued for cash, the amount to be collected on them may be payable in a lump sum or
in installments. Where payable in installments, debenture application account is opened on receipt of
applications. Then there are debenture allotment account and debenture calls account.
296 FP-FA&A
Issue of Debentures at Par
Debentures are said to be issued at par when the debenture-holder is required to pay an amount equal to the
nominal or face value of the debentures e.g. the issue of ` 1,000 debenture for ` 1,000.
(a) If the full amount is payable along with the application:

(1) On receipt of application money:
Bank Dr. (with the money received on
To Debentures Application application)
and Allotment A/c
(2) On allotment:
Debenture Application and (with the money received on
Allotment A/c Dr. debentures allotted)
To Debentures A/c
(b) If the amount is payable in installments
1. On receipt of application money:
To Debentures Application A/c application)
2. On Allotment:
Debenture Application A/c Dr. (with the application money
Debenture Allotment A/c Dr. (with the allotment money due on
debentures)
To Debentures A/c (with application and allotment money on
debentures allotted)
3. On refund of application money:
Debenture Application A/c Dr. (with the excess application money
To Bank refunded)
4. On receipt of allotment money:
To Debenture Allotment A/c allotment)
5. On making calls:
Debenture Calls A/c Dr. (with the money due on respective
To Debenture A/c calls)
6. On receipt of call money:
To Debenture Calls A/c respective calls)
Note:
– All cash transactions are generally passed through the Cash Book.
 – It is customary to prefix the rate of interest payable on debentures with the debenture account.
 – The company cannot allot more debentures than issued. The excess application money may be
retained by the company against the allotment money due. But the excess application money received
on debentures rejected has to be refunded to the applicants.
Issue of Debentures at a Premium

If the debentures are issued at a price higher than the nominal value of the debentures, the debentures are
said to be issued at a premium. The excess of issue price over the nominal value is regarded as the premium
amount. In such a case, the Debentures Account should be credited only with the nominal value of the
debentures and the premium should be credited to “Securities Premium Account”.
Debenture Application A/c Dr. (with the money due on application)

Debenture Allotment A/c Dr. (with allotment money including
premium)
To Debentures A/c (with the nominal value of the
debentures)
To Securities Premium A/c (with the premium money)
Issue of Debentures at a Discount
If the debentures are issued at a price lower than the nominal value of the debentures, the debentures are
said to be issued at a discount. The difference between the nominal value and the issue price is regarded as
the discount. Such discount being a capital loss must be shown specifically on the assets side of the Balance
Sheet under the heading ‘Miscellaneous Expenditure’. Such discount on issue of debentures may either be
written off against revenue profits or capital profits of the company. When debentures are issued at a
discount, the Debentures Account should be credited with the nominal value of the debentures and the
discount allowed on issue of debentures, being a capital loss, should be debited to “Discount on Issue of
Debentures Account”.
Debenture Application A/c Dr. (with the money due on application)

Debenture Allotment A/c Dr. (with the money due on allotment)
Discount on Issue of Debentures A/c Dr. (with the amount of discount)
To Debentures A/c (with the total)
Illustration 14:
X Ltd. made an issue of 10,000 12% Debentures of ` 100 each, payable as follows:
` 25 on Application
` 25 on Allotment
` 50 on First and Final Call.
Applications were received for 12,000 debentures and the directors allotted 10,000 debentures rejecting
applications for 2,000 debentures. The money received on applications for 2,000 debentures rejected was duly
refunded. The calls were made and the moneys were duly received.
Show the necessary cash book and journal entries to record the above transactions and prepare the balance
sheet of the company.
298 FP-FA&A
Solution:
Dr. Cr.
To 12% Debenture Application 3,00,000 By 12%A/c
Debenture
Application A/c 50,000
(Application money on (Refund of Application
12,000 12% Debenture @ ` money on 2,000, 12%
25 per debenture) Debenture @ ` 25 per
debenture)
To 12% Debenture Allotment 2,50,000 By Balance
A/c c/d 10,00,000
12% Debenture @ ` 25 per
debenture)
To 12% Debenture First and 5,00,000
Final Call A/c
(First and final call money on
10,000 debentures @ ` 80
per debenture)
10,50,000 10,50,000

Journal Entries
(`) (`)
12% Debenture Application A/c Dr. 2,50,000
12% Debenture Allotment A/c Dr. 2,50,000
To 12% Debentures A/c 5,00,000
(Being capitalization of application money @ ` 25 per
debenture and allotment money due on 10,000 debentures
as per Boards resolution dated.....)
12% Debenture First and Final Call A/c Dr. 5,00,000
(First and final call money due on 10,000, 12% debentures @
` 50 per debenture as per board’s resolution dated...)
Balance Sheet of X Ltd. as at...

Secured loans: Current Assets, Loans and
12% Debentures 10,00,000 Advances
A. Current Assets
Cash at Bank 10,00,000
10,00,000 10,00,000
Illustration 15:
B Ltd. issued 2,000, 13% Debentures of ` 100 each at ` 110 payable as follows:
On Application ` 25
On Allotment ` 35 (including premium)
On First and Final Call ` 50
The debentures were fully subscribed and the moneys were duly received. Prepare cash book, pass the
necessary journal entries and prepare the balance sheet of the company.
Solution:
Dr. Cr.
To 13% Debenture Application 50,000 By Balance
A/c c/d 2,20,000
(Application money on 2,000
debentures @ ` 25 per each)
To 13% Debenture Allotment A/c 70,000
debentures @ ` 35 per
debenture including premium
of `10 each)
To 13% Debenture First and Final
Call A/c 1,00,000
2,000 debentures @ ` 50 per
debenture)
2,20,000 2,20,000
In the books of B Ltd.

Journal Entries
(`) (`)
13% Debenture Application A/c Dr. 50,000
13% Debenture Allotment A/c Dr. 70,000
(Being capitalization of application money @ ` 25 per debenture and
allotment money due on 2,000 debentures @ ` 35 including premium of
` 10 each as per Boards resolution dated.....)
(First and final call money due on 10,000, 12% debentures @ ` 50 per
debenture as per board’s resolution dated...)
300 FP-FA&A
Balance Sheet of B Ltd. as at...
Reserves and Surplus Current Assets, Loans and
Securities Premium 20,000 Advances
Secured loans: 2,00,000 A. Current Assets
13% Debentures 2,20,000 Cash at Bank 2,20,000
2,20,000
Illustration 16:
W Ltd. issued 2,000, 14% Debentures of ` 100 each at discount of 5%, the discount being adjustable on
allotment. The debentures were payable as follows:
On Application - ` 25
On Allotment - ` 20
On First and Final Call - ` 50
The debentures were fully subscribed and the moneys were duly received. Show the cash book and journal
entries and prepare the balance sheet of the company.
Solution:
Dr. Cr.
To 14% Debenture Application By Balance c/d 1,90,000
A/c 50,000
(Application money on 2,000
debentures @ ` 25 per each)
To 14% Debenture Allotment
A/c 40,000
debentures @ ` 20 each)
To 14% Debenture First and
Final Call A/c 1,00,000
2,000 debentures @ ` 50
per debenture)
1,90,000 1,90,000
In the books of W Ltd.
Journal Entries
(`) (`)
14% Debenture Application A/c Dr. 50,000
14% Debenture Allotment A/c Dr. 40,000
Discount on issue of debentures A/c Dr. 10,000
(Being capitalization of application money @ ` 25 per
debenture and allotment money due on 2,000 debentures @
` 20 after adjusting discount of ` 5 each as per Boards
resolution dated.....)
(First and final call money due on 2,000, debentures @ ` 50
per debenture as per board’s resolution dated...)
Profit & Loss A/c Dr. 10,000
To Discount on issue of debentures A/c 10,000
(Discount on issue of debentures A/c being written off against
the profit & loss account)
Balance Sheet of W Ltd. as at...
Secured loans: Current Assets, Loans and
13% Debentures 2,00,000 Advances
A. Current Assets
Cash at Bank 1,90,000
Miscellaneous Expenditure
Discount on issue of shares 10,000
2,00,000 2,00,000
DEBENTURES ISSUED FOR CONSIDERATION OTHER THAN CASH

The company may allot debentures to the vendors for acquiring some assets as payment for purchase
consideration. This issue of debentures to vendors is known as issue of debentures for consideration other
than cash.
Journal Entries
(1) For acquisition of assets:
Sundry Assets (Individually) A/c Dr. (with the value of assets)
To Vendors (with the purchase price)
(2) (a) On allotment of debentures (at par)
Vendors Dr. (with the value of debentures)
To Debentures A/c
(b) On allotment of debentures (at premium)
Vendors A/c Dr. (with the purchase price)
To Debentures A/c (with the nominal value)
To Securities Premium A/c (with the amount of premium)
(c) On allotment of debentures (at discount)
Vendors A/c Dr. (with the amount of purchase)
Discount on Issue of Debentures A/c Dr. (with the amount of discount)
To Debentures A/c (with the nominal value)
Notes:
(i) If the value of debentures allotted is more than the agreed purchase price, the difference is debited to
Goodwill Account.
302 FP-FA&A
(ii) Similarly, if the value of debentures allotted is less than the agreed purchase price, credited to Capital
Reserve Account.
Illustration 17:
Optimist Ltd. purchased building worth Rs.1,20,000 and plant and machinery worth Rs. 1,00,000 from
Depressed Ltd. for an agreed purchase consideration of Rs. 2,00,000 to be satisfied by the issue of 2,000,
12% Debentures of Rs. 100 each. Show the necessary journal entries in the books of Optimist Ltd.
Solution:
Journal
Particulars Dr.(`) Cr.( `)

Building A/c Dr. 1,20,000
Plant and Machinery A/c Dr. 1,00,000
To Depressed Ltd. 2,00,000
(Purchase of sundry assets and transfer of capital profits as per
agreement with the vendor dated...)
Depressed Ltd. Dr. 2,00,000
(Being 2,000, 12% Debentures of Rs. 100 each allotted to vendors for
consideration other than cash as per Board’s resolution dated...)
DEBENTURES ISSUED AS COLLATERAL SECURITY

The term ‘Collateral Security’ implies additional security given for a loan. Where a company obtains a loan from
a bank or insurance company, it may issue its own debentures to the lender as collateral security against the
loan in addition to any other security that may be offered. In such a case, the lender has the absolute right over
the debentures until and unless the loan is repaid. On repayment of the loan, however, the lender is legally
bound to release the debentures forthwith. But in case the loan is not repaid by the company on the due date
or in the event of any other breach of agreement, the lender has the right to retain these debentures and to
realise them. The holder of such debentures is entitled to interest only on the amount of loan, but not on the
debentures. Such an issue of debentures is known as “Debentures issued as Collateral Security”. There are
two alternative ways by which debentures issued as collateral security can be dealt with:
(1) No accounting entry is required to be shown in the books of account at the time of issue of such debentures
for the simple reason that the loan against which the debentures are issued as collateral security has already
been credited, the debit being given to Bank. But the existence of such debentures issued as collateral security
has to be mentioned by way of a note on the Balance Sheet under the specific loan account.
(2) If it is desired that such an issue of debentures as collateral security is to be recorded in the books of
account, the accounting entries will be as follows:
(i) On issue of debentures as collateral security

Debentures Suspense A/c Dr. (with the nominal value of the
To Debentures A/c debentures issued)
In this case, Debentures Suspense Account will appear on the asset side of the balance sheet under the
heading Miscellaneous Expenditure. Debentures Account will appear as a liability on the liabilities side of
the Balance Sheet.
(ii) On repayment of the loan and release of debentures
Debentures A/c Dr. (with the nominal value of the
To Debentures Suspense A/c debentures released)
Note: The net effect of the above two entries is nil. Both the Debentures Suspense Account and the
Debentures Account are cancelled on repayment of the loan. As such, this method is rarely followed in
practice.
Illustration 18:
Z Ltd. secured an overdraft of Rs. 50,000 from the bank by issuing 600, 12% Debentures of Rs. 100 each as
collateral security. Prepare the Balance Sheet of the Company under both the methods.
Solution:
(First Method):
Balance Sheet of Z Ltd. as at...
Secured Loan:
Bank Overdraft 50,000
(Secured by the issue of 600,
12% Debentures of Rs. 100
each as collateral security)
Solution (Second Method):

Journal Entries
Particulars Dr.(`) Cr.( `)
Debentures Suspense A/c Dr. 60,000

To Debentures A/c 60,000
(Issue of 600, 12% Debentures of Rs. 100 each as collateral security for
a bank overdraft of Rs. 50,000 as per Board’s resolution dated.....)
Balance Sheet of Z Ltd. as at.....
Secured Loans: Miscellaneous Expenditure

600, 12% Debentures of Rs. 100 each 60,000 Debentures Suspense Account 60,000
(issued as collateral security as per (issued as collateral security as
contra) per contra)
Bank Overdraft (Secured by the issue of 50,000
600, 12% Debentures of Rs. 100 each
as collateral security)
304 FP-FA&A
REDEMPTION OF PREFERENCE SHARES
A company limited by shares may, if authorized by its articles of association can issue preference shares
which are or at the option of the company are liable to be redeemed under section 80 of the Companies Act
1956. The preference shares can be redeemed out of profits or out of the proceeds of fresh issue of equity or
preference shares or a combination of both. The preference shares can be redeemed at a premium also.
When preference shares are to be redeemed at a premium, the amount of premium payable on redemption
can be provided either out of securities premium account or the profit of the company.
Section 80 of the Companies Act provides for the issue and redemption of preference shares and prescribes
the following conditions with regard to the redemption of preference shares:
(i) Such shares can be redeemed either out of the profits of the company which would otherwise
available for dividend or out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of shares made for the purpose of
redemption.
(ii) Unless the shares are fully paid they cannot be redeemed.
(iii) If any premium is to be payable on redemption, such premium has to be provided out of the profits of
the company or out of the securities premium account.
(iv) Where any such shares are redeemed out of profits, a sum equal to the nominal amount of the shares
so redeemed must be transferred out of the profits of the company which would otherwise to be
available for dividend to a reserve fund called ‘Capital Redemption Reserve Account’. As such the
capital structure of the company will remain unaffected even after the redemption of the redeemable
preference shares. Otherwise, the provisions relating to the reduction of share capital of a company
will apply.
(v) The capital redemption reserve account may be applied by the company in paying up unissued shares
of the company to be issued to the members of the company as fully paid bonus shares. Otherwise
Capital Redemption Account must be maintained intact unless otherwise sanctioned by the Court.
(vi) No company limited by shares, shall after the commencement of the Companies (Amendment) Act,
1996 issue any preference shares which is irredeemable or is redeemable after the expiry of a period
of twenty years from the date of issue [80(5A)].
(vii) The redemption of preference shares by a company shall not be taken as reducing the amount of its
authorised share capital.
(viii) Where in pursuance of this section, a company has redeemed or is about to redeem any preference
shares, it shall have power to issue upto the nominal amount of the shares redeemed or to be
redeemed as if those shares had never been issued.
(ix) If new shares are issued for the purpose of redemption of preference shares, it will not be treated as
increase of capital.
(x) If a company fails to comply with the legal provisions of this section, the company and every officer of
the company who is in default shall be punishable with fine which may extend to ten thousand rupees.
Case 1: Redemption out of the profits of the company which would otherwise be available for
dividend
If the redeemable preference shares are redeemed out of the profits of the company which would otherwise
be available for dividend, the “Capital Redemption Reserve Account” has to be created which will represent
the redeemable preference shares in the balance sheet after the redemption. This capital redemption reserve
should be equal to the amount of Preference Shares to be redeemed. The profits available for dividend have
to be transferred to Capital Redemption Reserve Account.
JOURNAL ENTRIES
1. Transfer profits available for dividend to Capital Redemption Reserve Account:
General Reserve Account Dr. (as the case may be)

Dividend Equalization Account Dr.
To Capital Redemption Reserve A/c (with the nominal value of the shares to be
redeemed)
2. If current assets are realized to provide cash for redemption of preference shares:
Bank Dr.
To Respective Assets Account (with the realized value of assets)
3. On transfer of redeemable preference share capital to be redeemed to Preference

Shareholders Account:
Redeemable Preference Share Capital A/c Dr. (with the nominal value of the
To Preference Shareholders A/c shares to be redeemed)
4. If preference shares are redeemed at premium:

Redeemable Preference Share Capital A/c Dr.
Premium on Redemption of Preference Shares A/c Dr. (with the amount of premium payable)
To Preference Shareholders A/c
5. For providing premium on redemption of preference shares:

Securities Premium Account Dr. (with the amount of premium paid on
or Profit and Loss Appropriation A/c Dr. redemption of preference shares)
To Premium on Redemption of Preference Shares Account
6. On redemption of preference shares:

Preference Shareholders Account Dr. (with the amount paid)
To Bank
Case 2: If the redeemable preference shares are redeemed out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of
shares made for the purpose of redemption:
If the redeemable preference shares are redeemed out of the proceeds of fresh issue of shares, the new
Share Capital Account raised by fresh issue will take the place of the Redeemable Preference Share Capital
Account after the redemption. Thus, in such a case, new Share Capital Account (Equity or Preference) must
be equal to the redeemable preference shares redeemed.
The term “Proceeds of Fresh Issue” has not been defined precisely anywhere in the section 80. As such,
there is much scope for confusion as to what should constitute the proceeds of fresh issue in various
circumstances like issue of shares - (i) at par, or (ii) at a premium, or (iii) at a discount. This point is
particularly important where preference shares are redeemed partly out of the profits of the company and
partly out of the proceeds of fresh issue of shares to determine the amount not covered by fresh issue for
transfer to Capital Redemption Reserve Account. For this, the following principles should be followed:
(i) When fresh issue of shares is made at par: In such a case, the nominal value of the shares issued will
constitute the proceeds and the same should be considered for determining the amount to be credited
to Capital Redemption Reserve Account.
(ii) When fresh issue of shares is made at a premium: In such a case, the premium received on issue of
306 FP-FA&A
shares should be disregarded and only the nominal value of the shares issued should be considered
for determining the amount to be credited to Capital Redemption Reserve Account.
(As per Section 78 of the Companies Act, 1956 clearly states that where a company issues shares at a
premium, a sum equal to the aggregate amount of the premium received on those shares be credited
to a separate account called “Securities Premium Account” and the provisions relating to the reduction
of capital shall apply if the Securities Premium Account is utilised otherwise than for the purposes
specified therein. But Section 78 does not specify redemption of preference for which the Securities
Premium Account can be utilised.)
However, when preference shares are to be redeemed at a premium, the amount of premium payable
on redemption can be provided either out of securities premium account, or from the profit of the
company. It means that capital profit could be utilised for premium, if any, payable on redemption of
preference shares.
(iii) When fresh issue of shares is made at a discount: In such a case, the net amount received on issue of
shares should constitute the proceeds and the same should be considered for determining the amount
to be credited to Capital Redemption Reserve Account.
(Keeping in view the main purpose of Section 80, it can be argued that the nominal value of the shares
issued is not represented wholly by tangible assets. The net amount received on such shares actually
represents tangible assets while the amount of discount being a capital loss does not represent
tangible assets.)
First of all, entries for fresh issue of shares will be passed. Then entries for redemption passed as given in
previous case.
Case 3: If the redeemable preference shares are redeemed partly out of the profits of the company
which would otherwise be available for dividend and partly out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of
shares made for the purpose of redemption:
If the redeemable preference shares are redeemed partly out of the profits of the company which would
otherwise be available for dividend and partly out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of shares equity or
preference, the Capital Redemption Reserve Account and the new Share Capital Account taken together will
replace the Redeemable Preference Share Capital redeemed. Thus in such a case, Redeemable Preference
Share Capital redeemed = Capital Redemption Reserve Account + New Share Capital Account (Equity or
Preference).
Here, all the entries shown under (1) and (2) have to be passed. But there are certain common entries which
can be combined together.
Illustration 19:
Vanities Ltd. had an issue 1,000, 12% redeemable preference shares of ` 100 each, repayable at a premium
of 10%. These shares are to be redeemed now out of the accumulated reserves, which are more than the
necessary sum required for redemption. Show the necessary entries in the books of the company, assuming
that the premium on redemption of shares has to be written off against the company’s Securities Premium
Account.
Solution:
In the books of Vanities Ltd.
Journal Entries

General Reserve Account Dr. 1,00,000
To Capital Redemption Reserve A/c 1,00,000
(Transfer of reserves to Capital Redemption Reserve Account
on redemption of redeemable preference shares)
12% Redeemable Preference Share Capital A/c Dr. 1,00,000

Premium on Redemption of Preference Shares A/c Dr. 10,000
1,10,000
To 12% Preference Shareholders A/c
(Amount payable to 12% preference shareholders on
redemption of 12% preference shares at a premium of 10%)
Securities Premium A/c Dr. 10,000
To Premium on Redemption of Preference Share A/c 10,000
(Application of Securities Premium Account to write off
premium on redemption of preference shares)
12% Preference Shareholders A/c Dr. 1,10,000

To Bank 1,10,000
(Amount due to 12% preference shareholders on redemption
paid)
Note: Capital Redemption Reserve Account replaces the 12% Redeemable Preference Shares Capital
Account and the capital structure of the company remains unchanged.
Illustration 20:
Sure and Fast Ltd. has part of its share capital in 12% redeemable preference shares of ` 100 each,
repayable at a premium of 5%. The shares have now become due for redemption. It is decided that the whole
amount will be redeemed out of a fresh issue of 20,000 equity shares of ` 10 each at ` 11 each. The whole
amount is received in cash and the 12% preference shares are redeemed. Show the necessary journal
entries in the books of the company.
Solution:
In the books of Sure and Fast Ltd.
Journal Entries
Particulars Dr. Cr.
(`) (`)
Bank Dr. 2,20,000
To Equity Share Application and Allotment A/c
(Application money on 20,000 equity shares @ ` 11 per 2,20,000
share including a premium of Re. 1 per share)
(Allotment of 20,000 equity shares ` 10 each issued at a
premium of ` 1 per share as per Board’s Resolution
dated....)
308 FP-FA&A
Particulars ` `
Premium on Redemption of Preference Share A/c Dr. 10,000
To 12% Preference Shareholders A/c 2,10,000
(Amount due to 12% preference shareholders on
redemption of 8% preference shares at a premium of 5%)
Securities Premium A/c Dr.
10,000
To Premium on Redemption of Preference Shares A/c
(Application of Securities Premium Account to write off 10,000
Premium on Redemption of Preference Shares)
12% Preference Shareholders A/c Dr.
2,10,000
To Bank
2,10,000
(Payment of amount due to 12% preference shareholders
on redemption)
Note: Equity Share Capital Account replaces the 12% Redeemable Preference Share Capital Account and
the capital structure of the company remains unchanged.
Illustration 21:
The following is the balance sheet of Oscar India Ltd. as on 31st March 2011:
Preference share capital: Fixed assets 6,00,000
2,500 shares of ` 100 Investment 50,000
each fully called-up 2,50,000 Bank 90,000
Less: Final call @ ` 20
per share unpaid 2,000
2,48,000
Equity share capital:
30,000 shares of ` 10
each fully paid-up 3,00,000
Profit and loss A/c 1,50,000
Securities premium 15,000
Creditors 27,000 _______
7,40,000 7,40,000
On 30th June, 2011, the Board of Directors decided to redeem the preference shares at a premium of 10%
and to sell the investments at its market price of ` 40,000. They also decided to issue sufficient number of
equity shares of ` 10 each at a premium of Re. 1 per share, required after utilizing the profit and loss account
leaving a balance of ` 50,000. Premium on redemption is required to be set off against securities premium
account.
Repayments on redemption were made in full except to one shareholder holding 50 shares only due to his
leaving India for good.
You are required to show the journal entries and the balance sheet of the company after redemption.
Assumption made should be shown in the working.
Solution:
In the books of Oscar Ltd.
Journal Entries

Bank Dr. 40,000
To Investments 50,000
(Being the sale of investments at a loss of ` 10,000)
Bank Dr. 1,65,000
To Share Capital A/c 1,50,000
(Being the issue of required number of equity shares at
a premium of 10%)
Preference Share Capital A/c Dr. 2,40,000

Premium on Redemption A/c Dr. 24,000
To Preference Shareholders A/c 2,64,000
(Being the transfer of the amount due to preference
shareholders on redemption)

24,000
To Premium on Redemption A/c
(Being the transfer of securities premium account to
write off premium on redemption of preference shares
account)
To Capital Redemption Reserve A/c 90,000
(Being the transfer of profit used for redemption of
preference shares to capital redemption reserve
account)
Preference Shareholders A/c Dr. 2,58,500
To Bank 2,58,500
(Being the payment to preference shareholders except
to a holder of 50 shares)
310 FP-FA&A
Balance Sheet of Oscar India Ltd. as on 1st July, 2011
(After redemption)
Preference Share Capital Fixed Assets 6,00,000
100 shares of Bank 36,500
` 100 each 10,000
Less: Calls in arrears 2,000 8,000
Equity Share Capital
45,000 shares of ` 10 each 4,50,000
Capital Redemption Reserve 90,000
Profit and Loss A/c 50,000
Securities Premium 6,000
Current Liabilities:
Creditors 27,000
Pref. Shareholders 5,500 _______
6,36,500 6,36,500
Working Notes:
Calculation of required number of fresh issue of equity shares:

` `
Balance of Profit and Loss A/c 1,50,000
Less: Loss on Sale of Investment 10,000
Balance required 50,000 _ 60,000
Profit available for redemption _ 90,000
Amount required for redemption 2,40,000
Amount available from Profit and Loss A/c _90,000
New issue required 15,000 shares 1,50,000
Dr. Bank Account Cr.
To Balance b/d 90,000 By Preference Share-
To Investment 40,000 holders A/c 2,58,500
To Share Capital A/c 1,50,000 By Balance b/d 36,500
To Securities
Premium A/c 15,000 _______
2,95,000 2,95,000
Illustration 22:
The Balance Sheet of Producers Ltd. as at 31st March, 2011 is as follows:
Authorised Capital Plant and Machinery 1,90,000
40,000 Equity Shares Furniture and Fixtures 20,000
of ` 10 each 4,00,000 Investments 60,000
1,000 8% Preference Current Assets, Loans and
Shares of ` 100 each 1,00,000 Advances:
5,00,000 A. Current Assets:
Issued and Subscribed Capital: Stock 1,30,500
25,000 Equity Shares of Debtors 49,550
` 10 each, fully paid-up 2,50,000 Cash at Bank 4,950
1,000, 8% Preference Shares B. Loans and Advances:
of ` 100 each, fully paid-up 1,00,000 Prepaid expenses 1,000
Reserves and Surplus:
Securities Premium Account 9,000
Profit and Loss Account 55,000
Current Liabilities and Provisions
A. Current LIabilities:
B. Provisions:
Provisions for taxation 19,500 _______
4,56,000 4,56,000
In order to redeem its preference shares, the company issued 5,000 equity shares of ` 10 each at a premium
of 10% and sold all of its investment for ` 70,800. Preference shares were redeemed at a premium of 10%.
Show the necessary journal entries in the books of the company and prepare the balance sheet of the
company immediately after redemption of preference shares.
Solution:
In the books of Producers Ltd.
Journal Entries
Particulars Dr. (`) Cr.(`)
Bank Dr. 55,000
To Equity Share Application and Allotment Account 55,000
(Application money received on 5,000 equity shares of ` 10
issued at a premium of 10%)
Equity Share Application and Allotment A/c Dr. 55,000
(Allotment of 5000 equity shares of ` 10 each issued at a
premium of 10% as per Board’s resolution dated....)
50,000
To Capital Redemption Reserve A/c
(Transfer of the balance of the nominal value preference
shares to be redeemed not covered by fresh issue, i.e., `
1,00,000 - ` 50,000 on redemption to Capital Redemption
Reserve A/c)
Bank Dr. 70,800
60,000
To Investments A/c
10,800
(Sale of Investments at a profit and transfer of profit on sale to
Profit and Loss A/c)
Premium on Redemption of Preference Shares A/c Dr. 10,000
1,10,000
To 8% Preference Shareholders A/c
(Amount due to 8% preference shareholders on redemption)
312 FP-FA&A
To Premium on Redemption of Preference Shares A/c 10,000
(Application of securities premium to write off premium on
redemption of preference shares)
8% Preference Shareholders A/c Dr. 1,10,000
To Bank 1,10,000
(Amount due to 8% Preference Shareholders on redemption of
their shares paid)
Balance Sheet of Producers Ltd. as at 31st March, 2011

(After redemption preference shares)
Authorised Capital: Plant and Machinery 1,90,000
(40,000 Equity Shares of 4,00,000 Furniture and Fixtures 20,000
` 10 each) Investments Nil
1,000 8% Preference Current Assets, Loans and
Shares of ` 100 each 1,00,000 Advances:
1,00,000
__ 5,00,000 A. Current Assets:
5,00,000
Issued and Subscribed Stock 1,30,500
Capital: Debtors 49,550
30,000 Equity Shares of Cash at Bank 20,750
` 10 each, fully paid-up 3,00,000 B. Loans and Advances:
Reserves and Surplus: B. Loans
Prepaid
and Expenses
Advances 1,000
Capital Redemption Reserve
Account 50,000
50,000
Securities Premium Account 4,0004,000
Profit and Loss Account 15,800
15,800
Current Liabilities and
Provisions:
A. Current Liabilities:
22,500
B. Provisions:
Provisions for Taxation 19,500
19,500
_______
____4,11,800 _______4,11,800
4,11,800 4,11,800
Working Notes:
(i) Dr. Bank Account Cr.
To Balance b/fd 4,950 By 8% Preference
To Equity Share Application Shareholders A/c 1,10,000
and Allotment A/c 55,000 By Balance c/d 20,750
To Investment A/c 60,000
To Profit and Loss A/c 10,800 _______
1,30,750 1,30,750
(ii) Dr. Securities Premium A/c Cr.
To Premium on Redemption of By Balance b/fd 9,000
Preference Shares Account 10,000 By Equity Share Application
To Balance c/d 4,000 and Allotment A/c 5,000
14,000 14,000
(iii) Dr. Profit and Loss A/c Cr.
To Capital Redemption By Balance b/fd 55,000
Reserve A/c 50,000 By Bank (Profit on sale
To Balance c/d 15,800 of investments) 10,800
65,800 65,800
Note: Equity Share Capital issued at ` 50,000 and Capital Redemption Reserve Account ` 50,000 jointly
replace 8% Redeemable Preference Share Capital ` 1,00,000. Hence, the capital structure of the company
remains unchanged.
LESSON ROUND UP
 – There are two basic types of share capital which can be issued by a company under the Companies
Act, 1956 i.e. (a) preference shares and (b) equity shares.
– Preference shares are those which carry preferential rights as to the payment of dividend at a fixed
rate; and the return of capital on winding up of the company.
– An equity share is one which is not a preference share. Equity shares are risk bearing shares.
– Share capital of a company can be categorized as: Nominal or Authorised Capital; Issued Capital;
Subscribed Capital; Called up Capital and Paid-up Capital.
– Shares of a company may be issued at par, at a premium or at a discount.
– When shares are issued at a price higher than the face value, they are said to be issued at a
premium.
– When shares are issued at a price lower than the face value, they are said to be issued at a
discount.
– Forfeiture of shares may be said to be the compulsory termination of membership by way of penalty
for non-payment of allotment and/or any call money.
314 FP-FA&A
– The forfeited shares may be re-issued at par, at a premium or even at a discount. If forfeited shares
are re-issued at a discount, the amount of discount can, in no case, exceed the amount credited to
Shares Forfeited Account.
– According to Section 80 of the Companies Act, a company limited by shares may, if authorised by
its articles, issue preference shares, which are, or at the option of the company liable to be
redeemed.
– Debentures may be issued at par, or at a premium, or at a discount.
– Debentures may be issued by a company for cash, for consideration other than cash, or as a
collateral security.
– The issue of debentures to vendors is known as issue of debentures for consideration other than
cash.
– A company may issue debentures on any specific condition as to its redemption such as: issued at
par and redeemable at par, issued at a discount redeemable at par, issued at a premium
redeemable at par, issued at par redeemable at premium, issued at a discount, but redeemable at a
premium.
– When a company issues debentures it undertakes to pay interest thereon at a fixed percentage. The
payment of interest on the debt is obligatory on the part of the company issuing them irrespective of
the fact whether the company earns profit or not and the interest payable on debentures is a charge
against the profits of the company.
– Discount on issue of debentures is a capital loss of the company and it is required to be shown on the
assets side of the Balance Sheet under the heading “Miscellaneous Expenditure” until it is written off.
– When a company issues debenture at par or at a discount which are redeemable at a premium, the
premium payable on redemption of the debentures is treated as a capital loss.
– The preference shares can be redeemed out of profits or out of the proceeds of fresh issue of equity
or preference shares or a combination of both. The preference shares can be redeemed at a
premium also.
– If the redeemable preference shares are redeemed out of the profits of the company which would
otherwise be available for dividend, the “Capital Redemption Reserve Account” has to be credited
which will represent the redeemable preference shares in the balance sheet after the redemption.
– If the redeemable preference shares are redeemed out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of shares,
the new Share Capital Account raised by fresh issue takes the place of the Redeemable Preference
Share Capital Account after the redemption.
GLOSSARY
Shares The total share capital is divided into a number of units known as ‘shares’.
Authorized The Company is registered with this amount of capital.
Capital
Issued That part of the authorized capital of the company which has actually been offered to
Capital the public for subscription in cash.
Subscribed It refers to that part of the issued capital which has actually been subscribed by the
Capital public and subsequently allotted to them.
Called Up It is that portion of the subscribed capital which the shareholders are called upon to pay
Capital on the shares applied by them.
Paid Up It refers to that part of the called up capital which has actually been paid by the
Capital shareholders.
Forfeiture The compulsory termination of membership by way of penalty for non-payment of
allotment and/or any call money.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
Theory Questions
1. What do you mean by shares? What are the types of shares?
2. Explain types of share capital in a company.
3. Briefly describe issue of shares at a premium.
4. What do you mean by forfeited shares? Can forfeited shares be re-issued? Explain.
5. What are debentures? How can a company issue debentures?
6. Explain various methods of redemption of preference shares.
Practical Questions
1. The authorised capital of a company is 1,00,000 shares of ` 10 each. On April 10, 2011, 50,000
shares are issued for subscription at a premium of ` 2 per share. The share money is payable as
follows: ` 5 (including the premium of ` 2) with application, ` 3 on allotment; ` 2 on first call and ` 2
on second call. The subscription list closes on May 11, 2011 and directors proceed to allotment on
May 18, 2011. The shares are fully subscribed and the application money (including the premium) is
received in full. The allotment money is received by June 30, 2011, except as regards 500 shares. It
is expected that the allotment money on these 500 shares will not be received. The first call and
second call money is received by September 30, 2011 and December 31, 2011 respectively, barring
the second call money on 200 shares which is not received and which is not likely to be received.
Show the cash book and the structure of the share capital in the balance sheet.
2. X Ltd. forfeited 100 shares of ` 10 each for non-payment of the final call of ` 2; the shares were re-
issued @ ` 9 per share. How much was credited to shares forfeited account and what amount was
transferred to capital reserve?
[Ans.: ` 800; ` 700]
3. Z Ltd. forfeited 150 shares of ` 10, issued at a premium of ` 2, for non-payment of the final call of `
3. Of these 100 shares were re-issued @ ` 11 per share. How much would be transferred to capital
reserve?
[Ans.: ` 700]
4. S Ltd. had issued equity shares of ` 10 each at a discount of 6%. 200 of these shares had been
forfeited for non-payment of the first and final call of ` 2 each; 150 of these shares were later re-
issued @ ` 9 per share. Indicate the balance in the Share Forfeited Account and the Capital
Reserve Account, resulting from the above.
[Ans.: Shares Forfeited A/c: ` 370 (Cr.);
Capital Reserve: ` 1,050 (Cr.)]
5. Redemption of 100,000 preference shares of ` 10 each was carried out by utilisation of reserves
and by issue of 40,000 equity shares of `10 each at `12.5. How much should be credited to capital
redemption reserve account?
[Ans.: ` 6,00,000]
In the above case, the redemption was carried out of reserves and out of the issue of 4,000 shares
of `10 each @ ` 9.5. What is the amount of capital redemption reserve account that is required?
[Ans.: ` 6,20,000]
6. A company having free reserves of ` 30,000 want to redeem rupees one lakh preference shares.
Calculate the face value of fresh issue of shares of ` 10 each to be made at a premium of 10%.
[Ans.: ` 70,000]
7. Bhalla and Co. Ltd. has an authorised equity capital of ` 20 lakhs divided into shares of ` 10 each.
The paid-up capital was ` 12,50,000. Besides this, the company had 9% preference shares of ` 10
316 FP-FA&A
each for ` 2,50,000. Balance on other accounts were - Securities Premium ` 18,000; Profit and Loss
Account ` 72,000 and General Reserve ` 3,40,000. Included in Sundry Assets were investments of
the face value of ` 30,000 carried in the books at a cost of ` 34,000. The company decided to
redeem the preference shares at 10% premium, partly by the issue of equity shares of the face
value of ` 1,20,000 at a premium of 10%. Investments were sold at 105% of their face value. All
preference shareholders were paid off except 3 holding 2500 shares. Give the necessary journal
entries bearing in mind that the Directors wanted a minimum reduction in free reserves, while
effecting the above transactions. Working should form part of your answer.
[Ans.: Amount paid to preference shareholders: ` 2,72,250]
8. Krishna Ltd issued 10,000 12% Debentures of `10 each at a discount of 6%. Applications were
received for 7,500 debentures. Journalise the transactions assuming all money has been received.
PART B
FUNDAMENTALS OF AUDITING
LESSONS
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
From the time of ancient Egyptians, Greeks and
10. Concepts of Auditing
Romans, the practice of auditing the accounts of
public institutions existed. Checking clerks were
11. Types of Auditing
appointed in those days to check the public
accounts. To locate frauds as well as to find out
12. Tools of Auditing whether the receipts and payments are properly
recorded by the person responsible was the main
13. Auditor and Related Provisions objective of Auditing of those days.
During the 18th century, the Company form of

organizations comes into existence. In these
companies capital is contributed by shareholders
but they do not have control over the day to day
working of the company. The shareholders who
have invested their money would naturally be
interested in knowing the financial position of the
company. This originated the need of an
independent person who would check the
accounts and report the shareholders on the
accuracy of the accounts and the safety of their
investment.
Now days many forms of organisations are

mandatorily required by the legislation to get their
accounts audited. So there is a need to have
understanding of the subject of auditing.
317
Lesson 10
Concept of Auditing
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Introduction The basic purpose of auditing is to confirm the

authenticity of books of accounts prepared by an
Accountant. It is well known saying that “where
– Meaning of Audit
the function of Accountant ends, audit begins to
determine the true and fair picture of such
– Principal aspects to be covered in audit
accounts”.
– Benefits of auditing Audit is performed to ascertain the validity and

reliability of information. Examination of books
of accounts with supporting vouchers and
– Limitations of auditing
documents in order to detect and prevent error
and fraud is the main function of auditing. Auditor
has to check the effectiveness of internal control
system for determining the extent of checking to
– Investigation
be done for carrying out the audit. Other than
internal control system auditor has to follow
– Difference between Auditing and certain other principal aspects of auditing. Audit
Investigation safeguards the financial interest of persons not
associated with the management like partners,
– Lesson Round UP shareholders, etc. Auditing also have some
inherent limitations such as the obtained
evidences are persuasive rather than conclusive.
– Glossary
Investigation and auditing are two different areas
not linked with each other.
In this lesson, you will learn the meaning of audit;
principal aspects of auditing, Benefits and
Limitations of audit and what is investigation and
how it is different from auditing.
I’m not suggesting there are any errors at all. I’m saying that without a proper audit, there’s no way to be
sure.
Pete Williams
Lesson 10  Concepts of Auditing 319
INTRODUCTION
The term ‘Audit’ originated from the Latin word “audire” means to hear. In earlier days, the accounts were
verified and certified by the auditors after hearing from the accounting parties. This manner of conducting
audit has been changed over the period of time.
No person or organization can effectively carry on its activities without the help of proper records and
accounts. The effect of all the transaction has to be recorded and analysed to see the results as regard the
business as a whole. Financial statement are often the basis for decision making by the management. The
management takes so many decisions on the basis of financial statements therefore the authenticity of
financial statements is very essential and such authenticity of accounts can be assured with the help of an
independent audit.
Audit is performed to ascertain the validity and reliability of information. Examination of books of accounts
with supporting vouchers and documents in order to detect and prevent error and fraud is the main function of
auditing. The goal of an audit is to express an opinion on the financial or non-financial areas. Audit
safeguards the financial interest of persons not associated with the management like partners or
shareholders, acts as a moral check on the employees and prevents from committing fraud. However, due to
constraints, an audit seeks to provide only reasonable assurance that the statements are free from material
error. In case of financial audit, a set of financial statements are said to be true and fair when they are free of
material misstatements. But recently, argument that auditing should go beyond just true and fair is gaining
momentum in view of recent frauds by high profile organizations in connivance with the reputed audit firms.
Traditionally, audits were mainly associated with gaining information about financial systems and the financial
records of a company or a business. However, recently auditing has begun to include non-financial subject
areas, such as safety, security, information systems performance, and environmental concerns. With non-
profit organizations and government agencies, there has been an increasing need for performance audit,
examining their success in satisfying mission objectives of business.
MEANING OF AUDITING
Audit deals with checking, verification and examination of accounts. The audit can be started only when the
accounting ends. There exists an interrelationship between accounting and auditing principles. Therefore it is
a fact that without the proper development of accounting principle, the development of auditing procedure and
principles is not possible. The term auditing is defined in various ways by different persons. Let’s have a look
at on these definitions;
Definition of Auditing
1. “An audit is an examination of such records to establish their reliability and the reliability of the
statement drawn from them”. – A.W. Hanson
2. “An audit is an examination of accounting records undertaken with a view to establishing whether they
correctly and completely reflect the transaction to which they relate. In some instances it may be
necessary to ascertain whether the transaction are supported by authority”. – L.R. Dicksee
3. “Auditing is the process by which a competent, independent person accumulate and evaluates
evidence about quantifiable information related to a specific economic entity for the purpose of
determining and reporting on the degree of correspondence between the quantifiable information and
established criteria”. – Arens and Loebbecke
4. “An audit denotes the examination of Balance sheet and profit and loss accounts prepared by others
together with the books, accounts and vouchers relating thereto in such a manner that the auditor may be
able to satisfy himself and honestly report that in his opinion, such Balance sheet is properly drawn up so
as to exhibit a true and correct views of the state of affairs of the particular concern according to the
information and explanations given to him and as shown by the books of accounts”. – F.R.M. De Paula
5. “Audit may be said to the verification of the accuracy and correctness of the books of accounts by an
independent person qualified for the job and not in any way connected with the preparation of such
accounts”. – R.B. Bose
320 FP-FA&A
Following features can be drawn out of the above definitions:
(i) Auditing is a systematic examination of accounts by an independent person to give transparent views
on books of accounts.
(ii) Time, extent and nature of audit depend upon effectiveness of internal control system of an
organization.
(iii) It may be done on test basis or in detail/in-depth examination of accounts.
(iv) Maintenance of accounts is the function of Accounting, auditing has nothing to do with it.
(v) Auditor has to report that accounts have been prepared as per Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles and presents a true and fair view of business operations.
In above discussion, the scope of auditing is restricted to financial information only but within the era of
globalization and technological advancement, today it extends to variety of non-financial areas as well. That is
how various expressions like Operational Audit, Process Audit, Secretarial Audit, Tax Audit, Efficiency Audit
etc. came into existence.
The term auditing is defined in broader sense in General Guidelines on Internal Auditing issued by the ICAI:
“Auditing is defined as a systematic and independent examination of data, statements, records, operations
and performances (financial or otherwise) of an enterprise for a stated purpose. In any auditing situation,
the auditor perceives and recognises the propositions before him for examination, collects evidence,
evaluates the same and on this basis formulates his judgment which is communicated through his audit
report.”
Thus, auditing can be defined as an independent examination of records whether financial or non-financial
maintained by the entity to express an opinion thereon, whether they comply with specific legislation
applicable to the entity.
PRINCIPAL ASPECTS TO BE COVERED IN AUDITING

The following aspects are required to be covered by an auditor while doing audit of any organization. The
principal aspects can also be called the functions of audit:
(i) Review of System and Procedures: Review of system and procedure is the primary function of auditing
exercise. First an auditor needs to understand the system and procedures adopted by the entity to go further
in the auditing exercise.
(ii) Review of Internal Control System: Review of internal control system is very important for the auditor as
the effectives of internal control system will determine the extent of checking to be done by the auditor. The
compliance test and substantive procedures performed by the auditor will determine the effectiveness of
internal control system. If internal control system is effective, less checking is required and vice-versa.
Moreover As per Company Audit report Order, 2003 also an auditor need to comment on the effectiveness of
Internal control system in the organization so the review of internal control is necessary for carrying out the
Auditing exercise.
(iii) Routine Checking/ Arithmetical Accuracy: It is the duty of the auditor to check the arithmetical
accuracy of the books of account by checking the proper posting and balances of the books of accounts.
(iv) Accounting Principles: Auditor has to ascertain whether proper distinction has been made between the
item of capital and revenue nature and also whether the item of income and expenditure of a particular period
has been adjusted in the books of accounts of that accounting period.
(v) Books and Statements: Auditor has to compare the balance sheet and profit and loss account or other
statement with the books of accounts and supporting vouchers to ascertain that the final accounts are been
made in accordance with the underlying records.
(vi) Verification of Assets: It is the duty of the auditor to physically inspect the assets and their recording in
the books of accounts and verify the legal and official documents to ascertain the existence, ownership,
possession, classification and valuation of assets of an entity.
(vii) Verification of Liabilities: It is the duty of the auditor to inspect the books of accounts and verify the
legal and official documents to ascertain the existence, obligation, completeness, valuation and disclosure of
liabilities of an entity.
(viii) True and Fair View: The auditor has to give its opinion whether the financial statements depicts the true
and fair view of the state of affairs of the organization.
(ix) Statutory Compliance: Auditor has to ensure that all the statutory requirements has been complied by
the entity like provisions of Income Tax Act, Companies Act and other acts if any applicable has been
complied by the organization.
(x) Reporting: The auditor has to report to the authority appointing him for conducting audit whether the
financial statements of accounts examined actually reveals true and fair view of the state of affairs and of the
profit or loss earned during the period by the organization.
BENEFITS OF AUDIT
(i) Satisfaction of Owner: It is because of audit that the owner will be satisfied about the business operations
and working of its various departments.
(ii) Detection and Prevention of Errors and Frauds: The errors whether committed innocently or
deliberately are discovered by the process of audit and its presence prevents their occurrence in the future.
No one will try to commit an error or fraud as the accounts are subject to audit and hence they will have a fear
of being detected. Just like errors, frauds are discovered by audit and its presence minimizes future possibility
if not eliminated totally.
(iii) Verification of Books: Another advantage of audit is the verification of the books of accounts, this helps
in maintaining the records up to date at all times.
(iv) Independent Opinion: Auditing is very useful in obtaining the independent opinion of the auditor about
business condition. If the accounts are audited by an independent auditor, the report of the auditor will be true
and fair in all respects and it will be of extreme importance for the management of the company.
(v) Moral Check: The process of audit will establish a check on the minds of the staff working in the business and
they will not be able to commit any irregularity, as they will have a fear and will also be aware that the accounts will
be examined in the near future and that action would be taken against them if any irregularity is discovered. Thus
the audit prevents the happening of any irregularity before it starts and the staff hence becomes more active and
responsible. The fear of their getting caught act as a moral check on the staff of the company.
(vi) Protection of the Rights and Interests of Shareholders: Audit helps in protecting the interests of
shareholders in case of joint stock company. Audit gives assurance to the shareholders that the accounts of
the company are being maintained properly and their interest will not suffer under any circumstances.
(vii) Reliance by Outsiders: Outsiders like creditors, debenture holders and banks etc. will rely on the books
of accounts and financial statements of the business if they are audited by an independent authority (external
auditor).
(Viii) Ensures Compliance with Legal Requirements: Audited statements are necessary to fulfill ceratin
legal requirements e.g. listing requirements of stock exchange etc.
(Ix) Reinforce and Strengthen Internal Control: Since auditing exercise involves the review of internal
control system, an auditor will identify the gaps in internal control system and can suggest the necessary
change in the internal control system.
(viii) Loan Facility: Money can be borrowed easily on the basis of audited balance sheet from financial
institutions. If accounts are audited the true picture will be visible to banks and it will be easy for them to issue
loans as early as possible.
LIMITATIONS OF AUDIT
Besides having various benefits, there are some inherent limitations of auditing. These are as follows:
(i) Higher Cost Burden: Due to Higher Cost Burden, the auditor limits his scope of work to selective testing
or sampling thus in depth checking of books of accounts is not possible.
322 FP-FA&A
(ii) Based on test checks. Generally an auditing exercise is based on test checking. Inferring a result on the
basis of test check always need not to be true.
(iii) Insufficient Time: Generally an auditor needs to release the report up to a specified timeline. Sometime
this timeline become a constraint for an auditor in carrying out the auditing exercise effectively. This time
constraint may affect the amount of evidence that can be obtained concerning events and transactions after
the balance sheet date that may have an effect on the financial statements. Moreover, there is a relatively
short time period available for resolving uncertainties existing at the financial statement date
(iv) Inconclusiveness of Evidences: The evidences obtained by an auditor are persuasive rather than
conclusive. For example, an architect’s certificate of valuation for a newly constructed building of a client may
not be conclusive evidence of the correct value of building.
(v) Based on Estimates: Estimates are an inherent part of the accounting process, and no one, including
auditors, can foresee the outcome of uncertainties. Estimate range from the allowance for doubtful accounts
and an inventory obsolescence reserve to impairment tests of fixed assets and goodwill. An audit cannot add
exactness and certainty to financial statements when these factors do not exist.
(vi) Based on the Information provided by the Management: The audit opinion is based on the information
provided by the management. Hence, outsiders cannot fully rely on the auditor’s report.
REVIEW QUESTION
1. The evidence obtained by an auditor is __________rather than conclusive.
2. The term ‘Audit’ originated from the Latin word “audire” means _________.
3. Auditing can be defined as an _______________ examination of records
(financial or non-financial).
4. If internal control system is effective, ___________ checking is required
and vice-versa.
INVESTIGATION
The investigation is related to critical checking of particular records. Investigation is done when a lapse
already exists to pin point the reason and person involved in it so that responsibility for such lapse could be
fixed whereas audit is a process to check whether the accounts are properly maintained as per required
norms following all the procedures etc. and to point out any lapses in this line. The purpose of auditing and
investigation is different.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN AUDITING AND INVESTIGATION
PARTICULARS INVESTIGATION AUDITING

1. Meaning Investigation implies systematic, An audit is independent
critical and special examination of examination of financial
the records of a business for a information of any entity, when
specific purpose. such an examination is conducted
with a view to expressing an
opinion thereon.
2. Mandatory Nature Voluntary Mandatory for Companies. For
others, it is voluntary.
3. Conducted by Any person, who may not be a A Chartered Accountant within
Chartered Accountant. the meaning of the Chartered
Accountants Act 1949.
4. Appointing Agency Owners or Management or even Owners/Shareholders of the
third parties may appoint the enterprise.
investigator.
5. Protection of Interests Work is carried out from the Work is carried out on behalf of
viewpoint of the appointing the owners, even if the power of
agency. appointment is delegated to say,
Board of Directors.
6. Scope and Coverage Specific – Seeks to answer only General – when compared to
those questions laid down in the investigation – seeks to form an
engagement letter. opinion on the Financial
Statements.
7. Period Covered Not necessarily restricted to a Generally a period of one
financial year. It can extend for a financial year.
period consisting of a number of
years.
8. Pre conceptions Its essence lies in going into the Audit is not based on suspicion
matter with some pre-conceived unless circumstances exist to
notion suited to the objective. arouse suspicion.
9. Evidence Seeks conclusive and Much of audit evidence is
corroborative evidence. persuasive rather than
conclusive.
10. Form of Reporting There is no statutory form of The matters to be covered in the
investigation report. audit report are sometimes
prescribed by law.
LESSON ROUND UP
– An Audit is an independent examination of financial or non-financial information of any entity; when
such an examination is conducted with a view to express an opinion thereon.
– Principal Aspects to be Covered in Audit: internal control system, review of system and
procedures, accounting principles, books and statements, verification of assets, verification of
liabilities, true and fair view, statutory compliance and report.
– Benefits of Audit: satisfaction of owner, detection and prevention of errors and frauds, verification of
books of accounts, independent opinion, moral check, protection of the rights and interests of
shareholders, ensures compliances with legal requirements, reinforce and strengthen internal control
system and reliance by outsiders
– Limitations of an Audit: Audit involves higher cost, audit involves reasonable length of time, based
on test checks, evidence obtained by an auditor are persuasive rather than conclusive, auditors cannot
determine the appropriateness of accounting estimates because of uncertainties involved in it and
audit is based on information provided by management.
– Difference between Investigation and Auditing: Investigation implies systematic, critical and special
examination of the records of a business for a specific purpose whereas audit is independent
examination of financial information of any entity, when such an examination is conducted with a view
to expressing an opinion thereon.
324 FP-FA&A
GLOSSARY
Connivance Agreement on a secret plot, collusion
Persuasive Intended or having the power to induce action or belief, convincing.
Conclusive Forming an end or termination; especially putting an end to doubt or question;
"conclusive proof"; "the evidence is conclusive"
GAAP Generally Accepted Accounting Principles, a collection of rules and procedures and
conventions that define accepted accounting practice; includes broad guidelines as well
as detailed procedures.
Statutory Relating to or created by statutes; "statutory matters"; "statutory law". Statute means a
law enacted by a government.
Corroborative To strengthen or support with additional evidence.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
1. What is the meaning of Auditing?
2. What are the principal aspects to be covered in auditing?
3. Why the need of auditing arises and what are benefits of auditing?
4. “The evidences obtained by the auditor are persuasive rather than conclusive”. Explain.
5. What do you mean by investigation and how it is different from auditing?
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Fundamentals of Auditing – By Kamal Gupta
2. Auditing: Principles and Practice - By Ravinder Kumar, Virender Sharma
3. An Insight into Auditing- By Dr. B. K. Basu
326 FP-FA&A
Lesson 11
Types of Audit
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Internal Audit In the last lesson the meaning, benefits and
– Advantages of Internal Auditing
limitations of audit is discussed. Here, we will see
– Benefits of Internal Auditing
the different types of audit. The requirement of
– Limitations of Internal Auditing
getting the books of accounts audited became
mandatory due to legislation. The nature and
– Financial Audit
scope of audit vary due to various factors such
– Secretarial Audit
as the size of organisation, the strength of internal
– Cost Audit
control system, legal requirement etc. In internal
– Tax Audit
Audit, the books of accounts may be audited by
internal department of the organisation while in
– Bank Audit
– Co-operative Society Audit other types of audit; such as statutory audit,
– Trust Audit secretarial audit, cost audit, tax audit, bank audit,
– Insurance Audit insurance audit, co-operative society audit, trust
– Partnership Audit audit, sole proprietorship audit etc. the audit is
– Sole Proprietorship Audit, etc. done by independent person. In internal audit the
– Government Audit area of work is determined by the management
– Management Audit whereas in other types of audit the area of work
– Functional Audit is determined by the legislation.
– Propriety Audit
In this lesson, you will learn the different types of
– Efficiency Audit
audit such as internal audit, financial audit, tax
– Lesson Round Up
audit, secretarial audit, cost audit, bank audit, trust
– Glossary
audit, insurance audit, etc.
Companies will not receive a rubber stamp certification; this is an in-depth program that requires an exhaustive
and thorough audit of one’s processes.
John Kania
328 FP-FA&A
INTRODUCTION
Up to early decades of Twentieth Century, Auditing exercise was considered limited to auditing of books of
accounts i.e. finance audit, internal audit. After the advancement of trade/technology various types of audit
have come into existence i.e. operation audit, management audit, efficiency audit, propriety audit, information
system audit etc. Types of audit depend upon various factors such as the nature of work undertaken,
approach used for conducting audit, organization structure, legal requirements etc. The different types of audit
have different objectives. Here, now we will study the different types of audit along with their characteristics,
merits and limitation.
TYPES OF AUDIT
Broadly, audit can be divided into two categories i.e. audit required under law and voluntary audit. Audit which
is prescribed by a statue/legislation includes Audit of Companies governed by the Companies Act, 1956,
Banking Companies, Electricity Supply Companies, Co-Operative Societies, Public and Charitable Trusts,
Corporation set up under Act of Parliament etc. Whereas voluntary audit includes Audit of Partnership Firm,
Sole Proprietorship, Hindu Undivided Families etc.
Further, audit can also be classified on the basis of methods used or scope of work defined under the audit.
These types of audit includes Internal Audit, Management Audit, Process Audit i.e. ISO audit, Functional
Audit, System Audit, Propriety Audit, Efficiency Audit etc.
Following types of audit are discussed from syllabus point of view:
– Internal audit
– Financial Audit
– Secretarial audit
– Cost audit
– Tax Audit
– Bank Audit
– Co-operative Societies Audit
– Trust Audit
– Insurance Audit
– Partnership Audit
– Sole Proprietorship Audit etc.
– Government Audit
– Management Audit
– Functional Audit
– Propriety audit
– Efficiency audit
Lesson 11  Types of Auditing 329
INTERNAL AUDIT
Internal audit is an evaluation and analysis of the business operation conducted by the internal audit staff. It is
the part of overall system of internal control established in an organization.
Internal audit is the independent appraisal activity within an organization for the review of accounting, financial
and other business practices as protective and constructive arms of management. It is a type of control which
functions by measuring and evaluating the effectiveness of other type of controls.
According to Professor Walter B. Meigs, Internal Auditing means “Internal auditing consist of a continuous,
critical review of financial and operating activities by a staff of auditors functioning as full time salaried
employees.”
In big organization, an internal audit is carried out by the team of professionals in the organization. The
internal audit is not mandatory but organization gets the internal audit done with a view to evaluate the
effectiveness of internal control, the soundness of financial system, effectiveness of business processes etc.
This provides management an assurance about the control process in the organization and it aids in early
detection of inefficiencies/fraud etc. it helps the statutory auditors too in getting the statutory audit done
effectively. As per company audit report order, 2003, statutory auditor also requires to comment whether the
company is having sound internal audit system or not.
OBJECTIVE OF INTERNAL AUDIT

(i) Proper Control: The purpose of internal Audit is to keep proper control over business activities. When
there is proper control there is maximum efficiency. The internal control can determine the degree of control
over work.
(ii) Accounting System: The purpose of internal audit is to evaluate the accounting system. It is concerned
with checking proper authority for transactions like purchase, retirement and disposal of fixed assets. The
voucher can be compared with entries in order to determine that figures and facts.
(ii) Help Management: The purpose of internal audit is to help the management. Internal auditor can point out the
weaknesses. The internal audit can be used as a tool to correct the situation. The management functions can be
performed properly.
(iv) Working Review: The purpose of internal audit is to review the working of business. The working of
current year can be reviewed in detail. There is a need to locate the weak points. The corrective measures
can be taken for proper working.
(v) Asset Protection: The purpose of internal audit is to protect the assets. The proper record of assets must
be there. Internal auditor can examine the valuation, verification and possession. The purchase and sale of
assets must be made under proper authority.
(vi) Internal Check: The purpose of internal audit is to evaluate the internal check system. There is division
of duties among the employees. When all staff member are working properly it means there is effective
internal check system. The work of an auditor is reduced. He can apply test checks to complete audit duty.
(vii) Fair Statements: The purpose of internal audit is to detect the error in the accounting records. The work
of internal audit can help the management to see that accounting record is in order.
(viii) Check Error: The purpose of internal audit is to detect the errors in the accounting records. If the work
of internal auditor goes side by side therefore there are minimum chances of errors. The accounting staff can
rectify mistake to prepare accounts at the end of year in order to help the external auditor.
(ix) Detect Fraud: The purpose of internal audit is to detect frauds in the books of accounting. When the work
of accounting staff is over the internal audit is started. Accounting staff remains alert because there is no time
gap between recording and checking. Thus detection of fraud is possible with it.
(x) Determine Liability: The purpose of internal audit is to determine liabilities of employees. The duties are
divided among the staff. It is easy to note the negligence on the part of employees. The internal audit can pin
point the person responsible for carelessness.
(xi) Help in Independent Audit: The purpose of internal audit is to help an independent audit. The external
auditor can rely on internal auditor and there is no need of cent percent checking. In this way there is saving
of time and money due to internal audit.
330 FP-FA&A
(xii) Performance Appraisal: The purpose of internal audit is to check the performance appraisal. The
management must achieve the targets fixed in budgets and plans. The internal audit is a tool to evaluate the
working of each management function.
(xiii) Provide Suggestions: The purpose of internal audit is to provide suggestions for improvement of
business activities. The internal audit staff can suggest the ways and means to remove the difficulties.
Anyhow the internal auditor cannot compel the management to implement suggestions.
(xiv) New Ideas: The purpose of internal audit is to seek new ideas relating to procedures, marketing,
financing and other business matters. The internal audit staff can provide new ideas about various business
matters. The viable ideas can be put in to practice for the benefit of business.
(xv) Use of Resources: The purpose of internal audit is to determine the proper use of resources. The
misuse of resources can increase the cost of doing the business. The proper use of resources means there is
efficiency on the part of management.
(xvi) Accounting Policies: The purpose of internal audit is to examine the accounting policies. The understanding
of accounting system and procedure is helpful to device the effective audit plans & procedures. The internal auditor
may find any weakness in the internal control. He can comment on the accounting policies.
(xvii) Special Investigation: The purpose of internal audit may be to conduct special investigation about any
business matter. Internal audit can be used as a tool to note the effectiveness of management function.
BENEFITS OF INTERNAL AUDIT

(i) Proper Accounting System: The benefit of internal audit is that proper accounting system is introduced.
Accounting system is a chain of activities in an entity by which transactions are processed for maintaining
financial record. There is a need of orderly devices to achieve desirable results.
(ii) Better Management: The benefit of internal audit is that there is better management of business concern.
The auditor can point out the weak areas of management. The goals of business can be achieved if there is proper
internal control, internal check and internal audit. It should be noted that management could rely on internal audit
for best results.
(iii) Progressive Review: The internal audit is beneficial to review progress of a business concern. The
figures of previous years are compared with this year. Moreover the performance result of similar companies
can be compared to determine the progress made by the entity. The management can review progress
through internal audit.
(iv) Effective Control: The internal audit is helpful to have effective control over business activities. Control is
a management function, which is related to supervision and direction of ongoing activities. The manager
concerned can remove the difficulties for smooth working of business.
(v) Assets Protection: The assets protection is possible through internal audit. The management can use
the assets for the benefit of business only. The assets cannot be used for private purposes. The
embezzlement of cash, misappropriation of stock and misuse of other assets is not possible as the internal
auditor keeps close watch over assets.
(vi) Division of Work: The internal audit is helpful to apply division of labour. The division of labour is
necessary to watch the activities of all employees including management. The auditor can suggest the way
and means to improve the performance of business.
(vii) No Error and fraud: The internal audit is used to protect accounting records from errors and fraud. The
accounting and auditing go side by side when accounting work is over the audit will start. In such situation
errors and fraud committed by the accounting staff will easily be detected and rectified.
(viii) Fixing Responsibility: Internal audit is used to fix the responsibility of people having poor performance.
The management establishes the performance standards. The internal auditor can evaluate the result of all
persons. The people can be held responsible for below standard work and action can be taken against them.
(ix) Helps External Auditing: The work performed by internal auditor can help external auditor in carrying
out the audit. The audit procedure of internal and external audit is almost the same. The auditor can go
through the internal audit report at the time of starting audit work. Anyhow external auditor is responsible for
external audit.
(x) Performance Improves: Internal auditor is helpful to improve the performance of the organization. The
achievements of previous year are the basis of preparing budget for the next years. The projected income
statement and balance sheet are drawn up. An attempt is made to get the positive result. Thus internal audit
improves performance of business and employees.
(xi) Proper Use of Resources: Internal audit is used to check the proper use of resources. The misuse of
resources can increase the cost of organization. The optimum use of resources can be determined to control
the cost of output. In this way internal audit is a tool to use the resources in the best interest of the business.
(xii) Investigation: Internal audit is of help to investigate in to the business matters. In case of doubt internal
auditor can be asked to examine the facts and figures to confirm or clear any doubt. The internal auditor can
investigate the matter in any manner. Such investigation can be made at the request of management or
owners.
LIMITATIONS OF INTERNAL AUDIT

(i) Staff Shortage: The limitation of internal audit is staff shortage. There may be need of reasonable audit
staff to examine the record. The shortage of staff is a hurdle to get benefit of internal audit.
(ii) Time Lag: The limitation of internal audit is that it starts when accounting ends. Thus there is a time lag
between recording and checking of entries.
(iii) Error: The limitation of internal audit is that there may remain undetected errors in the books of accounts
as it depends upon the expertise of internal audit staff to detect such errors. If audit staff is competent there is
less chance of error being undetected. In case of poor audit staff there is no guarantee that audited accounts
are free from errors.
(iv) Responsibility: The limitation of internal audit is that management may not feel their responsibility in
completing the audit formalities. The audit staff may give suggestion for proper working of business. The top-
level management may not pay attention to suggestions. In this way the audit work cannot help the business.
(v) Duties: If the duties of audit staff are not properly divided then the purpose of internal audit may be
defeated.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. The purpose of internal Audit is to keep proper ____________over

business activities.
2. Internal audit is conducted by ________________.
3. Internal audit is a part of _______________ system.
4. Time lag is one of the ____________ of Internal Audit.
FINANCIAL AUDIT
Independent financial audit is generally conducted to ascertain whether the Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss
Account presents a true and fair view of the financial position and working result of the organization under
audit. The need for financial audit arises as the control of the company is vested in the hands of the
management of the company and the financial statements are also prepared by the management. The
owners (shareholders), therefore, need assurance that the financial statements prepared by the management
are reliable. The opinion of the auditor—an independent expert—assures the owners about the reliability of
the financial statements. Similarly, investors wish to invest their moneys in the shares of companies on the
basis of their profitability and financial position. They will also place greater reliance on financial statements if
they have been audited. Other users of financial statements, e.g., trade creditors, banks, financial institutions,
tax authorities, other government authorities, labour unions, etc., also place greater reliance on audited
accounts.
332 FP-FA&A
Section 224 of the Companies Act 1956 contains provisions regarding the appointment of the auditor. As per
this section the auditor of any company can be appointed by the shareholders however in some cases the
auditor can be appointed by the directors or the central government.
SECRETARIAL AUDIT
Secretarial Audit is a compliance audit and it is a part of total compliance management in an organisation.
The Secretarial Audit is an effective tool for corporate compliance management. It helps to detect non-
compliance and to take corrective measures.
Secretarial Audit is a process to check compliance with the provisions of various laws
and rules/regulations/procedures, maintenance of books, records etc., by an independent professional
to ensure that the company has complied with the legal and procedural requirements and also followed
the due processes. It is essentially a mechanism to monitor compliance with the requirements of stated laws.
A Company Secretary in Practice has been assigned the role of Secretarial Auditor under section
2(2)(c)(v) of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980.
Ever-increasing complexities of laws and responsibilities of directors (especially non-executive directors)
make it imperative that a Practicing Company Secretary (PCS) reports whether or not there exists proper
compliance mechanism and systems in the corporate structure. PCS has also to verify whether diverse
requirements under applicable laws have been duly complied with or not and if there is a need for any
corrective measures or improvement in the system.
Secretarial Audit on a continuous basis would help the company in initiating corrective measures and
strengthening its compliance mechanism and processes. It is recommended that the Secretarial Audit be
carried out periodically (quarterly / half yearly) and adverse findings if any, be communicated to the Board for
corrective action.
The multiplicity of laws, rules, regulations, etc. has necessitated introduction of a compliance management
system to ensure compliances of laws applicable to a company. This has a two-fold objective:
(a) Firstly, to protect the interests of all the stakeholders;
(b) Secondly, to avoid any legal action against the company and its management.
As of now Secretarial Audit is not mandatory on the Companies. However, it is optionally undertaken by the
companies for maintaining good Corporate Governance practices.
COST AUDIT
The Institute of Cost and Works Accountants of India defines cost audit as “a system of audit introduced by
the Government of India for the review, examination, and appraisal of the cost accounting records and
attendant information, required to be maintained by specified industries.” According to CIMA, London, cost
audit is “the verification of the correctness of cost accounts and of adherence to the Cost Accounting plan.”
Thus cost audit comprises of:
(i) The verification of the cost accounting records such as the accuracy of the cost accounts, cost reports,
cost statements, cost data, costing techniques and
(ii) Examining these records to ensure that they adhere to the cost accounting, plans, procedures and
objectives.
Ministry of Corporate Affairs has issued mandatory cost audit orders on Companies engaged in Bulk drugs,
fertilization, sugar, telecommunications, industrial alcohol, and electricity & petroleum and if in immediate
previous year aggregate value of Net Worth exceeds the specified limits.
The cost auditor has to judge :
(i) Whether the planned expenditure is designed to give optimum results.
(ii) Whether the size and channels of expenditure were designed to produce the best results, and
(iii) Whether the return from expenditure on capital as well as current operations could be improved by
some other alternative plan of action.
Cost Audit is useful for the purpose of Cost Control; Cost reduction and proper utilization of scarce resources.
Moreover, cost audit also ensures that proper records are kept as to purchases and utilisation of material and
expenses incurred on wages, overheads, etc. It also ensures that the unit has been run economically and
efficiently.
TAX AUDIT
In India, the Income Tax Act, 1961, provides for the compulsory audit of the accounts of certain income tax
assessee whose turnover or receipts exceed the specified limits. The objective of such audit is to assist the
tax authorities in making the correct income tax assessment of the assessee concerned. The tax auditor has
to specifically report on certain transactions which have an effect on the income tax liability of the assessee
concerned and are, thus important to the tax authorities. The income tax act 1961 also contains various other
provisions whereby audit report is required to be submitted to get certain deductions, exemptions etc.
As per the income tax ax, every person carrying on business whose turnover or gross receipts exceeds `
60,00,000 (` 15,00,000 if carrying on profession) in the previous year shall get his accounts audited.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Section 224 of the Companies Act 1956 contains provisions regarding the
______________ of the auditor.
2. Secretarial audit is also termed as _____________ audit.
3. A _______________ has been assigned the role of Secretarial Auditor under
section 2(2)(c)(v) of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980.
4. _______________audit is useful for the purpose of Cost Control; Cost
reduction and proper utilization of scarce resources.
Bank Audit
The huge amount of public monies are handled by the banks make it imperative that the activities of
the industry are closely monitored and regulated without strangulating the spirit of entrepreneurship.
Audit forms an integral and important part of such monitoring and regulation. The Auditors have to certify
that statement of accounts of the bank as at the closure of the financial year reveal true and fair view of
the Bank' financial position, adequate provision for Non-Performing Asset(NPA)/bad debts has been
made in the books. All expenses/income have been duly accounted for and profit is correctly worked out. The
Banking Regulation Act, 1949 contains the provisions relating to the maintenance of accounts and their audit.
Co-Operative Society Audit

There are certain features of co-operative which are similar to those of companies. As in the case of
companies, in co operative societies also, there is a separation of ownership from management while the
capital of a co-operative society is contributed by all the members. The management of its affairs is in the
hands of only some of the members' elected for this purpose. This necessitates an independent financial
audit of accounts of co-operative societies. Considering this, audit of cooperative societies is required by law
in India. However, an important feature of co operative societies is that, unlike most companies, the affairs of
co-operative societies are often managed by persons who do not possess adequate managerial, technical or
accounting skills. The independent financial auditors of co-operative societies are, therefore, required to
report on some of these aspects also.
334 FP-FA&A
Trust Audit
Independent financial audit of trusts assures the creators of trust and/or those for whose benefit the trust is
created (i.e., beneficiaries) the financial statements of the trust are reliable. Therefore in many cases, it is
specifically provided in the relevant law and/or in the trust deed that the trustees shall get the financial
statements of the trust audited.
In India the Income-Tax Act, 1961, provides for non-inclusion of certain incomes of public trusts in their taxable
income. Many public trusts get their accounts audited pursuant to the requirement of the Income Tax Act, 1961.
Insurance Audit
The insurance audit is an examination of the operations, records and books of account of the insurance
company. Auditor performs an audit to ensure that the customer has paid the appropriate premium for risk
cover provided to him. The auditor should be conversant with the provisions of the Insurance Regulatory and
Development, Act 1999 which contains the provision of the maintenance of accounts and audit of the
insurance companies.
Partnership Firm Audit
At present, partnership firms in India are not legally required to get their financial statements audited. Still,
many firms get their financial statements audited as audited accounts helps in proper valuation of goodwill,
distribution of share of the deceased Partner to their legal heirs etc. The audited accounts are also useful to
get the loan sanctioned from the banks. The audit should be carried out as per the terms of partnership deed
and Partnership Act.
Sole Proprietorship Audit
Like partnership firms, sole proprietary concerns are also not legally required to get their financial statements
audited by independent financial auditors. However, many such concerns get their financial statements so
audited for the following reasons. Audit assures the proprietor that the accountant has maintained the books
and prepared the financial statements properly.
Government Audit
Government audit aims at ensuring that the financial transactions of the government are executed properly
under sanctions and authorities and are correctly recorded in the books of accounts. It is the duty of
Comptroller and Auditor General of India (C&AG) to audit the receipts and expenditure of the Union
Government and State Government.
Further, government audit also includes the audit of government companies conducted by C&AG in
accordance with the provisions of Companies Act, 1956 and other relevant legislations.
Management Audit
It is a structured review of the systems and procedures of an organization in order to evaluate whether they are
being conducted efficiently and effectively. A management audit involves establishing performance objectives,
agreeing the standards and criteria for assessment, and evaluating actual performance against targeted
performance Generally management audit/operational audit is not mandatory but it recommendatory certainly.
Functional Audit
In this form of audit, a function is analyzed thoroughly with respect to system, process, input and output. This
audit is being carried so as to evaluate the effectiveness of the department processes and for finding out the
gaps in desired output and actual output with reasons. After the function audit, proper systems are put in
place and gaps as identified are filled by way of corrective actions.
Propriety Audit
Under this type of audit, the expenditure is analyzed with a view to ascertain the cases of improper, avoidable
or in fructuous expenditure even though the expenditure has been incurred in conformity with the existing
rules and regulations. This audit is very important form of management audit and helps the management in
finding out the inefficiencies in the system.
Efficiency Audit
Efficiency audit or performance audit is a form of audit which is being carried out for ascertaining the
efficiency/performance of a system/process/input. This is being carried out to judge whether the result as
achieved are in conformity with set standards or not. Appraisal of how a particular activity is carrying out the
company's policies and procedures. Such review may cover any activity within a department, division, or local
area. A performance audit can be a review of a program to assure that it is satisfying its objectives. The
program may apply to management and accounting procedures, guidelines, or policies. The performance
audit may take into account the anticipated benefits of a program relative to the actual performance. Also
relevant may be the costs and time associated with the activity. A report of management's abilities is typically
prepared to meet particular goals. Included in the report are measures of the effectiveness of internal controls
and efficiency of procedures and processes. The performance audit may be initiated by the organization or by
external interested parties.
LESSON ROUND UP
In this lesson, we have discussed various types of audit such as internal audit, financial audit, secretarial
audit, cost audit, tax audit etc.
– Internal Audit- Internal audit is an evaluation and analysis of the business operation conducted by the
internal audit staff. It is the part of overall system of internal control established in an organization.
– Objective of Internal Audit- proper control, accounting system, help management, working review,
asset protection, internal check, fair statements, check error, detect fraud, determine liability, help in
independent audit, performance appraisal, provide suggestions, new ideas, use of resources,
accounting policies, special investigation.
– Benefits of Internal Audit- proper accounting system, better management, progressive review,
effective control, assets protection, division of work, no error and fraud, fixing responsibility, helps
external auditing, performance improves, investigation, proper use of resources.
– Limitations of Internal Audit- staff shortage, time lag, error, responsibility, duties.
– Financial Audit- Independent financial audit is generally conducted to ascertain whether the balance
sheet and profit & loss account present a true and fair view of the financial position and working result
of the organization under audit.
– Secretarial Audit- Secretarial Audit is a process to check compliance with the provisions of various
laws and rules/regulations/procedures, maintenance of books, records etc., by an independent
professional to ensure that the company has complied with the legal and procedural requirements and
also followed the due process. It is essentially a mechanism to monitor compliance with the
requirements of stated laws. A Company Secretary in Practice has been assigned the role of
Secretarial Auditor under section 2(2)(c)(v) of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980.
– Cost Audit- A system of audit introduced by the Government of India for the review, examination, and
appraisal of the cost accounting records and attendant information, required to be maintained by
specified industries.
– Tax Audit: The objective of such audit is to assist the tax authorities in making the correct income tax
assessment of the assesses concerned.
– Bank Audit: The Banking Regulation Act, 1949 contains the provisions relating to the maintenance of
accounts and their audit.
– Co-Operative Society Audit: The management of the affairs of the co-operative societies is in the
hands of only some of the elected members. This necessitates an independent financial audit of
accounts of co-operative societies.
– Trust Audit: It is specifically provided in the relevant law or in the trust deed that the trus-tees shall
get the financial statements of the trust audited.
– Insurance Audit: Insurance Regulatory and Development, Act 1999 contains the provision of the
maintenance of accounts and audit of the insurance companies.
336 FP-FA&A
– Partnership Firm Audit: At present, partnership firms in India are not legally required to get their
financial statements audited. Still, many firms get their financial statements audited
– Sole Proprietorship Audit: Like partnership firms, sole proprietary concerns are also not legally
required to get their financial statements audited by independent financial auditors.
– Government Audit: It is the duty of Comptroller and Auditor General of India (C&AG) to audit the
receipts and expenditure of the Union Government and State Government.
– Management Audit: It is a structured review of the systems and procedures of an organization in
order to evaluate whether they are being conducted efficiently and effectively.
– Functional Audit: In this form of audit, a function is analyzed thoroughly with respect to system,
process, input and output.
– Propriety Audit: Under this type of audit, the expenditure is analyzed with a view to ascertain the
cases of improper, avoidable or in fructuous expenditure even though the expenditure has been
incurred in conformity with the existing rules and regulations.
– Efficiency Audit: Efficiency audit or performance audit is a form of audit which is being carried out for
ascertaining the efficiency/performance of a system/process/input.
GLOSSARY
Constructive Arm Improve or promote development
Independence Free from the influence, guidance, or control of another or others; self-reliant:
an independent mind.
Practicing Company The member of ICSI who hold certificate of practice.
Secretary:
Check An action or influence that stops motion or expression; a restraint
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
1. What are the types of audit? Explain in brief.
2. What is meant by Internal Audit and what are its benefits and limitations?
3. What is meant by Financial Audit?
4. What is the difference between Internal Audit and Financial Audit?
5. What is Secretarial audit and who can be appointed as secretarial auditor?
6. What are the objectives of secretarial audit?
7. What do you mean by tax audit and on whom it is applicable?
8. What is cost audit and explain its usefulness in brief?
SUGGESTED READINGS
2. Auditing: principles and practice - By Ravinder Kumar, Virender Sharma
338 FP-FA&A
Lesson 12
Tools of Auditing
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Audit Plan In the last lesson the various types of audit have
– Audit Programme been discussed. In this lesson the steps taken

by the auditor while carrying out an audit will be
– Advantages of Audit Programme
dealt. Auditor uses various types of tools such
– Disadvantages of Audit Programme as audit plan, audit programme etc. for carrying
– Remedies of Disadvantages of Audit out an audit. An audit plan lays down the
Programme strategies to be followed for carrying out an audit.
– Difference between Audit Plan and Audit It is the first step of audit. After preparing an audit
Programme plan, the auditor will make an audit programme
which contains the instructions to be followed by
the audit staff. This helps auditor in proper
– Audit evidence
supervision of the audit. While doing an audit the
– Essentials of Audit evidence auditor has to collect evidences in support of his
– Factors considered while obtaining audit opinion. The audit evidence provides grounds for
evidence believing that a particular thing is true or not by
providing support for a fact or a point in question.
– Techniques of obtaining audit evidence
Audit working papers are used to support the
– Working papers
audit work done in order to provide assurance
– Types of working paper that the audit was performed in accordance with
– Review Questions the relevant auditing standards.
– Lesson Round-Up In this lesson you will learn how the Audit Plan is
important in an audit, the ways of laying down an
– Glossary
audit Programme, importance of evidence and
– Self-Test Questions working papers.
It’s an independent audit of the work and all the contracting issues to determine whether existing procedures
were complied with and whether there should be any changes in those procedures.
John Mullen
340 FP-FA&A
AUDIT PLAN
An audit plan lays out the strategies to be followed to conduct an audit. It includes the nature, timing and
extent of audit procedures to be performed by the engagement team members. The auditor shall develop an
audit plan while considering the following:
(a) The nature, timing and extent of planned risk assessment procedures.
(b) The nature, timing and extent of audit procedures at the assertion level.
(c) Other planned audit procedures that are required to be carried out so that the engagement complies
with Standard on Auditing (SAs).
The objective of the auditor is to plan the audit so that it will be performed in an effective manner.
The auditor should consider the following matters before planning for an audit:
(i) Terms of Engagement and any Statutory Responsibilities: While framing an audit plan auditor should
ascertain his terms of appointment and responsibilities cast by various legislations on him. The auditor should
then prepare his audit plan based on what he is required to do.
(ii) Nature and Timing of Report or other Communications: Auditor should determine the form and the
timing of the report. This will help auditor in determining the scope and time schedule of the audit.
(iii) Accounting Policies followed by the Enterprise and Change in those Policies: Accounting policies
followed by the enterprise affect the audit plan. While preparing an audit plan due consideration may be given
to the areas where there is any change in accounting policies.
(iv) Effect of New Accounting or Auditing Requirements: Any change in accounting and auditing
standards may affect the scope of audit or the manner in which it is conducted. Therefore these should be
carefully considered while drawing up the audit plan.
(v) Identification of Significant Audit Areas: It is important for the auditor to identify the areas which
involves greater audit risk, so that the audit can be planned in such a way that overall audit risk will be less.
More risky areas should be checked in detail and vice-versa.
(vi) Setting of Materiality Levels for Audit Purposes: At the planning stage the auditor sets the materiality
levels. For example the auditor may decide that in the case of audit of sales he will examine all sales
transactions above Rs.5000.
(vii) Degree of Reliance Expected to be placed on Accounting System and Internal Control: While
laying down an audit plan the auditor shall assess the effectiveness of accounting systems and internal
controls. On the basis of assessment, the auditor has to decide whether he will do test checking or more
extensive checking of transaction and balances.
(viii) Nature and Extent of Audit Evidence: The nature and extend of audit evidence will vary in different
auditing situations. For example in one situation the auditor may rely more on physical examination,
confirmation from third parties whereas in another situation he may rely more on examination of documentary
evidence.
(ix) Work of Internal Auditors: Statutory auditor has to review the work done by the internal auditors to
determine the extent of reliance they can place on. It will help the auditor in determining the scope of work
under the audit plan.
(x) Establishing and Coordinating Staffing Requirements: Auditor shall determine the exact requirements
of the staff along with the broad estimate of time required by each staff members. So that the audit work will
be completed on time.
AUDIT PROGRAMME
An audit programme is a set of instructions which are to be followed for proper execution of audit. After the
development of audit plan a detailed written audit programme containing the various steps and procedures
shall be required. The audit programme contains the measures that are generally employed to determine
Lesson 12  Tools of Auditing 341
what, and how much evidence must be collected and evaluated. It also lays down the responsibilities for the
whole audit team for carrying out different tasks.
The prepared audit program may be revised if needed in accordance with the prevailing circumstances. An
audit program largely depends on the size of the organization and other relevant factors. Minimum essential
work to be done is Standard Programme and rest is according to circumstances. There is no standard audit
programme applicable for all situations.
Audit programme is documented in the Audit Working Papers, which are the official record that contains the
planning and execution of the audit agreement.
ADVANTAGES OF AUDIT PROGRAMME
1. It helps in ensuring that all important areas are appropriately covered during audit.
2. It helps in distributing the work among the assistants in accordance with the level of their competence
and experience.
3. It provides instructions to the audit staff and reduces scope for misunderstanding.
4. It helps in fixing the responsibility for the work done among the audit staff as work done may be traced
back to the individual staff member.
5. It helps in assessing the progress of work by ascertaining what part of audit work has been completed
and how much is left.
6. It serves as evidence against charge of negligence.
7. On completion of an audit, it serves the purpose of audit record which may be useful for future
reference.
DISADVANTAGES OF AUDIT PROGRAMME
1. Rigidity: Audit programme loses its flexibility as it can not be same for different types of organisation.
Each business has separate problems. So a single/same audit programme can not be laid down for
each type of business.
2. Reduces the Initiative of Efficient Staff: It kills the initiative of capable persons. Assistant can not
suggest any improvement in the plan.
3. Audit Work becomes Mechanical: The Audit programme is mechanical that it ignores many other
aspects like internal control.
4. New Areas may be Overlooked: With the passage of time new problems arises during the audit may
be over looked in the audit Programme.
REMEDY OF DISADVANTAGES
1. The remedy in such situations is that audit programme should be flexible must be always opens to
changes and improvements.
2. The audit staff should be encouraged to draw attention of the auditor to any defects in the programme.
3. The staff should be encouraged to explore fully unusual transaction and do not get restricted with the
audit programme.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN AUDIT PLAN AND AUDIT PROGRAMME
Audit Plan Audit Programme

it lays down the audit strategies to be followed Audit programme is an outline of how the audit is to
for conducting an audit such as identifying the be done, who is to do what work and within what
areas where special audit consideration and skills time.
may be necessary, obtain the knowledge of
business etc.
342 FP-FA&A
Plans should be made to cover, among other things: It lays down the following audit procedure to be
followed:
i) Acquiring knowledge of accounting systems,
policies and internal control procedures i) Evaluation of internal control
ii) Establishing the expected degree of reliance ii) Ascertain arithmetical accuracy of books of
to be paced on the internal control accounts
iii) Determining the nature, timing and extent of iii) Vouching of transactions’
the audit procedures to be performed iv) Verification and valuation of assets and
iv) Co-ordinating the work to be done liabilities
v) Ledger scrutiny
vi) Checking of overall disclosure and
presentation of all items in the final accounts.
vii) Preparation and submission of audit report.
REVIEW QUESTION
1. At the ___________ stage the auditor sets the materiality levels.
2. While laying down an audit plan the auditor shall assess the
effectiveness of accounting systems and __________ _____.
3. An audit programme is a set of __________ which are to be followed for
proper execution of audit.
4. Audit programme is documented in the ______________, which are the
official record that contains the planning and execution of the audit
agreement.
AUDIT EVIDENCE
The auditor has to obtain sufficient and appropriate evidence to substantiate his opinion on the financial
statements. The audit evidence provides grounds for believing that a particular thing is true or not by
providing support for a fact or a point in question. The evidences collected by the auditor must support the
contents of the auditor’s report.
Essentials of good audit evidence

(a) Sufficient: The audit evidence are said to be sufficient when they are in adequate quantity. The audit
evidence enables the auditor to form an opinion on the financial information. Sufficient evidence can
be obtained by test checking instead of 100% checking.
(b) Reliable: Evidences obtained by auditor are persuasive rather than conclusive in nature therefore
evidence cannot be100% reliable. The reliability of audit evidence is depends upon:
(i) Source: whether the evidence obtained within the organisation i.e. internal and obtained from
outside i.e. external (confirmation by third party)
(ii) Nature: whether the evidence is verbal (explanation from clients staff), visual (physical
verification of stock) or documentary (bills attached to vouchers)
(c) Relevant: The obtained audit evidence must be relevant to the matter being checked. For e.g. the
balance stock in hand to be checked then the relevant evidence shall the physical verification.
The following rules of thumb have proven helpful in judging the appropriateness of evidence:
(a) documentary evidence is usually better than testimonial evidence;
(b) audit evidence is more reliable when the auditor obtains consistent evidence from difference sources
or of a different nature.
(c) original documents are better than photocopies;
(d) evidence from credible third parties may be better than evidence generated within the audited
organization;
(e) the quality of information generated by the audited organization is directly related to the strength of the
organization’s internal controls (the auditors should have a good understanding of internal controls as
they relate to the objectives of the audit); and
(f) evidence generated through the auditor’s direct observation, inspection and computation is usually
better than evidence obtained indirectly.
Important factors to be considers while obtaining audit evidence:
– the quality of the evidence (its relevance, reliability and validity);
– the level of materiality (Rupees terms) or the significance of the observation or conclusion (in general, the
higher the level of significance or materiality, the higher the standard that evidence will have to meet);
– whether an audit level of assurance (high) or a review level of assurance(moderate) is required (for
example, a higher level of assurance is required for evidence to support observations than is required
to support contextual information included in the report);
– the risk involved in making an incorrect observation or reaching an invalid conclusion (as an example,
if any risk of legal action against the auditee results from reporting an observation, the standard of
evidence demanded will be high); and
– the cost of obtaining additional evidence relative to likely benefits in terms of supporting observations
and conclusions (as in most things, diminishing returns apply in gathering audit evidence at some
point, incurring the cost of obtaining more evidence will not be justified by changes in the
persuasiveness of the total body of evidence).
TECHNIQUES OF OBTAINING EVIDENCE

(i) Inspection: Inspecting the documentary evidence like deed papers, certificates etc relating to the audit
whether in possession of the entity or the third parties.
(ii) Observation: Observing the process or procedure being performed by others. Like physical verification
and counting of inventory.
(iii) Enquiry: Enquiring from the client, his staff or third parties having knowledge about a particular item or
activity.
(iv) Confirmation: Seeking information from third party having knowledge about a particular transaction.
(v) Computation: It involves checking of the arithmetical accuracy of a source documents and accounting
records.
(vi) Analytical Review Procedures: Analysis of significant ratios and trends for investigating unusual
fluctuation and items.
(vii) Independent Execution: In this auditor performs the procedure and controls that were originally
performed as part of entity’s internal control system.
WORKING PAPERS
Audit working papers are the documents prepared or obtained by the auditors and retained by him in
connection with the audit. Audit working papers are used to support the audit work done in order to provide
assurance that the audit was performed in accordance with the relevant auditing standards. Working papers
include all the evidence gathered by auditor indicating what work has been done by him and the procedure he
has followed in verifying a particular asset or a liability and also provide information that whether:
– audit was properly planned;
– audit was carried out;
344 FP-FA&A
– audit was adequately supervised;
– the appropriate review was undertaken;
– the evidence is sufficient and appropriate to support the audit opinion.
Working papers are the connecting link between the client's records and the audited accounts. These provide
permanent historical record. These also serve as a great guide to the staff to whom the work of audit has been
assigned after the previous year audit. These would come to the help of the auditor in future in case the client
files a suit against the auditor's negligence. The working papers are the property of the auditor and the client
cannot ask the auditor for their custody. However it is the duty of the auditor to maintain confidentiality of the
client information. Further, if audit working papers are disclosed than it will amount to professional misconduct.
AUDIT WORKING
PAPERS
Clients Records
such as Journal, Link Between
ledgers, subsidiary Audit Report
books and other
books
Advantages of maintenance of working papers
1. Working papers helps in proper planning and performance of audit.

2. Seniors can supervise the audit work performed by the juniors by examining their working papers.
3. It provide as evidence of the audit work performed to support the auditor’s opinion.
TYPES OF WORKING PAPERS

The Auditors Working Papers are divided into two parts:
1. Permanent Audit file
2. Current Audit file
Permanent File
The data in these file are the information, which is of continuous interest and relevant to succeeding audits.
Data in this file can include the following:
– Articles of incorporation
– Loan agreements
– Documents related to understanding internal control
– Leases
– Significant audit observation of earlier years
– Notes regarding significant accounting policies
Current Audit File
These file contains information relating to the audit of the current period. Data in this file can include the
following:
– Financial statements and audit report
– Working trial balance and worksheets
– Adjusting journal entries and reclassification entries
– Audit programs
– Documentation of the consideration of internal control and the consideration of fraud risk factors
– Record of test of controls and substantive tests
– Record of audit exceptions and their resolutions
– Letters of attorneys, representation letter and
– Confirmation responses
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. The working papers are the property of the __________.
2. The auditor can divide his working papers into ________.
3. Current audit file contains information related to audit of _________.
4. ___________ refers to the extent to which the information bears a clear and logical
relationship to the audit criteria and objectives.
5. Documentary evidence is usually better than __________ evidence
LESSON ROUND UP
– An audit plan lays out the strategies to be followed to conduct an audit. It includes the nature, timing
and extent of audit procedures to be performed.
– The auditor should consider the following matters while laying out an audit plan:
(a) Terms of engagement and any statutory responsibilities.
(b) Nature and timing of report or other communications.
(c) Accounting policies followed by the enterprise and change in those policies.
(d) Effect of new accounting or auditing requirements.
(e) Identification of significant audit areas.
(f) Setting of materiality levels for audit purposes.
(g) Degree of reliance expected to be placed on accounting system and internal control.
(h) Nature and extent of audit evidence.
(i) Work of internal auditors.
(j) Establishing and coordinating staffing requirements.
– An Audit Programme is a set of instructions which are to be followed for proper execution of audit.
The audit programme contains the measures that are generally employed to determine what, and how
much evidence must be collected and evaluated. It also lays down the responsibilities for the whole
audit team for carrying out different tasks.
– Advantages of Audit Programme- It ensures that all important areas are covered during audit; it
distributes the work among the assistants as per their competence; it provides instructions to staff and
reduces scope for misunderstanding; it fixes the responsibility for the work done; it helps in assessing
the progress of work; it serves as evidence against charge of negligence; it serves the purpose of audit
record which may be useful for future reference.
– Disadvantages of Audit Programme- Loses its flexibility; It kills the initiative of capable persons; it is
mechanical; Not suitable for small audits; new problems arises may be over looked in the audit
Programme.
– Remedial Actions- Programme should be flexible, staff should be encouraged to draw attention to
any defects, The staff should be encouraged to explore fully unusual transaction,
346 FP-FA&A
– Audit Working Papers are the documents prepared or obtained by the auditors and retained by him
in connection with the audit. Working papers include all the evidence gathered by auditor.
– Advantages of Maintenance of Working Papers- They helps in proper planning and performance of
audit, seniors can supervise the audit work, It provide as evidence of the audit work performed.
– The auditor can divide his working papers into two parts:
(a) Permanent Audit File- The data in these file are the information, which is of continues interest
and relevance to succeeding audits.
(b) Current Audit File- These file contains information relating to the audit of the current period.
– Audit Evidence is information that is collected and used to provide a factual basis for developing
observations and concluding against audit objectives. Evidence provides grounds for believing that a
particular thing is true or not by providing persuasive support for a fact or a point in question. Audits
should have sufficient appropriate evidence to support the contents of the audit report. For evidence to
be appropriate, the information must be relevant, reliable and valid. The quantity of evidence is
sufficient if when taken as a whole its weight is adequate to provide persuasive support for the
contents of the audit report.
– Techniques of Obtaining Evidence: Inspection, Observation, Enquiry, Confirmation, Computation,
Analytical review procedures, Independent execution.
GLOSSARY
Standard of SAs are standard on auditing issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of
Auditing (SAs) India. They are the guidelines to conduct an audit.
Documentary Evidence in the form of written papers or documents.
Evidence
Testimonial Something that recommends a person or thing as worthy or desirable.
Evidence
Audit Risk Audit risk is the risk of the auditor providing an inappropriate opinion on the financial
statements, particularly when those financial statements contain a material
misstatement.
Analytical Any process by which a person or company looks at an account or financial
Review statement and attempts to identify any irregularities. This may involve comparing
financial and non-financial information. An analytical review is less thorough than an
audit.
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
1. What is audit plan and what are the factors to be considered while preparing an audit plan?
2. Write short notes on
(a) Permanent Audit File
(b) Current Audit File
3. What is Audit Programme and how it helps in performing an audit?
4. Explain briefly the utility of working papers?
5. Describe briefly the various techniques which an auditor applies to collect evidence?
SUGGESTED READINGS
348 FP-FA&A
Lesson 13
Auditor and Related Provisions
LESSON OUTLINE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
– Who is an Auditor
These days the focus of the government is on
– Appointment of Auditor
self regulation by the business community.
– First Auditors
Society also wants less intervention of the
– Subsequent Auditors
government in the functioning of the business.
– Filling of Casual Vacancy
Therefore various laws and legislation provide
– Power of the Central Government to
appoint Auditors for the appointment of independent auditor. The
– Qualification of Auditor appointment of auditor, his rights, duties and
– Review Questions functions are governed by the legislations under
– Disqualification of Auditor which he is appointed. The emphasis of all these
– Rights and Powers of Auditor regulation is that the auditor should be
– Duties of Auditor independent. In this chapter we have highlighted

– Auditors Report the provisions of Companies Act, 1956 relating
– Essentials of Auditors’ Report to the auditor and his reports.
– Specimen of Auditors’ Report
At the end of this Lesson you will learn who is an
– Auditors Opinion
auditor, how auditor can be appointed, what are
the qualification, rights and duties of the auditor,
– Lesson Round Up
meaning of auditors report and how and when
– Glossary
auditors will qualify his opinion.
– Self Test Questions
Laws continue to be enacted, and the regulatory environment has become more complex due to unacceptable
conduct remediation. Consequently, entities continue to be compelled to demonstrate compliance with legal
mandates through documented assurance assessments.
Robert E. Davis
350 FP-FA&A
WHO IS AN AUDITOR
A person who conducts an audit is an auditor. An auditor is a professional that accumulates and evaluates
evidence to report whether the company complies with the established set of procedures or standards. An
auditor may function as an employee or an independent professional. When the auditor works for the
organization, he or she is usually referred to as an internal auditor. The internal auditor often conducts
periodic audits that may encompass several areas on a rotating basis. As an example, the internal auditor
may focus on the manufacturing process during one quarter of the year, while devoting a second quarter to
evaluating the financial record keeping of the company. Often, the internal auditor will set up a schedule to
ensure that audits are conducted on each critical portion of the company at least once per calendar. So many
acts require the organizations to get their accounts audited by an independent external agency. This
independent external agency is known as External auditor of the organization. The external auditor has to
check the accounts of the organization, and their compliances to various rules and regulations. The idea
behind using an external auditor is that the audit will be free of bias and not influenced by office politics or
internal relationships that exist among the employees of the company. No connection to the company is
permitted, as it may be construed as biasing the auditor’s report. To be fair and equitable, an external auditor
should familiarize himself with the nature of the business he is auditing prior to starting the job.
APPOINTMENT OF AUDITOR
Section 224 of the Companies Act 1956 contains provisions regarding the appointment of the auditor. As per
this section the auditor of any company can be appointed by the shareholders however in some cases the
auditor can be appointed by the directors or the central government.
The provisions with regard to the appointment of an auditor can be divided into three categories:
– First auditor
– Subsequent auditor
– Filling of casual vacancy
– Power of the Central Government to appoint Auditor.
Appointment of First Auditor

Section 224(5) provides that the first auditor or auditors are to be appointed by the Board of directors within
one month of the date of the registration of the company. The auditor so appointed shall hold office till the
conclusion of first Annual General Meeting (AGM). Company is not required to send any intimation of
appointment to first auditor to the Registrar of companies.
In case the Board of directors fails to appoint the first auditors within one month of its incorporation, the
company in general meeting may appoint the first auditors.
Subsequent Appointment of Auditor

Section 224(1) provides that every company must appoint an auditor or auditors at each annual general
meeting to hold office from the conclusion of that annual general meeting until the conclusion of the next
annual general meeting, and must, within 7 days of the appointment, give intimation thereof to the auditors so
appointed. As per Section 224(1A), every auditor so appointed must, within 30 days of the receipt from the
company of the intimation of his appointment, inform the Registrar in writing in Form No. 23B that he has
accepted the appointment or refused it.
Filling of Casual Vacancy

Sub-section (6) of Section 224 provides that the casual vacancy in the office of auditor may be filled by the Board.
But where the vacancy is caused by resignation of auditor, such vacancy shall only be filled by the company in
general meeting. The remaining auditor or auditors may act notwithstanding the casual vacancy. The auditor
appointed in the casual vacancy holds office till the conclusion of the next annual general meeting.
“Casual Vacancy” means vacancy created by the auditor ceasing to act after being validly appointed and
Lesson 13  Auditor and Related Provisions 351
acceptance of appointment. For example, vacancy arises due to resignation, death or disqualification of auditor
etc.
Power of the Central Government to Appoint Auditor

If no auditors are appointed or re-appointed at the annual general meeting, the Central Government may appoint
a person to fill the vacancy [Section 224(3)]. The company is required to give within one week notice to the
Central Government that the power has become exercisable. If a company fails to give such notice, then the
company and every officer of the company who is in default shall be punishable with fine upto Rs. 5000.
Qualification of Auditor
Section 226 contains provision as regards qualifications and disqualifications of auditors. These apply to all
companies whether public or private or Section 25 companies or a Government company.
Section 226 provides that only a Chartered Accountant in practice within the meaning of Chartered
Accountants Act, 1949 can act as an auditor of a limited company. A firm whereof all the partners are
practicing Chartered Accountants can be appointed by its firm name as auditor in which case any partner may
act in the name of the firm.
Disqualification of Auditor
Section 226(3), of the companies act, 1956 defines disqualification of the auditor in a negative sense. As per
this section none of the following shall be qualified for appointment as auditor of a company:
1. A body corporate; (because of Limited Liability Concept)
2. An officer or employee of the company (‘officer’ includes director, manager or secretary);
3. A person who is a partner or who is in the employment, of an officer or employee of the company;
4. A person who is indebted to the company for more than Rs. 1,000/- or who has guaranteed the
repayment of any debt of more than Rs. 1,000/- due to the company by a third person;
5. A person holding any security of that company after a period of one year from the date of
commencement of the Companies (Amendment) Act, 2000 i.e. 13 December, 2000 [Section 226(4)].
6. A person who is disqualified for appointment as auditor of the company’s subsidiary or holding
company, or a subsidiary of its holding company.
The Department of Company Affairs vide Circular No. 5/77 dated 8.4.1977 has clarified that a statutory
auditor cannot act also as internal auditor of the company.
Other Disqualifications
(a) If a partner is disqualified, then the firm will automatically be disqualified,

(b) In case of insolvency or unsound mind, a person ceases to be a member of ICAI, so he will
automatically be disqualified for appointment as an auditor.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. Section __________ of the Companies Act 1956 contains provisions
regarding the appointment of the auditor.
2. Is there any need to send any intimation of appointment to the
Auditor, true or false.
3. As per Section 224(1A), every auditor appointed under section 224(1)
must, within ________ days of the receipt from the company of the
intimation of his appointment, inform the Registrar in writing in Form No.
____________that he has accepted the appointment or refused it.
4. A person who is indebted to the company for more than Rs. _________
is disqualified for appointment as auditor.
352 FP-FA&A
RIGHT AND POWERS OF AUDITOR
The various rights and powers enjoyed by the auditors under the Companies Act, 1956 are as follows:
(i) Right to Access to Books, Accounts and Vouchers: The auditor of a company shall have right of
access, at all times, to the books, accounts and vouchers of the company, whether kept at the head
office of the company or elsewhere.
(ii) Right to obtain Information and Explanation: The auditor shall be entitled to require from the officers of
the company such information and explanation as he thinks necessary for the performance of his
duties as auditor. The Article of Association of a company cannot preclude the auditor team from
availing himself of all information which is material to enable him to make his report and from fulfilling
his statutory duties to the shareholders. In case the information is not supplied to the auditor, he can
report the same to the members.
(iii) Right to Sign the Audit Report: Only the person appointed as auditor of the company, or where a firm
is so appointed, only a partner in the firm practicing in India, may sign the auditor’s report, or sign or
authenticate any other document of the company required by the law to be signed or authenticated by
the auditor.
(iv) Right to Receive Notice of and Attend General Meeting: The auditors have the right to attend any
general meeting and to receive any notice and other communications relating thereto which members
are entitled to receive and to be heard at any general meeting on any part of the business which
concerns them as auditors.
(v) Right to visit Branch Office and right of Access to Books: Where the accounts of any branch office are
audited by a person other than the company’s auditor, the company’s auditor
(a) shall be entitled to visit the branch office, if he deems it necessary to do so for the performance of
his duties as auditor; and
(b) Shall have a right of access at all times to the books and accounts and vouchers of the company
maintained at the branch office.
(vi) Right to Receive Remuneration: The auditor shall have the right to receive remuneration for auditing
the accounts of the company.
DUTIES OF AUDITOR
The duties of an auditor are many and varied. He must examine the original books of account, kept by
the company to discover any inaccuracies or omissions therein, to examine the company’s balance sheet
and profit and loss account, and report on the original books of account and the annual accounts to the
members.
Section 227(1A) requires an auditor to inquire:
(a) whether loans and advances made by the company on the basis of security have been properly
secured and whether the terms on which they have been made are not prejudicial to the interests of
the company or its members;
(b) where the transactions of the company which are represented merely by book entries are not
prejudicial to the interests of the company;
(c) where the company is not an investment or a banking company, whether so much of the assets of the
company as consists of shares, debentures and other securities have been sold at a price less than
that at which they were purchased by the company;
(d) whether loans and advances made by the company have been shown as deposits;
(e) whether personal expenses have been charged to revenue accounts;
(f) whether cash has actually been received in respect of any shares shown in the books to have been
allotted for cash;
(g) Whether the position as stated in the books is correct, regular and is not misleading.
Auditor will report on these points only if he has a special comment to make otherwise will not make any
comment.
AUDITORS REPORT
Under Section 227(2) of the Companies Act, 1956, it is the duty of the auditor to make a report to the
members of the company on the accounts examined by him, and on every balance sheet, every profit and
loss account and on every other document declared by the Act to be part of or annexed to the balance sheet
or profit and loss account and laid before the company in general meeting during his tenure of office. The
report, besides other things necessary in any particular case, must expressly state:
(1) Whether, in his opinion and to the best of his information and according to explanation given to him,
the accounts give the information required by the Act and in the manner as required;
(2) Whether the balance sheet gives a true and fair view of the company’s affairs as at the end of the
financial year and the profit and loss account gives a true and fair view of the profit or loss for the
financial year;
(3) Whether he has obtained all the information and explanations required by him for the purposes of his
audit;
(4) Whether, in his opinion, proper books of account as required by law have been kept by the company, and
proper returns for the purposes of his audit have been received from the branches not visited by him;
(5) Whether the company’s balance sheet and profit and loss account dealt with by the report are in
agreement with the books of account and returns.
(6) Whether in his opinion, the profit and loss account and balance sheet comply with the accounting
standards referred to in Sub-section (3C) of Section 211;
(7) In thick type or in italics the observation or comments of the auditors which have any adverse effect on
the functioning of the company.
(8) Whether any director is disqualified from having appointed as director under clause (g) of 274 (1).
Sections 227(4) states that where any of the above matters is answered in the negative or with a qualification,
the auditor’s report must state the reason for the same.
Under Sub-section (4A) of Section 227 the Central Government is empowered to issue order requiring the
auditor to include in his report a statement on such matters as may be specified. In exercise of this power the
Central Government had issued an order called Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order, 2003. It is the duty of
the auditor to comply with this order when making his report to the shareholders.
Auditor's report is the expert's opinion expressed by the auditor as to the fairness of financial
statements.
The audit report is the end product of every audit. It is the medium through which an auditor expresses his
opinion on the financial statements. Audit report is an important part of audit process since it summarize the
results of the examination work conducted by the auditor. The report shows the scope of the work done and
the responsibility assumed by the auditor regarding the fairness or otherwise of the financial statements. The
auditor draws appropriate conclusions by examining the various statements and accounts, which he conveys
through the audit report. It is a formal communication by the auditor to the shareholders throwing light on the
state of affairs of the company. Audit report is addressed to the members of the company and is considered
at the Annual General meeting of the company. Audit reports should be so drafted that they remain simple
and intelligible to a common man. The audit report should be explicit so as to provide greater information and
protection to the interest of shareholders and others.
Essentials of Audit Report
(i) Title: An auditor report must have appropriate title, such as "Auditor's Report". It is helpful for the
reader to identify the auditor's report. It is easy to distinguish it from other reports. The management
can issue any report about the business performance. The title o the report is essential.
354 FP-FA&A
(ii) Addressee: The addressee may be shareholder or board of director of a company. The auditor can
audit financial statements of any business unit as per agreement. The report should be appropriately
addressed as required by engagement letter and legal requirements. The report is usually addresses
to the shareholders or the board of directors.
(iii) Identification: The audit report should identify the financial statement that have audited. The financial
statement may include trading profit and loss accounts, balance sheet and statement of changes in
financial position and sources and application of cash flow statement. The report should include the
name of the entity. Moreover the data and period covered by the financial statement are also stated in
it.
(iv) Reference to Auditing Standards: The audit report should indicate the auditing standard or practice
followed in conducting the audit. The international auditing guidelines need assurance that the audit
has been conducted as per set standards.
(v) Opinion: The auditor's report should clearly state the auditor's opinion on the presentation in the
financial statement of the entity's financial position and the result of its operations. The statement give
a true and fair view is an auditor's opinion. This opinion is usually based on national standard or
international accounting standards.
(vi) Signature: The audit report should be signed in the name of the audit firm, the personal name of the
auditor or both as appropriate.
(vii) Auditor's Address: The address of auditor is stated in the audit report. The name of city is stated in
the report for information of the readers.
(viii) Date of Report: The auditor’s report shall be dated not earlier than the date on which the auditor has
obtained sufficient appropriate audit evidence and date on which accounts are approved by the
management.
SPECIMEN OF AUDITORS REPORT
Auditor’s Report
To the shareholders of___________ (Company Name)
1. We have audited the attached balance sheet of ____________________ (Company name), as
at______________ (Balance Sheet date), the Profit and Loss Account and also the cash flow statement for
the period ended on that date annexed thereto. These financial statements are the responsibility of the
Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on
our audit.
2. We conducted our audit in accordance with the auditing standards generally accepted in India. Those
Standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the
financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis,
evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as
evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis
for our opinion.
3. In accordance with the provision of section 227 of the Companies Act, 1956, we report as under:
(i) We have obtained all the information and explanations, which to the best of our knowledge and belief
were necessary for the purposes of our audit;
(ii) In our opinion, proper books of account as required by law have been kept by the Company so far as
appears from our examination of those books;
(iii) The balance sheet, profit and loss account and cash flow statement dealt with by this report are in
agreement with the books of account;
(iv) In our opinion, the balance sheet, profit and loss account and cash flow statement dealt with by this
report comply with the accounting standards referred to in sub-section (3C) of Section 211 of the
Companies Act, 1956;
(v) On the basis of written representations received from the directors, as on ___________ (Balance
Sheet date) and taken on record by the Board of Directors, we report that none of the directors were
disqualified as on ___________ (Balance Sheet date) from being appointed as a director in terms of
clause (g) of sub-section (1) of section 274 of the Companies Act, 1956;
(vii) In our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us, the said
accounts give the information required by the Companies Act, 1956, in the manner so required and
give a true and fair view in conformity with the accounting principles generally accepted in India:
(a) in the case of the balance sheet, of the state of affairs of the Company as at ___________
(Balance Sheet date).
(b) in the case of the profit and loss account, of the profit for the period ended ___________
(Balance Sheet date); and
(c) in the case of the cash flow statement, of the cash flows for the period ended on ___________
(Balance Sheet date).
Sd/--------------------
Place:
Date: (Firm name)
(Name of partner)
AUDITORS OPINION
In financial accounting, an auditor's opinion is the published outcome an auditor's review of a company's or
organizations financial statements. The auditor's opinion does not pass judgment on the organization's
financial position or financial performance or otherwise interpret the financial data.
In the audit opinion, the auditor states that he or she has examined the client's financial statements for the
year ended in accordance with the generally accepted accounting principles including tests of the accounting
records and other necessary auditing procedures. The auditor then indicates whether in his or her opinion the
client's financial statements present fairly the financial position, results of operations, and changes in financial
position for the year-ended in conformity with Accounting Principles applied on a consistent basis. The
Auditors opinion may be of the following types:
– Unqualified opinion
– Adverse opinion
– Qualified opinion, and
– Disclaimer of opinion
Unqualified Opinion
Where auditor does not have any reservation, objection regarding the information under audit, then he issues
an unqualified opinion. This opinion signifies that the auditor accepts the accounting treatment given to the
various transactions and the profit and loss account shows the true and fair view of the transaction entered by
the organization during the period and the balance sheet shows the true and fair view of the state of affairs of
the organization at that point of time. It is also Know as “Clean report”
Adverse or Negative Opinion

Where as a result of the examination of the books of accounts, the auditor concludes that he does not agree
with the true and fair view of financial statements under audit, he express adverse opinion or negative
opinion. The adverse opinion is appropriate in circumstances where the auditor has reservation on matters
such as the accounting policies selected and their application, adequacy of disclosures made and where the
auditor considers that the impact of reservation or qualification is so material and pervasive that the financial
statements as a whole do not give a true and fair view.
356 FP-FA&A
Where auditor expresses an adverse opinion, he should also state in his report the reason for the same, so
that the readers can assess their significance and effect.
Qualified Opinion
In a situation where neither the unqualified, nor adverse opinion is appropriate the auditor gives the qualified
opinion. This is a situation where the auditor has some reservation about the financial statements which
though significant but not that significant so as to warrant adverse opinion and auditor agrees to a large extent
with the true and fair view of the financial statement then he gives qualified opinion. As per this opinion
subject to certain reservation or qualification stated, the auditor agrees with the proposition stated in the
financial statements.
Where auditor expresses a qualified opinion, he should also state in his report the reason for the same, so
that the readers can assess their significance and effect. The words “Subject to” are written to show
qualification. If the qualification are quantifiable (measurable) then the auditor has to quantify it. And if these
are not quantifiable, Auditor has to clearly state that quantification is not possible.
Disclaimer of Opinion
The above three are the opinions which the auditor expresses but the disclaimer of opinion is a situation when
auditor is not in a position to give his opinion. Where there is a situation where auditor is not in a position to
collect sufficient appropriate audit evidence which enables him to draw his conclusion then it is proper for the
auditor to disclaim an opinion due to lack of sufficient appropriate audit evidence.
Where auditor expresses a disclamer of opinion, he should also state in his report the reason for the same, so
that the readers can assess their significance and effect.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Fill in the blanks
1.The auditor’s report is to be laid before the company in
_________________meeting.
2. Where auditor does not have any reservation, objection regarding the
information under audit, then he issues ________________opinion.
3.In a situation where auditor is not in a position to collect sufficient
appropriate audit evidence to draw conclusion then auditor gives
______________ of opinion.
LESSON ROUND UP
– An auditor is a professional that accumulates and evaluates evidence to report whether the company
complies with the established set of procedures or standards. When the auditor works for the
organization, he or she is usually referred to as an internal auditor. Where as independent external
agency is known as External auditor of the organization.
– The provisions with regard to the appointment of an auditor can be divided into three categories:
– First auditor- By the Board of directors within one month of the date of the registration of the
company.
– Subsequent Auditor- every company must appoint an auditor or auditors at each annual general
meeting
– Filling of Casual Vacancy- casual vacancy in the office of auditor may be filled by the Board.
But where the vacancy is caused by resignation of auditor, such vacancy shall only be filled by
the company in general meeting.
– Power of the Central Government to Appoint Auditors- If no auditors are appointed or re-appointed
at the annual general meeting, the Central Government may appoint a person to fill the vacancy
– Qualification of Auditor- Only a Chartered Accountant in practice within the meaning of Chartered
Accountants Act, 1949 can act as an auditor of a limited company. A firm whereof all the partners are
practicing Chartered Accountants can be appointed by its firm name as auditor in such case any
partner may act in the name of the firm.
– Disqualification of Auditors- None of the following shall be qualified for appointment as auditor of a
company: A body corporate; An officer or employee of the company (‘officer’ includes director,
manager or secretary); A person who is a partner or who is in the employment, of an officer or
employee of the company; A person who is indebted to the company for more than Rs. 1,000/- or who
has guaranteed the repayment of any debt of more than Rs. 1,000/- due to the company by a third
person; A person holding any security of that company after a period of one year from the date of
commencement of the Companies (Amendment) Act, 2000 i.e. 13 December, 2000; A person who is
disqualified for appointment as auditor of the company’s subsidiary or holding company, or a
subsidiary of its holding company; Statutory auditor cannot act as internal auditor of the company.
– Right and powers of Auditors- Right to access to books, accounts and vouchers; Right to obtain
information and explanation; Right to sign the audit report; Right to receive notice of and attend
General Meeting; Right to receive remuneration; Right to visit branch office and right of access to
books.
– Duties of Auditors- An auditor to inquire: whether loans and advances made by the company are
properly secured and the terms on which they have been made are not prejudicial to the company;
book entries transactions are not prejudicial to the interests of the company; in case of non-investment
or a banking company, whether shares, debentures and other securities have been sold at a price less
than its purchase price; whether loans and advances made by the company have been shown as
deposits; no personal expenses has been charged to profits; whether cash has actually been received
in respect of any shares shown in the books to have been allotted for cash; Whether the books are not
misleading.
– Auditors Report- The report must expressly state: Whether, in his opinion the accounts give the
information required by the Act and in required manner; Whether the balance sheet and profit and
loss account gives a true and fair view; Whether he has obtained all the information and explanations
required; Whether, in his opinion, proper books of account as required by law have been kept by the
company, and proper returns for the purposes of his audit have been received from the branches not
visited by him; Whether the company’s balance sheet and profit and loss account are in agreement
with the books; Whether in his opinion, the profit and loss account and balance sheet comply with the
AS; Auditor’s observation or comments; Whether any director is disqualified from appointment; reason
for negative answers.
– Essentials of Audit Report- Title; Addressee; Identification; Reference to Auditing Standards;
Opinion; Signature; Auditor's Address; Date of Report.
– Types of auditor opinion- Unqualified opinion; Adverse or Negative Opinion; Qualified Opinion;
Disclaimer of opinion.
GLOSSARY
Body Corporate group of persons incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956 to carry out a
specific enterprise and having limited liability.
Indebted Money borrowed, an obligation to repay an amount you owe
Annual General Statutory meeting of the directors and shareholders of a company or of the
Meeting members of a society, held once every financial year, at which the annual report is
presented required under the Companies Act, 1956
Board Meeting Meeting of directors of the Company.
358 FP-FA&A
SELF-TEST QUESTIONS
1. Who can be appointed as the auditor of a company?
2. How the first auditor of the company is appointed?
3. What is a casual vacancy? What are the rules regarding appointment for the casual vacancy on
account of resignation?
4. What are the powers of the company auditor?
5. Can a company restrict the rights of its statutory auditor?
SUGGESTED READINGS
Test Papers 359
FOUNDATION PROGRAMME
FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING AND AUDITING

TEST PAPER 1/2012
(This Test Paper is for practice and self study only and not to be sent to the Institiute)
Time Allowed : 2 Hours Maximum Marks : 100

[Attempt all questions. Each question carries 1 Mark. There is no negative mark for incorrect answers.]
PART A
1. Accounting standards are:

(a) written policy documents issued by expert accounting body
(b) set of broad accounting policies to be followed by an entity.
(c) set in the form of general principles.
(d) All of the above.
2. X and Y are partners with capitals of A10,000 and A20,000 respectively and sharing profits equally. They
admitted Z as their third partner with one-fourth profits of the firm on the payment of A12,000. The amount
of hidden goodwill is:
(a) 6,000.
(b) 10,000.
(c) 8,000.
(d) None of the above.
3. Which account is the odd one out?
(a) Office Furniture & Equipment.
(b) Freehold Land and Buildings.
(c) Stock of raw materials.
(d) Plant and Machinery.
4. Purchases book records:
(a) All cash purchases only.
(b) All credit purchases only.
(c) Credit purchases of goods in trade only.
(d) Both cash and credit purchases.
5. Trial balance is a statement which shows the total of the ________or the ________balances of all the
accounts.
(a) Opening, Closing
360 FP-FA&A
(b) Current, Future.

(c) Debit, Credit.
(d) Cash, bank
6. Contra entries are passed only when
(a) Double column cash book is prepared
(b) Three-column cash book is prepared
(c) Simple cash book is prepared
(d) None of the above
7. Mr. Anand buys goods of A2,50,000 paying cash A2,00,000. What is the amount of expense as per the
accrual concept?
(a) A2,50,000.
(b) A2,00,000.
(c) A50,000.
(d) Nil.
8. Profit or loss on revaluation at the time of admission of partner, is shared among the partners in _______
ratio.
(a) Old Profit Sharing.
(b) New Profit Sharing.
(c) Capital.
(d) Equal.
9. All of the following errors do not affect the trial balance, except
(a) Compensating errors.
(b) Errors of complete omission.
(c) Errors of partial omission.
(d) Errors of principle.
10. Errors are ________ mistakes.
(a) Intentional.
(b) Unintentional.
(c) Undetected.
(d) None of the three.
11. Which of the following is an example of capital expenditure?
(a) Drawings Account
(b) Outstanding Expenses Account
(c) Machinery Account
(d) Debtors Account
Test Papers 361
12. Interest on capital will be paid to the partners if provided for in the agreement but only from________
(a) Profits.
(b) Reserves.
(c) Accumulated Profits.
(d) Goodwill.
13. Present liability of uncertain amount, which can be measured reliably by using a substantial degree of
estimation, is termed as ________
(a) Provision
(b) Liability
(c) Contingent liability
(d) Reserve
14. If a purchase return of A94 has been wrongly posted to the debit of the sales return account, but had been
correctly entered in the suppliers account, the total of the trial balance would show
(a) the credit side to be A94 more than debit side.
(b) the debit side to be A94 more than credit side.
(c) the credit side to be A188 more than debit side.
(d) the debit side to be A188 more than credit side.
15. X and Y are partners with the capital A1,50,000 and A1,40,000 respectively. They share profits and losses
equally. Z is admitted on bringing A1,50,000 as capital only and nothing was bought against goodwill.
Goodwill in Balance sheet of A20,000 is revalued as A35,000. What will be value of goodwill in the books
after the admission of Z?
(a) A55,000.
(b) A35,000.
(c) A20,000.
(d) A15,000
16. The profits of last three years are A43,000; A38,000 and A45,000. Find out the goodwill if it is valued at two
years purchase of average profits.
(a) A42,000.
(b) A84,000.
(c) A1,26,000.
(d) A36,000.
17. If capital employed by a partnership firm is A1,00,000 and its average profit is A20,000 normal rate of return
is 15%, then find goodwill if it is valued on the basis of one year purchase of super profits.
(a) A30,000
(b) A5,000
(c) A1,33,333
(d) A33,333
362 FP-FA&A
18. Total capital employed by a partnership firm is A1,00,000 and its average profit is A25,000. Normal rate of
return is 20% in similar firms working under similar conditions. The firms earns super profit of:
(a) A3,000
(b) A5,000
(c) A4,000
(d) A2,000
19. In the absence of any provision in the partnership agreement, profits and losses are shared
(a) In the ratio of capitals.
(b) Equally.
(c) In the ratio of loans given by them to the partnership firm.
20. A company forfeited 2,000 shares of A10 each (which were issued at par) held by Mr. X for non-payment of
first & final call money of A4 per share. The called-up value per share was A9. On forfeiture, the amount
debited to share capital will be
(a) A10,000
(b) A8,000
(c) A20,000
(d) A18,000
21. Abacus Ltd. issued shares of A10 each at a discount of 10%. Mr. Mahesh purchased 30 shares and paid A2
on application but did not pay the allotment money of A3. The company forfeited his entire shares, the
forfeiture account will be credited by
(a) A90
(b) A81
(c) A60
(d) A54
22. A company cannot issue redeemable preference shares for a period exceeding
(a) 6 years
(b) 7 years
(c) 8 years
(d) 20 years
23. A200 paid as wages for erecting a machine should be debited to
(a) Repair account.
(b) Machine account.
(c) Capital account.
(d) Furniture account
Test Papers 363
24. If sales are A2,000 and the rate of gross profit on cost of goods sold is 25%, then the cost of goods sold will
be
(a) A2,000.
(b) A1,500.
(c) A1,600.
25. If Cost of goods sold is A80,700, Opening stock A5,800 and Closing stock A6,000. Then the amount of
purchase will be
(a) A80,500
(b) A74,900
(c) A74,700
(d) A80,900.
26. Under the straight line method of depreciation, the amount of yearly depreciation _____________
(a) Remains the same
(b) Fluctuates
(c) Increases year after year
(d) Decreases year after year.
27. A Bank Reconciliation Statement is prepared to know the causes for the difference between:
(a) the balances as per cash column of Cash Book and the Pass Book.
(b) the balance as per bank column of Cash Book and the Pass Book.
(c) the balance as per bank column of Cash Book and balances as per cash column of Cash Book
28. In case of redemption of preference shares out of distributable profits, an amount equal to the nominal
value of preferences shares redeemed must be transferred to the
(a) Development rebate reserve
(b) Investment allowance reserve
(c) Capital redemption reserve
(d) Premium on redemption of preference shares
29. When preparing a Bank Reconciliation Statement, if you start with a debit balance as per the Cash Book,
cheques issued but not presented within the period should be:
(a) Added
(b) Deducted
(c) Not required to be adjusted
364 FP-FA&A
30. The assumption underlying the fixed instalment method of depreciation is that of ________ of the asset
over different years of its useful life.
(a) Usage.
(b) Equal usage.
(c) Charge.
31. Original cost = A1,26,000. Salvage value = 6,000. Useful Life = 6 years. Annual depreciation under Stragiht
Line Method will be
(a) A21,000
(b) A20,000
(c) A15,000
(d) A14,000
32. Preference shares amounting to A1,00,000 are redeemed at a premium of 5% by issue of shares amounting
to A50,000 at a premium of 10%. The amount to be transferred to capital redemption reserve account will
be
(a) A55,000.
(b) A50,000.
(c) A45,000.
(d) A57,500.
33. Brave Ltd. issued 60,000 shares of A10 each at a discount of A1 per share. The application money was A2,
allotment money was A4, and first call was of A1. The amount of final call will be
(a) A3
(b) A2
(c) A1
(d) A4
34. Discount on issue of debentures is shown as _________on the assets side of balance sheet:
(a) Preliminary expenses
(b) Miscellaneous expenditure
(c) Capital expenditure
35. Which of the following expenses are debited in trading account?
(a) Carriage outwards
(b) Salaries
(c) Carriage inwards
(d) Rent of office premises
Test Papers 365
36. As per the accounting equation

(a) Capital + Liabilities = Assets
(b) Capital + Assets = Liabilities
(c) Liabilities + Assets = Capital
(d) Assets = Liabilities – Capital
37. In Double Entry System of Book-keeping every business transaction affects:
(a) Two accounts with equal but opposite effect.
(a) Two sides of the same account.
(b) The same account on two different dates.
(c) All of the above.
38. __________ is an intangible real account.
(a) Land
(b) Building
(c) Goodwill
(d) Cash
39. Journal entry for outstanding salary to clerk A6,000 will be
(a) Dr. Salary a/c and Cr. Cash a/c A6,000.
(b) Dr. Outstanding salary a/c and Cr. Salary a/c A6,000.
(c) Dr. Salary a/c and Cr. Outstanding salary a/c A6,000
(d) Dr. Cash a/c and Cr. salary a/c A6,000
40. What is the order in which the accounting transactions and events are recorded in the books?
(a) Journal, Subsidiary books, Ledger and Trial Balance.
(b) Ledger, Journal, Ledger, and Trial Balance.
(c) Subsidiary books, Ledger and Trial Balance and Journal.
(d) Profit and loss account, Ledger, Balance sheet, Journal.
41. The two amount columns in double column cash book are
(a) Cash and bank
(b) Cash and discount
(c) Bank and discount
42. The error caused because of the failure to differentiate between capital and revenue expenditures and
capital and revenue receipts is
(a) compensatory errors
(b) errors of commission
366 FP-FA&A
(c) errors of omission

(d) errors of principle
43. A5,00,000 spent on advertising to introduce a new line of product is______.
(a) Capital expenditure.
(b) Revenue expenditure.
(c) Deferred revenue expenditure.
44. When a trial balance does not agree, the difference can be transferred to ____________
(a) Nominal account
(b) Personal account
(c) Real account
(d) Suspense account
45. Bank pass book is also known as ________
(a) Bank book.
(b) Bank account.
(c) Bank column.
(d) Bank statement.
46. Machinery costing A20,00,000 was purchased on 1.4.2010. The installation charges amounting A5,00,000
were incurred. The depreciation at 10% per annum on straight line method for the year ended 31st March,
2011 will be
(a) A2,50,000
(b) A2,00,000
(c) A50,000
(d) A1,50,000
47. Debit balance as per Cash Book of Yeti Enterprises as on 31.3.2011 is A20,000.Cheques deposited but not
cleared amounts to A2,000 and Cheques issued but not presented of A4,000. Balance as per pass book
should be
(a) 22,000.
(b) 18,000.
(c) 20,000.
(d) 24,000
48. In the books of Deepak Ltd. the machinery account shows a debit balance of A60,000 as on April 1, 2009.
The machinery was sold on September 30, 2010 for A30,000. The company charges depreciation @ 20%
p.a. on diminishing balance method. Profit / Loss on sale will be
(a) A13,200 Profit
(b) A13,200 loss
Test Papers 367
(c) A6,800 profit

(d) A6,800 loss
49. The balance sheet of Mr. Kapoor consists of Capital A7,00,000; Machinery A5,00,000 and cash A2,00,000.
If he spends A5,000 to buy a car for personal use, the balance of capital account will be
(a) A7,00,000
(b) A6,95,000
(c) A7,05,000
(d) A1,95,000
50. Withdrawal of money by the proprietor is not an expense but a reduction of__________.
(a) Capital
(b) Liability
(c) Asset
51. If the rate of gross profit is 25% on cost of goods sold and the sales is A5,00,000, the amount of gross profit
will be __________.
(a) 1,00,000
(b) 1,50,000
(c) 1,25,000
(d) 1,20,000
52. Internally generated goodwill is-
(a) shown in Trading account.
(b) shown in Profit and loss account.
(c) shown in Balance sheet.
(d) not recorded in the books.
53. If outstanding wages appears in the trial balance it is shown in __________
(a) Balance sheet
(b) Both in balance sheet and profit and loss account
(c) Profit and loss account
(d) Trading account
54. Which of the financial statement represents the accounting equation?
(a) Manufacturing account
(b) Cash flow statement
(c) Balance sheet
(d) Profit and loss account
368 FP-FA&A
55. Capital expenditures are recorded in the ________

(a) Balance sheet.
(b) Profit and loss account.
(c) Trading account.
(d) Manufacturing account.
56. Cost of floating a company is an example of:
(a) Wasting assets
(b) Intangible assets
(c) Fictitious assets
(d) Liquid assets.
57. A & B are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio 5:3. On admission of C, new profit sharing ratio
between A, B and C is 7:5:4. Find the sacrificing ratio as A:B
(a) 3:1
(b) 4:7
(c) 5:4
(d) 2:1
58. Ram and Shyam are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2 having the capital of A180,000
and A150,000 respectively. They are entitled to 10% p.a. interest on capital before distributing the profits.
During the year firm earned A7,800 after allowing interest on capital. Profits apportioned among Ram and
Shyam is:
(a) 4,680 and 3,120.
(b) 4,800 and 3,000.
(c) 5,000 and 2,800.
(d) 6,000 and 1,800
59. At the time of death of a partner, firm gets ________ from the insurance company against the Joint Life
Policy taken jointly for all the partners.
(a) Policy Amount.
(b) Surrender Value.
(c) Policy Value for the dead partner and Surrender Value for the rest.
(d) Surrender Value for all the partners.
60. Preference shares amounting to A1,00,000 are redeemed at a premium of 5% from the profits of the
company. The amount to be transferred to capital redemption reserve account will be
(a) A1,05,000.
(b) A1,00,000.
(c) A95,000.
(d) A90,000.
Test Papers 369
61. In the absence of any provision in the partnership agreement, the partners have right to receive interest on
loan at
(a) 12% p.a
(b) 6 % p.a
(c) 20% p.a
(d) Nil
62. Total capital employed by a partnership firm is A1,00,000 and its average profit is A25,000. Normal rate of
return is 20% in similar firms working under similar conditions. The firms earns super profit of:
(a) A3,000
(b) A5,000
(c) A4,000
(d) A2,000
63. A, B and C are equal partners. D is admitted to the firm for one-fourth share. D brings A20,000 capital and
A5,000 for goodwill. The value of goodwill of the firm is
(a) A10,000
(b) A40,000.
(c) A20,000.
(d) A50,000
64. A company issued 5,000 10% Debentures of A100 each at 10% discount. All the debentures were subscribed
and allotted by crediting 10% Debentures account with
(a) A10,00,000.
(b) A12,00,000.
(c) A5,00,000.
(d) A4,50,000.
65. Bajaj Ltd. issued 5,000 equity shares of A10 each payable as A2 on application, A3 on allotment, A2 on first
call and the balance in the final call. The amount to be debited to bank account at the time of receipt of first
call money will be
(a) A30,000
(b) A10,000
(c) A40,000
(d) A50,000.
66. Mr. Verma holding 1000 equity shares of A10/- each issued at a discount of 10% could not pay final call of
A3.50 and his shares were forfeited. In the books of the company, shares forfeited account will be credited by
(a) A2,500.
(b) A5,500.
(c) A3,500.
(d) A2,000.
370 FP-FA&A
67. Making provision for bad debts in respect of doubtful debts is based on the convention of ______________
(a) Consistency
(b) Disclosure
(c) Conservatism
(d) Materiality
68. Preference shares can be redeemed only if they are
(a) Partly paid up
(b) Fully paid up
(c) Both of the above
69. If sales revenues are A4,00,000; cost of goods sold is A3,10,000, the gross profit is
(a) A90,000.
(b) A4,00,000.
(c) A3,10,000.
(d) A7,10,000
70. If Average Stock = A24,000. Closing stock is A6,000 more than opening stock then the value of closing
stock will be
(a) A24,000
(b) A48,000
(c) A20,500
(d) A27,000.
PART B
71. Which of the following is not corroborative evidence?
(a) Minutes of meetings;
(b) Confirmations from debtors;
(c) Information gathered by auditor through observation;
(d) Worksheet supporting consolidated financial statements.
72. In case the directors fail to appoint first auditor(s), the shareholders shall appoint them at………….by passing
a resolution:
(a) A general meeting
(b) First annual general meeting
(c) Statutory meeting
(d) Annual general meeting.
73. Balance sheet audit does not include:
(a) Vouching of income expense accounts related to assets and liabilities;
(b) Examination of adjusting and closing entries;
Test Papers 371
(c) Verification of assets and liabilities;

(d) Routine checks
74. Which of the following statements is, generally, correct about the reliability of audit evidence:
(a) To be reliable, evidence should be conclusive rather than persuasive;
(b) Effective internal control system provides reliable audit evidence;
(c) Evidence obtained from outside sources routed through the client;
(d) All are correct.
75. Which of the following statement is true regarding an auditor’s working papers:
(a) They document the level of independence maintained by the auditor.
(b) They should be considered as the principal support for the auditor’s report
(c) They should not contain details regarding weaknesses in the internal control system.
(d) They help the auditor to monitor the effectiveness of the audit firm’s quality control procedures.
76. Cost Audit is related to:
(a) Cost accounting records;
(b) Compliance
(c) Financial statements
(d) Balance and Profit & Loss Account
77. The current file of the auditor’s working papers, generally, should include:
(a) A flowchart of the internal controls
(b) Organization charts
(c) A copy of financial statements
(d) Copies of bond and debentures
78. When an independent auditor relies on the work of an internal auditor, he or she should:
(a) Examine the scope of internal auditor’s work
(b) Examine the system of supervising, review and documentation of internal auditor’s work.
(c) Adequacy of related audit programme
(d) All of the above
79. Appropriateness of evidence depends on the following:
(a) Information must be reliable
(b) Information must be affordable
(c) Information must be relevant
(d) Information must be valid.
80. One of the following is not an advantage of maintaining working papers:
(a) Working papers helps in proper planning and performance of audit
(b) It provides as evidence of the audit performed to support the auditor’s opinion
(c) Seniors can supervise the audit work performed by juniors by examining the working papers.
(d) Working papers acts as morale check on client staff.
372 FP-FA&A
81. Which of the following is not the objective of internal audit:

(a) To keep proper control over business activities;
(b) To evaluate accounting system
(c) To report to the owners and outsiders
(d) To evaluate the internal check system
82. Primary responsibility for the adequacy of financial statement disclosures rest with the:
(a) Auditor
(b) Management
(c) Auditor’s staff
(d) Central Government
83. Who can be appointed as an auditor of the company:
(a) Body corporate
(b) A person who has indebted for more than Rs.1,000
(c) An officer of the company
(d) A partner of a firm
84. Secretarial audit is also termed as:
(a) Financial audit
(b) Compliance audit
(c) Operational audit
(d) Tax audit
85. For Tax Audit the specified limit given under Income Tax Act, 1961 for a person carrying on business shall be:
(a) A40,00,000
(b) A15,00,000
(c) A60,00,000
(d) A50,00,000
86. Cost Audit is compulsory for:
(a) Specified entities
(b) Specified industries
(c) All Companies
(d) All manufacturing companies.
87. _____________________ of the Companies Act, 1956 contains provisions regarding the appointment of
the auditor.
(a) Section 223
(b) Section 221
(c) Section 224
Test Papers 373
(d) Section 226

88. The quality of auditor to be free from influence is being defined by which term:
(a) Self-Control
(b) Objective
(c) Independence
(d) Unbiased.
89. Auditor has to obtain___________ audit evidence:
(a) Adequate
(b) Correct
(c) Relevant
(d) Sufficient and appropriate.
90. Which of the following statement is not true:
(a) A partnership firm can be appointed as a statutory auditor of a limited company.
(b) Appointment may be made in the name of the firm.
(c) Majority of the partners should be practicing in India.
(d) All partners should be Chartered Accountants.
91. If a casual vacancy in the office of auditor arises by his resignation it should only be filled by the company
in a _______________
(a) Board’s meeting
(b) Extraordinary general meeting
(c) General meeting
(d) Annual general meeting.
92. ___________ refers to the method and means adopted by the auditor for collection and evaluation of audit
evidence in different audit situation:
(a) Audit evidence
(b) Audit tools
(c) Audit planning
(d) Audit technique.
93. The objective of an audit of financial statement is to enable an auditor to__________ on financial statements.
(a) Completion of Audit
(b) Express on opinion
(c) Check the transactions
(d) Check fraud.
94. A Company Secretary in Practice has been authorized under Section 2(2)(c)(v) of the Company Secretaries
Act, 1980 to conduct :
374 FP-FA&A
(a) VAT Audit

(b) Secretarial Audit
(c) Cost Audit
(d) Bank Audit
95. The auditor of a Government Company is appointed by the ______________.
(a) Comptroller and Auditor General of India.
(b) The shareholder in a general meeting.
(c) The shareholder at an annual general meeting.
(d) The board of directors.
96. Who appoints internal auditor:
(a) Management
(b) Shareholders
(c) Government
(d) Stock Exchange
97. Due to lack of audit evidence, auditor issues a:
(a) Qualified opinion
(b) Unqualified opinion
(c) Adverse opinion
(d) Disclaimer of opinion
98. Which types of audit is conducted by the internal audit staff:
(a) Cost Audit
(c) Internal Audit
(d) Tax Audit
99. Who will be responsible for errors in report if external audit relies on the work of internal auditor:
(a) External auditor
(b) Internal auditor
(c) Management
(d) Shareholders
100. Weakness in internal control system ________________ the risk of fraud and errors:
(a) Increases
(b) Decreases
(c) Does not effect
(d) Eliminates
Test Papers 375
ANSWERS
Part A Part B
1. (d) 37. (a) 71. (d)
2. (a) 38. (c) 72. (a)
3. (c) 39. (c) 73. (c)
4. (c) 40. (a) 74. (d)
5. (c) 41. (b) 75. (b)
6. (b) 42. (d) 76. (a)
7. (a) 43. (c) 77. (c)
8. (a) 44. (d) 78. (d)
9. (c) 45. (d) 79. (c)
10. (b) 46. (a) 80. (d)
11. (c) 47. (a) 81. (c)
12. (a) 48. (b) 82. (b)
13. (c) 49. (b) 83. (d)
14. (d) 50. (a) 84. (b)
15. (b) 51. (a) 85. (c)
16. (b) 52. (d) 86. (d)
17. (b) 53. (a) 87. (c)
18. (b) 54. (c) 88. (c)
19. (b) 55. (a) 89. (d)
20. (d) 56. (c) 90. (d)
21. (c) 57. (a) 91. (c)
22. (d) 58. (a) 92. (d)
23. (b) 59. (a) 93. (b)
24. (c) 60. (b) 94. (b)
25. (d) 61. (b) 95. (a)
26. (a) 62. (b) 96. (a)
27. (b) 63. (c) 97. (d)
28. (c) 64. (c) 98. (c)
29. (a) 65. (b) 99. (a)
30. (b) 66. (b) 100. (a)
31. (b) 67. (c)
32. (b) 68. (b)
33. (b) 69. (a)
34. (b) 70. (d)
35. (c)
36. (a)
376 FP-FA&A
TEST PAPER 2/2012
(This Test Paper is for practice and self study only and not to be sent to the Institiute)
Time Allowed : 2 Hours Maximum Marks : 100

[Attempt all questions. Each question carries 1 Mark. There is no negative mark for incorrect answers.]
PART A
1. It is essential to standardize the accounting principles and policies in order to ensure
(a) Transparency.
(b) Consistency.
(c) Comparability.
2. Which of the following is not a tangible asset for the firm?
(a) Furniture
(b) Goodwill
(c) Machinery
(d) Land and Building
3. The determination of the amount of bad debts is an accounting
(a) policy
(b) estimate
(c) parameter
4. The transactions recorded through accounting equation are based on
(a) Going concern
(b) Business entity
(c) Dual aspect
5. The debit balance of a cash account shows
(a) Amount receivable
(b) Amount payable
(c) Cash in hand
(d) Liability
6. The balance of the petty cash is _________
(a) an expense,
Test Papers 377
(b) income,
(c) an asset.
(d) Liability
7. Opening, closing and adjustment entries are recorded in
(a) Purchase Book

(b) Sales Book
(c) Petty Cash Book
(d) Journal Proper

8. Journal entry for purchase of furniture A8,000 will be
(a) Dr. furniture a/c and cr. cash a/c A8,000.
(b) Dr. purchases a/c and cr. Cash a/c A8,000.

(c) Dr. cash a/c and cr. purchases a/c A8,000
(d) Dr. cash a/c and cr. furniture a/c A8,000
9. Sales returns book records:

(a) All cash sales returned by customers.
(b) All credit sales of the business.
(c) Credit sales of goods in trade returned by customers

(d) Both cash and credit sales returned by customers
10. Journal entry for purchase of furniture for personal use A8,000 will be
(a) Dr. furniture a/c and Cr. cash a/c A8,000.

(b) Dr. drawings a/c and Cr. Cash a/c A8,000.
(c) Dr. cash a/c and Cr. drawings a/c A8,000
(d) Dr. cash a/c and Cr. . furniture a/c A8,000

11. Rectification in the next financial year is done through
(a) Profit and loss account
(b) Profit and loss appropriation account

(c) Profit and loss adjustment account
(d) None of these
12. White-washing charges of A50,000 were debited to building account. It is ______________

(a) Error of omission
(b) Error of commission
(c) Error of principle

(d) Compensating error.
378 FP-FA&A
13. If outstanding wages appears in the trial balance it is shown in __________
(a) Balance sheet
(b) Both in balance sheet and profit and loss account
(c) Profit and loss account
(d) Trading account
14. Rent outstanding account is an example of _________ account
(a) Real
(b) Nominal
(c) Personal
15. According to the decision in Garner vs. Murray, in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, the
deficiency of the insolvent partner must be borne by the solvent partners in the
(a) Capital ratio
(b) Old profit sharing ratio
(c) New profit sharing ratio
16. Under ___________method, the charge for depreciation for an accounting period is calculated in proportion
of the remaining life of the asset at the beginning of every accounting period.
(a) Reducing balance method
(b) Sum of year’s digit method
(c) Double declining balance method
(d) Fixed instalment method
17. Which of the following errors are not disclosed by the trial balance?
(a) Error of casting
(b) Wrong balancing of an account
(c) Double posting in one account
(d) Compensating errors.
18. A __________________ is given to the customer when he returns the goods.
(a) Credit note
(b) Debit note
(c) Invoice
(d) None of these

Test Papers 379
19. An expense on major repairs of machinery purchased second hand has been debited to repairs account; it
involves an error of _________.
(a) Error of omission
(b) Error of commission
(c) Error of principle
(d) Compensating error.
20. A and B are partners in a firm. During the year 2010, A withdrew A1,000 p.m and B withdrew A500 p.m on
the first day of each month for personal use. Interest on drawing is charged @ 10% p.a. What is the interest
on drawings?
(a) A1,800
(b) A975
(c) A900
(d) A650
21. Unrecorded liability paid at the time of dissolution of a partnership is debited to________ account.
(a) Partners’ capital account
(b) Realisation account
(c) Liability account
(d) Revaluation account
22. A and B are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 5:3. They admit C into partnership and the
profit sharing ratio of the three partners is agreed at 7:5:4. The gaining or sacrificing ratio among A and B
will be:
(a) Gaining ratio of 3:1
(b) Gaining ratio of 1:3
(c) Sacrificing ratio of 1:3
(d) Sacrificing ratio of 3:1
23. Which of the following books is used to record purchase of machinery by cash?
(a) Cash book
(b) Purchases book
(c) Journal proper
(d) Purchases returns book
24. At the time of admission of a new partner, if the value of land and building is overstated in the books, it is
written back by:
(a) Debiting to revaluation account
(b) Crediting to revaluation account

380 FP-FA&A
(c) Debiting to partner’s account
(d) Crediting to partner’s account
25. A5,000 incurred for upgradation of computer by installation of 128 MB RAM is
(a) Capital expenditure.
(b) Deferred revenue expenditure.
(c) Revenue expenditure.
26. Errors of commission arises when:
(a) Any transaction is recorded on the wrong side of the account.
(b) Any transaction is omitted to be recorded partially.
(c) Any transaction is omitted to be recorded completely.
(d) Revenue expenditure is treated as capital expenditure.
27. Furniture purchased for resale is an example of :
(a) Capital expenditure
(b) Deferred revenue expenditure
(c) Revenue expenditure
(d) Current Liability.
28. A change in accounting policy is justified
(a) To comply with accounting standard.
(b) To ensure more appropriate presentation of the financial statement of the enterprise.
(c) To comply with law.
29. Original cost = 2,26,000. Salvage value = 26,000. Useful Life = 5 years. Annual depreciation under Straight
Line Method will be
(a) A40,000
(b) A20,000
(c) A80,000
(d) A60,000
30. If Cost of goods sold is A2,50,000, Opening stock A20,000 and Closing stock A36,000. Then the amount of
purchase will be
(a) A2,50,000
(b) A2,66,000
Test Papers 381
(c) A2,00,000
(d) A3,00,000.
31. If Average Stock = A12,000. Closing stock is A6,000 more than opening stock then the value of closing
stock will be
(a) A12,000
(b) A24,000
(c) A15,000
(d) A18,000.
32. Ganesh got a salary A10,000 per month and withdrew goods worth A2,500 for personal use and got salary
A9,500 in cash. The excess payment of A2,000 will be debited to
(a) Sales account.
(b) Goods account.
(c) Salary account.
(d) Salary in advance account.
33. If sales revenues are A4,00,000; cost of goods sold is A3,10,000 and operating expenses are A60,000 the
gross profit is
(a) A30,000.
(b) A90,000.
(c) A3,40,000.
(d) A60,000
34. If sales are A2,000 and the rate of gross profit on cost of goods sold is 25%, then the cost of goods sold will
be
(a) A2,000.
(b) A1,500.
(c) A1,600.
35. In case of retirement, accumulated profits/losses are transferred to the capital accounts in the
(a) Capital ratio
(b) Old profit sharing ratio
(c) New profit sharing ratio
36. A, B, & C are sharing profits in the ratio of 1/2:3/10:1/5. Calculate the new profit sharing ratio if A retires:
(a) 2:3
(b) 3:2
382 FP-FA&A
(c) 5:2
(d) 2:5
37. A, B and C are the partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 4:3:1. B died on June 30th 2010. What
will be the share of B in goodwill of the firm if it is decided to value goodwill on the basis of two year’s
purchase of average profits of 4 completed years immediately preceding the year of the death of the
partner. Profits for the year ended 2007 is A1,60,000, 2008 is A20,000, 2009 is A20,000 and 2010 is
A80,000.
(a) 1,20,000
(b) 60,000
(c) 52,500
(d) 90,000
38. Zodiac Ltd. issued 10,000 shares of A10 each. The called up value per share was A8. The company
forfeited 200 shares of Mr. A for non-payment of 1st call money of A2 per share. He paid A6 for application
and allotment money. On forfeiture, the share capital account will be _________.
(a) Debited by A2,000
(b) Debited by A1,600
(c) Credited by A1,600
(d) Debited by A1,200
39. A to whom 100 shares of A10 each was allotted at par, paid A3 on application, A3 on allotment but could not
pay the first and final call money of A4. His shares were forfeited by the directors. The amount to be credited
to shares forfeited account will be
(a) A500
(b) A400
(c) A600
(d) A1,000
40. Ashish Ltd. issued shares of A100 each at a premium of 25%. Manas, who has 2,000 shares of Ashish Ltd.,
failed to pay first and final call totalling A5. Premium was taken by Ashish Ltd. at the time of allotment. On
forfeiture of Manas’s shares, the amount to be debited to Share premium account will be
(a) A5,000
(b) A10,000
(c) A15,000
(d) Nil
41. Indigo Ltd. had A9000, 10% redeemable preference shares of A10 each, fully paid up. The company decided
to redeem these preference shares at par by the issue of sufficient number of equity shares of A10 each
fully paid up at a discount of 10%. The number of equity shares issued should be:
(a) 9,000
Test Papers 383
(b) 11,000
(c) 10,000
42. Bank overdraft is shown on the ______________ side of trial balance.
(a) Debit
(b) Credit
(c) None
(d) Both
43. Aditya Ltd. issued equity shares of 50,000 shares of A10 each for subscription. 40,000 shares were subscribed
by the public by paying A3 as application money. Number of shares allotted to public by Aditya Ltd. will be
(a) 50,000 shares.
(b) 40,000 shares.
(c) 30,000 shares.
(d) 10,000 shares.
44. Recovery of bad debt is a:
(a) Revenue receipt
(b) Capital receipt
(c) Capital expenditure
(d) Revenue expenditure
45. Depreciation is provided only on
(a) fixed assets
(b) current assets
(c) liquid assets
(d) fictitious assets
46. A company issued 1,00,000 equity shares of A10 each at a premium of A2 and 5,000 10% Debentures of
A100 each at 10% discount. All the shares and debentures were subscribed and allotted by crediting 10%
Debentures account with
(a) A10,00,000.
(b) A12,00,000.
(c) A5,00,000.
(d) A4,50,000.
47. Trading account is a:
(a) Real account

384 FP-FA&A
(b) Personal account
(c) Nominal account
(d) None
48. Balance sheet is a:
(a) Period statement
(b) Point statement
(c) Both
(d) None
49. Maximum number of partners in a banking partnership firm is
(a) 10
(b) 20
(c) 25
(d) 30
50. Journal records the transactions of the firm in a:
(a) Analytical manner
(b) Chronological order
(c) Periodical manner
(d) Summarized manner
51. Discount allowed to Sohan A73 has been credited to his account by A37. the error will be rectified by:
(a) Crediting Sohan by A36
(b) Debiting Sohan by A36
(c) Crediting discount by A36
(d) None
52. Preference shares amounting to A1,00,000 are redeemed at a premium of 5% by issue of shares amounting
to A50,000 at a premium of 10%. The amount to be transferred to capital redemption reserve account will
be
(a) A55,000.
(b) A50,000.
(c) A45,000.
(d) A57,500.
53. While finalizing the current year’s profit, the company realized that there was an error in the valuation of
closing stock of the previous year. In the previous year, closing stock was valued more by A50,000. As a
result
(a) Previous year’s profit is overstated and current year’s profit is also overstated
Test Papers 385
(b) Previous year’s profit is understated and current year’s profit is overstated
(c) Previous year’s profit is understated and current year’s profit is also understated
(d) Previous year’s profit is overstated and current year’s profit is understated
54. Which of the following are of capital nature?
(a) Purchase of a goods
(b) Cost of repair
(c) Wages paid for installation of machinery
(d) Rent of a factory
55. Discount on issue of debentures is a __________
(a) Revenue loss to be charged in the year of issue
(b) Capital loss to be written off from capital reserve
(c) Capital loss to be written off over the tenure of the debentures
(d) Capital loss to be shown as goodwill
56. If the incoming partner brings any additional amount in cash other than his capital contributions then it is
termed as ________
(a) Capital.
(b) Reserves.
(c) Profits.
(d) Premium for goodwill.
57. Fluctuating capital account is credited with __________
(a) Interest on capital.
(b) Profits of the year.
(c) Salaries or remuneration of the partners.
58. On 1.1.2011, a machine costing A10,000 and a piece of furniture costing A20,000 was purchased.
Depreciation is provided @ 5% on furniture and 10% per annum on machine. The depreciation for the year
ended 31st March, 2011 should be:
(a) A1,000.
(b) A300
(c) A1,250
(d) A500
59. Which of the following errors will affect the trial balance?
(a) Repairs to building wrongly debited to Building A/c

386 FP-FA&A
(b) Total of Purchase Journal by A1,000 short.
(c) Freight paid on new machinery debited to Freight A/c
60. Difference of totals of both debit and credit side of the trial balance is transferred to
(a) Difference account.
(b) Trading account.
(c) Miscellaneous account.
(d) Suspense account.
61. Machinery costing A20,00,000 was purchased on 1.4.2009. The installation charges amounting A5,00,000
were incurred. The depreciation at 10% per annum on diminishing balance method for the year ended 31st
March, 2011 will be
(a) A2,50,000
(b) A2,00,000
(c) A2,25,000
(d) A1,50,000
62. The petty cashier generally works on _________ system.
(a) Accrual.
(b) Balancing.
(c) Imprest.
63. All expense and _________ accounts appearing in the trial balance are transferred to the trading and profit
and loss account.
(a) Loss.
(b) Revenue
(c) Asset.
(d) Liability.
64. ____________principle requires that the same accounting method should be used from one accounting
period to the next.
(a) Conservatism.
(b) Consistency.
(c) Business entity.
(d) Money measurement.

Test Papers 387
65. Under straight line method, depreciation is calculated on
(a) Written down value.
(b) Scrap value.
(c) Original cost.
66. Which of the following is not a transaction?
(a) Goods are purchased on cash basis for A1,000.
(b) Salaries paid for the month of May, 2006.
(c) Land is purchased for A10 lacs.
(d) An employee dismissed from the job.
67. Unintentional omission or commission of amounts and accounts in the process of recording transactions
are known as
(a) Frauds.
(b) Misinterpretation.
(c) Errors.
68. “Treating a revenue expense as a capital expenditure” is an example of
(a) Compensating errors.
(b) Errors of principle.
(c) Errors of omission.
(d) Errors of commission.
69. Narrations are given at the end of
(a) Final accounts.
(b) Trial balance.
(c) Each ledger account.
(d) Each journal entry.
70. Interest on capital paid to the sole-proprietor from business is debited to
(a) Interest account
(b) Bank account
(c) Capital account
(d) Not to be shown books

388 FP-FA&A
PART B
71. Balance sheet audit is also known as:
(a) Continues Audit
(b) Annual Audit
(c) Internal Audit
(d) Financial Audit
72. Audit programme is prepared by:
(a) The auditor
(b) The client
(c) The audit assistants
(d) The auditor and his audit assistants
73. Accounts Maintenance is the function of:
(a) Auditor
(b) Accountant
(c) Auditor Staff.
(d) Practicing Professionals.
74. Independent auditing can be best described as a:
(a) Subset of accounting.
(b) Professional activity that attests to the fair presentation of financial statements.
(c) Professional activity that measures and communicates financial accounting data.
(d) Regulatory activity that prevents the issuance of improper financial information.
75. Of the following which is the least persuasive type of audit evidence:
(a) Bank statements obtained from the clients;
(b) Documents obtained by the auditor from third party directly;
(c) Carbon copies of sales invoices inspected by auditor;
(d) Computations made by the auditor.
76. The main object of an audit is:
(a) Expression of opinion
(b) Detection and prevention of fraud and error
(c) Both (1) & (2)
(d) Depends on the type of audit

Test Papers 389
77. The working papers which auditor prepares for financial statements audit are:
(a) Evidence for audit conclusions
(b) Owned by the client
(c) Owned by the auditor
(d) Retained in auditor’s office until a change in auditors.
78. The board of directors shall appoint first auditor of a company:
(a) Within one month of completion of capital subscription stage of the company.
(b) Within one month of the promotion of the company.
(c) Within one month of the commencement of the business of the company.
(d) Within one month of incorporation of the company.
79. Which of the following is not an analytical procedure:
(a) Tracing of purchases recorded in the purchase book to purchase invoices;
(b) Comparing aggregate wages paid to number of employees;
(c) Comparing the actual costs with standard costs;
(d) All of them are analytical procedure.
80. Secretarial audit is conducted by:
(a) Chartered Accountant in Practice
(b) Lawyer
(c) Internal auditor
(d) Company Secretary in Practice
81. Which term defines internal audit with clarity:
(a) Internal audit is an evaluation and analysis of the business operation conducted by the internal audit
staff.
(b) Internal audit is an evaluation and analysis of the financial statements conducted by the internal audit
staff.
(c) Internal audit is an evaluation and analysis of the financial statements only conducted by the external
agency.
(d) Internal audit is an evaluation and analysis of operation of business conducted by external audit staff
only.
82. When auditor does not have any reservation, objection regarding the information under audit then he
issues an:
(a) Qualified opinion
(b) Adverse opinion
(c) Unqualified opinion

390 FP-FA&A
(d) Negative opinion
83. Which of the following best describes the primary purpose of audit programme preparation:
(a) To detect errors or fraud
(b) To comply with GAAP.
(c) To gather sufficient appropriate evidence.
(d) To assess audit risk.
84. The auditor’s permanent working paper file should not normally, include:
(a) Extracts from client’s bank statements
(b) Past years’ financial statements
(c) Attorney’s letters
(d) Debt agreements
85. Time, extent and _______________ of audit depend upon effectiveness of internal control:
(a) Nature
(b) Periodicity
(c) Relevance
(d) Format.
86. Auditor has to give its opinion whether the financial statement depicts:
(a) True and Correct View
(b) Fair and Correct View
(c) True and Fair View
(d) True and Exact View
87. Auditor has to report to:
(a) Management
(b) Owners
(c) Government
(d) Appointing authority
88. Which type of audit is conducted by the internal audit staff:
(a) Cost Audit
(c) Internal Audit
(d) Tax Audit
89. Which of the following factors is most important in determining the appropriations of audit evidence:
Test Papers 391
(a) The reliability of audit evidence and its relevance in meeting the audit objective
(b) The objectivity and integrity of the auditor
(c) The quantity of audit evidence
(d) The independence of the source of evidence
90. In comparison to the independent auditor, an internal auditor is more likely to be concerned with:
(a) Cost accounting system
(b) Internal control system
(c) Legal compliance
(d) Accounting system
91. A statutory auditor has a right of access at all times to:
(a) Books and accounts of a company
(b) Books, accounts and documents of the company
(c) Books, accounts and vouchers of the company
(d) Notices and documents of the company.
92. Whether the management can restrict the scope of work of external auditor:
(a) Yes
(b) No
(c) In some cases
(d) If shareholders permit
93. Every auditor appointed under section 224(1), must intimate to the registrar within ___________ days of
the receipt of intimation of appointment from the company.
(a) 15
(b) 21
(c) 30
(d) 18
94. One of the following is not an advantage of audit:
(a) It provides satisfaction for owner
(b) It helps in getting loans
(c) It reduces cost burden
(d) It detects errors and frauds.
95. The authority to remove the first auditor before the expiry of the term is with:
(a) The shareholder in a general meeting
(b) The shareholders in the first annual general meeting

392 FP-FA&A
(c) The board of directors
(d) The central Government
96. The retiring auditor does not have a right to:
(a) To make written representations
(b) Get his representations circulated
(c) Be heard at the meeting
(d) Speak as a member of the company
97. Who out of the following cannot be appointed as a statutory auditor of the company:
(a) Erstwhile director
(b) Internal auditor
(c) Relative of a director
(d) only (2) and (3)
98. The auditor has a right to:
(a) Obtain information and explanation
(b) Obtain information and explanations from the employees and officers
(c) Obtain information and explanation necessary for the purpose of audit
(d) Both (2) and (3)
99. The date on auditor‘s report should not be:
(a) the date of AGM
(b) later than the date on which the accounts are approved in board’s meet
(c) earlier than the date on which the accounts are approved by the management
(d) both (1) and (2)
100. What are the analytical procedures:
(a) substantive tests designed to assess control risk
(b) substantive tests designed to evaluate the validity of management’s representation letter
(c) substantive tests designed to study relationships between financial and non-financial information
(d) all the above.

Test Papers 393
ANSWERS
Part A Part B
1. (d) 38. (b) 71. (d)

2. (b) 39. (c) 72. (a)
3. (b) 40. (d)
73. (b)
4. (c) 41. (c)
74. (b)
5. (c) 42. (b)
6. (c) 43. (b) 75. (c)
7. (d) 44. (a) 76. (d)

8. (a) 45. (a) 77. (c)
9. (c) 46. (c) 78. (d)
10. (b) 47. (c)
79. (a)
11. (c) 48. (b)
80. (d)
12. (c) 49. (a)
13. (a) 50. (b) 81. (a)
14. (b) 51. (a) 82. (c)
15. (a) 52. (b) 83. (d)
16. (b) 53. (d)
84. (a)
17. (d) 54. (c)
85. (a)
18. (a) 55. (c)
19. (c) 56. (d) 86. (c)
20. (b) 57. (d) 87. (d)

21. (b) 58. (d) 88. (c)
22. (d) 59. (b) 89. (a)
23. (a) 60. (d)
90. (b)
24. (a) 61. (c)
91. (c)
25. (c) 62. (c)
26. (a) 63. (a) 92. (b)
27. (c) 64. (b) 93. (c)
28. (d) 65. (c) 94. (c)
29. (a) 66. (d)
95. (a)
30. (b) 67. (c)
96. (d)
31. (c) 68. (b)
32. (d) 69. (d) 97. (b)
33. (a) 70. (a) 98. (d)

34. (c) 99. (c)
35. (a) 100. (c)
36. (b)
37. (c)
394 FP-FA&A
*OMR Sheet in the examination may be different from this specimen.

Faa PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Faa PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Faa PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STUDY MATERIAL

Public Dealing Timings

Laser Typesetting by AArushi Graphics, Prashant Vihar, New Delhi, and

Part-A Fundamentals of Accounting, and

Part-B Fundamentals of Auditing

PAPER 4: FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING AND AUDITING

Level of Knowledge: Basic Knowledge

PART A: FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING (70 MARKS)

PART B: FUNDAMENTALS OF AUDITING (30 MARKS)

Accounting as Information System 7

Accounting Principles, Concepts and Conventions 9

Accounting – A Measurement Discipline 13

Accounts and its Classification 13

Double Entry System 15

Rules of Debit and Credit 16

ACCOUNTING PROCESS-I (RECORDING OF TRANSACTIONS)

Subsidiary Books of Accounts 33

– Purchases Returns Book 34

– Sales Returns Book 35

– Bills Receivable Book 39

– Bills Payable Book 40

Petty Cash Book 44

ACCOUNTING PROCESS-II (RECTIFICATION OF ERRORS)

Errors Disclosed by Trial Balance 61

Errors Not disclosed by Trial Balance 62

Steps to locate Errors 63

– Before the preparation of Trial Balance 63

– In the next accounting period 70

ACCOUNTING PROCESS-III (CAPITAL AND REVENUE ITEMS)

Deferred Revenue Expenditure 82

Capital and Revenue Receipts 83

Capital and Revenue Profits 84

Capital and Revenue Losses 84

BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT

Significance of Bank Reconciliation Statement 94

Procedure of preparing Bank Reconciliation Statement 94

– Preparation of Bank Reconciliation Statement when overdraft balances are given 96

LESSON ROUND UP 108

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS 109

Accounting Concept of Depreciation 116

Review Questions 117

Methods of Providing Depreciation 118

– Uniform Charge Methods 118

– Fixed Instalment Method or Straight Line Method 118

– Depreciation Fund (Sinking Fund) Method 120

– Insurance Policy Method 124

– Annuity Method 126

– Declining Charge Depreciation Methods 128

– Diminishing Balance Method (Reducing Balance Method) 128

– Sum of Years’ Digits Method 130

– Double Declining Balance Method 130

– Other Methods 131

Change in Method of Depreciation 132

Calculation of Profit or Loss on Assets Sold 133

Depreciation and Replacement of Assets 136

LESSON ROUND UP 137

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS 137

PREPARATION OF FINAL ACCOUNTS FOR SOLE PROPRIETORS

Trading Account 142